mesasmabi.commesasmabi.com/.../2019/04/1.2.1-new-programmes-new-courses-under-the… · 3. basic...

U.O.No. 5868/2017/Admn Dated, Calicut University.P.O, 10.05.2017

Vasudevan .K

Assistant Registrar

Forwarded / By Order

Section Officer

File Ref.No.26046/GA - IV - E - SO/2016/Admn

UNIVERSITY OF CALICUT

Abstract

Faculty of Commerce and Management studies-Revised Regulations, Scheme and Syllabus of Bachelor of

Commerce(BCom) Degree Programme under CUCBCSS UG-with effect from the 2017-18 admission-implemented-

orders issued.

G & A - IV - E

Read:-1.Item No..1 of the Minutes of the meeting of the Board of Studies in Commerce(UG)held on 02.02.2017.2.Item No.2 of the Minutes of the meeting of the Faculty of Commerce andManagement Studies held on 29.03.2017.

ORDER

As per paper read as (1) above, the meeting of the Board of Studies in Commerce (UG) held on02.02.2017, resolved to approve and adopt the revised Regulation, Scheme and syllabus of B.Com(CUCBCSS) with effect from the academic year 2017-18.

As per paper read as (2) above, the Faculty of Commerce and Management Studiesapproved the minutes of the Board of Studies in Commerce (UG) read as (1) above.

After considering the matter in detail, the Hon'ble Vice Chancellor has accorded sanction toimplement the revised Regulation, Scheme and Syllabus of B.Com (CUCBCSS) with effect from2017-18 admission onwards, subject to ratification by the Academic Council.

The following orders are therefore issued;

The revised Regulation, Scheme and Syllabus of B.Com (CUCBCSS) is implemented with effectfrom 2017-18 admission, subject to ratification by the Academic Council.

(Revised Regulation, scheme and syllabus appended)

To1.Principal of all affiliated Colleges offering B.Com programme2.Controller of ExaminationsCopy to: PS to VC/PA to PVC/PA to Registrar/PA to CE/J.R, B.Com branch/Digitalwing/EX & EG section/SF/DF/FC.


REGULATIONS GOVERNING BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE

PROGRAMME UNDER CUCBCSSUG ---- EFFECTIVE FROM THE ACADEMIC

YEAR 2017-18

BATCH B.Com ADMISSIONS 2017-18

1.0 Title of the Programme

This DEGREE shall be called BACHELOR OF COMMERCE (B.Com).

2.0 Eligibility for admission

Any candidate who has passed the Plus Two of the Higher Secondary Board of Kerala or Pre

Degree of Calicut University or that of any other University or Board

of Examinations in any state recognized as equivalent to the Plus Two of

the Higher Secondary Board in Kerala, with not less than 45% marks in aggregate is

eligible for admission, However, SC/ST, OBC and other eligible communities shall be

given relaxation as per University rules.

3.0 Duration of the programme

The duration of the B.Com programmme of study is three academic years with six

semesters.

4.0 Medium of Instruction

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

5.0 Courses of study

Total number of courses for the whole B.Com Programme is 31. It is divided in to courses

namely:-

1. Common courses

2. Core courses

3. Complementary courses and

4. Open courses

The course of study leading to the award of B.Com shall comprise the following :-

5.1 Semester I

Course Title Contact

Hours

Credits Internal External Total

Marks Common BC1A01 4 4 20 80 100

Common BC1A02 5 3 20 80 100

Common BC1A07 5 4 20 80 100

Core BCIB01 Business Management

6 4 20 80 100

Compl. BCIC01 Managerial Economics 5 4 20 80 100

Total 25 19 100 400 500

Semester II


Hours


Marks Common BC2A03 4 4 20 80 100

Common BC2A04 5 3 20 80 100

Common BC2A08 5 4 20 80 100

Core BC2B02 Financial Accounting 6 4 20 80 100

Compl. BC2C02 Marketing Management 5 4 20 80 100

Total 25 19 100 400 500

Semester III


Hours


Marks Common BC3A11 Basic Numerical Skills 5 4 20 80 100

Common BC3A12 General Informatics 5 4 20 80 100

Core BC3B03 Business Regulations 5 4 20 80 100

Core BC3B04 Corporate Accounting 6 4 20 80 100

Compl. BC3C03 HumanResources Management 4 4 20 80 100

Total 25 20 100 400 500

Semester IV


Hours


Marks Common BC4A13 Entrepreneurship Development 5 4 20 80 100

Common BC4A14 Banking and Insurance 5 4 20 80 100

Core BC4B05 Cost Accounting 6 4 20 80 100

Core BC4B06 Corporate Regulations 4 4 20 80 100

Compl. BC4C04 Quantitative Techniques

for Business

100

Total 500


Hours


Marks

5

Core BC5B07 Accounting for Management 4 4 20 80 100 25

Core BC5B08 Business Research Methods 4 4 20 80 100

Semester VCore BC5B09 Income Tax Law and Accounts 5 4 20 80 100

Core BC5B10 Course in Specialisation 5 4 20 80 100


Open BC5D01 Open Course ( For tudents from

other Departments)s

2 2 10 40 50

Total 25 22 110 440 550

Semester VI


Hours


Marks

Core BC6B12 Income Tax and GST 6 4 20 80 100

Core BC6B13 Auditing and Corporate Governance 5 4 20 80 100



Core

Project

BC6B16 (PR) Three Weeks Project and

Viva-Voce

4 2 10 40 50

Total 25 20 90 360 450

Core Courses in the area of Specialization:

A. Finance

1. Financial Markets and Services

2. Fundamentals of Investments

3. Financial Derivatives

4. Financial Management

B. Banking and Insurance

1. Banking Services Management

2. Insurance Management

3. Foreign Exchange Management

4. Risk Management and Insurance

C. Co - operation

1. Co-operative Theory and Practice

2. Legal Environment For Co-operatives

3. International Co-operative Movement

4. Co-operative Management and Administration

D. Computer Applications

1. Computer Applications in Business

2. Business Information Systems

3. Office Automation Tools

4. Computerized Accounting with Tally

E. Travel and Tourism

1. Tourism Principles And Practices

2. Tourism Product And Promotion

3. Tourist Transport And Tour Operation

4. Hospitality Management

F. Islamic Finance

1. Introduction to Islamic Commercial Banking

2. Fundamentals of Islamic Commercial Law

3. Foundations of Islamic Accounting Theory and Practice

4. Islamic Investment Funds and Insurance

Open Courses (For students from other departments)

1. E- Commerce

2. Basics of Entrepreneurship and Management

3. Basic Accounting

5.2 Four Common Courses (BC3A11 Basic Numerical Skills, BC3A12 General Informatics,

BC4A13 Entrepreneurship Development BC4A14 Banking and Insurance), all the Core

Courses, Complementary and Open Courses for B.Com Programme shall be taught by

Commerce Faculty. However, the core courses under the specialization Islamic Finance shall

be taught by Commerce Faculty or teachers having M.A Islamic Finance or M.A Islamic

Economics or M.A Economics with Islamic Finance qualifications.

6.0 Attendance

A candidate shall attend at least a minimum of 75% of the number of classes actually held for

each of the courses in a year to be eligible for appearing for examination in that course. If the

candidate has shortage of attendance in any course in a year he shall not be allowed to appear

for any examination in that year. However the University may condone shortage if the

candidate applies for it as laid down in University procedures and if the Vice Chancellor is

satisfied with the reasons cited by the candidate for his absence in classes.

7.0 Internal Assessment

All courses shall have internal assessment as specified in the common regulations for

CUCBCSSUG 2014. Provisions of the clause 9.2 and 9.3 of the common regulation are

applicable in the case of internal assessment.

8.0 External Examination.

8.1 The University shall conduct semester examinations as specified in the common

regulations for CUCBCSSUG 2014. The duration of examination shall be three hours

for each course; Provisions of clause 9.5, 9.6, 9.7 and 9.8 of the common regulation

for CUCBCSSUG 2014 will be applicable for external examinations.

9.0 Project Report

9.1 During the sixth semester every student shall do a project .The student may choose

any topic from the subjects he/she has studied.

9.2 The candidate shall prepare and submit a project report to the Department.

9.3 The report shall be in English with not less than 30 pages, printed or typed (A4 size

paper, 1.5 line spacing, Times New Roman font, font size 14) and spiral bound.

The project report should be submitted to the Head of the Department one week before the

last working day of the sixth semester, duly certified by the Guide.

9.4 Project work shall have the following stages:

□ Project proposal presentation

□ Field work and data analysis

□ Report writing

□ Draft project report presentation

□ Final project report submission

9.5 The project can be done individually or as a group of three students (maximum) on the same

topic and present the report. However, the project supervisor should make sure that each

student constructively contributes to the completion of the project. For this purpose the

supervisor shall keep a diary in which the chronological record of the students visit to the

supervisor for the project discussions shall be maintained. The work of each student shall be

guided by one Faculty member.

9.6 The candidate shall prepare at least two copies of the report; one copy for

submission to the Department and another copy for the student which he/she has to bring with

him/her at the time of viva voce. More copies may be prepared if the organization

or the guide or both ask for.

9.7 Duration of project work

The duration for project work is 3 weeks.

9.8 A certificate showing the duration of the project work shall be obtained from the

supervising teacher or from the organization for which the project work was done

and it shall be included in the project report.

9.9 Structure of the report

Title page

Certificate from the supervising teacher / organization (for having done the project work)

Acknowledgements

Contents

Chapter I : Introduction (Organization profile, Research problem, Objectives

of the study, Research methodology etc.) Chapter II : Review of Literature

Chapters III and IV: Data Analysis (2 or 3 chapters) Chapter V : Findings,

Suggestions and Conclusion.

Appendix : (Questionnaire, specimen copies of forms, other exhibits etc.)

Bibliography: (books, journal articles etc. used for the project work). 9.10

Evaluation of project report

The project report shall be subject to internal and external evaluation. The internal

evaluation shall be carried out by the supervising teacher and external evaluation done

jointly by the internal examiner and the external examiners appointed by the University

inclusive of Viva-voce examination. The marks should be awarded on the basis of the

following:-

1. Evaluation of the Project Report shall be done under Mark System.

Marks secured for the project will be awarded to candidates, combining the internal and

external Marks

2. The internal to external components is to be taken in the ratio 1:4. Assessment of different

components may be taken as below.

Internal (20% of total) External (80% of Total)

Components %of

Marks

Components %of

Marks

Punctuality 20 Relevance of the Topic, Statement of

Objectives, Methodology (Reference/

Bibliography)

20

Use of Data 20 Presentation, Quality of Analysis/Use of

Statistical tools, Findings and

recommendations

30

Scheme/Organization of

Report

30 Viva-Voce 50

Viva-Voce 30

3. Submission of the Project Report and presence of the student for viva are

compulsory for internal evaluation. No marks shall be awarded to a candidate if

she/he fails to submit the Project Report for external evaluation.

4. The student should get a minimum of 40 % marks in the aggregate and 40%

separately for external for pass in the project.

5. There shall be no improvement chance for the Marks obtained in the Project

Report.

6. In an instance of inability of obtaining a minimum of 40% marks, the project work

may be re- done and the report may be re-submitted along with subsequent exams

through the department, as per the existing rule of the University examinations.

10.0 VivaVoce

At the end of sixth semester candidate shall attend a comprehensive viva voce. The external

evaluation of 12 to 15 students per day is to be conducted with one external examiner

and one internal examiner. The examiners shall consult each other and award the grades

according to the same criteria specified in 9.10 for the award of marks.

11.0 Requirement for passing the course

For a pass in each course the student has to secure aggregate 40% marks or E grade in

internal and external. An aggregate of 40% marks (E grade with 120 credits) is required for a

pass in the B.Com degree programme.

12. The fourth/fifth semester students of regular colleges shall be taken under the supervision of

faculty members to business or industrial units so as to enable them to have firsthand

knowledge about location, layout, managerial functions, H R management or any area of

study as per curriculum. Study tour to an industrial/business centre will form part of

curriculum. The report submitted by the student in this respect shall be considered as one of

the assignment of any one of the courses in the concerned semester.

13.0 In all other matters regarding the conduct of B.Com Programme in the affiliated

colleges under Calicut University under Choice Based Credit Semester System which

are not specified in this regulation, the common regulation CUCBCSSUG 2014 will be

applicable.


SYLLABUS OF BACHELOR OF COMMERCE DEGREE PROGRAMME UNDER

CUCBCSS UG --- EFFECTIVE FROM THE 2017-18 BATCH B.COM ADMISSIONS

CORE COURSES

BCIB01 BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

Lecture Hours per week: 6 Credits: 4

Internal: 20, External: 80

Objectives:

> To understand the process of business management and its functions.

> To familiarize the students with current management practices.

> To understand the importance of ethics in business.

> To acquire knowledge and capability to develop ethical practices for

effective management.

Module I

Concepts of Management – Characteristics of management – Schools of management thought -

Management and administration – Functions of management – Management by objectives –

Management by participation – Management by exception – Management by motivation

15 Hours

Module II

Functions of Management: Planning – concept and importance - Decision making – barriers

to effective planning – Organizing – concept and importance – different organization models –

Span of management – Departmentation – Delegation.

20 Hours

Module III

Functions of Management: Motivation: – concept and importance – Contributions of

McGregor, Maslow and Herzberg – Leadership: – Concept and styles – Leadership traits -

situational theory of leadership - Communication: – process and barriers – Control: – concept

steps – tools – Coordination: Concept – Principles - Techniques

20 Hours

Module IV

Business Ethics: Meaning and scope – Types of ethics – Characteristics – Factors influencing

business ethics – Arguments for and against business ethics – Basics of business ethics -

Corporate social responsibility - Environmental issues in business – Ethics in advertising –

Globalization and business ethics.

20 Hours

Module V

Emerging concepts in management – Kaizen – TQM – TPM – MIS – ISO – Change management

– Stress management – Fish bone (ISHIKAWA) Diagram – Business eco system – Logistic

management.

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Boatwright. John R: Ethics and the Conduct of Business, Pearson Education, New

Delhi.

2. Gupta. CB; Business management, Sultan Chand & sons

3 Koontz, H and Wechrick, H: Management, McGraw Hill Inc, New York.

4 Prasad. LM; Principles and Practicd of Management; Sultan Chand & sons

5 Stoner. AF and Freeman RE; Management; Prentice Hall of India

6 Drucker, Peter, F., Management: Tasks, Responsibilities and Practices, Allied

Publishers, New Delhi.

5. R.S Davar; Management Process

6. Rustum & Davan, Principles and Practice of Management.

7. Srinivasan & Chunawalla, Management Principles and Practice.

8. S. V. S. Murthy. Essentials of Management.

BC2B02 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING



Objectives:

� To equip the students with the skills of preparing financial statements for various type

of organizations.

� To enable the students to acquire knowledge about financial reporting standards

and to understand corporate accounting methods.

Module I

Preparation of Financial Statements of Non Corporate Entities not covered by IFRS

Convergence: Preparation of Financial Statements of sole trader - Single Entry: Meaning -

Methods of profit determination - Capital comparison method - Conversion method – Depreciation

accounting -

25 Hours

Module II

Accounts of Corporate Entities not Covered by IFRS Convergence: Issue of shares and

debentures, Forfeiture of shares (An overview) - Preparation of financial statements of Joint stock

companies

20 Hours

Module III

Accounting For Banking Companies: Bank accounts - Concept of Non-Performing Assets (NPA)

-Preparation of Profit and Loss Account - Asset classification - Preparation of Balance Sheet.

15Hours

Module IV

Accounting For Insurance Companies: Insurance Accounts – types of insurance accounts-Final

accounts of life Insurance - Profit determination of life insurance

15 Hours

Module V

Accounting Standards for Financial Reporting: Objectives and uses of financial statements for

users - Role/objectives of accounting standards - Development of accounting standards in India -

Requirements of international accounting standards -International organizations engaged in

accounting harmonization - IASB – FASB- Role of IASB in developing IFRS - IFRS adoption or

convergence in India -Implementation plan in India - Ind AS - Differences between Ind AS and

IFRS -Conceptual framework - Definition of financial elements - Principles of recognition,

measurements, presentation and disclosure.

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Chintan Patel, BhupendraMantri, Indian Accounting Standards, TaxmannPublications.

2. T. P, Ghosh , Illustrated Guide To Indian Accounting Standards, TaxmannPublications.

3. M.C. Shukla, T.S. Grewal and S. C. Gupta, Advanced Accounts, S. Chand &Co., New

Delhi.

4. S.N. Maheswari and S.K. Maheswari, Financial Accounting.

5. R.L. Gupta and Radhaswamy, Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons,New Delhi.

6. Dr. Goyal V.K., Financial Accounting, Excel Books, New Delhi.

7. Ashok Sehgal and Deepak Sehgal, Advanced Accounting, VolumeI,Taxmann, New

Delhi.

8. Jain and Narang, Financial Accounting, Kalyani Publishers.

9. B.S. Raman, Advanced Accountancy.

10. P.C. Tulasian, Introduction to Accounting, Pearson Education.

BC3BO3 BUSINESS REGULATIONS



Objectives:

> To familiarize the students with certain statutes concerning and affecting business

organizations in their operations.

Module I

Business Laws : Introduction - Nature of Business Law - Meaning and definition -Indian Contract

Act, 1872: Contract - Definition - Essentials of valid contracts - Classification of contracts - Offer

and acceptance - Consideration - Capacity to contract - Free consent -Coercion - Undue influence

- Misrepresentation - Fraud - Mistake - Void agreements -Discharge of contract - Breach of

contract and remedies - Contingent contracts -Quasi contracts.

25 Hours

Module II

Special Contracts: Contract of Indemnity: Meaning - Nature - Right of indemnity holder and

indemnifier - Contract of Guarantee: Meaning - Nature - Rights and liabilities of surety -

Discharge of surety from liability - Contract of Bailment and Pledge: Rights and duties of

bailor and bailee, pledger and pledgee - Contract of Agency - Creation of agency - Delegation of

authority - Duties and liabilities of principal and agent -Termination of agency.

20 Hours

Module III

Sale of Goods Act 1930: Contract for sale of goods -Essentials of a contract of sale

-Conditions and Warranties - Caveat emptor - Sale by non owners - Rules as to delivery of goods

- Un paid seller and his rights.

10 Hours

Module IV

The Consumer Protection Act 1986: Objects and scope - Definition of consumer and consumer

dispute - Complaint - Goods - Service - Unfair trade practices - Restrictive trade practices - Rights

of consumers - Consumer Protection Council - Consumer Disputes Redressal Agencies.

10 Hours

Module V

The limited liability partnership Act 2008 – Salient features – Distinction with partnership and

company – LLP agreement – partners and designated partners – incorporation document – Extent

and limitation of liability of LLP and partners.

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Singh Avtar, The Principles of Mercantile Law , Eastern Book Company, Lucknow.

2. Kuchal M.C, Business Law , Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi

3. Kapoor N.D, Business Law , Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.

4. Chandha P.R , Business Law.

5. S.S. Gulshan, Business Laws.

6. B. Sen and Mitra, Business and Commercial Laws.

7. Chandha P.R, Business Law, Galgotia, New Delhi.

8. Balchandani, Business Laws.

10. Desai T.R., Indian Contract Act, Sale of Goods Act and Partnership Act, S.C. Sarkar &

Sons Pvt. Ltd. Kolkata.

BC3 BO4 CORPORATE ACCOUNTING



Objectives:

� To help the students to acquire conceptual knowledge of the fundamentals of the

corporate accounting and the techniques of preparing the financial statements.

Module I

Accounting Standards for Assets, Liabilities and Revenue: Inventories (IAS 2 and Ind AS 2) -

Accounting for tangible non-current assets (IAS 16 and Ind AS 16) -Accounting for intangible

assets (IAS 38 and Ind AS 38) - Accounting for impairment of assets (IAS 36 and Ind AS 36) -

Accounting for borrowing costs (IAS 23 and IndAS 23) - Investment property (IAS 40 and Ind AS

40) - Revenue from contracts with customers (IFRS 15 and Ind AS 115) - Income tax (IAS 12 and

Ind AS 12) -Employee benefits (IAS 19 and Ind AS 19) - Provisions, contingent liabilities and

contingent assets (IAS 37 and Ind AS 37).

20 Hours

Module II

Accounting For Joint Stock Companies: Accounting for Government grants (IAS20 and Ind AS

20) - Accounting for leases (IAS 17 and Ind AS 17) - Share based payments (IFRS 2 and Ind AS

102) - Accounting for Bonus and Right issue -Redemption of Preference shares - Redemption of

Debentures - Buyback of shares -Alteration of Share capital.

15 Hours

Module III

Presentation of Single Entity Financial Statements Covered by IFRS Convergence(IAS 1 and

Ind AS 1): Accounting policies, accounting estimates (IAS 8 and Ind AS 8)- Events after reporting

date (IAS 10 and Ind AS 10) - Structure and contents of financial statements - Preparation of

financial statements: Statement of Financial Position (SOFP)- Statement of Profit or Loss (SOPL) -

Statement of Changes in Equity (SOCE) – Cash Flow Statement (SOCF) (IAS 7 and Ind AS 7).

15 Hours

Module IV

Business Combinations And Consolidated Statements (IFRS 3,10,13 and Ind AS103, Ind AS 27,

Ind AS 28): Acquisition method for business combination -Consolidated Statement of Financial

Statements - Statement of Financial position /Balance sheet - Summary of consolidation procedures

- Non controlling interests -Goodwill arising on consolidation - Intra group trading - Intra group

trading of Non-current assets - Pre-acquisition profits - Fair values in acquisition accounting

-Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income – Intragroup

dividends.

25 Hours

Module V

Accounting For Electricity Companies: Concept of Double account system -Difference between

double entry and double account - Final accounts of electricity companies.

15 Hours

(Theory and Problems may be in the ratio of 40% and 60% respectively)

Reference Books:

1. Chintan Patel, BhupendraMantri, Indian Accounting Standards, TaxmannPublications.

2. T. P, Ghosh, Illustrated Guide To Indian Accounting Standards, TaxmannPublications.

3. B. D, Chatterjee, Illustrated Guide To Indian Accounting Standards, TaxmannPublications.

4. Dolphy D’Souza, Vishal Bansal, Indian Accounting Standards, Snow WhitePublications.

5. ICAI, Study material of ICAI – Financial Reporting (Final level).

6. IASB, IFRS (Red Book).

7. M.C. Shukla, T.S. Grewal and S. C. Gupta, Advanced Accounts, S. Chand &Co., New

Delhi.

8. S.N. Maheswari and S.K. Maheswari, Financial Accounting.

9. R.L. Gupta and Radhaswamy, Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons,New Delhi.

10. Dr. Goyal V.K., Financial Accounting, Excel Books, New Delhi.

11. Ashok Sehgal and Deepak Sehgal, Advanced Accounting, VolumeI,Taxmann, New Delhi.

12. Jain and Narang, Financial Accounting, Kalyani Publishers.

13. B.S. Raman, Advanced Accountancy,

14. P.C. Tulasian, Introduction to Accounting, Pearson Education.

15. B. D, Chatterjee, Illustrated Guide To Indian Accounting Standards, TaxmannPublications.

16. Dolphy D’Souza, Vishal Bansal, Indian Accounting Standards, Snow WhitePublications.

17. ICAI, Study material of ICAI – Financial Reporting (Final level).

18. IASB, IFRS (Red Book).

BC4B05 COST ACCOUNTING

Lecturer Hours per week: 6 Credits: 4

Internal: 20, External: 80 Objectives:

> To familiarize the students with the various concepts and elements of cost.

> To create cost consciousness among the students.

Module I

Introduction : Definition - Meaning and scope - Objectives - Functions -Merits and Demerits -

Cost Accounting and Financial Accounting - Cost classification - Elements of cost - Cost units -

Cost centre - Types - Methods and Techniques of Costing .

10 Hours

Module II

Materials : Importance of Material cost control - Purchase Procedure - Store control -Types of

Store - Stores Records - Perpetual Inventory-ABC Analysis - VED Analysis-JIT Inventory - Stock

levels - EOQ - Issue of materials - FIFO , LIFO , Simple and Weighted Average methods.

20 Hours

Module III

Labour and Overheads: Importance of Labour cost control - Time Keeping and Time Booking - Idle

Time - Over Time - Computation of Labour cost - Remuneration Systems and Incentive Schemes.

Overheads : Definition - Overhead Allocation - Apportionment - Re-Apportionment -Direct

distribution - Step Ladder - Reciprocal Service methods - Repeated Distribution and

Simultaneous Equation methods - Absorption of overheads - Methods of Absorption - Labour

Hour Rate and Machine Hour Rate .

20 Hours

Module IV

Methods of Costing: Unit Costing - Job Costing - Contract Costing - Process Costing -Process

Losses - Service Costing (only Transport)

25 Hours

Module V

Cost Control Techniques: Budgetary Control and Standard Costing: Budget and Budgetary

Control - Need and Importance - Types of Budgets -Preparation of Financial

Budget - Flexible Budget and Fixed Budget - ZBB - Programme and Performance

Budgets. 15 Hours


Reference Books:

1. N.K. Prasad : Cost Accounting

2. Nigam & Sharma : Cost Accounting

3. Khanna Pandey & Ahuja : Cost Accounting

4. M.L Agarwal : Cost Accounting

5. Jain & Narang : Cost Accounting

6. S.P. lyengar: Cost Accounting

7. S.N. Maheswari : Cost Accounting

8. Horngren : Cost Accounting : A Managerial Emphasis.

9. M.N.Arora: Cost Accounting

10. Dutta: Cost Accounting

BC4BO6 CORPORATE REGULATIONS

Lecture Hours per week: 4 Credit: 4


Objectives:

> To familiarise the students with corporate law and to make them aware of the

importance of corporate governance in the management of organizations.

Module I

Introduction to Companies Act 2013: Objects of the Act - Salient features of the Act -Meaning and

definition of company - Features - Kinds of companies - Private Company -Public company -

Associate Company - Dormant Company - One person company -Small Company -

Government Company - Lifting of corporate veil.

05 Hours

Module II

Formation of Companies: Promotion - Role of promoters - Incorporation - Capital subscription -

Commencement of business - Pre-incorporation and provisional contracts. Document of

companies: Memorandum of Association - Definition - Contents and alteration - Doctrine of

Ultravires - Articles of Association - Definition - Contents and alteration - Distinction between

Memorandum and Articles - Constructive notice of Memorandum and Articles - Doctrine of Indoor

management - Prospectus - Contents -Statement in lieu of prospectus - Liabilities for misstatement.

20 Hours

Module III

Share Capital : Shares - Kinds of shares - Public issue of shares - Book building -Allotment of

shares - Irregular allotment - Issue prices of shares - Listing of shares -Employees stock option

scheme - Sweat equity shares - Right shares - Bonus shares -Shares with differential rights - Share

certificate and share warrant - Calls - Forfeiture -Surrender of shares - Buyback of shares - De

materialization and re materialization of shares - Transfer and transmission of shares - Transfer

under Depository system.

15 Hours

Module IV

Management of Companies : Board and Governance - Directors: Appointment - Position - Powers

- Rights - Duties and liabilities - Qualification - Disqualification - Removal of directors - Key

Managerial Personnel - Introduction to Corporate Governance - Need and importance of Corporate

Governance - Corporate social responsibility. Securities and Exchange Board of India Act 1992 -

Object - Establishment and management of SEBI -Powers and functions of SEBI - Securities

Appellate Tribunal (SAT).

20 Hours

Module V

Company Meetings and Winding up : Requisites of a valid meeting - Statutory meeting -Annual

general body meeting - Extra ordinary meeting - Board meetings - Resolutions -Types - Company

Secretary : Qualification - appointment - duties - Winding up : Meaning - Modes of winding up

- Winding up by Tribunal - Members' voluntary winding up - Creditors' voluntary winding up -

Liquidator: Powers - Duties and liabilities -Consequences of winding up.

10 Hours

Reference Books:

1. M.C. Shukla & Gulshan :Principles of Company Law.

2. N.D. Kapoor : Company Law and Secretarial Practice.

3. Mannual of Companies Act, Corporate Laws and SEBI Guidelines", Bharat Law

House, New Delhi.

4. M.C. Bhandari: Guide to Company Law Procedures.

5. Tuteja :Company Administration and Meetings.

6. S.C. Kuchal :Company Law and Secretarial Practice.

7. Dr. P.N. Reddy and H.R. Appanaiah : Essentials of Company Law and Secretarial

Practice, Himalaya Publishers.

8. M.C. Kuchal: Secretarial Practice.

9. Ashok Bagrial: Secretarial Practice.

BC5B07 ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGEMENT

Lectures Hours per week: 4 Credits: 4


Objectives:

> To enable the students to understand the concept and relevance of Management

Accounting.

> To provide the students an understanding about the use of accounting and costing data for

planning, control, and decision making.

Module I

Management Accounting: Nature and Scope - Difference between cost Accounting, Financial

accounting and Management accounting - Recent trends in Management Reporting.

05 Hours

Module II

Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements: Meaning - Types and Methods of Financial

Analysis - Comparative Statements - Trend Analysis - Common size Statements (a general

discussion only).

05 Hours

Module III Ratio Analysis: Meaning - Nature - uses and limitations of Ratios -

Liquidity, Profitability, Turnover, Solvency, Leverage. Market test Ratios. Construction of

Financial Statements from ratios - Judgment of financial stability through ratios - (Focus to be

given to problems solving and Interpretation skills)

25 Hours

Module III

Fund Flow and Cash Flow Analysis:

A. Fund Flow Statements: Meaning and concept of Fund - Current and Non Current Accounts

- Flow of fund - Preparation of Fund Flow statement - Uses and Significance.

B. Cash Flow Statement: Difference between Fund flow Statement and Cash flow

Statement - Preparation of Cash Flow Statement as per AS - 3 Norms - Direct and Indirect

methods (Stress to be given to Problems).

20 Hours

Module-V

Managerial Decision making with the help of CVP Analysis : Marginal Costing - Fixed Cost-

Variable Cost - Contribution - P/V Ratio - Break Even Analysis - Algebraic and Graphic

presentation - Decision making : Fixation of Selling Price - Exploring new markets - Make or

Buy - Key Factor - Product Mix - Operate or Shutdown.

20 Hours


Reference Books:

1. Dr. S.N. Maheswari : Management Accounting.

2. Saxena : Management Accounting.

3. Made Gowda : Management Accounting.

4. Dr. S. N. Goyal and Manmohan : Management Accounting.

5. B.S.Raman: Management Accounting.

6. R.S.N. Pillai and Bagavathi : Management Accounting.

7. Sharma and Gupta : Management Accounting.

8. J. Batty : Management Accounting.

9. Foster: Financial Statement Analysis, Pearson Education.

10. P.N. Reddy & Appanaiah : Essentials of Management Accounting.

BC5B08 BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS



Objectives:

> To enable students for acquiring basic knowledge in business research methods and to develop

basic skills in them to conduct survey researches and case studies.

Module I

Business Research: – Definition and significance - Features of business research – The

research process – Variable - Proposition - Types of research – Exploratory and causal research –

Theoretical and empirical research - Basic and applied research - Descriptive research - Phases

of business research – Research Hypothesis – Characteristics – Research in an evolutionary

perspective – Role of theory in research - Theory building - Induction and Deduction Theory.

10 Hours

Module II

Research Design – Definition – Types of research design – Exploratory and causal research design -

Descriptive and experimental design – Types of experimental design – Validity of findings –

Internal and external validity – Variables in research – Measurement and scaling – Different scales –

Construction of instrument - Validity and reliability of instrument -

15 Hours

Module III

Data Collection: - Types of data – Primary Vs secondary data – Methods of primary data collection –

Survey Vs observation – Experiments – Construction of questionnaire and instrument – Validation

of questionnaire – Sampling plan – Sample size – Sampling methods - Determinants of optimal

sample size – Sampling techniques – Probability Vs non probability sampling methods.

15 Hours

Module IV

Data Processing: Processing stages - Editing - Coding and data entry – Validity of data –

Qualitative Vs quantitative data analysis – Frequency table - Contingency table - Graphs -

Measures of central tendency and index number – Testing of Hypothesis - Bivariate and multi

variate statistical techniques – Factor analysis – Discriminant analysis- Cluster analysis –

Interpretation.

15 Hours

Module V

Research Report: Different types – Contents of report – Need of executive summary –

Chapterisation – Contents of chapter - Report writing stages – The role of audience – Readability –

Comprehension – Tone – Final proof – Report format – Title of the report – Ethics in research –

Subjectivity and objectivity in research.

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Donald R.Cooper and Pamela S, Schindler: Business Research Methods. Latest

Edition, Irwin McGraw- Hill International Editions, New Delhi.

2. John Adams, Hafiz T.A. Khan Robert Raeside, David white: Research Methods

for Graduate Business and Social Science Students, Response Books. New

Delhi- 110044.

3. Neresh K. Malhotra: Marketing Research, Latest edition. Pearson Education.

4. William G. Zikmund, Business Research Methods, Thomson

5. Wilkinson T.S. and Bhandarkar P.L.: Methodology and Techniques of Social

Research, Himalaya.

6. S N Murthy &. U Bhojanna: Business Research Methods, Excel Books, New

Delhi.

7. Jan Brace: Questionnaire Design, Kogan Page India

8. Michael V.P. Research Methodology in Management, Himalaya.

9. Dipak kumar Bhattacharyya. Research Methodology. Excel Books, New Delhi.

10. R. Paneerselvan: Research Methodology, Prentice-Hall of India

11. Ajai S Gaur & Sanjaya S Gaur: Statistical Methods for Practice &. Research,

Response Books, New Delhi.

12. Kultar Singh: Quantitative Social Research Methods. Response Books, New

Delhi.

Bc5 B09 Income Tax Law and Accounts



> To impart basic knowledge and equip students with application of principles and provisions

Income - tax Act, 1961 amended up to date.

Module I

Basic Concepts: Income - Agricultural income - Person - Assessee - Assessment Year -

Previous Year - Gross total income - Total income - Maximum marginal rate of lax - Residential

status - Scope of total income on the basis of residential status –Exempted incomes.

10Hours

Module II

Computation of Income under Different Heads: Salaries - Allowances - Perquisites -Profit in

lieu of salary - Gratuity – Pension. 20 Hours

Module III

Income from house property: Annual Value of House property - Computation under different

circumstances - Deduction from annual value.

15Hours

Module IV

Profits and Gains of Business or Profession: Definition - Computation - Allowable expenses and

non allowable expenses - General deductions - Provisions relating to Depreciation.

20 Hours

Module V

Capital Gains: Definition of Capital Assets - Long term and Short term - Transfers - Cost of

acquisition - Cost of improvement - Exempted Capital gains. Income from Other Sources:

Definition– Computation.

20 Hours

(Theory and problems may be in the ratio of 40% and 60%respectjvely .Only simple problems are

to be expected)

Reference Books:

1. Dr. Vinod K. Singhania : Direct Taxes - Law and Practice, Taxman publication.

2. Dr. Mehrotra and Dr. Goyal: Direct Taxes - Law and Practice, Sahitya Bhavan Publication.

3. B.B. Lai: Direct Taxes, Konark Publisher (P) ltd.

4. Bhagwathi Prasad : Direct Taxes - Law and Practice. Wishwa Prakashana.

5. Dinakar Pagare : Law and Practice of Income Tax. Sultan Chand and sons

6. Gaur & Narang : Income Tax.

Bc6 B12 Income Tax and GST



Objectives:

> To impart basic knowledge and equip students with application of principles and

provisions Income - tax Act, 1961 and GST Act 2016

Module I

Income Tax Contd: Deemed Incomes and Clubbing of income – Set- off and carry forward of

losses - Deductions to be made in computing total income – Computation of total Income of

individuals – Computation of Tax liability of individuals – Rebate and relief of tax.

25 hours

Module II

Income tax authorities – Powers and functions – Provisions of advance payment of tax – Tax

payment – Deduction and payment of tax at source – Recovery of tax.

Procedure of assessment of income tax – Filing of returns of income – Voluntary return of income –

Statutory obligations in filing of returns – Return of loss – Belated returns – Revised returns –

Defective returns – PAN – Different types of assessment – Self assessment – Assessment on the

basis of return – Best judgment assessment – Regular assessment – Reassessment – Protective

assessment.

15 Hours

Module III

Goods and Services Tax: Brief history behind the emergence of GST – The scope of GST –

Definitions and meaning - Central Goods and Services Tax Act–Integrated Goods and Services Tax Act -

State Goods and Services Tax Act - Levy and Collection of Central/State Goods and Services Tax -

Taxable person - Power to grant exemption from tax - Time and value of supply of goods - Time of

supply of services

15 Hours

Module IV

Registration - Amendment of registration - Cancellation of registration - Revocation of

cancellation of registration - tax invoice, credit and debit notes – Returns - First Return -

Annual return - Final return - Tax Return Preparers - Levy of late fee - Notice to return

defaulters

15 Hours

MODULE V

Payment of tax, interest, penalty and other amounts - Interest on delayed payment of

tax - Tax deduction at source - transfer of input tax credit - refund of tax - accounts and records -

demands and recovery I - Inspection, search, seizure and arrest - offences and penalties - Audit by tax

authorities - Special audit - Power of CAG to call for information.

10 Hours

(The syllabus of GST will be revised after the rules and regulations relating to GST Act are framed)

BC6B13 AUDITING AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE



Objective: To provide knowledge of auditing principles and techniques and to familiarize the

students with the understanding of issues and practices of corporate governance in the global and

Indian context.

Module I:

Auditing – Meaning – Objects - Basic Principles and Techniques – Auditing and investigation -

Classification of Audit - Audit Planning – Qualities of an auditor – Advantages and limitations of

audit - 10 hours

Module II

Audit Procedures: Vouching - Definition - Features - Examining vouchers -Vouching of cash

book - Vouching of trading transactions - Verification and valuation of assets and liabilities:

Meaning - Definition and objects - Vouching v/s verification - Verification and Valuation of

different assets and liabilities – 20 hours

Module III

Internal Control - Internal Check - Internal Audit --Definitions - Necessity - Difference between

internal check and internal control - Fundamental Principles of internal check - Difference between

internal check and internal audit - Special Areas of Audit: Tax audit and Management Audit -

Recent trends in auditing - Relevant Auditing and Assurance Standards (AASs) - Rights duties and

liabilities of auditor - Audit committee - Auditor's Report - Contents and types - Auditors

certificate. -20 hours

Module IV: Conceptual Framework of Corporate Governance: Meaning, Theories, Models and

Benefits of Corporate Governance; Board Committees and their Functions; Insider Trading; Rating

Agencies; Green Governance/E-governance; Clause 49 of Listing Agreement; Class Action;

Whistle Blowing; Shareholders Activism - 20 hours

Module V

Major Corporate governance failures - BCCI (UK) - Maxwell Communication (UK) - Enron (USA

– Satyam Computer Services Ltd - TATA Finance - Kingfisher Airlines - Common Governance

Problems Noticed in various Corporate Failures - Codes and Standards on Corporate Governance

- 10 hours

Suggested Readings:

1. Institute of Chartered Accountants of India, Auditing and Assurance Standards, ICAI, New

Delhi.

2. Relevant Publications of ICAI on Auditing (CARO).

3. Gupta, Kamal and Ashok Arora, Fundamentals of Auditing, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Publishing Co.

Ltd., New Delhi.

4. Ghatalia, S.V., Practical Auditing, Allied Publishers Private L td., New Delhi.

5. Singh, A. K. and Gupta Lovleen, Auditing Theory and Practice, Galgotia Publishing Company.

6. Mallin, Christine A., Corporate Governance (Indian Edition), Oxford University Press, New

Delhi.

7. Rani, Geeta D., and R.K. Mishra, Corporate Governance- Theory and Practice, Excel Books,

New Delhi.

8. Bob Tricker, Corporate Governance-Principles, Policies, and Practice (Indian Edition), Oxford

University Press, New Delhi.

9. Sharma, J.P., Corporate Governance, Business Ethics, and CSR, Ane Books Pvt Ltd, New Delhi.

Core courses in the area of Specialization-Finance

BC5B10 FINANCIAL MARKETS AND SERVICES



Objectives:

> To provide basic knowledge about the structure, organization and working of financial

system in India.

Module I

Financial System: Meaning and Significance - Functions of the financial system -

Financial concepts - Financial Assets - Financial markets - Classification - Financial instruments

-Weakness of Indian Financial System. Financial services-Meaning -Types.

15 Hours

Module II

Money Market: Definition - Features - Objectives - Features of a developed .money market

-Importance of Money market - Composition of Money market - Operations and Participants

-Money market Instruments - Features of Indian money market - Recent developments

15 Hours

Module III

Capital Market: New issue market - meaning - functions - methods floating new issue

-intermediaries in the new issue market - Merchants bankers and their functions - Recent trends in

new issue market - Stock Exchanges - Functions - Structure of Stock Exchanges- BSE - NSE -

Listing of securities - Advantages of listing - Methods of trading in stock exchanges - On line trading

- Stock indices. Venture Capital-Concept and meaning.

25 Hours

Module IV

Financial Institutions: Commercial banks - Development financial institutions - Non-Banking

Financial Corporations - Mutual Funds, Insurance Companies - Objectives and functions- Lease

Financing-meaning- Factoring and Forfeiting (only a brief outline)

15 Hours

Module V

Regulatory Institutions - RBI - Role and Functions - The Securities and Exchange Board of India:

Objectives - Functions - Powers - SEB1 Guidelines for primary and secondary market.

10 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Kohn, Meir: Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill.

2. Bhole L.M: Financial Institutions and Markets, Tata McGraw Hill.

3. Desai, Vasantha: The Indian Financial System, Himalaya Publishing House.

4. Machiraju.R.H: Indian Financial System, Vikas Publishing House.

5. Khan M.Y: Indian Financial System, Tata McGraw Hill.

6. Varshney, P.M., & D. K. Mittal, D.K.: Indian Financial System, Sulthan Chand & Sons

7. Gordon E. & Natarajan K.: Financial Markets & Services, Himalaya Publishing House.

8. Pathak. V. Bharati: Indian Financial System. Pearson Education.

BC5B11FUNDAMENTALS OF INVESTMENTS

Lecture Hours/ week : 5

Credits : 4

Maximum Marks : 100 (External : 80, Internal :20)

Duration of Examination : 3 Hours

Course Objectives

• To familiarize the students with the world of investments.

• To provide a theoretical framework for the analysis and valuation of investments.

Module I

The Investment Environment: The investment decision process - Types of Investments -

Commodities, Real Estate and Financial Assets - Security market indices - Sources of financial

information - Concept of return and risk

20 Hours

Module II

Fixed Income Securities: Bond - Features - Types of bonds - Estimating bond yields - Types of

bond risks - Default risk and credit rating - Bond valuation

10 Hours

Module III

Approaches to Security Analysis: Fundamental Analysis - Technical Analysis and Efficient Market

Hypothesis - Dividend capitalization models - Price Earnings Multiple Approach to equity

valuation.

20 Hours

Module IV

Portfolio Analysis: Portfolio and Diversification - Portfolio Risk and Return –portfolio with more

than two securities. Markowitz model - efficient portfolio – optimal portfolio – single index model

– multi index model.

20 Hours

Module V

Investor Protection: SEBI & role of stock exchanges in investor protection - Investor grievances

and their redressal system - Insider trading - Investors' awareness and activism.

10 Hours

(Theory and problems may be in the ratio of 50% and 50% respectively)

Reference Books:

1. Donald E. Fisher and Ronald J. Jordan: Securities Analysis and Portfolio Management, Prentice

Hall, New Delhi.

2. S. Kevin: Security Analysis and Portfolio Management.

3. Sourain. Harry; Investment Management, Prentice Hall of India.

4. Francis and Archer: Portfolio Management, Prentice Hall of India.

5. Gupta L.C.: Stock Exchange Trading in India, Society for Capital Market Research and

Development, Delhi. 6. Machi Raju, H.R.: Working of Stock Exchanges in India, Wiley Eastern

Ltd, New Delhi.

BC6B14-FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES

Lecture Hours/ week : 5 Credits : 5

Maximum Marks : 100 (External : 80, Internal :20) Duration of Examination : 3 Hours

Course Objectives

• To acquire knowledge about financial derivatives and their features.

• To know about various risks associated with derivatives.

Module I

Financial Derivatives: Introduction - Meaning – Types of financial derivatives: Forwards – Futures

– Options – Swaps – Economic functions of derivative contracts.

10 Hours

Module II

Derivative Markets: History of financial derivative market – Participants in a derivative market –

Cash market Vs derivative market – Stock market derivatives in India – Other derivatives in India –

The regulatory frame work for derivatives trading in India.

15 Hours

Module III

Forward Contracts : Features – Limitations of forward markets – Introduction to Futures – Meaning

and definition - Features of futures – Difference between forwards and futures – Futures

terminology – Types of future contracts - Financial futures – Stock futures – Currency futures -

Interest rate futures – Index futures - Commodity futures – Futures pay-offs – Trading strategies in

stock futures .

20 Hours

Module IV

Options: Meaning – Definition – Need - Difference between options and futures – Fundamental

option strategies – Types of options contracts - Call – Put – options – Intrinsic value Vs Time value

of options - Trading strategies in stock options.

20 Hours

Module V

Swaps: Meaning – Definition - Features of swaps – Terms used in swaps – Types of swaps: Interest

rate swap - Currency swap - Commodity swap - Equity swap – Difference between Swaps and

Futures.

15Hours

Reference Books:

1. Hull John. C, Options, Futures and Other Derivatives, Pearson Educations Publishers, New

Delhi (Latest Edition).

2. S.L.Gupta, Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd, New Delhi.

3. L.M Bhole , Financial Institutions and Markets – Structure, Growth and Innovations , Tata Mc

Graw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd. New Delhi.

4. D.C. Patwari&A.Bhargava , Options and Futures, An Indian Perspective , JAICO Publishing

BC6 B15 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT



Objectives:

> To familiarize the students with the concepts, tools and practices

of financial management.

> To learn about the decisions and processes of financial management in a business firm.

Module I

Introduction: Nature, scope and objectives of financial management - Time value of money

and mathematics of finance - Concept of risk and return.

15 Hours

Module II

Investment Decision: Capital budgeting process - Estimation of relevant cash flows -Payback

Period method - Accounting Rate of Return - Net Present Value - Net Terminal Value - Internal

Rate of Return - Profitability Index - Capital budgeting under risk -Certainty Equivalent Approach

and Risk Adjusted Discount Rate.

20 Hours

Module III

Financing Decision: Cost of capital and financing decision - Estimation of components of cost of

capital : Equity capital - Retained earnings - Debt and Preference capital -Weighted average

cost of capital and Marginal cost of capital - Sources of long term financing - Capital structure -

Operating and financial leverage - Determinants of capital structure.

20 Hours

Module IV

Dividend Decision: Relevance and irrelevance of dividend decision - Cash and stock dividends

- Dividend policy in practice.

10 Hours

Module V

Working Capital Management: Meaning and nature of working capital - Determination of working

capital requirement - A brief overview of Cash management, Inventory management and

Receivables management.

15 Hours


Reference Books:

1. Home, J.C. Van: "Financial Management and Policy". Prentice Hall of India , New

Delhi.

2. Khan and Jain: "Financial Management Text and Problems", Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi.

3. Pandey, I.M: "Financial Management", Vikas Publications.

4. Bhalla, V.K.: "Financial Management & Policy," Anmol Publications. Delhi.

5. Chandra, P: "Financial Management - Theory and Practice", Tata Me Graw Hill.

6. Singh, J.K.: "Financial Management- Text and Problems". Dhanpat Rai and Company.

Delhi.

7. R. S. Kulshrestha: Financial Management. Sahitya Bhawan.

8. R. P. Rastogi: Fundamentals of Financial Management, Galgotia Publications. New

Delhi.

9. Ravi M Kishore: Fundamentals of Financial Management. Tax man Publications.).

10 Battacharya, Hrishikas: Working Capital Management - Strategies and Techniques, Prentice

Hall of India, New Delhi.

Core courses in the area of Specialization – Banking and Insurance

BC5B10 BANKING SERVICES MANAGEMENT



Objectives:

> To help the students to understand the various provisions of Banking Regulation

Act 194 9 and the reforms in the banking sector.

> To impart knowledge about different forms of banking services and the procedure

for opening and operating bank accounts.

Module I

Banking Legislation and Reforms: Banking Regulation Act 1949 - Provision on capital liquidity -

Powers of Reserve bank of India - Banking sector reforms in India -Classification of bank

assets - Investment evaluation - Income recognition -Management of non-performing assets.

15 Hours

Module II

Innovation in Banking Services: Innovative banking - Social banking - Lead bank scheme

- Differential interest rate scheme - off shore banking - Hi-tech banking -Financial

services - Venture capital financing - Housing finance - Agricultural Financing - Hire

purchase - Packing credits - Deficiency in services - Ways to improve the services.

20 Hours

Module III

Loans and Advances: Principles of lending - Safety - Liquidity - Profitability - Security

- Repaying capacity - Project appraisal - Loan system - Advantages and limitations -

Cash credit - Hypothecation - Pledge - Lien - Mortgages - Factors limiting advances -

Recalling of advances - Consortium advances.

15Hours

Module IV Banker and Customer: Meaning and definition - Relationship - Obligations of a

banker -

Garnishee Order - General and special rights of a customer to charge a bank under Consumer

Protection Act.

15 Hours

Module V

Opening and Operating of Accounts: Procedure for opening and closing an account -

Savings Bank Account - Fixed Deposit Account - Current Account - NRE Account -Precautions

taken by the banker to open and operate accounts for various types of customers: Minor -

Married women - Agent - Joint accounts - Partnership firms - Joint stock companies - Trustees -

Clubs and charitable societies - Pardanashin Women -Executors and administrators - Lunatics

- Illiterate - Drunkard .

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Maheshwari. S.N , Banking Law and Practice.

2. Shekar. K.C, Banking Theory Law and Practice.

3. B.S Khubchandani, Practice and Law of Banking, Mac Millan India Ltd, 2000

4. Bedi. H.L & V.K Hardikar, Practical Banking.

5. K.C Nanda, Credit and Banking, Response Book, Sage Publications, 1999

6. Pannandikar & Mithami, Banking in India.

7. Radhaswamy & Vasudevan , Text Book of Banking.

8. Varshaney , Banking Law and Practice.

9. Sundram & Varshney, Banking And Financial System, Sultan Chand & Sons.

lO.Dr.S.Gurusamy, Financial Services & System , Vijay Nicole imprints Pvt Ltd.

BC5 B11 INSURANCE MANAGEMENT



Objectives:

> To impart knowledge about the insurance organizations and management.

> To help the students to understand the role of insurance intermediaries in emerging

market.

> To enable the students to learn the computation of premium, bonus and claims.

> To provide knowledge about various methods of pricing of insurance products.

Module I

Insurance Organization and Management - Organisation forms in Life and Health insurance -

Organisational structure - Life insurers management and office administration - Insurance

documentation - Publicity - Proposal forms - Policies contracts - Premium receipts - Endorsement

- Renewals.

15 Hours

Module II

Role of Insurance Intermediaries in Emerging Markets - Agency regulation - Prerequisites -

Training procedures for becoming an agent - Remuneration and other benefits - Agency

commission structures - Functions of an agent.

10 Hours

Module III

Underwriting and Claims - Computation of premium and bonuses - Claims - Annuities

- Pensions - Claim processing and settlement - Role of surveyors - Opportunity to appeal -

Considerations in deriving gross premiums - Premium rate structure - Surplus and its

distribution - Annual claim costs - Premium rate variables - Need for underwriting -

Principles in underwriting - Features affecting insurability.

20 Hours

Module IV

Investment Management - Objectives of investment policy - Nature of investments -Magnitude of

funds - Investments of funds - Constraints of stock market- 'Non-Life' investments - Capital

adequacy and capital management - Mobilising large resources -Investor or / Policyholder

protection.

15 Hours

Module V

Pricing of Insurance Products - Impact of legislation and competition on pricing -Taxation and

policies - Market related policies - Cost consciousness - Accounting practices - Scale of

operations - Factors having impact on the demand for insurance -Rigidities in the present pricing

system - Getting out of a controlled price regime - Price behaviors in a deregulated market.

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Kenneth Black Jr., Harold D. Skipper Jr., Life and Health Insurance, Pearson

Education

2. P.S.Palande, R.S.Shah, M.L.Lunawat, Insurance in India, Response Books.

3. D.C.Srinivasan, Shashank Srivastsava , Indian Insurance Industry, New century

publications.

4. Julia Holyoake & Bill Weiper, Insurance, CIB publications, Delhi.

5. Anand Ganguly, Insurance Management, New Age publications.

BC6B14 FOREIGN EXCHANGE MANAGEMENT



Objectives:

> To enable the students to learn the theories of foreign exchange behavior.

> To help the students to understand the different types of exchange rate risks.

Module I

Exchange Rate - History of exchange control in India - Features of Foreign Exchange Regulation

Act, 1973 (FERA) - Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999 -Administrative set up of

foreign exchange in India - Foreign Exchange Dealers' Association of India (FEDAI) -

Functions of Foreign Exchange Department - Nostro Account - Vostro Account - Loro Account.

10 Hours

Module II

International Exchange Systems - Fixed and floating exchange rate systems -Depreciation

V/s Devaluation - Exchange rate system prior to IMF - Exchange rate systems under IMF -

Smithsonian Agreement - Currency exchange rate regimes -External value of rupee - Current

Account convertibility and Capital Account convertibility.

20 Hours

Module III

Balance of Payments - Definition - Components of balance of payments -Disequilibrium

in balance of payments - Corrections of disequilibrium.

10 Hours

Module IV

Foreign Exchange Market - Features - Participants - Settlement of Transactions - Types of

Transactions - Spot - Forward - Swap and Non - deliverable forwards - Quotations in Interbank

Markets - American and European quotation - Factors determining spot exchange rates -

Purchasing Power Parity Theory.

20 Hours

Module V

Derivatives - Meaning and types - Forward Contracts - Features of Futures contract -Hedging with

futures - currency options - Concept of interest rate risks - Exchange Risk -Transaction exposure -

Translation and economic exposures.

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Luc Soenen: "Foreign Exchange Management", McGraw-Hill Primis Custom Publishing.

3. Robert J. Hodrick: " The Empirical Evidence on the Efficiency of Forward and

Futures Foreign Exchange Markets", Gordon & Breach Publishing Group.

4. Loosigian, Allan: " Foreign Exchange Futures: A Guide to International Currency",

Scholarly Books,USA

5. CJeevanandam: " Foreign exchange, Concepts, practices & control",

Sultan Chand &sons.

BC6B15 RISK MANAGEMENT AND INSURANCE



Objectives:

> To enable the students to understand risk, risk management process and

techniques.

> To help the students to learn about risk financing.

> To understand risk management applications.

Module I

Risk: Meaning of risk - Degrees of risk - Cost of risk - Various elements of cost of risk -Sources of

risk - Types of risk - Pure risk and speculative risk - Acceptable and non acceptable risks - Static

and dynamic risk - Risk management - Characteristics of risk management - Significance -

Principles of risk management - Objectives - Risk and risk management process - Risk

identification - Evaluation - Risk management techniques -Selecting and implementing risk

management techniques - Risk Management Information System - Organisation of risk management

in business - Methods of risk management -Identification, measurement and control of risk -

Evaluation, frequency and severity of losses - Pooling of risk - Insurance as risk pooling

arrangements - Transferring of risks.

20 Hours

Module II

Commercial Risk Management Applications - Property - Liability - Commercial property

insurance -Different policies and contracts - Business liability and risk management insurance -

Workers' compensation and risk financing.

18 Hours

Module III

Derivatives as Risk Management Tools: Classification of derivatives - Features of hedging,

forward, futures, options and swaps.

15 Hours

Module IV

Risk Management Applications - Loss of life - Loss of health - Retirement planning and annuities -

Employee benefits - Financial and estate planning.

12 Hours

Module V

Risk Management Environment - Industry - Functions and organisation of insurers -Government

regulation of insurance sector - IRDA - Privatisation of insurance business in India - Changes in

Insurance Act - Insurance intermediaries - Insurance products pricing -Claim valuation - Foreign

insurers in India.

10 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Rejda, George E: Principles of Risk Management and Insurance, Latest Edn, Addison

Wesley Longman.

2. McNamara: Principles of Risk Management and Insurance, Addison - Wesley

3. Dorfman: Introduction to Risk Management and Insurance, Prentice Hall.

4. Williams: Heins, Risk Management and Insurance, McGraw Hill Pub.

5. James S.Trieschman, Sandra G. Gustavsonh, Robert E. Hoyt: Risk management and

Insurance, Thomson Asia Pvt. Ltd., Singapore.

6. G. Kotheshwar Rao , Risk Management.

7. Gulati, Risk Management.

8. Dr.P.K.Gupta, Insurance and Risk Management, Himalaya Publishing House.

9. Insurance Act - Latest.

10. Sengupta Mrinal Chandra, Insurance Finance, Progressive Publishers, New Delhi

Core courses in the area of Specialization: Co-operation

Core courses in the area of Specialization – Co-operation

BC5B10 CO-OPERATIVE THEORY AND PRACTICE



Objectives:

> To provide conceptual clarity and theoretical base in co-operation.

> To provide an overall idea about important types of co-operatives.

Module I

Co-operation and its Principles: Co-operation - Meaning - Definition - Features -Importance -

Benefits - Principles of Co-operation: Rochdale (first stage) - Reformulated Co-operative Principles

by ICA (2nd stage) - Karve Committee in Co-operative principles (3rd stage) and Principles at the

4th stage by ICA in 1995. 20 Hours

Module II

Co-operation and Other Economic Systems, Organizations and Associations: Cooperation and

economic systems : Capitalism, Socialism and Communism.

10 Hours

Module III

Co-operative Education and Training: Meaning - Importance - ICA and Co -operative movement -

NCUI, VAMNICOM, NCCT, ICM, State Co-operative Unions and their role in education and

training - Co-operative week - Co- operative flag - Journals on cooperation.

15 Hours

Module IV

Types of Co-operatives and Co-operative Credit :_Agricultural credit societies - Non agricultural

credit societies - Non agricultural non credit societies - PACS - Service Cooperative Banks -

Farmers Banks - District Co-operative Banks - State Co-operative Banks - Primary Agricultural

and Rural Development Banks - Kerala State Co-operative Agricultural and Rural Development

Banks.

15 Hours

Module V

NABARD and its role in co-operative movement - Consumer societies - Dairy societies -Marketing

societies - SC/ST societies - Urban Cooperative Banks - Employee societies -IFFCO - KRIBCO -

Fishery societies - Housing societies - Industrial societies (Weavers and Coir Societies) - NAFED

- MILMA - HANTEX - MATSYAFED - MCAC - NHB and NCB - Types of Credit: Short,

medium and long term - Two tier and Three tier credit structure.

20 Hours

Reference Books:

1. DubashiP.R , Principles and Philosophy of Co-operation

2. Krishnaswamy O. R &Kulandaiswamy, Co-operation Concept and Theory

3. Mathur B.S, Co-operation in India

4. Hajala.T.N , Principles, Problems and Practice of Co-operation

5. Krishnaswami. O.R, Fundamentals of Co-operation.

6. Mamoria C.B, Rural Credit & Agricultural Co-operatives

7. Bedi R.D, Theory, History & Practice of Co-operation

8. Kulkarni, Theory and Practice of Co-operation

9. Mamoria C.B. and Saxena , Co-operation in Foreign Lands

10. G.R.Madan, Co-operative Movement in India.

11. B.B.Goel, Co-operative Legislation, Trends and Dimensions.

12. Periodicals and Journals Published by NCUI

BC5B11 LEGAL ENVIRONMENT FOR CO-OPERATIVES



Objectives:

> To enable the students to acquire knowledge about co-operative legal frame work

in India and Kerala.

> To understand the formalities for registering co-operatives and the administrative

set up.

Module I

Cooperative Legislation: Features and important landmarks in the history of co-operative

legislation in India - Genesis and growth of co-operative movement in India during pre-, post

independence and after 1991.

10 Hours

Module II

Co-operative Legislations in India: Co-operative Credit Societies Act, 1904 - Features

-Co-operative Societies Act, 1912 - Features - Kerala Co-operative Societies Act, 1969 -Features -

Multistage Co-operative Societies Act, 1984 - Model Cooperative Societies Act, 1991 & 2002 -

Features - Recent Trends and Developments - Vaidyanathan Committee Report.

20 Hours

Module III

Kerala Co-operative societies Act 1969-Registration of Co-operative Societies : Formalities -

Bye Law - Model and its amendment - Formalities - Change of name and liability - Formalities -

Membership formalities - Qualifications and disqualifications -Associate or nominal member -

Qualifications and disqualifications of members of Board - Election - Procedure - Settlement of

disputes - Types and procedure - Enquiry -Inspection - Supervision - Surcharge - Liquidation

and its formalities - Board of Directors' meeting - Annual General Body meeting - Minutes -

Quorum for the meetings -Removal and expulsion of members - Restrictions on holding shares -

Privileges of cooperatives.

20 Hours

Module IV

Administrative Set-up of Co-operative Department in Kerala - Delegation of powers -Audit -

Procedure - Audit programme - Vouching - Audit classifications - Proceedings -State and the

co-operative movement in India - Role of state in the development of cooperatives -

De-officialisation of the co-operative movement - Reconstructing cooperative administration.

15 Hours

Module V

Salient Features of Banking Regulation Act 1949 (As applicable to co-operative societies) -

Impact of Co-operative Law on co-operative management.

10 Hours

Reference Books :

1. G.R.Madan, Cooperative Movement in India

2. Goel B.B, Cooperative Legislation, Trends and Dimensions

3. B.S.Mathur, Co-operation in India.

4. T .N.Hajella , Principles, Problems and Practice in Co-operation.

5. Dr.V.BJugale and Dr. P.A.Kohli, Reasserting the Co-operative Movement

6. Co-operative Credit Societies Act ,1904

7. Co-operative Societies Act, 1912

8. Government of India, Multi State Co-operative Societies Act, 2002

9. Government of India, Report of the Committee on Model Act

10. Mohanan P.N., Co-operative Laws in Kerala

11. Bedi R.D., Co-operative Law in India

12. Calvert, The Law and Principles of Co-operation.

13. Rishpal Nainta , The Law of Co-operative Society in India, Deep & Deep

Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

BC6B14 INTERNATIONAL CO-OPERATIVE MOVEMENT



Objectives: To enable the students to aquire

koknowledge about evolution and development of

co-operative movement in the world.

Module I

Co-operative Movement in Foreign Countries: Great Britain (Consumer) - Germany (Agricultural

Credit) - Denmark (Dairy) - China (Induscos) - Japan (Multi-purpose societies) - USA

(Marketing) - USSR (Collective Farms).

15 Hours

Module II

Co-operatives and Employment in Africa: Cocoa - Co-operatives in Sierra Leone -African

Confederation of Co-operatives Savings and Credit Associations, (Nairobi) Kenya - Kilimanjaro

Native Co-operative Union (Tanzania) - Contribution of Robert Owen, Louis Blanc, Shri V. L.

Mehta and D. R. Gadgil in the sphere of co-operation.

15 Hours

Module III

International Co-operative Alliance: Objectives - Role - Membership - Governing Bodies -

Regional offices - Sectoral organizations and functioning of ICA - Leading specialized

organizations of ICA - International Co-operative Agricultural Organization (ICAO) - International

Co-operative Banking Association (ICBA) - International Health Co-operative Organization

(IHCO) - International Co-operative Fisheries Organization (ICFO) - Consumer Co-operative

World-wide (CCW).

20 Hours

Module IV

Role of International Organisations in the Development of Co-operative Movement: International

Labour Organization - World Bank - World Assembly of Youth - Afro-Asian Rural Reconstruction

Organization

15 Hours

Module V

Inter Co-operative Relations: Indian Farmers Fertilizers Co-operatives (IFFCO) - Anand Milk

Producers Union Limited (AMUL) - National Co-operative Union of India (NCUI)

10 Hours

Reference Books:

1. G.R.Madan , Co-operative Movement in India.

2. T.N.Hajella , Principles, Problems and Practice in Co-operation.

3. Periodicals and Journals published by NCUI

4. R.D.Bedi, Theory, History and Practice of Co-operation.

5. Saxena and Mammoria , Co-operation in Foreign Lands.

6. T.N.Hajella , Principles, Problems and Practice of Co-operation.

7. C.A. Digest Published by I.C.A.

8. Review of International Co-operation, Official Journal of I.C.A.

BC6B15 CO-OPERATIVE MANAGEMENT AND ADMINISTRATION



Objectives:

> To enable the students to acquire knowledge about the co-operative management

and administration.

> To familiarize the students with accounting and auditing of co-operatives.

Module I

Management of Societies: General body - Representative general body - Election -Supersession

-Privileges of co-operative societies - State and co-operatives - Properties and funds of

co-operatives - Disposal of net profit - Co-operative education fund - Audit - Inquiry and

supersession - Disputes - Settlement of disputes - Winding up and cancellation of registration

- Execution - Appeals - Revision and Review.

20 Hours

Module II

Role of Management in the Development of Co-operative Organizations - Principles of management

- Co-operative management - Unique features of co-operative management -Integrating the

principles of co-operation and principles of management - Professional management for

co-operatives - Meaning - Importance and evaluation criteria -Organizational structure of a

co-operative - Designing organization structure for cooperatives.

15 Hours

Module III

Co-operative Leadership - Meaning - Importance - Types - Problems of leadership in cooperative

organization - Path-goal theory of leadership and case studies of Cooperative leadership - Nature

of management leadership - Combination of management and leadership qualities.

10 Hours

Module IV

Co-operative Accounting: Meaning - Definition - Special Features of co-operative accounting -

Sources of funds - Owned and borrowed - State aid to co-operatives -Preparation of Trial Balance,

Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet - Treatment of overdue interest - Books &

registers maintained by the co-operatives - statutory

requirements - Day book and subsidiary day book - Triple column cash book - Rough cash chitta

- R&D statements - Computerized accounting system.

15 Hours

Module V

Co-operative Audit - Features - Difference between co-operative audit and general audit, financial

audit and administrative audit - Auditor - Duties, rights and responsibilities -Stages of audit work-

Preparation of audit programs-Vouching - Verification &valuation of assets & liabilities - Auditing

of reserves & provisions -Audit memorandum - Audit classification - Audit certificate - Audit fees.

15 Hours

Reference Books :

1. Dwivedi R.C, Democracy in Cooperative Movement - An Indian Profile

2. Hajela T.N, Principles, Problems and Practice of Cooperation

3. Kamat G.S, New Dimensions of Co-operative Management

4. Nakkiran S, Cooperative Management - Principles and Techniques

5. Sah A.K, Professional Management for Co-operatives

6. DesaiS.S.M, Agriculture and Rural Banking in India

7 ILO, Co-operative Management & Administration

8. Goel .B.D, Co-operative Management and Administration, Deep&Deep Publications, New

Delhi

9. Nakkiran.S , A Treatise on Co-operative Management, Rainbow Publications, Coimbatore

10. Sinha and Sahaya .R., Management of Co-operative Enterprises, National Council for

Co-operative Training, New Delhi

11. ICA, Readings in Co-operative Management

12. Krishnaswamy O.R, Co-operative Account Keeping

13. Manikkavasakam , A Treatise on Co-operative Account eeping

14. Samiuddin , Co-operative Accounting & Auditing

Core Courses in the area of Specialization: Computer Applications

BC5B10 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN BUSINESS



Objectives:

> To help the students to acquire basic knowledge about computer and its applications in

various areas of business.

> To enable the students to understand the modern trends and technologies incomputer

applications.

Module I

Computer Systems : Introduction – Features and Parts of new generation Computers-Factors to be

considered while selecting computer - Importance of computers in business –Network- Types of

network, LAN, WAN, MAN, PAN ,BAN,SAN&CAN.Computer applications in various areas of

business- Internet, Features and uses in business- Social media & its uses in business

15 Hours

Module II

Business and websites-introduction to web design-concepts-principles involved in

developing a website-golden rules of web designing-page design-home page-web

standards-audience requirement-Role of websites in a business-Cascading Style Sheet-Concept of

CSS-HTML-HTML documents-Basic structure of an HTML Document-creating an HTML

Document-HTML Tags.

15 Hours

Module III

Elements of HTML-Introduction-working with text-working with Lists, Tables, Hyperlinks,

images and multimedia-web publishing or hosting-creating the website -saving the site-working on

the web site-themes-publishing websites-website for business growth.

15 Hours

Module IV

E-Commerce & Digital payments: E-Commerce, Business Models - B2B, B2C, B2G, C2C & B2E

– Requirements of e-commerce website – Modes of delivery- Digital payments: USSD, NUUP,

AEPS, UPI, Debit card, Credit card, Pre-paid cards, Internet Banking, Mobile banking, e-wallets –

POS Terminals, M-POS, V-POS.

20 Hours

Module V

Digital Security – Security threats in Internet & e-Commerce, Virus & Trojan horses, Phishing,

Hacking, Spyware – Security Measures, Antivirus, Firewall, Encryption, Bio-metrics

–Precautions while using Internet & e-payments - IT Act, Major Provisions of IT Act.

10 Hours

Reference Books :

1. Rajaraman , Introduction to Information Technology, PHI

2. Jennifer Niederst Robbins, “Learning web design:A beginner’s Guide to HTML,CSS,Java

script.and web Graphics” ,O’ Reilly Media,Inc

3. John Duckett, “HTML and CSS Design and build websites”,John Wiley&Sons

4. Rajaraman , Fundamentals of Computers 4/E, PHI

5. PTSJ Joseph, E-Commerce: An Indian perspective, PHI

6. Ananya Misra, E-Commerce, B.K Publications Pvt.Ltd.

7. P. Mohan , Fundamentals of Computers, Himalaya Publishing House

8. Dennis P. Curtin , Information Technology, McGraw Hill International

9. Behrouz A. Forouzan , Data Communication and Networking 2nd edition ,McGraw- Hill

10. Avi Silberschatz, Peter Galvin & Greg Gagne Willey, Operating System Concepts

11. Uyless Black , Computer Networks Protocols, Standards and Interface: Prentice Hall India

Pvt. Ltd.

12. Alfred Glkossbrenner , Internet 101 Computing MGH

13. Alex Leon & Mathews Leon, Fundamentals of Information Technology, LeonTechworld

14. Suresh Samudrala, Retail Banking Technology, Jaico Puubishing House

15. Indian Institute of Banking & Finance, Digital banking, Taxman

16. Karnika Seth, Computers, Internet and New technology laws, Lexis Nexis

17. Pavan Duggal, A text book on Cyber law, Universal Law Publishing company

18. Harish Chander, Cyber Laws and IT Protection, Prentice Hall India

BC5B11 BUSINESS INFORMATION SYSTEMS



Objective:

> To enable the students to acquire basic knowledge in the information technology and its

relevance to the various areas of business.

Module I

Management Information System: Data, Information & Knowledge – Information Technology &

Communication technology - Role of Information & Communication technology in Business –

Management Information System , Meaning , Concepts, Purpose & Features of MIS, Basic

structural concepts.

15 Hours

Module II

Types of Management Information Systems: Transaction Processing System - Decision Support

Systems (DSS) - Characteristics and capabilities of DSS – Components of DSS – Executive

Information System - Expert System – Management Reporting System.

15 Hours

Module III

Data Base Management Systems : DBMS - Definition - Necessity of a database - Characteristics of

database - Database management systems - Types of database management systems - Logical data

models - Hierarchical model - Network model - Relational model - Object-oriented model - Object

relational model Deductive/inference model - Comparison between various database models.

20 Hours

Module IV

Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) – Meaning - Need for ERP - Benefits of an ERP system –

ERP software – Phases in ERP implementation - Issues and challenges in the implementation of

ERP.

15 Hours

Module V

Business Process Reengineering: Meaning and definition of BPR – Reengineer - Need and

Objectives of BPR - Process of BPR – Advantages of BPR - Issues and problems of BPR

10 Hours

Reference Books :

1. James A O’brien, George.M.Marakas & Ramesh Behl, Management Information Systems,

McGraw Hill Education, 2013

2. D.P Goyal, Management Information Systems: Managerial Perspectives, Vikas Publishing

House, 2014

3. A.K Gupta, Management Information System, S.Chand & Company 2010

4. Alexis Leon, Enterprise Resource Plannning, McGraw Hill Education 2007

5. Uma G Gupta, Management Information Systems, Galgotia Publications Pvt Ltd, New

Delhi, 1993

6. Jyotindra Zaveri, Enterprise Resource Planning, Himalaya Publishing House 2012

7. Rajesh Ray, Enterprise Resource Planning text and cases, McGraw Hill Education 2010.

8. R.Radhakrishnan & S.Balasubrahmanian, Business Process Reengineering: Text and cases,

Prentice Hall India Learning Pvt. Ltd, 2008

9. R.Srinivasan, Business Process Reengineering, McGraw Hill Education 2011

10. B.R Dey, Business Process Reengineering & Change Management , Dreamtech Press 2004.

BC6B14 OFFICE AUTOMATION TOOLS



Objectives:

> To enable the students to acquire basic knowledge in the various office automation

tools and its applications in the various areas of business.

Module I

MS-Word : Word Basics - Starting word - Creating a new document - Opening preexisting document

- The parts of a word window - Typing text - Selecting text - Deleting text -Undo - Redo - Repeat

- Inserting text - Replacing text - Formatting text - Cut - Copy -Paste - Formatting Text and

Documents - Auto format - Line spacing - Margins - Borders and Shading.

Headers and Footers : Definition - Creating basic headers and footers - Tables - Creating table -

Adding, changing, deleting rows - Inserting, changing, deleting column - Graphics - Importing

graphics - Clipart - Insert picture - Clip Art Gallery - Drawing objects - Text in drawing .

Templates : Template types - Using templates - Exploring templates - Modifying templates -

Macros : Record in macros - Editing macros - Running a macro - Mail Merge: Mail Merge concept

- Main document - Data sources - Merging data source and main document - Overview of word

menu options - Word basic tool bar.

(Theory 15 Hours and Practical 10 Hours)

Module II

MS EXCEL : Electronic Spreadsheet – Creating and rearranging worksheet - Structure of

spreadsheet and its applications to accounting, finance, and marketing functions of business

-Creating a dynamic / sensitive worksheet - Concept of absolute and relative cell reference -

Using built in functions – Mathematical, statistical and financial functions – Conditional

formatting –filters- Charts – Pivot table and pivot chart - Goal seeking and solver tools - Sharing

data with other desktop applications - Strategies of creating error free worksheet.


Module III

Ms-Power Point : Power point - Basics - Terminology - Getting started - Views -Creating

presentations - Using auto content wizard - Using blank presentation option -Using design

template option - Adding slides Deleting a slide - Importing images from the outside world -

Drawing in power point - Transition and build effects - Deleting a slide - Numbering a slide

- Saving presentation - Closing.


Module IV

The Internet and its Basic Concepts: Internet concept - History - Development in India

-Technological foundation of internet - Distributed computing - Client-server computing -Internet

protocol suite - Application of distributed computing - Client-server computing -

Module V

Internet protocol suite in the internet environment - Domain Name System (DNS) -Generic

Top Level Domain (g TLD) - Country Code Top Level Domain (cc TLD) -Indian -

Allocation of second level domains - IP addresses - Internet Protocol Applications of

internet in business, Education, Governance, etc.

(Theory 10 Hours)

Reference Books :

1. Ron Mansfield, Working in Microsoft office, Tata Me Graw Mill (2008)

2. Ed Bott, woody Leonard, Using Microsoft Office 2007, Pearson Education (2007)

3. R.K.Taxali, PC Software Made Simple.

4. Stephen L.Nelson , Office 2000 Complete Reference.

5. Joyce Cox ,Polly Orban, Quick course in Microsoft Office.

6. Gimi Couster , Mastering Office 2000.

7. Rajkamal, Internet and Web Technologies, Tata McGraw Hill (2007).

BC6B15 COMPUTERISED ACCOUNTING WITH TALLY



Objectives:

> To enable the students to acquire basic knowledge in the computerized accounting

systems and its applications in the area of business.

(Out of the 80 lecture hours, the ratio between theory and practical hours shall be 3:2)

Module I

Introduction to Accounting: Accounting basis and terms -Branches of accounting - Mode of

accounting - Manual accounting - Computerized accounting fundamentals.

Accounting with Tally : Introduction to Tally - Tally interface - fll features - fl2 configuration -

Company creation - Accounting groups - Accounting ledgers - Accounting vouchers - Vouchers

entry.

15 Hours

Module II

Inventory Management with Tally - Stock groups - Stock items - Stock category -Unit of

measures - Godown inventory vouchers (Pure inventory and inventory vouchers).

Integration of Accounting with Inventory : Bill wise details - Invoicing - Voucher entry -Cost

centre - Cost category - Budget and control - Bank reconciliation - Interest calculation - Order

processing - Stock valuation methods - Reorder levels - Tracking numbers - Bill of material -

Inventory ageing.

30 Hours

Module III

Tax Application in Tally - Introduction to GST - GST activation and classification -GST

computation - Composite GST - Input Tax credit - Tax Invoice, Credit and Debit Notes- Returns-

Transfer of Input Tax Credit- Time and Value of Supply-Recent features

15 Hours

Module IV

Accounting

and Inventory Reports - Trading, Profit and loss A/c - Balance Sheet -Ledgers - Cost centre and

budget reports - Cash book and bank book - Inventory reports - Decision supporting tools -

Ratio analysis - Cash flows - Fund flow - Budgeting system - Printing of reports - Voucher

and bill printing etc.

10 Hours

Module V

Technology Advantage of Tally - Tally audit - Tally vault - Back up, restore, merge and split of

database - ODBC interface - Export and import of data - web enabled reporting - On line support

of software.

10 Hours

Reference Books:

1. A.K. Nadhani and K.K. Nadhani, Implementing Tally 6.3, 1/e BPB Publications, New

Delhi.

2. Namrata Agarwal, Tally 6.3 , 2004 Edition , Dream Tech., New Delhi.

3. Sridharan,, Narmadha Publications, May 2003.

Core courses in the area of Specialization – Travel and Tourism

BC5B10 TOURISM PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES



Objectives:

> To enable the students to understand the basic concepts, principles and the current

practices of tourism in India.

Module I

Tourism an Overview: Meaning and definition of tourism, traveler, visitor, excursionist and

transit visitor - International and domestic tourist - Elements, nature and characteristics of

tourism - Types and forms of tourism - Inter disciplinary approaches to tourism - Historical

perspective of tourism - Major travel motivations - Tourism demand -Types of tourism demand -

Evolution of tourism demand.

10 Hours

Module II

Tourism Industry and Impacts: Structure and components of tourism industry- Tourism system -

Positive and negative impacts of tourism - Economic, sociocultural, and environmental impacts -

Nature of impacts - Economic and socio-cultural measures for maximising benefits and minimising

costs.

15 Hours

Module III

Tourism Organizations: Role of different tourism organizations - UNWTO, WTTC, PATA,

IATA, National Tourist Organizations (NTO) - Role and functions of Ministry of Tourism,

Government of India, ITDC - Major public sector organizations in Kerala Tourism : DOT,

Government of Kerala, KTDC and DTPCs.

10 Hours

Module IV

Tourism Planning and Development: Concept of tourism planning - Evolution of tourism planning

- Significance, levels and types of tourism planning - Process in tourism planning

- Leadership and co-operation in tourism development plans - Role of Government, private

sector and NGOs - Factors responsible for growth and development of tourism at the global and

national levels - Factors inhibiting growth of tourism - Tourism scenario and future - Tourism

trends at national and international levels - Five year plans and major tourism development

initiatives - National and state tourism policies.

20 Hours

Module V

Tourism and Environment: Concept and types of environment in tourism - Relationship between

tourism & environment - Meaning and principles of sustainable tourism development - Steps in

sustainable tourism development - Environment impact assessment - Types, importance and

factors influencing carrying capacity - Role of tourist and community participation in sustainable

tourism - Approaches to sustainable tourism -Eco-tourism - Responsible tourism - Responsible

tourism initiatives in Kerala.

20 Hours

Reference Books:

1. A.K Bhatia , International Tourism , Sterling Publishers

2. G.S Batra, Tourism in 21st Century, Anmol Publishers

3. P.C Sinha, Tourism Impact Assessment, Kaniska Publishers

4. K.C Sharma, Tourism Policies, Planning Strategies, Pointer Publishers

5. Kishan K.Kamra ,Managing Tourist Destination ,Kanishka Publishers

6. Pran Nath Seth, Sushama Seth Bhat, An Introduction to Travel and Tourism, Sterling Publishers.

7. V.Harikumar, A.S Dileep,T.Rajesh, Tourism Trends and Strategies, Sonali Publishers.

8. Kerry Godfrey and Jackie Clarke, Tourism Development Hand Book, Cassell, London.

9. Foster Douglas , Travel & Tourism Management, Me. Millan, London

10. Cooper Fletcher, Gilbert and Wanhill, Tourism Principles and Practices, ELBS with Pitman,

London

11. Page J Stephen, Brunt Paul, Connel Jo et al, Tourism A Modern Synthesis, Thomson Publishers,

London

12. Charles R. Goeldner & Brent Ritchie, J.R. ,Tourism, Principles, Practices, Philosophies, John

Wiley and Sons, New Jersey.

BC5B11 TOURISM PRODUCTS AND PROMOTION



Objectives:

> To enable the students to acquire knowledge about the tourism product and promotion.

Module I

Tourism Product: Meaning and definition of tourism product - Salient features of tourism product -

Components of tourism product - Tourism resources as products - Categories of tourism resources:

Natural, cultural, events, activities - Peter's inventory of tourist attraction - Tourism resource

audit - Resource inventory and evaluation - Concept of tourist destination - Tourist and tourism

product - Classification of tourists.

10 Hours

Module II

Natural Tourism Resource: Hill and mountain tourism - Himalayan and non Himalayan hill

resorts in India - Role of desert, beaches, islands, rivers and lakes in Indian tourism -Wildlife

tourism in India - Major wildlife circuits - Major wildlife sanctuaries and national parks in India.

15 Hours

Module III

Culture and Tourism : Culture and tourism inter-relationship - Tourism culture Vs cultural tourism

in India - Elements of culture - Socio cultural tourism resources in India -Architectural heritage

of India - Historical monuments : museum, art galleries and libraries - Important shrines of the

Hindus, Buddhist, Jain, Sikh, Muslim, Christians and others - Classical and folk dance forms and

styles in India - Classical vocal music schools - Fairs and festivals of India - Cuisines, customs,

costumes and handicrafts of India -Ayurveda, yoga and meditation - Conservation of cultural

heritage of India.

20 Hours

Module IV

Manmade Resources: Relationships between leisure, recreation and tourism - Urban and rural

recreation - Barriers to recreation - Gender and social constraints - Range of recreation

businesses - Adventure sports - Commercial attractions - Amusement parks -Gaming - Shopping -

Live entertainments - House boats -Tree houses - Home stays.

15 Hours

Module V

Tourism Promotion: Concept of tourism promotion - Approaches to promote tourism product -

Push and pull strategies - Dimensions of tourism promotion - Objectives -Advertisement - Process

and tools - Public relation - Concept and tools - Sales promotion:

Concept and techniques - Tourist publicity - Media and types - Tourist information centres -

Tourist guides.

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. A.K Bhatia, International Tourism, Sterling Publishers

2. P.C. Sinha, Tourism Marketing, Anmol publishers

3. Ratandeep Singh, Infrastructre of Tourism in India, Kaniska

4. Ratandeep Singh , TourismMarketing , Kaniska

5. Acharya Ram, Tourism and Cultural Heritage of India, ROSA Publication

6. Ministry of Information and Broadcasting, Government of India, The Gazette of India:

History and Culture, Vol.2,

7. Hussain.A.K, The National Culture of India, National Book Trust,

8. Mukerjee.R.K, The Culture and art of India ,George Allen Unwin Ltd,

9. Kishan K.Kamra, Managing Tourist destination, Kanishka

10.Pran Nath Seth ,Sushama Seth Bhat, An Introduction to Travel and Tourism Sterling. 12 Stephen

Ball, Encyclopedea of Tourism Resources in India, B/H.

11. Manoj Dixit, Tourism products, New Royal Book Co.

12. Sarina Singh , Lonely Planet India.

13. Robinet Jacob, Indian Tourism Products, Abhijeet Publications,

14. George Torkildsen, Leisure and Recreation Management, Fourth Edition, E&FN

Spon, London

BC6B14 TOURIST TRANSPORT AND TOUR OPERATION



Objectives:

> To help the students to understand system of tourist transport and tour operation and to know

current development and practices in these areas.

Module I

Tourist Transport System: Tourist transport systems in the world - Transportation and Travel

evolution - Role of transport in tourism - Road, rail, water, and air transport - Role of Railways in

tourism - Indian Railways and tourism - Major tourist trains in India -

Concept of cruises - Road transportation - Major transcontinental, international and National

Highways - Coach travel - Role of Government in road transport in India - Car rental agency

operations.

15 Hours

Module II

Air Travel - History of aviation - Airline terminology - Embarkation and disembarkation

procedures - Major air travel routes - Airport codes - Codes of major airlines - Baggage handling -

Airport security - freight - Guidelines for special handling of passengers - Role of IATA and ICAO

- History and growth of airlines in India - major airports, air routes and airlines in India - An

overview of ticketing - Basic elements of air Fares - Air Ticketing process - Parts of a ticket -

Types of tickets - Details of an automated ticket.

20 Hours

Module III

Travel Agency: Travel agency business - Functions and types of travel agency - Linkages and

integration with the principal service providers - Setting up a full-fledged travel agency -

Sources of income of a travel agency - IATA and DOT rules for travel agency approval - Passport

and visa - Types of visa - Preparing visa cases - Formalities required for various visas.

15 Hours

Module IV

Tour Operation: Difference between travel agent and tour operator - Types of tour operators -

Package tour and its components - Types of package tours - Formulation, designing, costing and

selling a tour package - Tour itinerary - Meaning and its importance - Types of itineraries -

Factors affecting in designing a tour itinerary- Role of UFTAA and TAAI.

15 Hours

Module V

Information Technology in Tourism: Modern mass media techniques - Passenger reservation

systems - Computer in airlines and railways - CRS Vs GDS - Use of IT in travel agency -

Consumer access to travel information systems: Websites - Automated ticket machines -

Information Kiosks.

10 Hours

Reference Books:

5. Jagmohan Negy, Travel Agency &Tour Operation Concepts & Principles, Kanishka

6. A.K Bhatia , International Tourism, Sterling Publishers

7. Pran Nath Seth , Sushama Seth Bhat, An Introduction to Travel and Tourism,

Sterling

8. Puspinder .S. Gill, Dynamics of Tourism , Anmol Publishers.

9. Ratan Deep Singh, Infrastructure of Tourism in India , Kanishka

10. Endres Guntar ,Vital Guide, Major Airlines of the World (2nd edition), Motrbooks Intl.

11. Senguttuvan P. S, Fundamentals of Air Transport Management, Excel Books.

12. Gupta S.K, International Airfare & Ticketing Methods and Techniques, UDH Publishers.

13. Ratandeep Singh, Tourism and Transport Management :Practice and Procedures,

Kanishka

14. Garg, Deepa , Travel Agency and Ticketing, Mohit Publication

15. Stephen J. Page, Transport for Tourism, Pearson Education

16. Sheldon J. Pauline, Tourism Information Technology, CABI Publishing New York.

17. Hirst Mike ,Air Transport System, Woodhead Publishing Ltd.

18. Doganis Rigas, The Airline Business (2nd edition), Routledge.

BC6B15 HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT



Objectives:

> To give the students a broad overview of the basic concepts of hospitality

management and to help them to make use of the opportunities in this sector.

Module I

Introduction to Hospitality Industry: Definition of hotel - History of hotel industry Economic

significance - Linkage among hospitality, tourism and travel industry - Classification of

hotels on the basis of size, location, clientele, duration of stay, level of service, ownership -

Alternative accommodations.

15 Hours

Module II

Hospitality Industry in India: Indian concept - History of hospitality establishments in India -

Western impact - Development in the 20th

century - Star rating of hotels - Major hotel chains in

India - Types of ownership and management of hotels - Proprietary, franchise and management

contract - Organizational structure and chart of a major hotel - Major departments of a hotel.

15 Hours

Module III

Front Office and House Keeping Functions: Sections and layout of front office -Functions of

front office - Attributes of front office personnel - Methods of hotel reservations - Recording the

reservations - Complaint handling - Paging - Functions of information section - Role of lobby

manager - Reception office equipments - Hotel tariff plans - Types of guest rooms - Mode of

settling bills of guests - Concept and areas of housekeeping - Staffing pattern of housekeeping

department.

20 Hours

Module IV

Food and Beverage: Concept of food and beverage preparation - Methods of cooking foods -

Staffing in hotel kitchen - Style of food service - Indian styles of food service -Types of menu -

Planning menu - Room service and buffet service - Guest reception in restaurant.

15 Hours

Module V

Safety and Security in Hotel: Safety precautions - Major security considerations - Water quality

defects and treatments - Handling of chemical hazards - Management of internal air quality of

hotel.

10 Hours

Reference Books :

1. Yogendra K .Sharma, Hotel Management Educational and Environmental Aspects, Kanishka.

2. A.K Bhatia , International Tourism , Sterling Publishers

3. M.Kumar, Basics of Food and Beverage Management, Axis Publications

4. Andrews, Sudhir, Food & Beverage Service: A Training Manual, Tata McGraw Hill.

5. James A Bardi, Hotel Front Office Management, John Wiley and Sons.

6. Andrews, Sudhir, Text Book of Front Office Management & Operations,

Tata McGraw Hill.

7. Jerome J Vallen, Gary K Vallan, Check in & Check out: Managing Hotel

Operations, Prentice Hall.

8. George, Bobby, Food & Beverage Service, Jaico.

9. G Raghubalan & Raghubalan Smritee, Hotel House Keeping : Operations & Management, Oxford

University Press, USA.

10.Singh Malini, George Jaya B. (2008), House Keeping Operations, Design and Management,

Jaico.

11.Muhammed Zulfikar, Inroduction to Tourism and Hotel Industry, VikasCore

Core courses in the area of Specialization – Islamic Finance

BC5B10 Introduction to Islamic commercial banking



Module I

The concept of Islamic Banking – Evolution and history of Islamic banking - development of

interest free banks- Modern Islamic Banks. Principles of Islamic finance- - Prohibition of riba,

gharar and mysir-rationale of prohibitions – trade and riba

10 Hours

Module II

Functioning of Islamic banks- Deposit products in Islamic banks-current account, savings account

and investment account- -al wadiah, qard and mudaraba principles- special investment account and

general investment account- difference between conventional banking and Islamic banking

10 hours

Module III

Financing products- equity based products- mudaraba, musharaka and declining

musharaka-various issues and merits of these techniques in finance operation- difference between

conventional equity finance and participatory finance

20 hours

Module IV

Debt based financial products- murabaha- conditions and steps for murabaha practice-murabaha

and musawama- bai, muajjal - Issues in product management and its area of application

Forward sales- bai’salam and isthisnah- method of operation and practice of salam

contract-parallel salam- Isthisnah –conditions for practice- difference between salam and

isthisnah-area of application.

20 hours

Module V

Leasing contract-ijara-basic rules of leasing-leasing as a mode of financing-permanent leasing and

ijara wa iqthinah –securitization of ijarah –Uses of ijara - Qard hasana, a’rahn, wakala , ju’alah

and kafala based products - practicing of hisbah in Islamic banks and its conditions

20 hours

Reference Books:

1) Kamal, Mohd Hashim. A Shari’a Analysis of Issues in Islamic Leasing. International

Islamic University Malaysia

2) Obaidullah, Mohammed. Islamic Financial Services. Jeddah: Islamic Economics Research

Center; King Abdulaziz University, 2005.

3) Ayub, Muhammad. Islamic Banking and Finance: Theory and Practice. 1st ed. Karachi:

State Bank of Pakistan, 2002.

4) Usmani, Dr. Muhammad I. Meezan Bank’s Guide to Islamic Banking. 1st ed. Karachi:

Darul Ishaat, 2002.

5) Usmani, Muhammad T. An Introduction to Islamic Finance. 1st ed. Karachi: Idaratul

Ma'Arif, 1999.

6) Interest free banking by Najathulla siddiqui, Markazi Makthaba islami publishers, New

Delhi

7) Al-Zuhayli, W. (2003). Financial Transactions in Islamic Jurisprudence (M. A. El-Gamal,

Trans. Vol. 1-2). Damascus: Dar al-Fikr.

8) Askari, H., Iqbal, Z., Mirakhor, A. & Krichenne, N. (2010). The Stability of Islamic

Finance: Creating a Resilient Financial Environment for a Secure Future. Singapore: John

Wiley & Sons (Asia).

9) Ayub, M. (2007). Understanding Islamic Finance. West Sussex, England: John Wiley &

Sons.

10) Chapra, M. U. (1988). Towards an Islamic Financial System. Journal of Islamic Economics,

1(2), 1-30.

11) Chapra, M. U. (1998). Relevance and Importance of Islamic Economics. In M. Kahf (Ed.),

Lessons in Islamic Economics Vol. 1, 99-114. Jeddah: Islamic Research and Training

Institute (IRTI). Seminar Proceedings No. 41.

12) Choudhury, M. A. (2007). Development of Islamic Economic and Social Thought. In M. K.

Hassan & M. K. Lewis (Eds.), Handbook of Islamic Banking, 21-37. Cheltenham, UK:

Edward Elgar.

13) El-Gamal, M. A. (2006). Islamic Finance, Law, Economic and Practice. Cambridge:

Cambridge University Press.

BC5B11 -Fundamentals of Islamic commercial law



Module I

Fundamentals of Islamic finance – Islamic Sharia- sources and Objectives of Islamic shariah-

wealth and ownership in Islamic perspective.

15 Hours

Module II

Goals of economic activities in Islamic perspective - Business ethics in Islamic economics and

finance- fair dealing-justice-mutual co operation, fair pricing- The Main Prohibitions and

promotions.

20 hours

Module III

Islamic law of contract-evolution of Islamic commercial law- general framework of

contract-elements of contracts-offer and acceptance - elements of subject matter-mutual consent-

Prohibition of Two Mutually Contingent Contracts- rules for validity of a contract -

Types of Contracts -Valid Contracts -Voidable (Fasid) Contracts and Void (Batil) Contracts-

commutative and non commutative contracts

20 hours

Module IV

Trading in Islamic commercial law-legality of trading-requirements of a valid sale contract -

conditional sales and two bargain in one sales- ethics of sale contract

15 hours

Module V

Loan and debt in Islamic commercial law-rules of debt contract- the substance of loans-time value

of money in loans and debts- termination of a loan contract- Bai‘ al Dayn

10 hours

Ref:

1) Hubbard, R. G. (2005). Money, the Financial System and the Economy (5th ed.). Boston:

Pearson Addison-Wesley.

2) Ibn ’Ashur, M. A.-T. (2001-1421AH). Maqasid al-Shariah al-Islamiyyah. Jordan: Dar-

al-Nafa_is.

3) Ibn Hajar, al-A. (1928). Bulugh al-Maram min Adillah al-Ahkam. Matba’ah al-Salafiyyah.

4) Ibn Qayyim, a.-J. (n.d.). I‘l_m al-Muwaqq_‘in Vol. 3. Cairo: Id_rah al-Tib_’ah

al-Mun_riyyah.

5) Iqbal, Z. (June 1997). Islamic Financial Systems. Finance & Development, Vol. 34, 42-45.

6) Iqbal, Z. & Mirakhor, A. (2007). An Introduction to Islamic Finance: Theory and Practice.

Singapore: John Wiley & Sons (Asia).

7) Kahf, M. (Ed.) (1998). Lessons in Islamic Economics Vol. 1. Jeddah: Islamic Research and

Training Institute (IRTI). Seminar Proceedings No. 41.

8) Kamali, M. H. (1998). Al-Maqasid al-Shari’ah: The Objectives of Islamic Law. The Muslim

Lawyer, Vol.3(1), 1-7.

9) Kamali, M. H. (2008). Shari’ah Law: An Introduction. Oxford: Oneworld Publications.

10) Khan, M. F. (2002). Fiqh Foundations of the Theory of Islamic Economics: A Survey of

Selected Contemporary Writings on Economics Relevant Subjects of Fiqh. In H. Ahmed

(Ed.), Theoretical Foundations of Islamic Economics, 61-85. Jeddah: Islamic Research and

Training Institute (IRTI). Book of Readings No. 3.

BC6B14 - Foundations of Islamic accounting theory and practice



Module I

Fundamentals of Islamic accounting-accounting objectives and Islamic world view-Islamic

perspective of accounting- elements of financial statements- ethics in accounting

15 hours

Module II

Financial statements of Islamic banks-principles of accounting- Islamic accounting standard-

important accounting standards issued by AAOIFI-general disclosure in the financial statements-

statements of financial position

20 hours

Module III

Financial reporting in Islamic financial institutions- Accounting for Islamic Deposit and Investment

Account- Accounting for Mudarabah Financing and Accounting for Musharakah Financing

20 hours

Module IV

Accounting for Murabahah Financing and Accounting for Ijarah Financing-ijara wa iqthinah

15 hours

Module V

Accounting for securities financing-accounting measurement issues- accounting disclosure

requirements-

10 hours

Ref:

1) Dr. Abdul Rahim Abdul Rahman, The introduction to Islamic accounting theory and

practice; IIUM Malaysia

2) AAOIFI, Statement of Financial Accounting (SFA) 1 (Accounting Objectives), Manama:

Bahrain.

3) Abdul Rahman A. R.and Goddard A.R, (1998). “An Interpretive Inquiry of Accounting

Practices in Religious Organisations in Malaysia - Emergent Theoretical Perspectives”, Financial Accountability and Management,Vol. 14 (3): pp 183 - 202.

4) Abu-Sulayman, A, (1994). Crisis in the Muslim Mind, International Institute of Islamic

Thought: Herndon, USA. 5) Al-Attas, S.N, (1995). Prolegomena to the Metaphysics of Islam, International Institute

of Islamic Thought and Civilization: Kuala Lumpur.

6) Al-Faruqi, I.R, (1992). Al-Tawhid: It’s Implications for Thought and Life, International

Institute of Islamic Thought: Herndon, USA.

7) Al-Safi, A.K., (1992). Accountability: Islam versus the Manmade Doctrines, DarulFikr,

Kuala Lumpur.

8) Napier, C (2007). “Other Cultures, Other Accountings? Islamic Accounting from Past

to Present”, Proceeding 5th. Accounting History International Conference, Banff: Canada.

9) Hamid, S., R. Craig, and F. Clarke (1993). “Religion: A Confounding Cultural Element in the International Harmonization of Accounting.” Journal of Accounting Finance and

Business Studies (ABACUS) 29.

10) Hassan, M.K. (1995) “Worldview Orientation and Ethics: A Muslim Perspective.” Proceedings of the International Conference on Development, Ethics and Environment,

Kuala Lumpur.

BC6B15 - Islamic investment funds and insurance



Module I

Capital markets Islamic perspective- -Islamic appraisal of capital market- Sharia compliance

shares- norms of shariah screening- business structure of an enterprise- indebtedness- business

practices- earnings and cash receivables- qualitative and quantitative screening- Islamic Rating

Systems -– Factors affecting innovation in Islamic Banking and Capital Market

15 hours

Module II

Islamic bonds (Sukuk)-Essential differences between conventional bonds and sukuk-Types of

sukuk- scope of sukuk in modern times- AAOIFI Sukuk standards - Alternative Sukuk structure -

Sukuk and the private sector - Rating Sukuk - Risks associated with Sukuk

15 hours

Module III

Investment products in Islamic finance- Islamic Equity Market Funds - Real Estate

Investment Trusts - Islamic Hedge Funds- real estate funds-venture capital finance- role and

structure

20 hours

Module IV

Islamic insurance (Takaful)-need for insurance- principles of insurance- Structure and models of

insurance-Types of insurance-different models-difference between conventional insurance and

Islamic insurance- different products in Islamic insurance-Reinsurance and re-takaful

15 hours

Module V

Islamic Capital market and Insurance in modern era - Islamic Market Indices - Dow Jones Islamic

Market index (DJIM) - FTSE Global Islamic Index Series- Islamic insurance companies

15 hours

Ref:

1) Adam, Nathif J., and Abdulkader Thomas. Islamic Bonds: Your Guide to Issuing,

Structuring and Investing in Sukuk. Euromoney Books, 2004.

2) Muhammed Ayyub; Understanding Islamic finance; John Wiley & Sons Ltd, The Atrium,

Southern Gate, Chichester, West Sussex PO19 8SQ, England, 2007

3) Aly Khurshid; Islamic insurance, a modern approach to Islamic banking; Rout edge

Curzon publishers, London 2004.

4) Venture capital, Islamic finance and SMEs, Mansoor Durani and Graham Boocock,

Antony Rowe Ltd, Chippenham and Eastbourne. Great Britain, 2006

5) Obaidullah, Mohammed Introduction to Islamic microfinance, IRTI, IDB, Jeddah 2008

Madura, J. (2008). Financial Markets and Institutions (8th ed.). Mason, Ohio:

South-Western.

6) Melicher, R. W. & Norton, E. A. (2008). Introduction to Finance: Markets, Investments,

and Financial Management. (13th ed.). New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons.

7) Mishkin, F. S. & Eakins, S. G. (2009). Financial Markets and Institutions (6th ed.). New

York: Pearson and Prentice Hall.

8) Siddiqi, M. N. (2004). Riba, Bank Interest and the Rationale of Its Prohibition. Jeddah:

Islamic Economics Research Center. Visiting Scholars_ Research Series No. 2.

9) Viney, C. (2007). McGrath's Financial Institutions, Instruments and Markets (5th ed.).

North Ryde, Australia: McGraw-Hill Irwin.

10) Visser, H. (2009). Islamic Finance: Principles and Practice. Cheltenham, UK: Edward

Elgar Publishing Limited.

11) Vogel, F. E. & Hayes, S. L. (1998). Islamic Law & Finance: Religion, Risk & Return. The

Hague: Kluwer Law International.Understanding Islamic finance Muhammed

SYLLABI FOR COMPLIMENTARY COURSES

BC1C01 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS



Objectives:

> To enable the students to understand micro and macroeconomic concepts relevant

for business decisions.

> To help the students to understand the Application of economic principles in

business management.

Module I

Managerial Economics:- – Definition and characteristics – Nature and Scope - Economics Vs

Managerial Economics - Decision making and forward planning – Relationship of managerial

economics with other disciplines - Basic economic tools in management economics – The role of

managerial economist.

10 Hours

Module II

Basic concepts of Demand and cost:- Demand function, Demand curve, Elasticity of Demand,

Demand forecasting – Production, production function, law of variable proportions, returns to

scale, isoquants, isocost, optimum combination of inputs, economies and diseconomies of scale –

costs, types of costs, cost minimization, profit maximization

10 Hours

Module III

Theory of consumer behavior: - Cardinal analysis - Law of diminishing marginal utility –

consumer surplus; Ordinal approach – indifference curve analysis – consumer equilibrium –

income consumption curve and price consumption curve – Hicksian decomposition of price effect

in to substitution effect and income effect – Demand curve for normal, inferior and giften goods –

concept of elasticity of demand – measurement of various elasticities – Elasticity of supply.

20 Hours

Module IV

Market structure:-

a. Perfect competition: – profit maximization and equilibrium of firm and industry – short run

and long term supply curves – price and output determination.

b. Monopoly: – Price determination under monopoly – equilibrium of firm – comparison

between perfect competition and monopoly – price discrimination.

c. Monopolistic competition: price and output determination – product differentiation –

comparison with perfect competition – excess capacity under monopolistic competition.

d. Oligopoly: indeterminate pricing and output – classical models of oligopoly – price leadership

– collusive oligopoly – kinked demand curve.

20 Hours

Module V

Macro economics: Indian economy – Basic characteristics of Indian economy – Issues in

Indian economy: Problems of growth, unemployment, poverty, inequality in income

distribution, inflation – Concept of parallel economy- Indian economy under WTO regime.

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. R.L. Varshney and K.L. Maheswari, Managerial Economics

2. Ahuja. HL; Business Economics, S. Chand & co.

3. D.N. Dwivedi, Managerial Economics

4. Dr. S. Sankaran, Managerial Economics

5. DM Mithani: Business Economics

6. Seth M L Text Book of Economic Theory

7. K K Dewett: Economic Theory

8. Dutt & Sundaram: Indian Economy

9. Petersen &. "Lewis: Managerial Economics

10. Mote V L peul. S & Gupta G S: Managerial Economics

11. H. Craig Petersen & W. Cris lewis: Managerial Economics

12. Dr. P.N. Reddy and H.R, Appanaiah : Essentials of Business Economics

13. Barry Keating and J. Holton Wilson: Managerial Economics

BC2C02 MARKETING MANAGEMENT



Objectives:

>To provide basic knowledge about the concepts, principles, tools and techniques of marketing.

>To impart necessary knowledge which help the student to choose a career in the field of

marketing.

>To expose the students to the latest trends in marketing.

Module I

Marketing Management: The value of marketing–Core marketing concepts–The new marketing

realities–Philosophy of marketing - Creating long term loyalty relationships – Marketing

management tasks –Analyzing consumer markets-Factors influencing consumer behaviour-Buying

decision process - market segmentation; bases for segmenting consumer markets – market targeting

- marketing of services - rural marketing in India; potential, challenges and strategies.

20 Hours

Module II

Creating and Capturing Value: The fundamentals of product management; product levels; customer

value hierarchy– Classification of product–Managing brands and brand equity-Product and

Services differentiation-Product and brand relationships - Product Life Cycle Marketing Strategies

- New product development-Packaging, labeling, Warranties and Guarantees.

Pricing to capture value; setting the price; methods of pricing; pricing strategies; pricing for rural

markets.

20 Hours

Module III

Delivering Value: Distribution -marketing channels and value networks-role of marketing

channels-channel design and management decision-channel integration and system-conflict,

cooperation and competition-Managing retailing, wholesaling and logistics-Direct and online

marketing 10 Hours

Module IV

Communicating Value: Integrated Marketing Communications; role of marketing communication;

developing effective communication; marketing communication mix - managing advertising;

deciding on media and measuring effectiveness ; communicating to rural audience- Sales

Promotion-Personal selling; principles of personal selling-Events and experiences-Public

relation-Interactive marketing-word of mouth marketing.

15 Hours

Module V

E-commerce and E-marketing: Concept and nature; Reason for growth of e-marketing -

E-commerce marketing practices; types of E-commerce; E-commerce business models;

E-commerce marketing strategies - M-commerce marketing practices- Electronic Payment

System-Security issues in E commerce.

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Philip Kotler, Kevin Lane Keller,“Marketing Management” (15e), Pearson India Education

Services Pvt Ltd

2. V S Ramaswamy& S Namakumari,“Marketing Management” (Latest Edition)- McGraw

Hill Education ( India) Private Limited, New Delhi

3. S.A. Sherlekar, “Marketing Management-Concepts and Cases”, Himalaya Publishing

House Pvt Ltd

4. William J Stanton,“Fundamentals of Marketing”, McGraw Hill Publishing Co, New York

5. Lamb. Hair, McDaniel, “Marketing”, Cengage Learning Inc USA.

6. Rayport, Jeffrey F and Jaworksi. Bernard J, “Introduction to E-Commerce”, Tata Mc Graw

Hill, New Delhi

BC3C03HumanResources Management



Objectives:

> To familiarize the students with the different aspects of managing human resources in a

organization.

> To equip the students with basic knowledge and skills required for the acquisition,

development and retention of human resources.

Module I

Introduction to Human Resource Management—Importance--scope and objectives of HRM.

Evolution of the concept of HRM- Approaches to HRM- Personal management Vs Human

Resource Management-HRM and competitive advantage- Traditional Vs Strategic human resource

management. 15 Hours

Module II

Human resource planning, Recruitment and selection—Job analysis---process of job analysis-job

discretion- job specification-- methods of job analysis-- Conventional Vs strategic planning—job

evaluation—Recruitment--source of recruitment-methods. 20 Hours

Module III

Placement, Induction and Internal mobility of human resource. Training of employees—need for

training-objectives- approaches --methods-training environment- areas of training- Training

evaluation. 15 Hours

Module IV

Performance appraisal and career planning. Need and importance- objectives process- methods and

problems of performance appraisal- . Concept of career planning –features- methods –uses career

development. 15 Hours

Module V

Compensation management and grievance redressal. Compensation planning objectives- Wage

systems- factors influencing wage system-. Grievance redressal procedure- discipline- approaches-

punishment-essentials of a good discipline system. Labour participation in management.

15 Hours

References:

1. Human Resource Management- Text and Cases-- VSP Rao

2. Human Resource Management – Pravin Durai

2. Human Resource Management—Snell, Bohlander

3. Personal Management and Human Resources—VenkataRatnam .Srivasthava.

4. A Hand Book of Personnel Management Practice—Dale Yolder

BC4C04 QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR BUSINESS



Objectives:

> To familiarize student with the use quantitative techniques in managerial decision

making.

Module I

Quantitative Techniques - Introduction - Meaning and definition - Classification of Q.T QT and

other disciplines -Application of QT in business -Limitations. 05 Hours

Module II

Correlation and Regression Analysis : Meaning and definition of Correlation - Karl Pearson's

co-efficient of correlation - Rank correlation - Regression - Types -Determination of simple linear

regression - Coefficient of determination. 20 Hours

Module III

Set Theory - Probability: Concept of probability - Meaning and definition - Approaches to

probability - Theorems of probability - Addition Theorem - Multiplication Theorem -Conditional

probability- Inverse probability- Baye'sTheorem. 15 Hours

Module IV

Theoretical Distribution: Binomial distribution - Basic assumptions and characteristics -Fitting of

binomial distribution - Poisson distribution - characteristics - Fitting of Poisson distribution -

Normal distribution - Features and properties - Standard normal curve. 15 Hours

Module V

Statistical Inference : Testing of hypothesis - Procedure - Error in testing - Two tail tests and one tail

tests - Non parametric tests (Chi-square test only) - Parametric tests - Z test -Test of significance of

large samples-Test for two sample means-Small sample mean tests - Students t test - Analysis of

Variance - F test - One way ANOVA . 20 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Richard I. Levin and David S. Rubin, Statistics for Management, Prentice Hall of

India, latest edition.

2. S.P.Gupta, Statistical Methods, Sultan Chand, latest edition

3. Sanchetti and Kapoor, Statistics, Sultan Chand.

4. G.C.Beri, "Statistics For Managemet",Tata Me Graw Hill, 2003.

5. J.K. Sharma, "Business Statstics:, Pearson, 2004

6. Anderson Sweeney Williams, "Statistics for Business and Economics", Thomson.

7. R.P.Hooda, "Statistics for Business", Me Millan.

8. Levine Krebiel & Bevenson, "Business Statistics", Pearson edition, Delhi.

SYLLABI FOR OPEN COURSES (For

Students from Other Departments)

BC5D01 E-COMMERCE

Lecture Hours per week: 2 Credits : 2


Objectives:

> To enable the students to understand basics of E- Commerce .

> To Gain a practical orientation to E-Commerce and E- Business management.

Module I

Introduction to E-Commerce: Meaning and concept - E-Commerce v/s Traditional Commerce -

E-Business &. E-Commerce - History of E- Commerce - EDI - Importance, features & benefits of

E- Commerce - Impacts, challenges & limitations of E-Commerce -Supply chain management &

E-Commerce - E- Commerce infrastructure - Business Models of E - Commerce: Business to

business - Business to customers -customers to customers - Business to government - Business to

employee - E - Commerce strategy - Influencing factors of successful E- Commerce.

15 Hours

Module II

Marketing Strategies & E - Commerce: Website - Components of website - Concept & designing

website for E- Commerce - Corporate website - Portal - Search Engine - Internet advertising -

Emergence of the internet as a competitive advertising media - Models of internet advertising -

Weakness in internet advertising.

15 Hours

Module III

Electronic Payment System: Introduction - Online payment systems - prepaid and postpaid

payment systems - E-cash - E- cheque - Smart card - Credit card - Debit card -Electronic purse -

Security issues on electronic payment system - Solutions to security issues - Biometrics - Types of

biometrics.

10 Hours

Reference Books:

5. Turban, Efraim, David King et. el.: Electronic Commerce: A Managerial Perspective,

Pearson Education Asia, Delhi.

6. Kalakota, Ravi: Frontiers of Electronic Commerce, Addison - Wesley, Delhi.

7. Rayport, Jeffrey F and Jaworksi. Bernard J: Introduction to E-Commerce, Tata Me

Graw Hill, New Delhi.

8. Smantha Shurety,: E-Business with Net Commerce, Addison - Wesley, Singapore.

9. Rich, Jason R: Stalling an E-Commerce Business, IDG Books, Delhi.

10. Laudon, Kenneth C and Carol Guercio Traver : E-Commerce business. Technology.

Society, Pearson Education, Delhi.

11. Stamper David A. and Thomas L.Case: Business Data Communications, Pearson

12. Education, New Delhi.

13. Willam Stallings: Business Data Communications. Pearson Education, New Delhi.

OPEN COURSE

BC5D02 -BASICS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND MANAGEMENT

Lecture Hours per week 2 Credits: 2


Objective:

> To enable the students to have an understanding of the basics of business, entrepreneurship

and organizational management.

Module I

Foundation of Business : Concept of business – Industry, Trade and Commerce – Classification of

Industry, Types of trade and Aids to trade – Forms of Business enterprises- Sole trader –

Partnership - Joint-stock Companies – Cooperative organisations – One man company. Factors to

be considered while setting up of a business - Social Responsibility of business.

15 Hours

Module II

Entrepreneurship: Concept of entrepreneur - Characteristics of entrepreneur - Functions of an

entrepreneur - Difference between entrepreneur and manager – Micro, Small and Medium

Enterprises, Definition, Registration procedure of Sole proprietorship and partnership units.

10 Hours

Module III

Management Concepts: Meaning - Nature and characteristics of management -

Management as science, art and profession - Levels of management –Henry Fayol’s Principles of

management. Functions of Management : Planning - Steps in planning – Organising - Types of

organisation – Line, Staff and Functional- Centralisation Vs decentralisation - Authority Vs

responsibility - Staffing – Elements of Staffing - Directing - Leadership - Leadership styles -

Controlling - Steps in controlling .

15 Hours

References:

1. Poornima M Charantimath, Entrepreneurship Development and Small Business Enterprise,

Pearson Education

2. Manjeeth Kalra, Entrepreneurship Development and Planning, AITBS Publishers

3. S.Anil Kumar, Entrepreneurship Development , New Age Publishers

4. E Gordon & K Natarajan, Entrepreneurship Development, Himalaya Publishing House

5. Basu, Business Organisation and Management, Tata McGraw Hill.

6. Gupta. C.B, Modern Business Organisations, Mayur Paper Backs.

7. Mishra, N, Modern Business Organisation, Sahitya Bhawan

8. Singh, B.P., T.N. Chhabra , Business Organisation and Management, Dhanpat Rai & Co.

9. Prasad. L.M., Principles and Practice of Management., Sultan Chand & Sons.

10. Rao. V.S.P, Narayana.P.S., Principles and Practice of Management, Sultan Chand & Sons

11. Koontz, H and Wechrick, H , Management, McGraw Hill Inc.

12. Khanka.S.S. Entrepreneurship Development , Sultan Chand

BC5D03 BASIC ACCOUNTING



Objectives:

> To enable the students to acquire knowledge of Accounting Principles and Practice

Module I

Basic Accounting Concepts: Kinds of accounts - Financial Accounting Vs Management

Accounting - Double Entry book keeping - Rules of debit and credit - Preparation of Journal and

Ledger accounts - Problems.

15 Hours

Module II

Subsidiary Books : Cash Book - Types of Cash Book - problems - Purchase Book -Sales

Book - Sales Return Book - Purchases Return Book - Journal Proper - Trial Balance

15 Hours

Module III

Final Accounts of sole trading concerns: Trading and Profit & Loss Account - Balance Sheet -

Problems with simple adjustments.

10 Hours


Reference Books:

1. Grewal T.S., Double Entry Book Keeping

2. Jain and Narang , Advanced Accountancy.

3. Shukla and Grewal, Advanced Accountancy.

4. Gupta and Radhaswamy, Advanced Accountancy.

5. Gupta . R.L, Advanced Accountancy.

COMMON COURSES

BC3A11 BASIC NUMERICAL SKILLS



Objectives:

> To enable the students to acquire knowledge of Mathematics and Statistics.

> At the end of this course, the students should have understood set operations, matrix and

Mathematics of finance, Statistical tools and their applications.

Module I

Sets and Set Operation - Venn Diagrams - Elements of Co-ordinate system - Matrices

-Fundamental ideas about matrices and their operational rules - Matrix multiplication -

Inversion of square matrices of not more than 3rd order - Solving system of simultaneous

linear equations.

15 Hours

Module II

Theory of Equations : Meaning - types of equations - Simple linear and Simultaneous equations

(only two variables) eliminations and substitution method only - Quadratic equation factorization

and formula method (ax2 + bx + c = 0 form only) - Problems on business applications.

10 Hours

Module III

Progressions : Arithmetic Progressions - Finding the 'n'th term of an AP and also sum to 'n' terms

of an AP - Insertion of Arithmetic means in given terms of AP and representation of AP -

Geometric Progression : Finding 'n'th term of GP - Insertion of GMs in given GP and also

representation of GP - Mathematics of Finance - Simple and compound interest (Simple problems

only).

15 Hours

Module IV

Meaning and Definition of Statistics - Scope and limitations - Statistical enquiries -Scope of

the problem - Methods to be employed - Types of enquiries - Presentation of data by

Diagrammatic and Graphical Method - Formation of Frequency Distribution.

15 Hours

Module V

Measures of Central Tendency - Arithmetic Mean - Median - Mode - Geometric and Harmonic

Mean - Measures of variation and standard, mean and quartile deviations -Skewness and Kurtosis

- Lorenz curve. Analysis of Time Series: Methods of measuring - Trend and Seasonal

variations - Index number - Unweighted indices -Consumer price and cost of living indices.

20 Hours

(Theory and problems may be in the ratio of 20% and 80% respectively. An over view of the topics

is expected and only simple problems shall be given)

Reference Books:

1. Sundaresan and Jayaseelan - An Introduction to Business Mathematics and Statistical Methods.

2. Dr. A K Arte & R V Prabhakar - A Text Book of Business Mathematics.

3. Sanchethi and Kapoor- Business Mathematics.

4. Gupta S .P- Statistical Methods

5. Navaneethan P- Business Mathematics

6. R.S.N. Pillai, Mrs. Bhagavathi - Statistics

7. P.R. Vittal - Business Mathematics and Statistics.

BC3A12 GENERAL INFORMATICS



> To update and expand basic Informatics skills of the students.

> To equip the students to effectively utilize the digital knowledge resources for their study.

Module I

Computers and Operating Systems : Features of New Generation Personal Computers and

Peripherals - Computer networks - Types of networks - Components of networks -Topology -

Internet - Uses of internet - Introduction to Software - License - Open source - Overview of

operating systems and major application software.

10 Hours

Module II

Basics of IT : Information - Pre-requisites and needs - IT and its components - IT and

Internet - IT Applications - E-Governance - IT for National Integration - IT Applications

in Health Care, Business, Commerce and Resource Management -Emerging Trends in IT:

Electronic Data Inter change - Mobile Computing - SMS -MMS - Wireless Applications - Blue

Tooth - Global Positional System - Infra Red Communication - Smart Card - DNA Computing -

Cloud computing

15 Hours

Module III

Knowledge Skills for Higher Education : Data, Information and Knowledge - Knowledge

Management - Internet as a knowledge repository - Academic search techniques - Case study of

academic websites - Basic concepts of IPR - Copy rights and Patents - Introduction to use of

IT in teaching and learning - Case study of educational software -Academic Service – INFLIBNET

- NICENET - BRNET.

15Hours

Module IV

Social Informatics : IT and society - Issues and concerns - Digital Divide - Free Software

Movement - IT and industry - New opportunities and threats - Cyber ethics - Cyber crimes -

Security - Privacy issues - Cyber Laws - Cyber addictions - Information overload - Health

issues - Guidelines for proper usage of computers and internet - e-waste and Green Csmputing

- Unicode - IT and regional languages.

15 Hours

Module V

Programmes for Office Management : Introduction to Linux - Linux systems - Linux distributions -

Operating systems and Linux - History of Linux and UNIX - Open source software - Linux

software - Software Repositories - Third party Linux Repositories -

Linux Office and Data base software - Internet servers - Development resources -Setting the

Desktop - The GNOME Desktop environment - Using the Metacity Window Manager - Using

GNOME Panels - Change in the GNOME preferences - Exiting GNOME - Working with words

and images - Desktop Publishing in Linux - Using Open Office.org office suit.

20 Hours

References Books:

1. Peter Norton, Introduction to Computers, Tata McGraw Hill Private Limited,

New Delhi, 2009.

2. Alan Evans, ITL ESL, Leslie Lamport, Dolores Etter, Darren George,

Kenneth C Laoudon, Gary Rogers, Rainer Handel, INFORMATICS -Technology

in Action, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2009.

3. V.Rajaraman, Introduction To Information Technology, PHI Learning Private Limited,

New Delhi, 2009.

4. Alex Leon, The Complete Reference Linux Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Private

Limited, New Delhi, 2009.

6. Christopher Mathews Leon, Fundamentals of Information technology, Leon Vikas,

Chennai, 2009.

5. Richard Peterson Negus, Linux Bible, Wiley India Private Limited, 2009.

7. Mike McGrath, Linux In Easy Steps , Dream TechPress, New Delhi, 2009

8. Daniel Minoli &Emma Minoli, Web Commerce Technology Hand Book, Tata McGraw

Hill, New Delhi, 2009

w w w. wikipedia. com

www.google.scholarr.com

www.bing.com

www.google.com

www.afk.com

www.yahoosearch.com

www.comp.os.lmux. admin

www.comp.os.lmux. answers

BC4A13 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT



Objectives:

> To familiarize the students with the concept of entrepreneurship.

> To identify and develop the entrepreneurial talents of the students.

> To generate innovative business ideas in the emerging industrial scenario.

Module I

Entrepreneur and Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship: Entrepreneurial competencies -Factors

affecting entrepreneurial growth - Role of entrepreneur in economic development -

Challenges of women entrepreneurs.

20 Hours

Module II

Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises: Legal Framework - Licenses - Role of promotional institutions

with special reference to KINFRA , KITCO , MSME & DICs - Concessions -Incentives and subsidies.

10 Hours

Module III

Project Management: Feasibility and Viability Analysis-Technical - Financial - Network

-Appraisal and evaluation - Project Report preparation.

30 Hours

Module IV

Identification of Business Opportunities in the Context of Kerala: Rate of ED Clubs -Industrial

Policies - Skill development for entrepreneurs - Business Incubation : Meaning - Setting up of

Business Incubation Centres.

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. S.S. Kanka , Entrepreneurial Development, Sultan Chand.

2. Prasanna Chandra , Project Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and

Review, Tata McGraw Hill.

3. Vasantha Desai , Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development, Himalaya.

4. C.B.Gupta & N.P. Sreenivasan , Entrepreneurial Development, Sultan Chand.

5. Nirmal K Gupta, Small Industry-Challenges and Perspectives, Anmol Publications.

6. Vasantha Desai, Small scale Industries and Entrepreneurship, Himalaya.

BC4A14 BANKING AND INSURANCE



Objectives:

> To enable the students to acquire knowledge about basics of Banking and Insurance.

> To familiarize the students with the modern trends in banking.

Module I

Introduction to Banking : Meaning and definition - Origin and development of banking -Customer

of a bank - Structure of banking in India - Banks and economic development -Functions of

commercial banks (conventional and innovative functions) - Central bank -RBI - Functions

-Emerging trends in banking.

15 Hours

Module II

Negotiable Instruments : Definition - Characteristics - Types - Parties to negotiable instruments -

Cheques - Types of cheques - Crossing of cheques - Drafts - Cheque vs. Draft - Endorsement -

Significance - Regularity of endorsement - Liability of endorser -Electronic payments.

15 Hours

Module III

E-Banking - Centralised Online Real time Electronic Banking (CORE) - Electronic Clearing

Service (ECS) - Electronic Fund Transfer (EFT) - Real Time Gross Settlement (RTGS) - National

Electronic Fund Transfer (NEFT) - Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial

Telecommunication (SWIFT) - E-cheque - Any Time Money - ATM s -Credit card - Debit

card - Smart card - Internet banking - Mobile banking - Tele-banking.

15 Hours

Module IV

Introduction to Insurance : Concept - Need of insurance - Insurance as a social security tool -

Insurance and economic development - Principles of insurance - various kinds of insurance - Life

and General insurance (Fire, Marine, Medical, Personal Accident ,

Property and Motor Vehicles Insurance) - Features - Life Insurance Vs General Insurance.

15 Hours

Module V

Life Insurance - Law relating to life Insurance - General Principles of Life Insurance Contract;

Proposal and Policy - Assignment and Nomination - Title and claims - General Insurance - Law

relating to General Insurance - IRDA - Powers and functions -Insurance business in India

15 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Sheldon H.P : Practice and Law of Banking.

2. Bedi. H.L : Theory and Practice of Banking.

3. Maheshwari. S.N. : Banking Law and Practice.

4. Shekar. K.C : Banking Theory Law and Practice.

5. Pannandikar & Mithami': Banking in India.

6. Radhaswamy & Vasudevan: Text Book of Banking.

7. Indian Institute of Bankers (Pub) Commercial Banking Vol-I/Vol-II (part I& II)Vol- III.

8. Varshaney: Banking Law and Practice.

9. Dr. P. Periasamy: Principles and Practice of Insurance Himalaya Publishing House, Delhi.

10. Inderjit Singh, Rakesh Katyal & Sanjay Arora: Insurance Principles and Practices,Kalyani

Publishers, Chennai.

11. M.N. Mishra: Insurance Principles and Practice, S. Chand & Company Ltd, Delhi.

12. G. Krishnaswamy : Principles & Practice of Life Insurance

13. Kothari & Bahl: Principles and Pratices of Insurance

14. B.S. Khubchandani, "Practice and Law of Banking",Mac Millan India Ltd ,2000.

15. K.C. Nanda," Credit Banking", Response Book, Sage Publication, 1999

The Principals of affiliated Colleges offering B.Com programmeCopy to: PS to VC/PA to PVC/PA to Registrar/PA to CE/EX Sn/D.R B.Com branch/SF/DF/FC

The Courses of study leading to the award of BBA shall comprise the following:

Semester I

Course Title Contact hours Credits

Common BBIA01 Communication Skills in English 5 4

Common BBIA02 Critical reasoning, writing and

presentation 5 3

Common BBIA06 History and philosophy of science 5 4

Core BBIB01 Management Concepts and

Business Ethics

5 5

Compl. BBIC01 Managerial Economics 5 4

Total 25 20

Semester II


Common BBIIA04 Readings on Indian constitution, Secularism and Sustainable Environment

5 4

Common BBIIA05 Literature and contemporary

issues

5 3

Common BBIIA10 Culture and Civilisation 5 4

Core BBIIB02 Financial Accounting 5 5

Compl. BBIIC02 IT for Business & Management 5 4

Total 25 20

Semester III


Common BBIIIA11 Basics of Numerical skills 5 4

Common BBIIIA12 General Informatics 5 4

Core BBIIIB03 Business regulatory frame work 5 4

Core BBIIIB04 Human Resource Management 5 4

Compl. BBIIIC03 Quantitative Techniques for

Business

5 4

Total 25 20

Semester IV


Common BBIVA13 Banking and Insurance 5 4

Common BBIVA14 Entrepreneurship Development 5 4

Core BBIVB05 Marketing Management 5 4

Core BBIVB06 Financial Management 5 4

Compl. BBIVC04 Management Science 5 4

Total 25 20

Semester V


Core BBVB07 Accounting for management 5 4

Core BBVB08 Business Research methods 5 4

Core BBVB09 Emerging Trends in Management 3 4

Core BBVB10 Service Management

(Specialisation I)

5 4

Core BBVB11 E-Commerce (Specialisation II) 5 4

Open. BBVD01 Open Course Hospitality

Management

2 2

Total 25 22

Semester VI


Core BBVIB12 Operations management 5 4

Core BBVIB13 Organizational Behavior 5 4

Core BB VI B14 Consumer behavior

(Specialisation III)

5 4

Core BBVIB15 Retail Management

(Specialisation IV)

5 4

Core Project

BB VI B16 Three weeks project and viva voce

5 4

Total 25 20

Semester I

Core Course

BBIB01 MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS AND BUSINESS ETHICS

Time: 5 Hours per week Credits: 5

Course objectives:

➢ To understand the process of business management and its functions, and

➢ To familiarize the students with current management practices.

➢ To understand the importance of ethics in business, and

➢ To acquire knowledge and capability to develop ethical practices for effective management.

Module I

Nature and scope of Management; evolution of management- Schools of management

thought; F.W.Taylor and Henry Fayol; principles of management; management as a

science and an art; management process.

Module II

Functions of management- planning: types of plan; planning process; organizing: span of

control , line and staff functions ; centralization and decentralization; delegation;

staffing: manpower planning, recruitment, selection and placemen;; directing: principles

of direction; coordinating, and controlling.

Module III

Manager vs leader; leadership and motivation; leadership styles; theories of motivation.

MBO;Management of performance; Understanding and managing group processes;

characteristics of work group, work group behaviour and productivity; team creation and

management;

Module 1V

Ethics, culture and values: Importance of culture in organisations; Indian ethos and value

systems; Model of management in the Indian socio political environment; Work ethos;

Indian heritage in production and consumption.

Module V

Business ethics: Relevance of values in Management; Holistic approach for managers in

decision-making; Ethical Management: Role of organisational culture in ethics; structure

of ethics management; Ethics Committee.

Books:

1. Boatright, John R: Ethics and the Conduct of Business, Pearson Education, New

Delhi 2005.

2. Sathish Modh: Ethical Management: Macmillan.

3 Koontz, H and Wechrick, H: Management, McGraw Hill Inc, New York,

1995.

4 Drucker, Peter, F: Management: Tasks, Responsibilities and Practices, Allied

Publishers, New Delhi 2004. 5. Principles of management By L.N Prasad.

6. Management Process by R.S Davar

Complementary Course

BBIC01 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS


Objectives:

➢ To enable the students to understand the micro and macroeconomic concepts relevant

for business decisions

➢ To help the students to understand the application of economic principles in business

management

Module I

Introduction - Definition of Managerial economics - objectives - characteristics - uses -

decision making and forward planning - basic economic tools in management economics.

8 Hours

Module II The concept of demand and elasticity of demand - Demand curve: Individual

demand curve, Market demand curve, Movement along Vs shifts in the Demand curve,

Elasticity of Demand: Price, Income and cross - Demand estimation and demand forecasting -

concept of revenue: Average Revenue and Total Revenue - Marginal Revenue and

Incremental Revenue.

12 Hours

Module III Production: Fixed and Variable inputs, Production function, Total, Average and

Marginal Product, Law of variable proportions, Linear homogeneous production function -

production isoquants, marginal rate of technical substitution - optimal combination of

resources - return to scale - cost of production - social and private cost of production -

difference between economic and accounting cost - long run and short run cost of production

- Economics and diseconomies of scale.

20 Hours

Module IV Price and output decisions under different market structures: Price and output

decisions under perfect competition, monopoly and monopolistic competition - pricing under

oligopoly - kinked demand curve - price leadership - pricing, under collusion.

10 Hours

Module V

A. Pricing policies and practices: factors governing prices - objectives of pricing policy -

Role of cost in pricing - demand factor in pricing - consumer psychology and pricing -

pricing methods: cost-plus or full-cost pricing - Target pricing - Marginal cost pricing - going

rate pricing - follow up pricing - Barometric pricing - customary prices - Pricing of new

products: Penetrating pricing - Price skimming.

B. Macro Economics and Business decisions: Phases of Business cycle - Evil effects of

cyclical fluctuations on business firms - Minimising effects of Business cycles. Economic

Forecasting for business: Economic and Business forecasting - uses of economic forecasts -

Methods of economic forecasting - selecting a forecast - evaluating forecasts.

25 Hours

Reference Books:

1. R.L. Varshney and K.L. Maheswari,Managerial Economics

2. D.N. Dwivedi, Managerial Economics

3. Dr. S. Sankaran, Managerial Economics

4. D M Mithani : Business Economics

5. Seth M L Text Book of Economic Theory

6. K K Dewett : Economnic Theory

7. Petersen & Lewis: Managerial Economics

8. Mote V L peul. S & Gupta G S: Managerial Economics

9. H. Craig Petersen & W. Cris lewis: Managerial Economics

10. Dr. P.N. Reddy and H.R. Appanaiah : Essentials of Business Economics

11.Barry Keating and J. Holton Wilson: Managerial Economics

Semester II Core Course

BBIIB02 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

Time: 5 Hours per week Credits:5

Objectives:

➢ To enable the students to acquire knowledge of the financial accounting

principles and practices

➢ To equip the students with skills for recording various kinds of business transactions

➢ To familiarize the students with the techniques of preparing financial statements

Module I

Introduction - Nature of financial Accounting - scope – objects –limitations –

Accounting concepts and conventions- Financial accounting standards –Object of

accounting standards – Accounting Standard Board of India and Indian Accounting

Standards – Accounting process from recording of business transactions to preparation

of Trial Balance (an overview only)

15 Hours

Module II

Conceptual Frame work for preparation and presentation of financial statements -

Capital, Revenue and deferred revenue expenditure – Capital and revenue receipts -

Final accounts of Sole Proprietor and not –for- profit organizations – accounting from

incomplete records – statement of affairs method and conversion method (simple

problems only)

25 Hours

Module III

Accounting for Hire Purchase and Installment System -Meaning – Features of hire

purchase agreement – Distinction between hire purchase and sale –Interest calculation

– Recording of transaction in the books of both parties - Default and repossession -

Installment system – Features – Distinction between hire purchase and installment

10 Hours

Module IV

Departmental Accounts - Meaning – Objects – Advantages - Accounting procedure –

Allocation of expenses and incomes – Interdepartmental transfers – Provision for

unrealized profit - Branch Accounts - Features – Objects- Types of branches –

Dependent branches – Account Systems –Stock and Debtors System –Independent

branch – Features – Preparation of consolidated Profit and Loss Account and Balance

Sheet

25 Hours

Module V

Accounting for hotels and restaurants – Introduction - features - revenue earning and

non revenue earning departments - heads of revenue and heads of expenditure -

Working papers, journals – posting - preparation of trial balance – preparation of final

statements -Trading accounts, Profit and Loss Accounts and Balance sheet

15 Hours


Reference Books:

1. S.N. Maheswari: Financial Accounting

2. Shukla, M.C., T.S. Grewal and S.C.Gupta: Advanced Accounts S.Chand&Co., New Delhi.

3. Naseem Ahmed, Nawab Ali Khan and M.L.Gupta: Fundamentals of Financial

Accounting, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

4. Grewal and Gupta: Advanced Accounting

5. Dr. Goyal V.K.., Financial Accounting, Excel Books, New Delhi.

6. Radhaswamy and R.L. Gupta: Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons,

New Delhi

7. R.K.Malhotra: Financial Management in Hotels and Restaurant Industry, Anmol

Publishers

8. S.Kr. Paul: Advanced Accounting,

9. P.C. Tulasian: Introduction to Accounting, Pearson Education

10. Jain & Narang: Financial Accounting

11. Ashok Sehgal and Deepak Sehgal: Advanced Accounting, Volume I,

Taxmann, New Delhi.

Complementary course

BBIIC02 IT FOR BUSINESS &MANAGEMENT


Course Objectives:

➢ To familiarize the students with the office automation and communication

technologies used in business, and ,

➢ To make them proficient in using computer for routine tasks like data retrieval,

data analysis, accounting and report generation.

Module I

Office automation – objectives – office automation technology – office equipment –

document generation – dictation systems, electronic typewriters – document distribution

– copier, telex, facsimile and personal computers – workstations - printers and storage

technologies- computer networks - LAN, WAN, Virtual Private Networks, ISDN, email,

message systems, computer conferencing, information retrieval systems- Desktop

publishing.

Module II

Microsoft Office - Word processing - characteristics of word processing - MS Word for

word processing – creating, formatting and printing documents in MS Word – inserting

objects from other MS applications - merge printing documents- MS Excel for spread

sheet applications – creating, formatting and printing worksheets- - functions in Excel-

goal seek, scenario management – financial functions – PMT, NPV, IRR, IPMT,

ISPMT- statistical functions- AVERAGE, MEDIAN , AVEDEV, CORREL,

INTERCEPT, MAX, MIN- database in spreadsheet-DMAX, DMIN, DAVERAGE,

DCOUNT- graphics in Excel –creating, formatting and printing graphs- Microsoft

PowerPoint – creating presentations in PowerPoint- applying templates – recording

narration – presenting animation – inserting hyperlink – inserting slide number, date and

time – inserting picture into slide – slide transition – running slide show.

Module III

Database system– characteristics of database system- database management system-

components – relational database system - popular relational database packages and their

features: MS Access, MS SQL Server, and Oracle - Database administrator – functions

of database administrator – database security – access rights and access contrrol - login

and passwords – physical security measures – backing up database for security -

Microsoft Acess – creation of database in MS Access – desinging and running queries in

Access : append query, update query, delete query, crosstab query- report generation in

MS Access – creating report in design view - creating report using Wizard ––formatting

and printing of report.

Module IV

The Internet – Internet protocol suite – domain name system – Internet and its

possibilites for business communication – Internet tools –email, FTP, WWW, bulletin

boards, telnet- portals – search engines – website– intranet and extranet- Electronic Data

Interchange- objectives and advantages of EDI- EDI formats- business applications of

EDI.

Module V

Computerised accounting – Tally – company creation (without inventory)- account

classification – types of vouchers- voucher entry – finanical statements and report

generation- cashflow statement, fundsflow statement, ratio anlysis-.

(Note: About half of the hours may be used for practical sessions to demonstrate the use

of MS Office applications such as Word, Excel, Access and PowerPoint. A few sessions

may also be used for web browsing and email communications).

Books:

1. Management Information Systems, Kenneth C. Laudon and Jane P. Laudon,

Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2002.

2. Using Microsoft Office, Ed Bott and Woody Leonhard, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi 1999.

3. Implementing Tally 6.3, A.K.Nadhani and K.K.Nadhani, BPB Publications, New

Delhi 2001.

4. Fundamental of Database Systems, Elmasri and Navathe, Adddison Wesley,

New Delhi.

Semester III Common Course

BBIIIA11 Basics of Numerical Skills


Course Objectives:

➢ To enable the students to acquire knowledge of mathematics and statistics.

➢ The students should have understood: Set operations, matrix and Mathematics of finance

Statistical tools and their applications

Module I Sets and set operation - Venn Diagrams - Elements of Co-ordinate system. Matrices,

Fundamental ideas about matrices and their operational rules – Matrix multiplication - Inversion of

square matrices of not more than 3rd order- solving system of simultaneous liner equations. (15

Hours)

Module II Theory of equations: meaning, types of equations –simple linear and simultaneous

equations (only two variables) eliminations and substitution method only. Quadratic equation

factorization and formula method (ax² + bx + c = 0 form only) problems on business application.

(10 Hours)

Module III Progressions: Arithmetic progressions finding the ‘n’th term of an AP and also sum to

‘n’ terms of an AP.Insertion of Arithmetic means in given terms of AP and representation of AP.

Geometric progression: finding nth term of GP. Insertion of GMs in given GP and also

representation of GP - Mathematics of Finance - simple and compound interest. (Simple problems

only). (15 Hours)

Module IV Meaning and Definitions of Statistics - Scope and Limitations – Statistical enquiries -

Scope of the problem - Methods to be employed - types of enquiries - Presentation of data by

Diagrammatic and Graphical Method - Formation of Frequency Distribution.

(20 Hours)

Module V Measures of Central tendency - Arithmetic Mean, Median, Mode, Geometric and

Harmonic mean, Measures of variation and standard, mean and quartile deviations - Skew ness and

Kurtosis and Lorenz curve. Analysis of Time Series: Methods of Measuring - Trend and Seasonal

variations - Index number - Unweighted indices - Consumers price and cost of living indices.

(15 Hours)


Reference Books

1. Sundaresan and Jayaseelan - An Introduction to Business Mathematics and Statistical Methods

2. Dr. A K Arte & R V Prabhakar: A textbook of Business Mathematics.

3. Sanchethi and Kapoor, Business Mathematics. 2. Gupta S.P. - Statistical Methods

4. Navaneethan P. - Business Mathematics

5. Statistics - R.S.N. Pillai, Mrs. Bhagavathi

6. P.R. Vittal - Business Mathematics and Statistics

Common Course

BBIII A12 GENERAL INFORMATICS

Lecture hours per week: 5 No of Credits: 4

Objectives:

➢ To update and expand basic Informatics skills of the students

➢ To equip the students to effective utilize the digital knowledge resources

Module I: Computers and Operating Systems: Features of New Generation Personal Computers

and Peripherals- Computer Networks-Types of Networks-Components of Networks-Topology-

Internet- Uses of Internet. Introduction to Software-License-Open Source-Overview of operating

systems and major application software.

(10 Hours)

Module II: Basics of IT: Information- Prerequisites ad needs- IT and its components-IT and

Internet-IT Applications—E-Governance—IT for National Integration-IT Applications in Health

Care, Business, Commerce and Resource Management Emerging Trends in IT: Eletronic Data Inter

change-Mobile Computing-SMS-MMS-Wireless Applications –Blue Tooth-Global Positional

System- Infra Red Communication-Smart CardDNA Computing-Cloud computing (

15 Hours)

Module III: Knowledge Skills for Higher Education: Data, Information and Knowledge-

Knowledge Management- Internet as a knowledge repositoryAcademic search techniques- Case

study of academic websites- Basic Concepts of IPR-Copy rights and Patents. Introduction to use of

IT in teaching and learning. Case study of educational software- Academic Service- INFLIBNET-

NICENET-BRNET.

(15 Hours )

Module IV: Social Informatics: IT and Society- Issues and Concerns-Digital devide-Free Software

Movement-IT and Industry-New opportunities and threats- Cyber ethics- Cyber crimes- Security-

Privacy Issues- Cyber Laws- Cyber addictions- Information overload-Health Issues- Guidelines for

Proper Usage of Computers and Internet- e-waste and Green computing- Unicode-IT and Regional

Languages.

(15 Hours)

Module V: Programmes for Office Management: Introduction to Linux- Linux Systems- Linux

distributions – Operating systems and Linux-History of Linux and UNIX- Open source software –

Linux software- Software Repositories- Third party Linux Repositories-Linux office and Data base

software- Internet Servers- Development Resources- Setting the Desktop- The GNOME Desktop

Environment – Using the Metacity Window Manager-Using GNOME Panels – Change in the

GNOME Preferences- Exiting GNOME- Working with Words and Images- Desktop Publishing in

LinuxUsing Open Office.og Office Suit

(20 Hours)

References:

1. Peter Norton, “Introduction to computers”, Tata McGraw Hill Private Limited, New Delhi, 2009.

2. Alan Evans, ITL ESL, Leslie Lamport, Dolores Etter, Darren George, Kenneth C Laoudon, Gary

Rogers, Rainer Handel, “INFORMATICS”-Technology in Action”, Pearson Education, Delhi,

2009.

3. V.Rajaraman, “Introduction To Information Technology”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New

Delhi, 2009.

4. Alex Leon, Mathews Leon, “Fundamentals of Information technology”, Leon Vikas, Chennai,

2009.

5. Richard Peterson, “The Complete Reference Linux Sixth Edition”, Tata McGraw Hill Private

Limited, New Delhi, 2009.

6. Christopher Negus, “Linux Bible”, Wiley India Private Limited, 2009.

7. Mike McGrath, “Linux In Easy Steps”, Dream TechPress, New Delhi, 2009 8. Daniel Minoli

&Emma Minoli, “Web Commerce Technology Hand Book”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009

Core Course

BBIIIB03 BUSINESS REGULATORY FRAMEWORK


Objectives:

➢ To provide students with Basic Legal Concepts and the Indian Legal

Environment in which Business is carried on

➢ To enable the students to understand the emerging legal issues in a digital

networked environment.

Module I

Indian Contract Act,1872 – Contract- Nature and classification of contracts-offer and

acceptance-consideration- capacity of parties-free consent- coercion- undue influence

– misrepresentation- fraud- mistake- void agreements- discharge of contract- breach of contract and remedies-contingent contracts-quasi-contracts

25 Hours

Module II

Special contracts-Contract of Indemnity- meaning – nature- right of indemnity holder

and indemnifier – Contract of Guarantee-meaning – nature and features- surety and co-

surety – rights and liabilities- discharge of surety from his liability – Contract of

Bailment and Pledge- rights and duties of bailer and bailee, pledger and pledgee- pledge

by non owners- Agency- creation of agency – duties and liabilities of agent and

principal-termination of agency. 12 Hours

Module III

Sale of Goods Act, 1930-Contract for sale of goods-Meaning – essentials of a contract of

sale – Conditions and Warranties- caveat emptor-sale by non owners- rules as to delivery

of goods- auction sale -rights of unpaid seller 08 Hours

Module IV

The Consumer Protection Act,1986 – Definition – consumer – complainant – goods –

service – complaint – unfair trade practices – restrictive trade practices – rights and

remedies for consumers - consumer protection council – consumer disputes redressal

agencies. 10 Hours

Module V

The Information Technology Act, 2000 – Digital signature – digital signature certificate

– electronic records and governance - certifying authorities – cyber crimes – offences and penalties under IT Act,2000.

5 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Balchandani: Business Laws

2. S.D.Geet and M.S. Patil: Business Laws

3. S.S. Gulshan: Business Laws

4. B.S.Moshal: Business & Industrial Law

5. B Sen and Mitra: Business and Commercial Laws

6. N.D.Kapoor: An Introduction to Mercantile Laws

7. N.M. Wechlakar: Business Laws

8. M.C. Kuchal: Business Laws

9. Government of India: Information Technology Act, 2000

Core Course-

BBIII B04 HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT


Objectives:

➢ To give a conceptual understanding of human resource practices in

organizations.

UNIT I

Introduction to Human Resource Management—Importance--scope and objectives

of HRM. Evolution of the concept of HRM- Approaches to HRM- Personal

management Vs Human Resource Management-HRM and competitive advantage-

Traditional Vs Strategic humanresourcemanagement.

15 Hours

UNIT II

Human resource planning, Recruitment and selection—Job analysis---process of

job analysis-job discretion- job specification-- methods of job analysis--

Conventional Vs strategic planning—job evaluation—Recruitment--source of

recruitment-methods..

(15 Hours )

UNIT III

Placement, Induction and Internal mobility of human resource. Training of

employees—need for training-objectives- approaches --methods-training

environment- areas of training-Trainingvaluation.

(12 Hour)

UNIT IV

Performance appraisal and career planning. Need and importance- objectives-

process- methods and problems of performance appraisal- . Concept of career

planning –features- methods–usescareerdevelopment.

10 Hours

UNIT V

Compensation management and grievance redressel. Compensation planning-

objectives-Wage systems- factors influencing wage system-. Grievance redressel

procedure- discipline- approaches- punishment-essentials of a good discipline

system. Labor participationinmanagement.

20 Hours

References:

1. Human Resource Management- Text and Cases-- VSP Rao

2. Human Resource Management—Snell, Bohlander

3. Personal Management and Human Resources—Venkata Ratnam .Srivasthava.

4. A Hand Book of Personnel Management Practice—Dale Yolder.


BBIIIC03 QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUE FOR BUSINESS MANAGEMENT


Course objectives:

➢ To familiarize the student with the use of quantitative techniques in managerial

decision making.

UNIT I: Quantitative techniques—introduction—meaning and definition—

classification of QT, QT and other disciplines—application of QT in business—

limitations 5 Hours

UNIT II: Set theory—Probability –concept of probability—meaning and

definition— approaches to probability—Theorems of probability—addition

theorem— multiplication theorem—conditional probability—inverse probability—

Baye’s theorem.

(15 hours )

UNIT III: Theoretical distribution—binomial distribution—basic assumptions and

characteristics—fitting of binomial distribution—Poisson distribution—

characteristics—fitting of Poisson distribution—Normal distribution—features and

properties—standard normal curve.

( 15 Hours)

UNIT IV: Statistical inference—testing of hypothesis—procedure—error in

testing— two tail test and one tail test—non parametric tests—Chi-Square test,

Wilkoxen test. Parametric tests—Z test—test of significance of large samples—test

for two sample means—small sample mean tests—Student t test—Analysis of

variance—F test—one way ANOVA and two way ANOVA tests.

(20

hours)

UNIT V: Correlation and regression analysis—meaning and definition of

correlation—Karl Pearson’s coefficient of correlation—rank correlation—

Regression—types—determination of simple linear regression—Coefficient of

determination.

(17 Hours )

References:

1. David M. Levine : Business statistics

2. S.P. Gupta ; Statistical methods

Semester IV

Common Course

BBIV A13 BANKING AND INSURANCE

Time: 5 Hours per week Credits : 4

Objectives:

➢ To enable the students to acquire knowledge about basics of Banking and

Insurance.

➢ To familiarise the students with the modern trends in banking.

Module I Introduction to Banking : Meaning and definition - Origin and development of

banking – Customer of a bank - Structure of banking in India – Banks and economic

development – Functions of commercial banks (conventional and innovative functions) –

Central Bank – RBI – Functions – Emerging trends in banking. 15 Hours

Module II Negotiable Instruments : Definition - Characteristics – Types – Parties to

negotiable instruments – Cheques – Types of cheques – Crossing of cheques – Drafts -

Cheque vs. Draft - Endorsement – Significance – Regularity of endorsement – Liability of

endorser – Electronic payments. 15 Hours

Module III E-Banking : Centralised Online Real time Electronic Banking (CORE) –

Electronic Clearing Service (ECS) – Electronic Fund Transfer (EFT) – Real Time Gross

Settlement (RTGS) – National Electronic Fund Transfer (NEFT) – Society for Worldwide

Interbank Financial Telecommunication (SWIFT) – E-cheque – Any Time Money – ATM

s – Credit card – Debit card – Smart card – Internet banking – Mobile banking – Tele-

banking. 15 Hours

Module IV Introduction to Insurance : Concept - Need of insurance - Insurance as a social

security tool - Insurance and economic development - Principles of insurance - various

kinds of insurance – Life and general insurance (Fire, Marine, Medical, Personal Accident,

Property and Motor Vehicle Insurance) – Features – Life insurance Vs General insurance.

15 Hours

Module V Life Insurance : Law relating to life insurance - General principles of life

insurance contract - Proposal and policy - Assignment and nomination - Title and claims -

General Insurance : Law relating to general insurance - IRDA - Powers and functions -

Insurance business in India . 15 Hours

Reference Books: 1. Sheldon H.P : Practice and Law of Banking.

2. Bedi. H.L : Theory and Practice of Banking.

3. Maheshwari. S.N. : Banking Law and Practice.

4. Shekar. K.C : Banking Theory Law and Practice.

5. Pannandikar & Mithami': Banking in India.

6. Radhaswamy & Vasudevan: Text Book of Banking.

7. Indian Institute of Bankers (Pub) Commercial Banking Vol-I/Vol-II (part I& II) Vol- III.

8. Varshaney: Banking Law and Practice.

9. Dr. P. Periasamy: Principles and Practice of Insurance, Himalaya Publishing House,

Delhi.

10. Inderjit Singh, Rakesh Katyal & Sanjay Arora: Insurance Principles and

Practices,Kalyani Publishers, Chennai.

11. M.N.Mishra: Insurance Principles and Practice, S.Chand & Company Ltd, Delhi.

12. G. Krishnaswamy : Principles & Practice of Life Insurance

13. Kothari & Bahl : Principles and Pratices of Insurance

14. B.S.Khubchandani, “Practice and Law of Banking”, Mac Millan India Ltd, 2000.

15. K.C. Nanda,” Credit Banking”, Response Book, Sage Publication, 1999.

Common Course

BBIVA14 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT

Time: 5 Hours per week Credits : 4

Objectives:

➢ To familiarize the students with the concept of entrepreneurship

➢ To identify and develop the entrepreneurial talents of students

➢ To generate innovative business ideas in emerging industrial scenario

Module I Entrepreneur and fundamentals of Entrepreneurship: - Entrepreneurial

competencies – Factors affecting entrepreneurial growth – Role of entrepreneur in

economic Development – Challenges of women Entrepreneurs.

20 Hours

Module II Micro small and Medium Enterprises – Legal Framework – Licenses – Role of

Promotional Institutions with Special Reference to KINFRA, KITCO. MSME & DICs –

Concessions – Incentives and Subsidies.

10 Hours

Module III Project Management – Feasibility and Viability analysis – Technical –

Financial – Network – Appraisal and Evaluation – Project Report Preparation 30

Hours

Module IV Identification of Business Opportunities in the context of Kerala – Rate of ED

Clubs – Industrial Policies – Skill Development for Entrepreneurs. Business incubation –

Meaning – Setting up of Business Incubation Centres. 12

Hours

Reference Books:

1. S.S. Kanka: Entrepreneurial Development, Sultan Chand.

2. Prasanna Chandra: Project Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and Review,

Tata McGraw Hill.

3. Vasantha Desai: Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development, Himalaya.

4. C.B. Gupta&N.P. Sreenivasan: Entrepreneurial Development, Sultan Chand.

5. Nirmal K. Gupta: Small Industry – Challenges and Perspectives, Anmol Publications.

6. Vasantha Desai: Small Scale Industries and Entrepreneurship, Himalaya.

Core course

BBIVB05 MARKETING MANAGEMENT


Objectives:

➢ To acquaint the students with the marketing principles and practices, and,

➢ To understand the process of marketing in a business firm.

Module I Marketing: nature and scope of marketing; marketing concepts- traditional and

modern; selling and marketing; marketing mix; marketing environment; service marketing-

characteristics of service.

10 Hours

Module II Consumer behavior and market segmentation: nature, scope and significance of

consumer behavior; market segmentation- concept and importance; bases for market

segmentation. 15 Hours

Module III Product: concept of product; consumer and industrial goods; product planning

and development; packaging- role and functions; branding: brand name and trade mark;

product life cycle; after sales service. Price: importance of price in marketing mix; factors

affecting price; discounts and rebates; pricing strategies.

15 Hours

Module IV Promotion: promotion mix; methods of promotion; advertising: functions of

advertising, characteristics of effective advertisement, advertising media-types of ad media,

media planning and scheduling, legal and ethical aspects of advertising; personal selling:

functions of a personal selling, characteristics of a good salesman, steps in personal selling

process; publicity and public relations. Sales promotion: meaning, nature and functions;

limitations of sales promotion; sales promotion schemes: sample; coupon; price off;

premium plan; consumer contests and sweep stakes; POP displays; demonstration; trade

fairs and exhibitions; sales promotion techniques.

20 Hours

Module V Distribution: physical distribution; channels of distribution-concept and role;

types of channels; factors affecting choice of a particular channel; physical distribution of

goods; transportationmodes; retail formats- supermarkets, hyper markets, chain stores,

department stores, discount stores, margin free markets, electronic retailing.

15 Hours

References:

1. Kotler, Philip: Marketing Management; Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

2. Condiff E.W. and Still, R.R., Basic Marketing Concepts, Decisions and Strategy;

Prentice Hal of India, New Delhi.

3. Stanton W.J., Etzel Michael J and Walter Bruce J; Fundamentals of Marketing; McGraw

Hill, New York.

4. Rorsiter Johan R, Percy Larry: Advertising and Promotion Management; McGraw Hill,

New York

5. Aaker, David and Myers Johan G, et. al,: Advertising Management; Prentice Hall of

India; New Delhi.

Core course

BBIVB06 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT


Objectives: • To familiarize the students with the concepts, tools and practices of financial

management, and, •

To learn about the decisions and processes of financial management in a business firm.

50% theory and 50% numerical

Module I Financial management: meaning, nature and scope of finance; financial goals:

profit maximization, wealth maximization; finance functions,- investment, financing and

dividend decisions. 10 Hours

Module II Capital budgeting: nature of investment decisions; investment evaluation

criteria- net present value, internal rate of return, profitability index, payback period,

accounting rate of return , NPV and IRR comparison; capital rationing; risk analysis in

capital budgeting. 20 Hours

Module III Working capital: meaning, significance and types of working capital;

financing of working capital; sources of working capital; management of inventory;

management of cash; management of account receivables; optimum credit policy; credit

collection; factoring service; various committee reports on bank finance; dimensions of

working capital management. 15 Hours

Module IV Capital structure theories: traditional and MM hypotheses; determining capital

structure in practice; Capital structure planning. Cost of capital: meaning and significance

of cost of capital; calculation of cost of debt, preference capital, equity capital and retained

earnings; Operating and financial leverages; measurement of leverages; effects of operating

and financial leverages on profit. 20 Hours

Module V Dividend decisions—Types of dividend- dividend models—principles of

dividend policy— practical aspects of dividend. 7 Hours

References:

1. Battacharya, Hrishikas: Working Capital Management: Strategies and Techniques;

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

2. Chandra, Prasanna: Financial Management; Tata McGraw Hill, Delhi.

3. Pandey, I.M.: Finanical Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

4. Khan M.Y. and Jain P.K.: Financial Management; Tata McGraw Hill, Delhi.

5. Vanhorne, J.C.: Financial Management and Policy; Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

6. Ravi M kishore: Fundamentals of Financial Management (Tax man)


BBIV C04 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE


Course objectives :

To provide a basic knowledge about Operations research and

To acquaint the students some common operations Research Tools for various

Business decision marketing situations.

Unit 1 – Operations Research: Concept -- Meaning and Definition – Development

of OR – Characteristics of OR – Scope & Objectives of OR – Phases of OR –

Techniques of OR – Or and Modern Business Management. (15 hours)

Unit 2 – Linear programming problem – Meaning & Objective of LP –

Applications of LP – Formulation of Mathematical Model to a LPP – Objective

function – Constraints – Solution to LPP (Graphical solution only) – Advantages &

Disadvantages of LP. (15 hours)

Unit 3 – Network Analysis – Meaning and Objectives – Network Techniques –

Managerial applications of Network Techniques – PERT & CPM – Network

diagram – activity – Event – Dummy Activity – Construction of Network diagram –

Numbering of events – Activity & Event times – Float & Slack – Steps in the

application of CPM – Critical activity – Finding of critical path & Estimated

Duration – Time estimates in PERT – Steps involved in PERT calculations –

Difference between PERT & CPM (only simple problems are expected – Crashing

of activity timing not expected) (25 hours)

Unit 4 – Decision Theory : Decision making situations – Decision making under

certainity - Decision making under uncertainity : Payoff, Regret (Opportunity loss),

Maximax criterion – Minimax criterion , Maximin criterion, Laplace criterion &

Huurwics alpha criterion – Decision making under risk : Expected Monetary Value

(EMV) , Expected Opportunity Loss (EOL) , Expected Value of perfect information

(EVPI) – Decision making under competition – Game Theory (Theory only) –

Decision Tree (10 hours)

Module – 5 – Transportation Model: Structure of Transportation problem –

solution for Transportation problem – North West Corner Method (NWCM) – Least

Cost Method (LCM) – Vogl’s Approximation method(VOM)(Simple problems

only). (10 hours)

Reference :

1) Operation research Techniques for management – V.K Kapoor,Sulthan Chand &

Sons

2) Operations Research an Introduction – Taha, Prentice hall.

3) Operations Research Theory and Application – J.K. Sharma.

4) Operations Research Problems and solutions – J.K. Sharma (Macmillan)

5) Operations Research – Paneersevam – (Prentice hall of India).

Semester V Core course

BBV B07 ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGEMENT


Objectives:

➢ To enable the students to understand the concept and relevance of management

Accounting

➢ To provide the students an understanding about the use of accounting and costing

data for planning, control and decision taking.

Module I Management Accounting –Nature and Scope – Difference between Cost Accounting,

Financial Accounting and Management accounting – Recent Trends in Management Reporting.

05 Hours

Module II Analysis and Interpretation of financial Statement: - Meaning- Types and Methods of

Financial Analysis – Comparative statements – Trend Analysis – Common size statements (a general

discussion only). Ratio Analysis: - Meaning –Nature – uses and limitations of Ratios –liquidity,

profitability, Turnover ,Solvency, Leverage, Market test ratios – Constructions of Financial

Statements from ratios –Judgment of financial stability through ratios –(Stress to be given to problem

solving and interpretation skills ) 25 Hours

Module III Fund Flow and Cash Flow Analysis: a. Fund Flow Statements : Meaning and concept of

fund – Current and Non- Current Accounts – Flow of Fund –Preparation of Fund flow statements –

uses and significance b. Cash Flow Statement : Difference between fund flow statement and cash

flow statements – Preparation of cash flow statements as per AS-3 Norms – Direct and Indirect

methods.(Stress to be given to problems) 20 Hours

Module IV Managerial decision making with the help of C.V.P. Analysis : Marginal Costing- Fixed

Cost, Variable Cost, Contribution, P/V ratio, Break Even Analysis – Algebraic and Graphic

presentation – Decision making: Fixation of Selling Price – Exploring new markets – make or buy-

key factor – Product Mix – Operate or Shutdown 20 Hours

Module V Responsibility Accounting –Concept – Significance – Responsibility centers- Activity

Based Costing – (General outline only) 05 Hours


Reference Books:

1. Dr. S.N. Maheswari: Management Accounting

2. Sexana: Management Accounting

3. Made Gowda: Management Accounting

4. Dr. S.N. Goyal and Manmohan: Management Accounting

5. B.S. Raman: Management Accounting

6. R.S.N. Pillai and Bagavathi: Management Accounting

7. Sharma and Gupta: Management Accounting

8. J. Batty: Management Accounting

9. Foster: Financial Statement Analysis, Pearson Education.

10. PN Reddy & Appanaiah: Essentials of Management Accounting.

Core course

BBV B08 BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS


Objectives:

➢ To enable students for acquiring basic knowledge in business research methods and to

develop basic skills in them to conduct survey researches and case studies

Module I Business research – meaning and definition – features of business research – theory

building- induction and deduction theory – concept – operational definition – variable – proposition –

hypothesis – types of business research – basic and applied, exploratory, descriptive and causal –

phases of business research. 10 Hours

Module II Exploratory research – objectives – methods – experience survey – secondary data

analysis – case study – pilot study by focus group interview – process of problem definition –

understanding background of the problem - determination of unit of analysis – determine the relevant

variables and state the research questions – hypothesis and research objectives. 10 Hours

Module III Meaning of research design – methods of descriptive and causal research – survey –

experiments – secondary data studies and observation – sampling design – simple random sampling –

restricted random sampling – stratified, cluster and systematic - nonrandom sampling – convenient

and judgment sampling – sampling error and non sampling error. 10 Hours

Module IV Measurement and scaling – nominal - ordinal – interval and ratio scale – criteria for good

measurement – reliability and validity – designing questionnaire – means of survey data collection –

personal interview – telephonic, mail and internet. 10 Hours

Module V A. Data processing – processing stages – editing – coding and data entry – descriptive

analysis under different types of measurements – percentages frequency table – contingency table –

graphs – measures of central tendency and index number – interpretation

B. Preparation of research report – format – report writing stages – gathering material and data -make

overall format - make detailed outline – write first draft - rewrite – final word processing and

publishing. 20 Hours

Reference Books:

1. Donald R.Cooper and Pamela S. Schindler: Business Research Methods, Latest edition, Irwin

McGRAW-HILL International Editions, New Delhi.

2. John Adams, Hafiz T.A. khan Robert Raeside, David white: Research Methods for graduate

business and social science students, Response Books, New Delhi – 110044.

3. Neresh K. Malhotra: Marketing research, latest edition, Pearson Education.

4. William G. Zikmund, Business research methods, Thomson

5. Wilkinson T.S. and Bhandarkar P.L.: Methodology and Techniques of social research, Himalaya.

6. S N Murthy & U Bhojanna: Business Research Methods, Excel Books, New Delhi.

7. Jan Brace: Questionnaire design. Kogan Page India

8. Michael V.P., Research Methodology in Management, Himalaya.

9. Dipak kumar Bhattacharyya, Research Methodology, Excel Books, New Delhi.

10. R. Paneerselvan: Research Methodology, Prentice-Hall of India

11. Ajai S Gaur & Sanjaya S Gaur: Statistical Methods for Practice & Research, Response Books,

New Delhi.

12. Kultar Singh: Quantitative Social Research Methods, Response Books, New Delhi

Core course

BBVB 09 EMERGING TRENDS IN MANAGEMENT


Objectives :

➢ To Impart knowledge about the emerging trends of new management concepts, and

➢ To provide knowledge about the significance of the integration of information

technology as the platform for the application of various management concepts

Unit 1 : Supply Chain Management : Meaning and definition- components/participants of SC-

concept of SCM- Objectives of SCM- SCM process : Customer relationship management, customer

service management, demand management, customer order fulfillment, manufacturing flow

management , Procurement management/supplier relationship management, product development &

Commercialization, returns management – Factors driving the evolution of SCM – objectives of SCM

– supply chain planning. (15 hours)

Unit 2 : Logistics Management : Meaning and definition – significant of logistics – business logistics-

concepts of logistics management – objectives of logistics management – elements of logistics

management – logistics management v/s supply chain management – integrated logistics- operating of

objectives of integrated logistics: (10 hours)

Unit 3 : Total Quality Management : Quality – Meaning & Definition – Quality education –

Efficiency v/s effectiveness – drivers of quality – quality management – internal & external

customers- vision statement – Mission statement – objectives of QM – Targets – Action Plans –

Principles of QM – Total quality management : Evolution , Definition – Preparing for TQM – Stages

in TQM implementation – TQM models – TQM planning – TQM software. (10 hours)

Core Course- Specialisation I

BBVB10 SERVICES MANAGEMENT


Objective :

• To familiarize the students with role of different prominent services in India and prepare them

with basic skills to manage.

Unit 1 : (10 hours) Services :- concept-definition-features-Growth of service sector; Role of services

in economy- Classification of services- service triangle- Marketing of services- Internal and external

marketing- Customer involvement in service Processes; Customer behavior in service settings.

Unit 2 : (10 hours) Service market segmentation; principles, bases- service marketing mix; four Ps

and expanded Ps ; methods of developing CR- building customer loyalty.

Unit 3 : (15 hours) Tourism management : Evolution of tourism – concept- characteristics-

components- economic, social, cultural, political and environmental impacts of tourism – Role of

travel agencies and tour operators- Role of airways, railways, cruises and road transport in the

development of tourism – Tourism guidance – tourist accommodation and hospitality – different types

of hotels- tourism in India; growth potentials in different areas – major tourist attractions.

Unit 4 : (15 hours) Banking and insurance management – Banking -concept- services; traditional and

new generation – universal banking- bancassurance- offshore banking- e- banking- retail banking- A

brief insight into the current Indian banking scenario; emerging issues in Indian banking;

Unit 5 : (7 hours) concept of Insurance- types of insurances; Life insurance and General insurance;

Marine, Fire, Personal accident and health insurance policies – insurance business in India – IRDA –

major private and public sector organisations in Indian insurance business.

Unit 6 : (15 hours) Services in organized retailing – Health care industry in India; Marketing E-

services; Business process outsourcing (BPO); medical transcription , knowledge process outsourcing

(K PO) E – learning (Indian context);

Books for Reference:

1) Rampal. M.K & Gupta S. L , Service marketing , Galgotia Publishing, NewDelhi.

2) Kritain Anderson & Carol Kerr, Customer relationship management , Tata MCGraw Hill,

NewDelhi.

3) Bhattacharjee , service sector management , Jaico publishing, Mumbai .

4) Lovelock, Christopher ; Services marketing- people, Technology, strategy ; Pearson. Education

Asia, Delhi; First Indian Reprint, 2001.

5) Bhatia A.K International Tourism , Sterling publishers New Delhi

6) Jha S. M, tourism marketing, Himalaya, Publishers, Mumbai.

7) Sethi & Bhatia , Elementis of banking and insurance PHI learning Pvt Ltd. New Delhi.

8) Sreenivasan – Service marketing PHI learning Pvt. Ltd.

Core Course- Specialisation II

BBVB11 E- COMMERCE


Course objectives: •

• To understand the importance of database systems for business management, and, •

• To gain a practical orientation to database development and maintenance.

UNIT I – Introduction to E- commerce : Meaning and concept – E- commerce v/s Traditional

Commerce- E- Business & E- Commerce – History of E- Commerce – EDI – Importance , features &

benefits of E- Commerce – Impacts, Challenges & Limitations of E- Commerce – Supply chain

management & E – Commerce – E – Commerce infrastructure. (15 hours)

UNIT II – Business models of E – Commerce : Business to Business – Business to customers –

customers to customers - Business to Government – Business to employee – E – Commerce strategy

– Influencing factors of successful E- Commerce. (10 hours)

UNIT III – Marketing strategies & E – Commerce : Website – components of website – Concept &

Designing website for E- Commerce – Corporate Website – Portal – Search Engine – Internet

Advertising – Emergence of the internet as a competitive advertising media- Models of internet

advertising – Weakness in Internet advertising – Mobile Commerce. (15 hours)

Module IV – Electronic Payment system : Introduction – Online payment systems – prepaid and

postpaid payment systems – e- cash, e- cheque, Smart Card, Credit Card , Debit Card, Electronic

purse – Security issues on electronic payment system – Solutions to security issues – Biometrics –

Types of biometrics. (15 hours)

Module V – Legal and ethical issues in E- Commerce : Security issues in E- Commerce- Regulatory

frame work of E- commerce, Cyber Laws – Information Technology Act 2000 – Digital signature –

digital certificate – encryption – decryption – Public key & private key. (10 hours)

Books: 1. Turban, Efraim, David King et. el.: Electronic Commerce: A Managerial Perspective,

Pearson Education Asia, Delhi 2002.

2. Kalakota, Ravi: Frontiers of Electronic Commerce, Addison - Wesley, Delhi 1999.

3. Rayport, Jeffrey F and Jaworksi, Bernard J: Introduction to E-Commerce, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi 2003.

4. Smantha Shurety,: E-Business with Net Commerce, Addison - Wesley, Singapore 2001.

5. Rich, Jason R: Starting an E-Commerce Business, IDG Books, Delhi 2000.

6. Laudon, Kenneth C and Carol Guercio Traver : E-Commerce business. Technology. Society,

Pearson Education, Delhi 2005.

7. Stamper David A, and Thomas L.Case: Business Data Communications, Pearson Education, New

Delhi 2005.

8. Willam Stallings: Business Data Communications, Pearson Education, New Delhi 2004.

Open Course

BBV D01 HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT


Objectives: •

• To give a broad overview of the basic concepts of hospitality management and

• Toequip the students to make use of the opportunities in this sector.

Module I Introduction to hospitality industry—meaning and definition—historical development of

hospitality industry—scope and significance—components of hospitality industry—Tourism

industry—Hotel industry—tourism travel industry—domestic and international hospitality industry—

Economic aspects of hospitality industry. 15

hours

Module II Tourism management—tourism planning—steps in planning—organisational structure for

tourism industry—directing, communicating , staffing, and controlling tourism activities. Assessing

tourism demand—Environmental dimension of tourism—sustainability and conservation policy—

tourism marketing—basic concepts of tourism marketing—tourism products—pricing—promotion

and tourism retailing. 20 Hours

Module III Hotel management—basic concepts of hotel management—history of hotel industry—

economic significance—functions— classification of hotels--continental— European and American—

major hotel chains in India--frond office management—facility and event management—service

regularity frame work—housekeeping, F&B production and service

15 Hours

References:

1. Hotel front office training manual BY Sudhir Andrews

2.Principles of hotel frond office operation By Sue Baker and others

Semester VI

Core Course BBVI B12 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT


Objectives: •

• To familiarize the students with the concepts, tools and practices of operations

management, and

• To learn about the decisions and processes of operations management in a business

firm.

Module I Operations management—meaning, definitions, scope and objectives—

interaction of operations management with other areas—manufacturing and non

manufacturing operations and their characteristics.

15 Hours

Module II Facilities planning—plant location—factors determining plant location— plant

layout—process layout and product layout—materials handling—MRP— Principle

equipments.

12 Hours

Module III Capacity planning—estimation of capital requirements—maintenance

management—types of maintenance -work study—time and method study—work

measurement, meaning, scope and importance. 15 Hours

Module IV Operations planning and control—objectives of operations planning—

planning procedure— operations planning categories ( concept only) operations control—

meaning , importance and objectives—techniques of operations control. 15

Hours

Module V Quality control—Concept of quality—quality planning—statistical quality

control—control charts( X chart and R chart Only)—management of quality in

organizations—quality circles— TQM.

15 Hours

References: 1. Russell, Roberta S, and Bernard W.Taylor III, Operations Management,

Pearson Education, New Delhi 2004.

2. Chase :Operations Management for Competitive Advantage, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi.

3. Buffa, E.S., ‘Modern Production Management’, New York, John Wiley, 1987.

4. Adam, E.E. and Ebert, R.J., ’Production and Operations Management’ Prentice Hall of

India, New Delhi 1995.

5. Chary, S,.N., Production and Operations Management’, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi

1989

Core Course

BBVI B13 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOR


Objectives: •

➢ To familiarize the students with the basic concepts of the organizational behavior

and

➢ To enhance their understanding of the interaction between the individuals and the

organizations.

Module I Organizational behavior—concepts, meaning, nature, scope features of OB.OB

and other disciplines

10Hours

Module II Individual behavior—basic psychological process—personality, determinants of

personality— personality traits—perception, factors affecting perception—learning,

theories of learning— social learning. Motivation—theories of motivation (Maslow’s,

Hertzberg, Mc Greger, X and Y theory) financial and non financial motivation.

20 Hours

Module III Group—concept of group dynamics—features of group—types of group

behavior—formal and informal group behavior—stages of group development— group

moral—group norms—group cohesiveness.

15 hours

Module IV Leaderships- types—theories of leadership ( Trait theory, Michigan studies

and Fideler’s contingency model) modern approach to leadership theories—leadership

styles.

15 Hours

Module V Stress management—meaning, types of stress—consequences of work stress—

causes of stress—Conflict, types of conflicts, conflict resolution— Organisational

development—meaning, need, benefits and limitations of OD—steps in OD.

Organizational changes.

12 Hours

References:

1. Fred Luthans: Organisational behavior

2. Danial C. Fieldman and Hugh Arnold: Managing individual and group behavior in

organization 3. Henry Mintzberg: The structure of organization

4. Edwin Gerlof: Organization theory and design

5 Robin. S. P: Organizational behavior

6. Aswathappa: Organizational Behavior

7. Jai B. Sunhat: Culture and Organisational Behavior

Core Course- Specialization III

BBVI B14 CONSUMER BEHAVIOR


Objectives: •

➢ To understand the basics of consumer decision-making processes, and,

➢ To understand the information needs for helping the consumer in decision making.

Module I Consumer behaviour – concepts; nature, scope and applications of consumer

behaviour; Consumer behaviour and marketing strategy; profiling consumers and their

needs; Market segmentation and consumer research; psychographics and lifestyle;

Consumer behaviour audit.

Module II Consumer involvement and decision-making; Consumer decision-making

process; Information search process; Evaluative criteria and decision rules.

Module III Individual influences on buying behaviour; Consumer as an individual;

Theories of personality; personality and market segmentation; consumer perception;

consumer needs and motivation. Personal influences and attitude formation. Learning and

consumer involvement; Communication and consumer behaviour. Reference group

influence in buying decisions; opinion leadership. Family life cycle and decision-making;

Social class concept and measurement

Module IV The buying process: problem recognition and information search behaviour;

information processing; alternative evaluation; Purchase process and post purchase

behaviour

Module V Culture and Consumer behaviour: Core culture and sub cultures. Role of culture

in consumer buying behaviour. Profile of Indian consumers; Behavioural patterns of Indian

consumers; Problems faced by Indian consumers; Consumer protection in India;

References: 1. Hawkins, Best and Coney: Consumer Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi 2004.

2. Schiffman, L.G. and Kanuk, L.L.: Consumer Behaviour, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi 1994.

3. Laudon, David L and Bitta Albert J Della: Consumer Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi 2005.

4. Mowen, John C: Consumer Behaviour, Macmillan, New York 1993.

5. Assael, H: Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Action, South Western, Ohio 1995.

Core Course- Specialization IV

BBVIB15 RETAIL MANAGEMENT


Objective: •

➢ To give an overview of the conceptual aspects of retail marketing management and

➢ to give some practical functional aspects of retailing.

Module I Retailing—nature and scope—objectives and functions—retailing scenario in

India— wheel of retailing—retailing life cycle—types of retailing—ownership based, store

based and non store based retailing—vertical marketing system.

15 Hours

Module II Strategic planning in retailing—retail environment and customers—design retail

information system and research—location and organizational decisions—trading area

analysis—site selection, organizational pattern in retailing.

15 Hours

Module III Retail operations management—budgeting and resource allocation—store

format and size decision—store layout and space allocation—store security aspects—credit

management— working capital for retailing—cash collection and recovery.

10 hours

Module IV Product assortment decision—merchandise forecasting—buying and handling

merchandise— inventory management—pricing, labeling and packaging. 15 hours

Module V Retail promotion—building retail store image—role of atmosphere—layout

planning—retail promotion mix—sales promotion scheme— public relations in retailing—

CRM in retailing--retail control system—financial control, merchandise control-- human

resource control—operational control.

References:

1. Berman, Barry and Joel Evans: Retail Management

2. Cooper J: Strategy planning in logistics and transportation

3. Cox Roger: Retail management

4. Kotler: Marketing Management

5. Levy, Michael: Retail Management


Vasudevan .K

Assistant Registrar


Section Officer

File Ref.No.4180/GA - IV - J1/2012/CU


AbstractBachelor of Computer Applications (B.C.A) Programme -CUCBCSS UG 2014- Scheme and Syllabus- revised w.e.f2017 Admissions- Approved Implemented- Orders issued.

G & A - IV - J

Read:-1. U.O.No. 6833/2014/Admn Dated 16.07.20142. Minutes of the meeting of Board of Studies in Computer Science U.G held on 12-06-2017 item No.1.3. Minutes of the Faculty of Science held on 10.07.2017 item. No3.4. Extract of the item No.II.H of the minutes of the meeting of the LXXVI meeting of theAcademic Council held on 17.07.20175. Orders of the Vice Chancellor in the file of 191466/GA IV/J1/2013/CU dated27.07.2017

ORDER

Vide paper read first above, the Scheme and Syllabus of Bachelor of Computer Applications (B.C.A)Programme under CUCBCSS 2014 regulations was implemented w.e.f 2014 admission onwards.

Vide paper read second above, the Board of Studies in Computer science U.G has decided to makerevision in syllabus of Bachelor of Computer Applications (B.C.A) Programme from 2017-2018academic year onwards.

Vide paper read third above, the Faculty of Science has resolved to approve the minutes of theBoard of Studies in Computer Science U.G.

Vide paper read fourth above, the LXXVI meeting of the Academic Council has resolved to approvethe minutes of the Faculty of Science and the Board of Studies coming under the Faculty.

Vide paper read fifth above, the Vice Chancellor has accorded sanction to implement the AcademicCouncil resolutions.

Accordingly orders are issued to implement the modified syllabus of Bachelor ofComputer Applications (B.C.A) under CUCBCSS UG Regulations 2014 with effect from 2017-18admission onwards.

Orders are issued accordingly.

(Revised Syllabus is enclosed herewith)

ToThe Principals of affiliated colleges.The Controller of examinations.,JCE 4, EX Branch.

UNIVERSITY OF CALICUTTHENHIPALAM, CALICUT UNIVERSITY P.O

DEGREE OFBACHELOR OF COMPUTER APPLICATION

(B. C. A)(CHOICE BASED CREDIT AND SEMESTER SYSTEM)

UNDER THE

FACULTY OF SCIENCE

SYLLABUSFOR THE STUDENTS ADMITTED FROM THE ACADEMIC

YEAR 2017 – 18 ONWARDS

BOARD OF STUDIES IN COMPUTER SCIENCE (UG)THENHIPALAM, CALICUT UNIVERSITY P.O

KERALA, 673 635, INDIA

JUNE, 2017© COPYRIGHT BY UNIVERSITY OF CALICUT, 2017

B.C.A (Academic Year 2017-18 onwards)June 1, 2017

2 | P a g e Board of Studies UG | Computer Science & Applications | University of Calicut

REGULATIONSFOR DEGREE OF

BACHELOR COMPUTER APPLICATIONS

(B.C.A)(CHOICE BASED CREDIT AND SEMESTER SYSTEM)

EFFECTIVE FROM THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2017-18

B.C.A. PROGRAMME OBJECTIVEThe basic objective of the program is to open a channel ofadmission for computing courses for

students, who have done the10+2 and are interested in taking computing/IT as a career. After

acquiring the Bachelor’s Degree (BCA) at University of Calicut, there is further educational

opportunity to go for an MCA or other Master’s Programme like MSc(CS), MSc(IT), MBA, etc.,

at this university or at any other University/Institute. Also after completing the BCA Programme,

a student should be able to get entry level job in the field of Information Technology or ITES or

they can take up self-employment in Indian & global software market. The specific objectives of

the program include:

1. To attract young minds to the potentially rich & employable field of computer applications

2. To be a foundation graduate program which will act as a feeder course for higher studies

in the area of Computer Science/Applications

3. To develop skills in software development so as to enable the BCA graduates to take up

self-employment in Indian & global software market.

4. To train & equip the students to meet the requirements of the Software industry in the

country and outside.



PROGRAMME STRUCTUREDuration: The duration of the BCA program shall be 6 semesters distributed over a period of 3

academic years. The odd semesters (1, 3, 5 ) shall be from June to October and the even semesters

(2, 4, 6) shall be from November to March. Each semester shall have 90 working days inclusive

of all examinations.

Courses: The BCA program includes four types of courses, viz., Common Courses (Code A),

Core courses (Code B), Complementary courses (Code C) and Open course (Code D). The

minimum number of courses required for completion of the BCA program is 36.

Credits: Each course shall have certain credits. For passing the BCA program the student shall be

required to achieve a minimum of 120 credits of which 36 (14 for common English courses + 8

for common languages other than English + 16 credits for General courses) credit shall be from

common courses, a minimum of 3 credits for project and 2 credits for the open course. Minimum

credits required for core, complementary and open courses put together are 82.

Attendance: A student shall be permitted to appear for the semester examination, only if he/she

secures not less than 75% attendance in each semester. Attendance shall be maintained by the

concerned Department. Condonation of shortage of attendance to a maximum of 9 days in a

semester subject to a maximum of two times during the whole period of the BCA Programme

may be granted by the University. Benefits of attendance may be granted to students who attend

the approved activities of college/university with prior concurrence of the Head of the institution.

Participation In such activities may be treated as presence in lieu of their absence on production of

participation/attendance certificate in curricular/extracurricular activities. It should be limited 9

days in a semester. The condonation of shortage of attendance shall be granted according to the

existing prescribed norms.

If a student registered in first semester of the BCA program is continuously absent from the

classes for more than 14 working days at the beginning of the semester without informing the

authorities the matter shall immediately be brought to the notice of the Registrar of the university.

The names of such students shall be removed from the rolls.



Admission to repeat courses should be within the sanctioned strength. However if more

candidates are there, the candidates who have suffered serious health problems, on production of a

medical certificate issued by a physician not below the rank of a Civil Surgeon in Government

service, may be permitted to repeat the course, with a written order issued by the Registrar,

Calicut University (by considering his/her SGPA/CGPA and percentage of attendance). The

number of such candidates should not exceed two.

Grace Marks: Grace Marks may be awarded to a student for meritorious achievements in co-

curricular activities (in Sports/Arts/NSS/NCC/ Student Entrepreneurship) carried out besides the

regular class hours. Such a benefit is applicable and limited to a maximum of 8 courses in an

academic year spreading over two semesters. No credit shall be assigned for such activities.

Project: Every student of the BCA program shall have to work on a project of not less than 3

credits under the supervision of a faculty member as per the curriculum.

Extension Activities: Compulsory social service (CSS) for a period of 15 days is essential for the

successful completion of the BCA program.

ADMISSIONThe admission to all programmes will be as per the rules and regulations of the University. The

eligibility criteria for admission shall be as announced by the University from time to time.

Separate rank lists shall be drawn up for reserved seats as per the existing rules.

The admitted candidates shall subsequently undergo the prescribedcourses of study in a college

affiliated to the university for six semesters within a period of not less than three years; clear all

the examinations prescribed and fulfill all such conditions as prescribed by the university from

time to time.

The College shall make available to all students admitted a Prospectus listing all the courses

offered in various Departments during a particular semester. The information so provided shall

contain title of the courses, the semester in which it is offered and credits for the courses. Detailed

syllabi shall be made available in the University/college websites.



There shall be a uniform calendar prepared by the University for the Registration, conduct

/schedule of the courses, examinations and publication of results. The University shall ensure that

the calendar is strictly followed.

There shall be provision for inter collegiate and inter university transfer in third and fifth semester

within a period of two weeks from the date of commencement of the semester. For the inter-

university or intra-university transfer of a student, he/she has a minimum of 20 credits in the

credit bank a) in the same discipline and b) within Kerala.

Complementary changes at the time of college transfer are permitted in the third semester if all

conditions are fulfilled. Complementary changes will not be permitted in the fifth semester.

REGISTRATIONEach student shall register for the courses he/she proposes to take through 'on line', in consultation

with the Faculty Adviser within two weeks from the commencement of each semester. The

college shall send a list of students registered for each program in each Semester giving the

details of courses registered, including repeat courses, to the university in the prescribed form

within 45 days from the commencement of the semester.

A student shall be permitted to register for the examination also. If registration for examination is

not possible owing to shortage of attendance beyond condonation limit, the student shall be

permitted to move to the next semester. In such cases, a request from the student may be

forwarded through the principal of the college to the University within two weeks of the

commencement of that semester. An undertaking from the Principal may also be obtained stating

that the students will be permitted to make up the shortage of attendance in that semester after

completing 6 semesters.( Students shall make up the shortage of attendance in 'Repeat Semester'

after completion of the program).

The 'Repeat Semester' shall be possible only once for the entire program and shall be done in the

same college.

A student who registered for the course shall successfully complete the program within 6 years

from the year of first registration. If not, such candidate has to cancel the existing registration and

join afresh as a new candidate.



The students who have attendance within the limit prescribed, but could not register for the

examination have to apply for the token registration, within two weeks of the commencement of

the next semester.

COURSE EVALUATIONTotal marks for each core, complementary and elective course, including lab courses shall be 100

marks, project evaluation cum programme viva voce, shall be 150 marks and open course shall be

50 marks.

The evaluation scheme for each course shall contain two parts (1) Internal evaluation (2) external

evaluation

20% weight shall be given to the internal evaluation. The remaining 80% weight shall be for the

external evaluation.

INTERNAL EVALUATION

20% of the total marks in each course (i.e., 20 marks), including lab are for internal examinations

and for project evaluation cum programme viva voce, it shall be 30 marks.

The internal assessment shall be based on a predetermined transparent system involving written

test, assignments, seminars and attendance in respect of theory courses and on

test/record/viva/attendance in respect of lab courses.

Components with percentage of marks of Internal Evaluation of Theory Courses are:

Test paper (50%) – 10 Marks

Attendance (25%) – 5 Marks

Assignment/Seminar/Viva (25%) – 5 Marks

Components with percentage of marks of Internal Evaluation of Lab Courses are:

Test paper (50%) – 10 Marks

Attendance (25%) – 5 Marks

Assignment/Lab involvement (25%) – 5 Marks

Attendance of each course will be evaluated as below:



Above 90% attendance – 5 Marks

85 to 89% – 4 Marks

80 to 84% – 3 Marks

76 to 79 % – 2 Marks

75% – 1 Marks

Internal evaluation for the project shall be generally based on content, method of presentation,

final conclusion, and orientation to research aptitude. The split up shall be:

Punctuality – 6 Marks

Use of Data – 6 Marks

Scheme/Organization of Report – 8 Marks

Viva-Voce – 10Marks

(If a fraction appears in internal marks, nearest whole number is to be taken)

To ensure transparency of the evaluation process, the internal assessment marks awarded to the

students in each course in a semester shall be notified on the notice board at least one week before

the commencement of external examination. There shall not be any chance for improvement for

internal marks. The course teacher(s) shall maintain the academic record of each student

registered for the course, which shall be forwarded to the University by the college Principal after

obtaining the signature of both course teacher and HOD.

The marks secured for internal examination only need be sent to university, by the colleges

concerned.

EXTERNAL EVALUATION:

There shall be University examinations for each course at the end of each semester. Practical

examinations shall be conducted by the University at the end of second, fourth and sixth semester.

External project evaluation cum programme viva-voce shall be conducted along with the project

evaluation at the end of the sixth semester.

External evaluation carries 80% of marks, i.e., 80 Marks, for each course.

External evaluation of even (2, 4 and 6) semesters will be conducted in centralized valuation

camps immediately after the examination. Answer scripts of odd semester (1, 3 and 5)

examination will be evaluated by home valuation. All question papers shall be set by the

university.



The model of the question paper for external examination (theory courses) of 3 Hours duration shall be

1. Section A:10 compulsory short answer type questions of 1 Marks each (Total 10 Marks)

2. Section B: 8 compulsory paragraph type questions of 2 Marks each (either a single question or can have subdivisions) (Total 16 Marks)

3. Section C:6 short essay type questions of 4 Marks each, to be attempted from a set of 9 questions – at least one question from each unit (either a single question or can have subdivisions) (Total 24 Marks)

4. Section D:3 long essay type questions of 10 Marks each, to be attempted from a set of 5 questions – at least one question from each unit (either a single question or can have subdivisions) (Total 30 Marks)

The external examination in theory courses is to be conducted with question papers set by

external experts. The evaluation of the answer scripts shall be done by examiners based on a well-

defined scheme of valuation and answer keys shall be provided by the University.

The external examination in practical courses shall be conducted bytwo examiners, one internal

and an external, appointed by the University.

The project evaluation with programme viva voce will be conducted by two examiners, one

internal and an external (appointed by the University), at the end of the sixth semester.

No practical examination will be conducted in odd semester. Practical examinations for B.C.A

program shall be conducted in the even semester 2, 4 and 6.

The model of the question paper for external examination (lab courses) of 3 Hours duration shall

be:

1. Section A: One marked question of 30 Marks from Programming Lab Part A is to be

attempted (Design - Algorithm/Flowchart/Interface: 10 Marks, Code: 10 Marks and

Result: 10 Marks. Total 30 Marks)

2. Section B: One marked question of 30 Marks from Programming Lab Part B is to be

attempted (Design - Algorithm/Flowchart/Interface: 10 Marks, Code: 10 Marks and

Result: 10 Marks. Total 30 Marks)



3. Section C:Lab viva voce (Total 10 Marks)

4. Section D:Lab Record (Total 10 Marks)

Project guidelines – Students must be encouraged to do projects in the latest tools or tools appropriate for their topic. Department should conduct monthly evaluation of the project and give necessary instructions to the students as and when required. Number of students in a project group must be limited to 4.

The scheme of evaluation for project cum programme viva voce shall be:

1. Relevance of the Topic, Statement of Objectives, Methodology (Reference/ Bibliography)

(Total 40 Marks)

2. Presentation, Quality of Analysis/Use of Statistical tools, Findings and recommendations

(Total 40 Marks)

3. Project cum Programme Viva Voce (Total 40 Marks)

REVALUATION:

In the new system of grading, revaluation is permissible. The prevailing rules for revaluation are

applicable.

Students can apply for photocopies of answer scripts of external examinations. Applications for

photocopies/scrutiny/revaluation should be submitted within 10 days of publication of results.

The fee for this shall be as decided by the university.

IMPROVEMENT COURSE

A maximum of two courses (Common, Core, Complementary or Open) can be improved in each

semester. Improvement of a particular semester can be done only once. The student shall avail the

improvement chance in the succeeding year after the successful completion of the semester

concerned. The internal marks already obtained will be carried forward to determine the

grades/marks in the improvement examination. If the candidate fails to appear for the

improvement examination after registration, or if there is no change in the results of the

improvement examination appeared, the marks/grades obtained in the first appearance will be

retained.

Improvement and supplementary examinations cannot be done simultaneously.



EVALUATION AND GRADINGMark system is followed instead of direct grading for each question (for both internal and external

examinations). For each course in the semester letter grade, grade point and % of marks are

introduced in 7- point indirect grading system. The grading on the basis of a total internal and

external mark will be indicated for each course and for each semester and for the entire program.

Indirect Grading System in 7 point scale is as below:

% of Marks Grade Interpretation Grade point (G)

Range of Grade Points Class

90 and above A+ Outstanding 6 5.5 to 6 First classwith

distinction80 to below 90 A Excellent 5 4.5 to 5.49

70 to below 80 B Very Good 4 3.5 to 4.49First class

60 to below 70 C Good 3 2.5 to 3.49

50 to below 60 D Satisfactory 2 1.5 to 2.49 Second class

40 to below 50 E Pass/Adequate 1 0.5 to 1.49 Pass

Below 40 F Failure 0 0 to 0.49 Fail

An aggregate of ‘E’ grade with 40% marks (after external and internal put together) is required in

each course for a pass and also for awarding a degree.

Appearance for Internal Assessment (IA) and End Semester Evaluation (ESE-external)) are

compulsory and no grade shall be awarded to a candidate if she/he is absent for IA/ESE or both.

For a pass in each course 40% marks or E grade is necessary

A student who fails to secure a minimum grade for a pass in a course is permitted to write the

examination along with the next batch.

After the successful completion of a semester, Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA) of a

student in that semester is calculated using the formula given below. For the successful

completion of a semester, a student should pass all courses. However, a student is permitted to

move to the next semester irrespective of SGPA obtained.

The Semester Grade Point Average can be calculated as



i.e.,

whereG1, G2, … are grade points of different courses; C1, C2, ... are credits of different courses

of the same semester and n is the total credits in that semester.

The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of the student is calculated at the end of a

program. The CGPA of a student determines the overall academic level of the student in a

program and is the criterion for ranking the students. CGPA can be calculated by the following

formula

The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) can be calculated as:

GRADE CARDS

The University shall issue to the students grade/marks card (by online) on completion of each

semester, which shall contain the following information:

i. Name of University

ii. Name of college

iii.Title of Under-Graduate Programme

iv.Semester concerned

v. Name and Register Number of student

vi.Code number, Title and Credits of each course opted in the semester

vii. Internal marks, External marks, total marks, Grade point (G) and letter grade for

each course in the semester

viii. The total credits, total credit points and SGPA in the semester (corrected to two

decimal places)

ix.Percentage of total marks



The final Grade/mark Card issued at the end of the final semester shall contain the details of all

courses taken during the entire program including those taken over and above the prescribed

minimum credits for obtaining the degree. However, for the compilation of CGPA only the best

performed courses, if any, with maximum grade points alone shall be taken subject to the

minimum credits requirements (120) for passing a specific degree. The final grade card shall

show the percentage of marks, CGPA (corrected to two decimal places) and the overall letter

grade of a student for the entire program. The final grade/mark card shall also include the grade

points and letter grade of common courses, core courses, complementary courses and open

courses, separately. This is to be done in a seven point indirect scale.

AWARD OF DEGREE The successful completion of all the courses (common, core, complementary and open courses)

prescribed for the BCA program with E grade (40 %) shall be the minimum requirement for the

award of BCA degree.

GRIEVANCE REDRESSAL COMMITTEE COLLEGE-LEVEL

The College shall form a Grievance Redressal Committee in each department comprising of

course teacher and one senior teacher as members and the Head of the department as Chairman.

This committee shall address all grievances relating to the internal assessment grades of the

students. There shall be a College-Level Grievance Redressal Committee comprising of Student

Advisor, two senior teachers and two staff council members (one shall be elected member) as

members and principal as Chairman.

UNIVERSITY-LEVEL

The University shall form a Grievance Redressal Committee as per the existing norms.



Bachelor of Computer Application (B.C.A)

Programme Structure

I Semester

Cou

rse

No

Course Code Course Title

Marks Contact Hours

Credit

Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

1 XXXXA01 Common EnglishCourse I 20 80 100 5 0 5 4

2 XXXXA02 Common EnglishCourse II 20 80 100 4 0 4 3

3 XXXXA07 Additional LanguageCourse I 20 80 100 4 0 4 4

4 BCA1B01 Computer Fundamentals & HTML 20 80 100 2 2 4 3

5 BCA1C01 Mathematical Foundation of ComputerApplications

20 80 100 4 0 4 3

6 BCA1C02 Discrete Mathematics 20 80 100 4 0 4 3

Total 6 Courses 600 23 2 25 20

II Semester

Cou

rse

No


Marks Contact Hours

Credit

Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

7 XXXXA03 Common EnglishCourse III 20 80 100 5 0 5 4

8 XXXXA04 Common EnglishCourse IV 20 80 100 4 0 4 3

9 XXXXA08 Additional LanguageCourse II 20 80 100 4 0 4 4

10 BCA2B02 Problem Solving using C 20 80 100 2 2 4 3



11 BCA2B03Programming Laboratory I: Lab Exam of 1st& 2nd Sem. HTML & Programming in C

20 80 100 0 0 0 2

12 BCA2C03Financial & Management Accounting

20 80 100 4 0 4 3

13 BCA2C04 Operations Research 20 80 100 4 0 4 3


III Semester

Cou

rse

No


Marks Contact Hours Credit

Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

14 XXXXA11 General Course I-Basic Numerical Skills 20 80 100 4 0 4 4

15 XXXXA12 General Course II- General Informatics 20 80 100 4 0 4 4

16 BCA3B04 Data Structures Using C 20 80 100 3 4 7 4

17 BCA3C05Computer Oriented Numerical &Statistical Methods

20 80 100 5 0 5 3

18 BCA3C06 Theory Of Computation 20 80 100 5 0 5 3


IV Semester

Cou

rse

No


Marks Contact Hours

Credit

Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

19 XXXXA13General Course III- Entrepreneurship Development

20 80 100 4 0 4 4

20 XXXXA14 General Course IV-Basics of Audio and

20 80 100 4 0 4 4



Video

21 BCA4B05 Database Management System and RDBMS 20 80 100 3 4 7 4

22 BCA4B06Programming Laboratory II: Lab Exam of 3rd& 4th Sem.Data Structures & RDBMS

20 80 100 0 0 0 2

23 BCA4C07 E-Commerce 20 80 100 5 0 5 3

24 BCA4C08 Computer Graphics 20 80 100 5 0 5 3


V Semester

Cou

rse

No


Marks Contact Hours

Credit

Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

25 BCA5B07 Java Programming 20 80 100 3 3 6 4

26 BCA5B08 Computer Organization And Architecture 20 80 100 5 0 5 4

27 BCA5B09 Web Programming Using PHP 20 80 100 3 3 6 4

28 BCA5B10 Principles of Software Engineering 20 80 100 4 0 4 4

29 XXX5DXX Open Course(Other Streams) 10 40 50 2 0 2 2

Project Work 0 0 0 0 2 2 0


VI Semester

Cou

rse

No



Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

30 BCA6B11 Android programming 20 80 100 4 1 5 4

31 BCA6B12 Operating Systems 20 80 100 4 1 5 432 BCA6B13 Computer Networks 20 80 100 5 0 5 4



33 BCA6B14Programming laboratory III- Java and Web Programming

20 80 100 0 0 0 2

34 BCA6B15Programming Laboratory IV: Lab Exam of Android & Linux shellProgramming

20 80 100 0 4 4 2

35 BCA6B16 Project and Viva Voce 30 120 150 0 2 2 3

36 BCA6B17x Elective 20 80 100 4 0 4 3




SEMESTER I

I Semester

Cou

rse

No


Marks Contact Hours

Credit

Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

1 XXXXA01 Common EnglishCourse I 20 80

100 5 0 5 4

2 XXXXA02 Common EnglishCourse II 20 80 100 4 0 4 3

3 XXXXA07 Additional LanguageCourse I 20 80 100 4 0 4 4

4 BCA1B01 Computer Fundamentals & HTML 20 80 100 2 2 4 3

5 BCA1C01 Mathematical Foundation of ComputerApplications 20 80 100 4 0 4 3

6 BCA1C02 Discrete Mathematics 20 80 100 4 0 4 3




SEMESTER I

BCA1B01 – COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS& HTML

Course Number: 4Contact Hours per Week: 4 (2T + 2P)Number of Credits: 3Number of Contact Hours: 60 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objectives To equip the students with fundamentals of Computer To learn the basics of Computer organization To equip the students to write algorithm and draw flow chart for solving simple problems To learn the basics of Internet and webpage design

Prerequisites

Background of the basic science at +2 level

Course Outline

Unit I [4 T]

Concepts of Hardware and Software: Computer Languages, Language Translators, Features of good language, Basics Computer Organization: Von Neumann Model, Input Unit, Output Unit, Storage Unit, Control Unit, Memory Hierarchy, Primary Storage, Cache Memory, Registers, Secondary Storage Devices, Basics of Hardware Components – SMPS, Motherboard, Add-on Cards, Ports, Memory, Adapters, Network cables, Basic Computer Configuration

Unit II [9 T]

Number Systems and Boolean Algebra – Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal Numbers, Arithmetic involving Number Systems, Inter Conversions of Number Systems, 1’s and 2’s Complements, Complement Subtractions, Digital Codes – Binary Coded Decimal (BCD), ASCII Code ,Unicode, Gray Code, Excess-3 Code. Boolean Algebra: Boolean Operations, Logic Expressions, Postulates, Rules and Laws of Boolean Algebra, De Morgan's Theorem, Minterms, Maxterms, SOP and POS form of Boolean Expressions for Gate Network, Simplification of Boolean Expressions using Boolean Algebra and Karnaugh Map Techniques (up to 4 variables)

[B.C.A (ACADEMIC YEAR 2017-18 ONWARDS)] June 1, 2017

19 | P a g e BoS in Computer Science (UG), University of Calicut

Unit III [7 T]

Fundamentals of Problem Solving – The Problem Solving Aspect, Top-down Design, Definition –Algorithm, Flowchart, Program - Properties of Flowcharts – Flowchart Symbols for Designing Application Programs, Sample Algorithms – Sum, Average, Finding Smallest Number, Checking Odd/Even Number, Prime Number, Quadratic Equation

Unit IV [5T + 15 L]

Basics of Web Design – www, W3C, Web Browser, Web Server, Web Hosting, Web Pages, DNS, URL, Introduction to HTML, XHTML, DHTML, HTTP.

Overview of HTML 5 – Basic Formatting Tags: heading, paragraph, break, underline, bold, italic, superscript, subscript, font and image, attributes: align, color, bgcolor, font face, border, size, navigation links using anchor tag: internal, external, mail and image, lists: ordered, unordered and definition, HTML media tags: audio and video

Unit V [5T+15 L]

Creating Simple Tables: row, col, heading, cell, border, spanning – Form Controls: Input types – text, password, text area, button, checkbox, radio button, select box, hidden controls, frames and frame sets

CSS: Introduction - Concept of CSS, Creating Style Sheet: inline and internal, CSS Properties, CSS Styling: Background, Text Format, Controlling Fonts - Working with Block Elements and Objects, CSS ID and Class

Text Books

1. Sinha. P.K, Computer Fundamentals, BPB Publications

2. Ram. B, Computer fundamentals, New Age International Pvt. Ltd Publishers

3. Rajaraman V and Radhakrishnan, An introduction to Digital computer Design, PHI,

4. HTML 5 Black book, Dream Tech Press, 2016 Edition

Reference Books

1. Thomas L Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, Universal Book Stall

2. Bartee T.C, Digital Computer Fundamentals, THM



BCA1C01 -Mathematical Foundations for Computer Applications

CA1C01 -- Mathematical Foundation of ComputerCourse Number: 5Contact Hours: 4 TNumber of Credits: 3Number of Contact Hours: 60 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objectives of the Course: To learn the basic principles of linear algebra and vectors. To learn the basic principles of differential and integral Calculus To learn the mathematical modeling using ordinary and partial differential equations

Course Outline

UNIT I (12T)

Linear Algebra and Vector Calculus: Matrices: Matrix definition, order of a matrix, types of matrices, addition of matrices, multiplication of matrices, various kinds of matrices, transpose of a matrix.

UNIT II (12T)

Linear system of equations and solutions using gauss elimination , Gauss Jordan, and Gauss Siedel methods.

Linear independence and rank , determinants, inverse, Eigen values. Vectors: Vectors in 2- and 3-space, dot and cross products

UNIT III (12T)

Differentiation: Limits (definition only).Derivative at a point, Derivative of a Function, Differentiation from first principle, Differentiation of important functions, Product rule, Quotient rule, Differentiation of a function of a function (problem based)

UNIT IV (12T)

Integration: Integral as Anti-derivative, Indefinite integral &constant of integration, Fundamental theorems, Elementary Standard results.

UNIT V (12T)

Methods of Integration, Integration through Partial Functions , Integration by parts. Definite Integral: Evaluation by Substitution, Properties of definite integrals (Problem Based)



Textbooks

1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley

References:

1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, John Bird, Elsevier Direct

2. Skills in Mathematics: Algebra, S.K.Goyal

3. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B S Grewal, Khanna Publishers

4. Higher Engineering Mathematics, Ramana, Tata McGraw Hill

5. Engineering Mathematics, P Kandasamy, S. Chand Group

BCA1C02 - Discrete Mathematics

Course Number: 6Contact Hours: 4 TNumber of Credits: 3Number of Contact Hours: 60 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objectives of the Course:

To learn the mathematical logic & Boolean Algebra

Prerequisites: Basic Mathematical knowledge

Course Outline

UNIT I (12T)

Mathematical Logic: Propositions and logical operators, Truth tables, equivalence and implementation, Laws of logic, Quantifiers.Settheory: Introduction, concept of set of theory relation, types of relation, equivalence relation.

UNIT II (12T)

Boolean Algebra and its properties, Algebra of propositions & examples, De-Morgan’s Laws, Partial order relations, greatest lower bound , least upper bound, Algebra of electric circuits & its applications. Design of simple automatic control system

UNIT III (12T)



Graph: Simple and multigraph, Incidence and degree, Isomorphism, Sub graphs and Union of graphs, connectedness, Walks, Paths and Circuits, Euler’s Formula, Eulerian graph, Hamiltonian graph, Chromatic Graphs, Planer Graphs, Travelling salesman problem, Complete, Regular and Bipartite graphs, Directed Graphs

UNIT IV (12T)

Trees: Properties of trees, pendant vertices. Centre of a tree, rooted and binary trees, spanning trees, spanning tree algorithms, fundamental. circuits; spanning trees of a weighted graph: cutsets and cut-vertices; fundamental cutsets; connectivity and separativity; network. flows; max-flow min-cut theorem.

UNIT V (12T)

Plan on graphs, dual graphs, Kuratowski's two graph, matrix representation of graphs, incidence matrix, directed graphs, digraphs, directed paths and connectedness. Eular digraphs

Textbooks

1. Discrete Mathematical Structures with applications to Computer Science, J.K. Tremblay and

R.Manohar, McGraw Hill

References:

1. Elements of Discrete Mathematics, C. L. Liu, TMH Edition

2. Discrete mathematical Structures, Kolman, Busby, Ross, Pearson

3. Graph theory, Harry, F., Addison Wesley.

4. Finite Mathematics, S. Lipchutz, Schaum Series, MGH.

5. Graph Theory, Deo. N, PHI



II SemesterC

ours

e N

o


Marks Contact Hours

Credit

Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

7 XXXXA03 Common EnglishCourse III 20 80 100 5 0 5 4

8 XXXXA04 Common EnglishCourse IV 20 80 100 4 0 4 3

9 XXXXA08 Additional LanguageCourse II 20 80 100 4 0 4 4

10 BCA2B02 Problem Solving using C 20 80 100 2 2 4 3

11 BCA2B03Programming Laboratory I: Lab Exam of 1st& 2nd Sem. HTML & Programming in C

20 80 100 0 0 0 2

12 BCA2C03Financial & Management Accounting

20 80 100 4 0 4 3

13 BCA2C04 Operations Research 20 80 100 4 0 4 3


SEMESTER II



BCA2B02 – Problem Solving Using C


Objective

To equip the students with fundamental principles of Problem Solving aspects. To learn the concept of programming To study C language To equip the students to write programs for solving simple computing problems

Prerequisites

Knowledge of basic computer operations

Course Outline

Unit I [4T+2L]

Introduction to C Programming - Overview and Importance of C, C Program Structure, Sample programs.

Familiarization of Integrated Development Environment - Invoking IDE, Opening a new window in IDE, Writing, Saving and Compiling a C program, making an Executable File.

Elements of C Language and Program Constructs: Character Set, C Tokens, Keywords and Identifier, Constants, Variables, Data types, Variable Declaration and Assignment of Values, Symbolic Constant Definition.

Unit II [5T+2L]

C Operators - Arithmetic operators, relational operators, and logical operators, assignment operators, increment and decrement operators, conditional operators, special operators, arithmetic expressions, evaluation of expressions, precedence of arithmetic operators,

Type conversion in expressions, operator precedence and associativity, Mathematical Functions, I/O operations - Library functions.

Unit III [7T+8L]



Data input output functions - Simple C programs – Flow of Control - Decision making with IF statement, Simple IF statement, If-else statement, Nesting of If-else and else-if Ladder, Switch statement, Conditional operator, goto statement. Looping - While loop, Do-While, and For Loops, Nesting of loops, jumps in loop, skipping of loops.

Unit IV [7T + 9L]

Arrays and Strings - One dimensional array, two dimensional and multi-dimensional arrays, strings and string manipulation functions.

The Concept of modularization and User defined functions - Definition - Multifunction Program, proto-types, Passing arguments, calling functions, various categories of functions, Nesting of functions and recursion, functions and arrays, scope and lifetime of variables in functions, multi-file programs.

Structures & Union structure definition - giving values to members, structure initialization, comparison of structure variables, arrays of structures, arrays within structures, structures within arrays, structures and functions, Unions, bit fields.

Unit V [7T +9 L]

Pointers - Understanding pointers, accessing the address of a variable, declaring and initializing pointers, accessing a variable through its pointer, pointer expressions, pointer and arrays, pointer and character string, pointers and functions, pointers and structures, pointer to pointer dynamic memory allocation.

Files: Creating, Processing, Opening and Closing a data file, command line operations

Textbooks

1. Balaguruswami. E, Programming in ANSI C, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2008

References

1. Brian W. Kernighan & Dennis M. Ritchie, The C Programming Language, Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition 1998

2. Yashavant P. Kenetkar, Let us C3. ByranGotfried, Schaums Outline series Programming with C4. Ashok N. Kamthane, Programming in C, Pearson, 2nd Edition



BCA2B03 - Programming Laboratory I: Programming in C & HTML

Course Number: 11Contact Hours per Week: 0Number of Credits: 2Number of Contact Hours: 0.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objective

To make the students learn programming environments. To practice procedural programming concepts. To make the students equipped to solve mathematical or scientific problems using C To learn how to implement various data structures. To provide opportunity to students to use data structures to solve real life problems.

Prerequisites

Knowledge in operating computer. Knowledge in Computer fundamentals.

Course Outline:

Part A: C Programming

Write programs to do the following:

1. Find the sum of digits and reverse of a number.2. Find the distance between two points.3. Find the factorial of a number.4. Find the Nth Fibonacci number using recursion.5. Print the reverse of a string using recursion.6. Solve the problem of Towers of Hanoi using recursion.7. Find Sin(x) and Cos(x) in the range 0o to 180o (interval 30o) using functions.8. Create a pyramid using ‘*’.9. Display the multiplication tables up to the number N.10. Find the number of words in a sentence.11. Perform matrix addition, subtraction, multiplication, inverse, and transpose using pointers

and functions.12. Replace a part of the string with another string.13. Find the power of a number using structure and union.



14. Find the average of prime numbers in a group of N numbers using function.15. Find the sum of the series S = 1 + (½)2 + (1/3)3+ ....to 0.0001% accuracy.16. Display the rightmost digit in a floating point number.17. Create a pattern with the number N.

e.g. N = 39174 Pattern: 3 9 1 7 49 1 7 41 7 47 44

18. Display the short form of a string. E.g. Computer Science : CS19. Currency conversion (any four currencies)20. Find the currency denomination of a given amount.21. Prepare sales bill using array of structures.22. Addition and subtraction of complex numbers using structure.23. Find the armstrong numbers within a given range.24. Check for palindrome string/number.25. Check for leap year.26. Find the number of special characters in a given string.27. Store and read data from a text file.28. Write odd and even numbers into separate files.29. Swapping of two numbers using call-by-reference method.30. Copy the contents of one file into another one using command line parameters.31. Base conversion of numbers.32. Calculate the percentage of marks obtained for N students appeared for examination in M

subjects using array of structures.33. Display a table of the values of function y = exp (-x) for x varying from 0.0 to N in steps

of 0.134. Design a Scientific Calculator and include as many functions as possible.35. Merge two numeric arrays in sorted order.36. Fill upper triangle with 1, lower triangle with -1 and diagonal elements with 0.37. Count the occurrence of different words in a sentence.38. Convert an input amount into words.39. Convert a time in 24 hour clock to a time in 12 hour clock using structure.40. Change the date/time format using structure.

Part B: HTML lab work

List of Exercises:

1) Design a web page to display the information of Computer Science department of your college by using basic page tags. Display the information in the form of paragraphs/sentences. Also use effects to highlight the information like bold, italic or underline.



2) (a) Create a webpage with HTML describing your department. Use paragraph and list tags.(b) Apply various colors to suitably distinguish key words. Also apply font styling like

italics, underline and two other fonts to words you find appropriate. Also use header tags.

3) Use the above webpage toa) Create links on the words e.g. “Wi-Fi” and “LAN” to link them to Wikipedia pages.b) Insert an image and create a link such that clicking on image takes user to other page.c) Change the background color of the page. At the bottom create a link to take user to the

top of the page.

4) Design a page to display the information in table format. Display the list of colleges offering B.Sc. Computer Science along with the details College Name, Address, Contact no. Address column will consist of sub columns as House Name, Post, City and pin code.(Purpose: - Introduction of table tags along with the sub columns and other supportive tags like caption, cell spacing, cell padding etc.)

5) Create a webpage to create a photo Album. When the user clicks on the Image and Video Link it should open the corresponding album.

6) Design web pages which display the product images and its information with it. The products are computer, printers and laptop. The information displayed of product should be configuration/ technical details, price etc.(Purpose: - Study image tag. Display image in tabular form along with the other text information.)

7) Design a page to display the B.Sc. Computer Science syllabus by using List tag.(Purpose: - Introduce list tag to display data in ordered or unordered format as main, sub main, sub-sub main, etc by using nos. or special types of bullets.)

8) Create HTML pages using Hyper Links

i. File Link

ii. Single Page Link

9) Create a hyperlink to show the information and syllabus of B.Sc. Computer Science. When click on the links each page should display the objective of respective course, Lesson plan, Course duration etc.(Purpose: - Introduce anchor tag to create links between pages. One can able to transfer the control to next page, previous page or to a specific page like Home page.)

10) Design an HTML page describing your University infrastructure. Use tables to provide layout to your HTML page.

11) Use <span> and <div> tags to provide a layout to the above HTML page instead of a table layout.

12) HTML pages with Tables

i. Use Tables to layout HTML pages



ii. Use <span> and <div> tags to provide a layout to the above page instead

of table layout

iii. Use Frames to divide the page contents into different parts

iv. Embed Audio and Video into your HTML webpage

13) Design a page to display the information in table format. Display the list of colleges offering Computer Science along with the details College Name, Address, Contact no.Address column will consist of sub columns as Post Office, City, District and Pin code.

(Purpose: - Introduction of table tags along with the sub columns and other supportive tags like caption, cell spacing, cell padding etc.)

14) Create an HTML page to show the use of Navigation Frame

15) Create an HTML page to show the use of Floating Frame

16) Create an HTML page to show the use of Inline Frame

17) Design web pages to display the information about your college and UG Programmes offered in your college. Divide the page into three frames. The top frame should display the title of the college, left frame shout display the UGProgrammes and the right frame display the details of selected programme like fees, syllabus etc.

(Purpose: - Study frame tag which allow to divide the screen into no of sections.)

18) Design web pages to accept the student information. Student should enter the details like first name, last name, middle name, city up to 25 characters, and address up to 50 characters. Show the combo box to select the qualification, option button for gender selection. Display the information accepted in a formatted form.

(Purpose: - Study form tag which allow to design the formatted screen to accept the information from the user.)

19) Design a website to show the use of the following input controls

i. Checkbox,

ii. Radio button

20) Design a website to show the use of the following input controls

i. Select box,

ii. Hidden controls

21) Design CSS style sheet to define settings for heading, body, table and links.

(Purpose: - Study CSS style sheet facility. This allows setting the default settings for all the pages.)



22) Design a webpage to show the use of External Style Sheets

Include any 20 C programs and 15 HTML programs in the record book.

Note: All lab works should be neatly recorded in a Laboratory Record Book in written form. However Program results can be pasted in the left hand side of the fare record. All students should have a rough record (observation note book) too, in which they write all the works to be carried out in the lab prior to his/her entering the lab. He/She may also note down the i/p and o/p that he gives for program verification in the observation note book (rough record).



BCA2C03-Financial & Management Accounting


Objectives

To get a general introduction on accounting and its general application. To get a general understanding on various tools for financial statement analysis. To get a general understanding on accounting procedures up to the preparation of various

financial statements.To get a general understanding of the important tools for managerial decision making.

Prerequisites:

Basic Accounting knowledge

Course Outline

UNIT I (12T)

Principles of accounting - Some fundamentals concepts and conventions - Systems of accounting double entry principles - Advantages of Double entry system - personal, real, nominal accounts.

UNIT II (12T)

Cash book - forms of cash books - subdivisions of Journal - Ledgers - limitations of financial accounting - Trial balance - Final accounts - Trading P/L A/c - Balance sheet

UNIT III (12T)

Invitation to management accounting: Analysis and interpretation of trading accounts and financial statements - Horizontal Vertical analysis - Common size Balance sheet - common size income statement - comparative income and balance sheet - trend analysis.

UNIT IV (12T)

Marginal costing - Breakeven point - cost volume profit analysis - margin of safety

UNIT V (12T)



Standard costing - analysis of variance - material - labour - O/H - sales variables - Budget and Budgetary control - different types of budgets - master budget - sales budget - production budget - flexible budget - cash budget - advantages – preparation

Textbooks

1. Financial Management, Pandey I.M Vikas publishing house

References:

1. Elements of Accounting, Kellock.J, Heinmann

2. Advanced Accountancy, S.N Maheshwari, Vikas Publishing

3. Cost and Management Accounting, A.Vinod, Calicut UniversityCentral Co-Operative

Stores

BCA2C04: Operations Research



To get a general introduction in solving linear programming problems. To get a general understanding of network analysis technique. To get a general understanding of different mathematical models.

Prerequisites:

Basic Mathematical knowledge

Course Outline

UNIT I (12T)

Operation research and LPP: Operation Research and Decision making, Advantages of O.R approach in decision making, Application of O.R, uses and limitations of O.R.

UNIT II (12T)



LPP: Introduction, mathematical formulation the problem, canonical and standard forms of LPP. Simplex method, artificial variable technique - Big M and two phase method - problem of degeneracy - concept of duality - dual simplex method.

UNIT III (12T)

Transportation model - North West corner rule, Least cost method, Vogel’s approximation method - loops in transportation table - Degeneracy in transportation table - Transshipment problem.

UNIT IV (12T)

Assignment model: Mathematical formulation of the problem - assignment algorithm impossible algorithms - travelling salesman problem

UNIT V (12T)

Network Scheduling: Concept of network, basic components, PERT and CPM, Rules of network construction, maximal flow problem, project scheduling critical path calculations, advantages of network (PERT/CPM).

Sequencing models: processing n jobs through two machines, n jobs through three machines, two jobs through m machines.

Textbooks

1. Operation Research, Kanti Swarup, Gupta P.K Man Mohan, Sultan Chand & Sons

References:

1. Operation Research: An Introduction, Tahah. A, McMillan 1982



III SemesterC

ours

e N

o



Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

14 XXXXA11 General Course I-Basic Numerical Skills 20 80 100 4 0 4 4

15 XXXXA12 General Course II- General Informatics 20 80 100 4 0 4 4

16 BCA3B04 Data Structures Using C 20 80 100 3 4 7 4

17 BCA3C05Computer Oriented Numerical & Statistical Methods

20 80 100 5 0 5 3

18 BCA3C06 Theory Of Computation 20 80 100 5 0 5 3


BCA3B04 – Data Structures Using C


Objective

To introduce the concept of data structures To make the students aware of various data structures To equip the students implement fundamental data structures

Prerequisites

Knowledge in C Programming Language

Course Outline



UNIT – I [8 T + 5 P]

Introduction: Elementary data organization, Data Structure definition, Data type vs. data structure, Categories of data structures, Data structure operations, Applications of data structures, Algorithms complexity and time-space trade off, Big-O notation.

Strings: Introduction, strings, String operations, Pattern matching algorithms

UNIT – II [10 T + 14 P]

Arrays: Introduction, Linear arrays, Representation of linear array in memory, Traversal, Insertions, Deletion in an array, Multidimensional arrays, Parallel arrays, sparse matrix.

Linked List: Introduction, Array vs. linked list, Representation of linked lists in memory, Traversal, Insertion, Deletion, Searching in a linked list, Header linked list, Circular linked list, Two-way linked list, , Applications of linked lists, Algorithm of insertion/deletion in Singly Linked List (SLL).

UNIT – III [10 T + 12 P]

Stack: primitive operation on stack, algorithms for push and pop. Representation of Stack as Linked List and array, Stacks applications: polish notation, recursion.

Introduction to queues: Primitive Operations on the Queues, Circular queue, Priority queue, Representation of Queues as Linked List and array, Applications of queue: Algorithm on insertion and deletion in simple queue and circular queue.

UNIT – IV [10 T + 12 P]

Trees - Basic Terminology, representation, Binary Trees, Tree Representations using Array & Linked List, Basic operation on Binary tree: insertion, deletion and processing, Traversal of binary trees: In order, Pre-order & post-order, Algorithm of tree traversal with and without recursion, Binary Search Tree, Operation on Binary Search Tree, expression trees, implementation using pointers, applications.

UNIT – V [10 T + 14 P]

Introduction to graphs, Definition, Terminology, Directed, Undirected & Weighted graph, Representation of graphs, graph traversal- depth-first and breadth-first traversal of graphs, applications.

Searching: sequential searching, binary searching, Hashing – linear hashing, hash functions, hash table searching; Sorting: Quick Sort, Exchange sort, Selection sort and Insertion sort.

Textbooks



1. Seymour Lipschutz, “Data Structures”, Tata McGraw- Hill Publishing Company Limited, Schaum’s Outlines, New Delhi.

2. YedidyanLangsam, Moshe J. Augenstein, and Aaron M. Tenenbaum, “Data Structures Using C”, Pearson Education., New Delhi.

3. Horowitz and Sahani, “Fundamentals of data Structures”, Galgotia Publication Pvt. Ltd., NewDelhi.

Reference books

1. Applications”, Mcgraw- Hill International Student Edition, New York.2. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Addison- Wesley,

(An Imprint of Pearson Education), Mexico City.3. A.K.Sharma, Data Structures Using C, Pearson, Second edition, 20114. Nair A.S., Makhalekshmi, Data Structures in C, PHI, Third edition 2011.

BCA3C05- Computer Oriented Numerical & Statistical Methods

Course Number: 17Contact Hours per week: 5 TNumber of Credits: 3Number of Contact Hours: 75 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks


To learn the floating point arithmetic To learn how to solve linear equations To learn the numerical differentiation and integration To learn basics of statistics, probability theory

Prerequisites:

Background of the basic Mathematics

Course Outline

UNIT I (7T)

Floating Point Arithmetic - Errors, Significant digits and Numerical Instability, Roots of Algebraic Equations - Bisection Method - Method of False Position - Newton Raphson Method.

UNIT II (17T)



Interpolation and Approximation–Lagrange & Newton; Interpolations- Finite Difference Operators, Interpolating; Polynomials using finite differences, Simpson’s 1/3rd rule ,Trapezoidal method.

UNIT III (17T)

Basics statistics: Measures of central tendencies - Mean, Median, Mode, Geometric mean and Harmonic mean. Measures of dispersion - Range, quartile deviation, Lorenz curve. Mean deviation and standard deviation.

UNIT IV (17T)

Curve fitting- Principles of least squares, fitting of straight lines. Correlation (Bivariate case only) Pearson’s coefficient of correlation. Rank correlation and Regression analysis. Probability theory: Random experiment. Sample point, sample space, events, union, intersection and compliment of events.

UNIT V (17T)

Random variables and probability distribution, Discrete and continuous random variables- density function- distribution- density function.

References:

1. Numerical Methods in Engineering, Salvadori & Baron, PHI

2. Numerical Methods for Scientific and Engineering Computation, M.K. Jain, SRK,

Iyengar, R.K. Jain, New Age International

3. Introduction to Mathematical Statistics, Hogg R V Craig A T, Macmillan

4. Mathematical Statistics, Freund J E, Waple R E, Prentice Hall of India.

5. Probability and Statistics for Engineers, Miller I Freund J E, Prentice Hall of India.



BCA3C06 –Theory of Computation

Course Number: 18Contact Hours per week: 5 TNumber of Credits: 4Number of Contact Hours: 75 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objectives:

To get a general introduction to Theory of computer science To get a general understanding on different languages, grammar, automata

Prerequisites:

Basic knowledge in discrete structures and graph theory.

Course Outline

UNIT I (10T)

Introduction to Mathematical preliminaries: Sets, Functions and Relations, graphs and trees, Strings and their Properties, Proof techniques: By induction, by contradiction.

UNIT II (10T)

Formal languages: Definitions and examples, Chomsky classification of languages, Languages and their relation, Recursive and Recursively enumerable sets, Languages and automata.

UNIT III (20T)

Theory of Automata: Definition of automaton, description of a finite automaton, DFA, transition systems, properties of transition functions, acceptability of a string by a finite automaton, Non deterministic finite state machines: with epsilon moves and without epsilon moves, equivalence of DFA and NDFA, Mealy and Moore Models, minimization of finite automata. Regular sets and grammar: Regular expressions, Finite automata and regular expressions, closure properties of regular sets, Algebraic laws for regular expressions, regular sets and regular grammars

UNIT IV (17T)

Context free languages: Context free languages and derivation trees, Ambiguity in context free grammars, Simplification of context free languages, normal forms for context free languages.

UNIT V (18T)



Pushdown automata: Definition, Acceptance by PDA, Pushdown automata and Context-free languages, Parsing and Pushdown Automata. Turing Machines: Turing machine model, representation of Turing machines, languages accepted by Turing machine.

References:

1. Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages & Computations, J.E Hopcroft, R Motwani

& J. D. Ullman

2. Elements of theory of Computation, Second edition, H.R. Lewis and C.H. Papadimitriou,

Pearson education.

3. An Introduction to the Theory of Computer Science, Languages and Machines-Thomas

A. Sudkamp, Third Edition, Pearson Education.

4. An Introduction to Formal languages and Automata- Peter Linz

5. Theory of Computer Science- Automata, Languages and Computation- K.L.P. Mishra, N

Chandrasekaran, PHI

IV Semester

Cou

rse

No


Marks Contact Hours

Credit

Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al19 XXXXA13

General Course III- Entrepreneurship Development

20 80 100 4 0 4 4

20 XXXXA14General Course IV-Basics of Audio and Video

20 80 100 4 0 4 4

21 BCA4B05 Database Management System and RDBMS 20 80 100 3 4 7 4

22 BCA4B06Programming Laboratory II: Lab Exam of 3rd& 4th Sem.Data Structures & RDBMS

20 80 100 0 0 0 2

23 BCA4C07 E-Commerce 20 80 100 5 0 5 3

24 BCA4C08 Computer Graphics 20 80 100 5 0 5 3




BCA4B05-Database Management System & RDBMS

Course Number: 21Contact Hours per week: 3T+ 4LNumber of Credits: 4Number of Contact Hours: 105 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objectives:

To learn the basic principles of database and database design To learn the basics of RDBMS To learn the concepts of database manipulation SQL To study PL/SQL language

Prerequisites:

Basic knowledge of the functional units computer of computers and their functioning along with basic programming knowledge

Course Outline

Unit I [8 T+3L]

Database System concepts and applications Introduction to databases, File Systems vs. DBMS, Advantages and Disadvantages of using DBMS Approach, Database administrators and user, Data Models, Schemas, and Instances, Types of Data Models, Three Schema Architecture and Data Independence, Database Languages and Interfaces.

Unit II [8 T+4L]

Entity-Relationship Model - Conceptual Data Models for Database Design Entity Relationship Models, Concept of Entity, Entity Sets, Relationship Sets, Attributes, Domains, Constraints, Keys, Strong and Weak Entities, Concepts of EER.

Relational Data Model Relations, Domains and Attributes, Tuples, Keys. Integrity Rules, Relational Algebra and Operations, Relational Calculus and Domain Calculus, Relational Database Design using ER to Relational Mapping.

Unit III [10 T+10L]

Relational Database Design - Relational database design Anomalies in a Database, Normalization Theory, Functional Dependencies, First, Second and Third Normal Forms,



Relations with more than one Candidate Key, Good and Bad Decompositions, Boyce Codd Normal Form, Multivalued Dependencies and Fourth Normal Form, Join Dependencies and Fifth Normal Form.

Unit IV [10 T+20L]

SQL Concepts: Basics of SQL, DDL, DML, DCL, Tables – Create, Modify and Delete table structures, Rename and Drop tables, Defining constraints – Primary key, foreign key, unique, not null, check, IN operator

Select Command, Logical Operators, Functions - aggregate functions, Built-in functions –numeric, date, string functions, set operations, sub-queries, correlated sub-queries, Use of group by, having, order by, join and its types, Exist, Any, All. View - Creation, Renaming the column of a view, destroys view.

Unit V [10 T+22L]

Transaction Management and Concurrency Control - Transaction Properties (ACID), states, Commit, Rollback; Concurrency Control Lost update problems, Locks, two phase locking.

Programming with SQL: Data types: Base and Composite, Attributes. Variables – Constants - Using set and select commands, Control Structures: IF, IF THEN ELSE, IF THEN ELSEIF, CASE. Loops: LOOP, EXIT, CONTINUE, WHILE, FOR, and FOREACH - Looping Through Arrays - Looping Through Query Results. Security: Locks: Table-level Lock, Row-level Lock, Deadlock, Advisory Lock. Cursors: Bound and Unbound Cursors, Declaration, Opening, Working with cursors: FETCH, MOVE, UPDATE/DELETE, CLOSE, Looping through a Cursor. Concept of Stored Procedures – Advantages and Disadvantages – Creation – Parameters Setting for Function- Alter – Drop – Grant and Revoke - Passing and Returning data to/from Stored Procedures - Using stored procedures within queries – Triggers: Creation, Modification, Deletion, Error Handling: Control Structures, Cursors, Functions, Triggers.

Textbooks:

1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F Korth, S.Sudharshan, Database System Concepts, 6thEdition

2. W. Gilmore, Beginning PHP and PostgreSQL 8: From Novice to Professional, Goels Computer Hut (2007), ISBN: 9788181286000

3. PosgreSQL Official Documentation Online

References:

1. Alex Krigel and Boris M.Trukhnov, SQL Bible, Wiley pubs

2. Paul Nielsen, Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Bible, Wiley Dreamtech India Pubs.

3. CJ Date, Introduction to Database Systems, Addison Wesley.



4. Ramkrishnan, Database Management Systems, McGraw Hill

BCA4B06- Programming Laboratory II: Data Structures & RDBMS

Course Number: 22Contact Hours per Week: 0PNumber of Credits: 2Number of Contact Hours: 0 hoursCourse Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objective

To make the students equipped to solve mathematical or scientific problems using C To learn how to implement various data structures. To provide opportunity to students to use data structures to solve real life problems.

Prerequisites

Knowledge in operating computer. Theoretical knowledge in Data structures. Knowledge in C Programming.

Course Outline

Part A: Data structure – Lab Questions

1. Sort a given list of strings2. Reverse a string using pointers.3. Implement Pattern matching algorithm. 4. Search an element in the 2-dimensional array 5. Append 2 arrays6. Merge two sorted array into one sorted array. 7. Search an element in the array using iterative binary search. 8. Search an element in the array using recursive binary search. 9. Implement sparse matrix10. Implement polynomial using arrays11. Implement singly linked list of integers.12. Delete a given element from a singly linked list13. Sort a singly linked list.



14. Delete an element from a singly linked list15. Implement a doubly linked list of integers16. Implement a circular linked list.17. Implement polynomial using linked list18. Addition of 2 polynomials19. Implement Stack using array20. Implement Stack using linked list21. Infix expression into its postfix expression22. Implement Queue using array23. Implement Queue using linked list24. Implement a binary search tree of characters.25. Traverse a binary search tree non recursively in preorder26. Traverse a binary search tree non recursively in inorder27. Traverse a binary search tree non recursively in postorder28. Traverse a binary search tree recursively in preorder29. Traverse a binary search tree recursively inorder30. Traverse a binary search tree recursively postorder.31. Delete an element from a binary search tree.32. Search an element in a binary search tree33. Implement linear sort34. Implement bubble sort35. Implement exchange sort36. Implement selection sort. 37. Implement insertion sort. 38. Implement quick sort. 39. Implement merge sort. 40. Implement heap sort

Part B: DBMS– Lab Questions

1. Create a table employee with fields (EmpID,EName, Salary, Department, Age). Insert some records. Write SQL queries using aggregate functions for

A. Display the total number of employees.B. Display the age of the oldest employee of each department.C. Display departments and the average salariesD. Display the lowest salary in employee tableE. Display the highest salary in sales department;

2. A trading company wants to keep the data of their Order Processing Application using the following relations.

Customer_Master



Customer_Number - Primary Key Customer_Name - Not NULLAddress -Pincode -

Order_Master

Order_Number - Primary KeyOrder_date - Not NULLCustomer_Number - Refers Customer_master tableOrder_amount - Not NULL

Order_Detail

Line_Number - Primary KeyOrder_Number - Primary KeyItem_No - Not NULL, Refers ITEM tableQuantity - Not NULLITEM

Item_No - Primary KeyUnitPrice - Not NULL

SHIPMENT

Order_Number - Primary KeyWarehouse_No - Primary Key, Refers Warehouse tableShip_Date - Not NULL with Integrity Check

WAREHOUSE

Warehouse_No - Primary KeyCity - Not NULL

A. Create the above tables by properly specifying the primary keys and foreign keys.B. Enter at least five tuples for each relation.C. Produce a listing: Cust_Name, No_of_orders, Avg_order_amount, where the middle

column is the total number of orders by the customer and the last column is the average order amount for that customer.

D. List the Order_Number for orders that were shipped from all the warehouses that the company has in a specific city.

E. Demonstrate the deletion of an item from the ITEM table and demonstrate a method of handling the rows in the ORDER_ITEM table that contains this particular item.



3. In this session you need to create database for an Employee management system of an ABC organization. The details about different tables are given below. According to that you can proceed further and create tables using PostgreSQL/ MySQL

Create the following tables with the specified constraints:

Department:

Department Number - Primary KeyDepartment Name - Not NULL uniqueManager ID - Refers to EmployeeID of employee table.ManagerDate of Joining - Not NULL.

Employee:

First Name - Not NULLMiddle InitialsLast Name - Not NULLEmployee ID - Primary KeyDate of Birth - Not NULLAddressGender - M or FSalary - Range of 5000 to 25000Date of JoiningDepartment Number - Refers to Department Number of Department table.

Department location:

Department Number - Refers to Department number of department table.Department Location - Not NULL.Department number & Department location are combined Primary Key

Project:

Project Name - Not NULL.Project Number - Primary Key.Project Location - Not NULL.Department number - Refers to department number of Department table.

Works-on:

Employee ID - Not NULL refers to Employee ID of Employee table.Project Number - Not NULL refers to Project number of Project table.Hours - Not NULL.



Employee ID & Project Number are combined primary key.

Dependent:

Employee ID - Refer to employee table Employee ID fieldDependent Name - Gender - M or FDate of Birth - Not NULLRelationship - Not NULLNow enter a few sets of meaningful data and answer the following queries.

A. List the department wise details of all the employees.B. Find out all those departments that are located in more than one location.C. Find the list of projects.D. Find out the list of employees working on a project.E. List the dependents of the employee whose employee id is 001

4. These sessions is similar to the previous one, but in this session, assume that you are developing a prototype database of the College library management system, for that you need to create the following tables: Book Records Book details Member details and Book issue details

Book Records:

Accession NumberISBN Number

Books:

ISBN NumberAuthorPublisherPrice

Members:

Member IDMember NameMaximum Number of books that can be issuedMaximum Number of days for which book can be issued

Book Issue:

Member ID



Accession NumberIssue DateReturn DateYou must create constraints, including referential integrity constraints, as appropriate. Please note accession number is unique for each book. A book, which has no return date, can be considered as issued book. Enter suitable data into the tables. Now answer the following:

A. Insert data in all the three tables (use insert).B. Insert appropriate description associated with each table and the column (use

comment).C. Display the structure of the tables.D. Display the comments that you have inserted.E. Using SELECT statement, write the queries for performing the following

function:a. Get the list of all books (No need to find number of copies).b. Get the list of all members.c. Get the Accession number of the books which are available in the library.d. On return of a book by a member calculate the fine on that book.e. List of books issued on 01-Jan-2005.f. Get the list of all books having price greater than Rs. 500/-g. Get the list of members who did not have any book issued at any time.h. Get the list of members who have not returned the book.i. Display member ID and the list of books that have been issued to him/her

from time to time.j. Find the number of copies of each book (A book accession number would

be different but ISBN number would be the same).k. Find the number of copies available of a book of given ISBN number.l. Get the member ID and name of the members to whom no more books can

be issued, because they have already got as many books issued as the number for which they are entitled.

5. This session is based on Lab 2 where you have created a library management system. In this session you have different query specification.

You must create appropriate forms, reports, graphs, views and data filtering, use of multilevel report, etc. to answer these queries.

A. Get the list of ISBN-Number, Book name, available copies of the books of which available copies are greater than zero.

B. Get the list of ISBN-Number, Book name, Total copies, available copies of the book of which available copies are greater than zero. List should be displayed in alphabetical order of book name.



C. Get the list of ISBN number, Book name, Author, total copies, cost (cost is price total copies). List should be displayed in descending order of cost.

D. Get the list of books issued to each member.E. Write query to know the maximum and average price of the books.F. Get the list of all existing members and the number of days for which a member is

allowed to keep the book. Also find out the members who have got the maximum number of books issued.

G. Get the list of member codes of those members who have more than two books issued.

H. Find the details of the books presently issued to a member.I. Create the history of issue of a book having a typical accession number.J. To set the width of the book name to 35.

6. Create the following table and perform the necessary tasks defined below one by one. You must use the query tools/ SQL/ Reports/ Forms/ Graphs/Views/ using client/server wherever needed.1. Create the following table named customer

Column name type size

Customer ID

Name

Area

Phone

Character

Character

Character

Numeric

10

25

3

7

Insert the appropriate data into table and do the following.

Update Phone numbers of all customers to have a prefix as your city STD Code Print the entire customer table List the names of those customers who have e as second letter in their names. Find out the Customer belonging to area ‘abc’ Delete record where area is NULL. Display all records in increasing order of name. Create a table temp from customer having customer-id, name, and area fields only Display area and number of records within each area (use GROUP by clause) Display all those records from customer table where name starts with a or area is

‘abc’. Display all records of those where name starts with ‘a’ and phone exchange is 55.



7. Answer the following queries using Library system as created earlier. You must create a view to know member name and name of the book issued tothem, use any inbuilt function and operators like IN, ANY, ALL,EXISTS.a. List the records of members who have not been issued any book using EXISTS

operator.b. List the members who have got issued at least one book (use IN / ANY operator).c. List the books which have maximum Price using ALL operator.d. Display Book Name, Member Name, and Issue date of Book. Create a view of this

query of the currently issued books.

8. Create a table of Employee (emp_number, name, dept_number, salary) and Department (dept_ number, dept_name). Insert some records in the tables through appropriate forms having integrity checks. Add some records in employee table where department value is not present in department table. Now answer the following query:a. Display all records from employee table where department is not found in department

table.b. Display records from employee table in a report format with proper headings. This

report must also contain those records where department number does not match with any value of department table.

c. Display those employee records who have salary less than the salary of person whose emp_number= A100.

d. Create another table: SalesData (RegionCode, City, SalespersonCode, SalesQty).e. Display records where salesperson has achieved sales more than average sales of all

sales persons of all the regions.

9. Create the following tables:

Order party: (Order number, Order date, customer code)Order: Order number, Item code, QuantityThe key to the second table is order-number + item-codeCreate a form for data entry to both the tables.

10. Create a table shop with fields Item_ID, Item_Name, Price, and Quantity. Write a procedure 'sales' to update the quantity by accepting Item_ID and Quantity as argument. Write PostgreSQL block to invoke the procedure

11. Implement student information system12. SQL scripts to display various reports like Result of an Examination, Salary Report, Sales

Report, Sales reports grouped on Sales person or item, etc13. Write simple PostgreSQL anonymous blocks for displaying whole numbers from 1 to

100, odd numbers from 1 to 100, even numbers from 1 to 100, positive whole numbers up to a given number, odd numbers from 1 to a given number, even numbers from 2 to a



given number, Fibonacci numbers up to 100, Strange numbers up to 1000, factorials of the numbers from 1 to 10, etc.

14. Create a table product with the fields(Product_code primary key, Product_Name, Category, Quantity, Price). Insert some records Write the queries to perform the following.

a. Display the records in the descending order of Product_Nameb. Display Product_Code, Product_Name with price between 20 and 50c. Display the Product_Name and price of categories bath soap, paste, washing

powderd. Display the product details whose Quantity less than 100 and greater than 500e. Display product names starts with 's'f. Display the products which not belongs to the category 'paste'g. Display the product names whose second letter is 'a' and belongs to the Category

'washing powder'

15. Create a STUDENT table with following fields:

Field Name Type Width

RegNo character 10

Name character 20Paper1 numeric 3Paper2 numeric 3Paper3 numeric 3Paper4 numeric 3Paper5 numeric 3Total numeric 3Result character 6Grade character 1

Enter the RegNo, Name and Marks in 5 Papers of at least 10 students. Write a SQL program to process the records to update the table with values for the fields Total (Paper1+Paper2+Paper3+Paper4+Paper5), Result (‘Passed’ if total is greater than or equal to 50% of the total; ‘Failed’ otherwise), and Grade (‘A’ if mark obtained is greater than or equal to 90% of the total mark, ‘B’ if mark obtained is greater than or equal to 75% of the total mark, ‘C’ if mark obtained is greater than or equal to 60% of the total mark, ‘D’ if mark obtained is greater than or equal to 50% of the total mark, and ‘F’ if



mark obtained is less than 50% of the total mark). Display a report in descending order of the total mark, showing the data entered into the table along with the total marks, result and grade.

16. An examination has been conducted to a class of 10 students and 4 scores of each student have been provided in the data along with their reg_no, name, total and avg_score. Assign null values to the fields total and average. Write Postgresql block to do the following

Find the total and average of each student. Update the table with the calculated valuesAssign a letter grade to each student based on the average Score as

avg_score between 90 and 100 - Aavg_score 75 -89 - B avg_score 60- 74 - Cavg_score 50 -59 - Davg_score below 50 - Failed

17. Prepare a salary report of the employees showing the details such as:

EmpNo, Name, Basic Pay, DA, Gross Salary, PF, Net Salary, Annual Salary and TaxFor this purpose, create a table named SALARIES having the following structure.

Field Name Type Width

EmpNo Character 10

Name Character 20Basic Numeric 6

Enter the records of at least 10 employees. Use the following information for calculating the details for the report:

DA is fixed as the 40% of the basic pay.PF is fixed as 10% of the basic pay.Gross Salary is (Basic Pay + DA).Net Salary is (Gross Salary – PF)Annual Salary is (12 * Net Salary)

Tax is calculated using the following rules:

If annual salary is less than 100000, No Tax



If annual salary is greater than 100000 but less than or equal to 150000, then the tax is 10% of the excess over 100000.If annual salary is greater than 150000 but less than or equal to 250000, then the tax is 20% of the excess over 150000.If annual salary is greater than 250000, then the tax is 30% of the excess over 250000.

18. Generate a Hospital information system that can generate the following reports: Patients who belongs to in-patient category Patients who belongs to out-patient category

For this purpose, create a table named HOSPITAL having the following structure.Field Name Type Width

PatientID character 10Name character 20Age numeric 3Doctor character 20PatientType character 15ConsultCharge numeric 6BloodTestCharge numeric 6XrayCharge numeric 6OtherCharges numeric 6TotalAmount numeric 6

Enter the records of at least 10 patients. Write a SQL program to display the report in the ascending order of patient name.

19. Using the Hospital table created in Lab 16, generate a Hospital information system that can generate the following reports:

Patients undergone blood test. Patients who have taken X-Rays

20. Design a Hotel Bill calculating system that generates hotel bills for the customers.21. Design an Electricity Bill Report generating system that generates electricity bills details

of customers for a month.22. Generate a Library Information System that generates report of the books available in the

library.23. Programs involving multiple tables.24. Create a table named Elec_Bill (Cust_No, Cust_Name, Units_Consumed, Bill_Amt). Set

bill_amt as null. Write a PostgreSQL function to calculate the Bill_Amt by accepting Cust_No and Units_Consumed. Write a PostgreSQL block to update the calculated amount by invoking the function.



25. Create two tables Book (BookID, BookName, Author, Publisher) and Book_Del (Date_of_Del, BookID, BookName)

Create and application to generate a trigger before deleting a record from book table. The trigger procedure should insert the deleted BookID and BookName along with current date to the table Book_Del.

Include any 20 Data structure Lab questions and 15 DBMS Lab questions in the record book.

Note: All lab works should be neatly recorded in a Laboratory Record Book in written form. However Program results can be pasted in the left hand side of the fair record. All students should have a rough record (observation note book) too, in which they write all the works to be carried out in the lab prior to his/her entering the lab. He/She may also note down the i/p and o/p that he gives for program verification in the observation note book (rough record).



BCA4C07- E-Commerce

Course Number: 23Contact Hours per week: 5TNumber of Credits: 3Number of Contact Hours: 75 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objectives:

To get a general introduction Electronic Commerce framework .To get a general understanding on various electronic payment system.

To get a general understanding on Internal information systems. To get a general understanding on the new age of Information.

Prerequisites:

Basic knowledge of Commerce

Course Outline

UNIT I (15T)

History of E-commerce and Indian Business Context : E-Commerce, Emergence of the Internet, Emergence of the WWW, Advantages of E-Commerce, Transition to E-Commerce in India, The Internet and India, E-transition Challenges for Indian Corporates.

UNIT II (15T)

Business Models for E-commerce: Business Model, E-business Models Based on the Relationship of Transaction Parties - E-business Models Based on the Relationship of Transaction Types.

UNIT III (15T)

Enabling Technologies of the World Wide Web: World Wide Web, Internet Client-Server Applications, Networks and Internets, Software Agents, Internet Standards and Specifications, ISP.e-Marketing: Traditional Marketing, Identifying Web Presence Goals, Online Marketing, E-advertising, E-branding

UNIT IV (15T)

e-Security : Information system Security, Security on the Internet, E-business Risk Management Issues, Information Security Environment in India. Legal and Ethical Issues: Cyber stalking,



Privacy is at Risk in the Internet Age, Phishing, Application Fraud, Skimming, Copyright, Internet Gambling, Threats to Children.

UNIT V (15T)

e-Payment Systems: Main Concerns in Internet Banking, Digital Payment Requirements, Digital Token-based e-payment Systems, Classification of New Payment Systems, Properties of Electronic Cash, Cheque Payment Systems on the Internet, Risk and e-Payment Systems, Designing e-payment Systems, Digital Signature.

References:

1. E-Commerce - An Indian Perspective, P.T.Joseph, S.J., PHI2. E-Commerce Strategy, Technologies and Applications, David Whiteley, Tata Mc-Graw-

Hill3. Frontiers of Electronic Commerce, Ravi Kalakota, Andrew B.Whinston, Pearson

Education Asia4. E – Commerce, Jeffery F. Rayport, Bernard J. Jaworski,TMCH5. E-Commerce - A Managerial Perspective, P.T. Joseph, PHI

BCA4C08- Computer Graphics

Course Number: 24Contact Hours: 5TNumber of Credits: 3Number of Contact Hours: 75 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objectives:

To learn basics of Computer Graphics

Prerequisites:

Basic knowledge in Mathematics and Computer

Course Outline

UNIT I (10T)

Introduction to computer graphics definition, Application, Pixel, Frame Buffer, Raster and Random Scan Display, Display Devices CRT, Color CRT Monitors, basics of LCD and LED Monitors



UNIT II (12T)

Scan Conversion of Line, DDA Algorithm of Line Drawing, Scan Conversion of Circles-Bresenham’s Circle Generating algorithm, Polygon Filling, Scan Line Polygon Filling Algorithm

UNIT III (20T)

Two-Dimensional Transformation, Translation, Rotation, Scaling, Homogeneous Coordinates, Reflection, Shear

UNIT IV (17T)

Window to Viewport Transformation, Clipping, Line Clipping, Cohen Sutherland Line Clipping, Polygon Clipping, Sutherland and Gray Hodgman Polygon Clipping Algorithm.

UNIT V (18T)

Color Models and Color Applications Light and Color, Different color models, RGB, CMY, YIQ. Introduction to GIMP, Image Manipulation Using GIMP.

References:

1. Donald Hearn and M Pauline Baker, Computer Graphics, PHI, New Delhi.2. Zhigang Xiang and Roy Plasock, Computer Graphics, Schaum’s Outlines.3. Deborah Morley, Understanding Computer Today And Tomorrow, Introductory Edition.

V Semester

Cou

rse

No


Marks Contact Hours

Credit

Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

25 BCA5B07 Java Programming 20 80 100 3 3 6 4

26 BCA5B08 Computer Organization And Architecture 20 80 100 5 0 5 4

27 BCA5B09 Web Programming Using PHP 20 80 100 3 3 6 4

28 BCA5B10 Principles of Software Engineering 20 80 100 4 0 4 4

29 XXX5DXX Open Course(Other Streams) 10 40 50 2 0 2 2Project Work 0 0 0 0 2 2 0




BCA5B07|Java Programming

Course Number: 25Contact Hours per Week: 6 (3T + 3P)Number of Credits: 4Number of Contact Hours: 90 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal: 20 Marks + External: 80 Marks

Objectives

To review on concept of OOP. To learn Java Programming Environments. To practice programming in Java. To learn GUI Application development in JAVA.

Prerequisites

Knowledge in OOP & Programming

Course Outline

Unit I [8 T + 4 P]

Introduction to OOPS, Characteristics of OOPS, Object oriented languages, comparison between procedural and object oriented programming, basic principles of Object Orientation-class, object, abstraction, encapsulation, inheritance, polymorphism, modularity, and message passing. Features of object orientation - attributes, state, identity, operation, behaviour.

Unit II [10 T + 8 P]

Introduction to Java: History, Versioning, The Java Virtual Machine, Byte code, Writing simple java program, Language Components: Primitive Data Types, Comments, Keywords, literals, The if Statement, The switch Statement, The for Statement, The while and do while Statements, The break Statement, The continue Statement, Operators – Casts and Conversions, Arrays. Introduction to classes and methods, constructors, Passing Objects to Methods, Method Overloading, Static and final, The this Reference, finalize, inner and nested classes. Inheriting class, extends, member access and inheritance, super keyword, Object class. Dynamic method dispatch, method overriding, abstract class, interface, packages, import statement.

Unit III [10 T + 10 P]



Exceptions, I/O and Threads Input and Output in Java: The File Class, Standard Streams, Keyboard Input, File I/O Using Byte Streams, Character Streams, File I/O Using Character Streams - Buffered Streams, File I/O Using a Buffered Stream, Keyboard Input Using a Buffered Stream, Writing Text Files. Threads: Threads vs. Processes, Creating Threads by Extending Thread, Creating Threads by Implementing Runnable, Advantages of Using Threads, Daemon Threads, Thread States, Thread Problems, Synchronization. Exceptions: Exception Handling, The Exception Hierarchy, throws statement, throw statement, Developing user defined Exception Classes- The finally Block.

Unit IV [10 T + 10 P]

Database Connectivity & Applets: Introduction to JDBC : The JDBC Connectivity Model, Database Programming, Connecting to the Database, Creating a SQL Query, Executing SQL Queries, Getting the Results, Updating Database Data, Executing SQL Update/Delete, The Statement Interface, The ResultSet Interface, ResultSetMetaData. Introduction to GUI Applications - Applets - Types of Applet, Applet Skeleton, Update method, repaint Methods, Html Applet tag and passing parameter to applet.

Unit V [10 T + 10 P]

Events and GUI Applications: Event Handling: The Delegation Event Model, Event Classes, Event Listener Interfaces, Adapter Classes. Java Desktop Applications, Introduction to the AWT, Overview of the AWT, Structure of the AWT, The AWT hierarchy, Containers, Components, Canvas, Frame Working with: Color, Font, FontMetrics, Simple Graphics- Point, line, Rectangle, Polygon, Controls - Button, , Checkbox, Choice, , Label, List, Scroll bar, TextArea, TextField, Layout Manager, MenuBar, Menu, MenuItem , Checkbox MenuItem.

Text Books

1. Herbert Scheldt, Java The Complete Reference, 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, ISBN: 9781259002465

References

1. E Balaguruswamy, Programming in Java: A Primer, 4th Edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill Education Private Limited, ISBN: 007014169X.

2. Kathy Sierra, Head First Java, 2nd Edition, Shroff Publishers and Distributors Pvt Ltd, ISBN: 8173666024.

3. David Flanagan, Jim Farley, William Crawford and Kris Magnusson, Java Enterprise in a Nutshell: A Desktop Quick Reference, 3rd Edition, O'Reilly Media, ISBN: 0596101422.

BCA5B08|Computer Organization & Architecture



Course Number: 26Contact Hours per Week: 5TNumber of Credits: 4Number of Contact Hours: 75 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objectives

To learn logic gates, combinational circuits and sequential circuits To learn basics of computer organization and architecture

Prerequisites

Boolean algebra

Course Outline

Unit I [14 T]

Digital Logic - Positive and negative logic, logic gates ,NOT gate, OR gate, AND gate, XOR and X-NOR gates, Universal gates- NAND gate, NOR gate,. Combinational circuits- Half adder, half subtractor, full adder, full subtractor, ripple carry adders, look-ahead carry adders, decoders, BCD to 7-segment decoder, encoders, multiplexers and demultiplexers.

Unit II [15 T]

Sequential Logic Circuits: Edge triggering, Pulse triggering ,SR latch, SR flip flop, JK flip flop, Master Slave JK flip flop, D flip flop, T flip flop. Shift register: serial in - serial out, serial in - parallel out, parallel in - serial out, parallel in-parallel out configurations. counters (asynchronous & synchronous), up/down counter, decade counter, mod N counter, Ring counter, Johnson’s counter

Unit III [15 T]

Basic Computer Organization and Design: Instruction Codes , Computer Registers, Computer Instructions, Instruction types, Timing and Control, Instruction Cycle, Memory reference Instructions, Register reference instructions, Input, Output and Interrupt Design of Basic Computer, Design of Accumulator logic

Unit IV [15 T]



Micro programmed Control: Control Memory, Address sequencing, Micro program Example, Design of control unit. Processor Organization: general register organization, stack organization, instruction formats, addressing modes, data transfer and manipulation, program control

Unit V [16 T]

Memory Organization: Memory mapping, Associative memory, Cache memory, Virtual Memory, Memory Management Hardware, hit/miss ratio, Input-Output Organization: Peripheral devices, I/O interface, Modes of Transfer-asynchronous and synchronous, Priority Interrupt, Strobe Control, Handshaking. Direct Memory Access, Input-Output Processor, Serial Communication. I/O Controllers

Textbooks:

1. Thomas L Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, Universal Book Stall (Unit I and II)2. M. Morris Mano, Computer System ArchitecturePHI (Unit III – V)

References:

1. Rajaraman V. &Radhakrishnan, An Introduction to Digital Computer Design, PHI.2. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture, PHI.3. Malvino& Leach, Digital Principles & Applications, TMH4. Jain R.P. , Modern Digital Electronics, TMH5. Malvino, Digital Computer Electronics, TMH6. Bartee T.C., Digital Computer Fundamentals, THM7. William H. Gothmann, Digital Electronics: An Introduction to Theory and Practice, PHI

BCA5B09|Web Programming using PHP

Course Number: 27Contact Hours per Week: 6 (3T + 3P)Number of Credits: 4Number of Contact Hours: 90 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal: 20 Marks + External: 80 Marks

Remarks:- HTML portion covered in Computer Fundamentals and HTML paper is trimmed. Emphasis is given for HTML 5.

Objectives

To review on concept of OOP. To learn Java Programming Environments. To practice programming in Java.



To learn GUI Application development in JAVA.

Prerequisites

Knowledge in OOP & Programming

Course Outline

Unit I [8 T + 8 P]

Introduction web-documents: Static, Dynamic, Active - Web programming: client side and server side scripting. HTML 5: Document Structure, Elements, Attributes, Types of Elements and Attributes, Basic HTML Data types. Using HTML5 form elements: datalist, keygen, output, progress, meter. File uploading using forms - Frameset and frames. CSS: External CSS, CSS3 Syntax, Selector: Universal, Class, ID. Working with Lists and Tables, CSS ID and Class – Navigation Bar - Image Gallery – Image Opacity.

Unit II [8 T + 9 P]

Javascript: Introduction, Client side programming, script tag, comments, variables. Including JavaScript in HTML: head, body, external. Data types. Operators: Arithmetic, Assignment, Relational, Logical. Conditional Statements, Loops, break and continue. Output functions: write, writeln, popup boxes: prompt, alert, confirm. Functions: Built-in Global Functions: alert(), prompt(), confirm(), isNan(), Number(), parseInt(). User Defined Functions, Calling Functions with Timer, Events Familiarization: onLoad, onClick, onBlur, onSubmit, onChange, Document Object Model (Concept). Objects: String, Array, Date.

Unit III [10 T + 10 P]

PHP: Introduction, Server side programming, Role of Web Server software, Including PHP Script in HTML: head, body, external. Comments, Data types, variables and scope, echo and print. Operators: Arithmetic, Assignment, Relational, Logical. Conditional Statements, Loops, break and continue. User Defined Functions.

Unit IV [8 T + 9 P]

Working with PHP: Passing information between pages, HTTP GET and POST method, Cookie, Session. String functions: strlen, strops, strstr, strcmp, substr, str_replace, string case, Array constructs: array(),list() and foreach(). Header().

Unit V [10 T + 10 P]

PHP & PostgreSQL: Features of PostgreSQL, data types, PostgreSQL commands – CREATE DATABASE, CREATE TABLE, DESCRIBE TABLE (\d table_name or using



usinginformation_schema), SELECT, SELECT INTO, CREATE AS, DELETE, UPDATE, INSERT. PHP - PostgreSQL Integration: Establishing Database Connection (pg_connect(), pg_connection_status(), pg_dbname()), Getting Error String (pg_last_error()), Closing database Connection (pg_close()), Executing SQL statements (pg_query(), pg_execute()), Retrieving Data (pg_fetch_row(), pg_fetch_array(), pg_fetch_all(), pg_fetch_assoc(), pg_fetch_object(), pg_num_rows(), pg_num_fields() pg_affected_rows(), pg_num_rows(), pg_free_result()), Insertion and Deletion of data using PHP, Displaying data from PostrgreSQL database in webpage. Introduction to AJAX - Implementation of AJAX in PHP - Simple example for partial page update.

Textbook

1. HTML 5 Blackbook, Dreamtech Press, ISBN 9879351199076, 2016 Edition.2. W. Gilmore, Beginning PHP and PostgreSQL 8: From Novice to Professional , Goels

Computer Hut (2007), ISBN: 9788181286000

Reference

1. HTML 5 Blackbook, Dreamtech Press, ISBN 987-93-5119-907-6, 2016 Edition.2. Jon Duckett, Beginning Web Programming with HTML,XHTML, CSS, Wrox.3. Jim Converse & Joyce Park, PHP & MySQL Bible, Wiley.4. PosgreSQL Official Documentation Onlin

BCA5B10|Principles of Software Engineering

Course Number: 28Contact Hours: 4T Number of Credits: 4Number of Contact Hours: 60 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objectives:

To learn engineering practices in Software Development.

Prerequisites:

Basic programming knowledge

Course Outline

UNIT I (12 hours)



Software and Software Engineering: Overview of Software Engineering, Practice & Myths; Software Process; Generic process model- Framework Activity, Task Set, Process Patterns, Process Improvement;SDLC, Prescriptive process model- Waterfall Model, Spriral Model, Incremental Process Model, Evolutionary Process Model; Specialized Process Models: Component Based Development, the Formal Methods Models;

Agile development-Agile Process; Extreme Programming; Other Agile Process Models – ASD, Scrum, DSDM, FDD, LSD, Agile Modeling, Agile Unified Process.

UNIT II (12 hours)

Requirements Engineering-Establishing the Groundwork-Eliciting Requirements - Developing use cases - Building the requirements model - Negotiating, validating Requirements - Requirements Analysis-Requirements Modeling Strategies.

UNIT III (12 hours)

MODELING WITH UML: Concepts and Diagrams - Use Case Diagrams - Class Diagrams - Interaction Diagrams - State chart Diagrams – Activity Diagrams - Package Diagrams - Component Diagrams - Deployment Diagrams -Diagram Organization- Diagram Extensions. Design Process- Design concepts: Abstraction, Architecture, patterns, Separation of Concerns, Modularity, Information Hiding, Functional Independence, Refinement, Aspects, Refactoring, Object Oriented Design Concepts, Design Classes- Design Model: Data, Architectural, Interface, Component, Deployment Level Design Elements .

UNIT IV (12 hours)

Structured coding Techniques-Coding Styles - Standards and Guidelines-Documentation Guidelines-Modern Programming Language Features: Type checking-User defined data types-Data Abstraction Exception Handling - Concurrency Mechanism.

UNIT V (12 hours)

TESTING: Software Quality- Software Quality Dilemma- Achieving Software Quality- Testing: Strategic Approach to software Testing- Strategic Issues - Testing: Strategies for Conventional Software, Object oriented software, Web Apps-Validating Testing- System Testing- Art of Debugging.

MAINTENANCE: Software Maintenance-Software Supportability- Reengineering - Business Process Reengineering- Software Reengineering- Reverse Engineering - Restructuring- Forward Engineering- Economics of Reengineering

TEXT BOOKS

1. Roger S, “Software Engineering – A Practitioner’s Approach”, seventh edition, Pressman, 2010.



2. Pearson Education, “Software Engineering by Ian Sommerville”, 9th edition, 2010.3. Roff: UML: A Beginner’s Guide TMH

REFERENCES

1. Hans Van Vliet, “Software Engineering: Principles and Practices”, 2008.2. Richard Fairley, “Software Engineering Concepts”, 2008.

3. RohitKhurana, Software Engineering: Principles and Practices, 2nd Edition, Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd.

4. PankajJalote, An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, 3rd Edition, Narosa Publishing House.

5. Alhir, learning UML, SPD/O’Reily6.



VI SemesterC

ours

e N

o



Inte

rnal

Ext

erna

l

Tot

al

The

ory

Lab

Tot

al

30 BCA6B11 Android programming 20 80 100 4 1 5 4

31 BCA6B12 Operating Systems 20 80 100 4 1 5 4

32 BCA6B13 Computer Networks 20 80 100 5 0 5 4

33 BCA6B14Programming laboratory III- Java and Web Programming

20 80 100 0 0 0 2

34 BCA6B15Programming Laboratory IV: Lab Exam of Android & Linux shellProgramming

20 80 100 0 4 4 2

35 BCA6B16 Project and Viva Voce 30 120 150 0 2 2 3

36 BCAB617x Elective 20 80 100 4 0 4 3


BCA6B11|Android Programming


Objectives:

To have a review on concept of Android programming. To learn Android Programming Environments. To practice programming in Android. To learn GUI Application development in Android platform with XML



Prerequisites:

Knowledge in OOP & Java Programming.

Course Outline

Unit I [12T+3L]

Introducing the android computing platform, History of android, android software stack, Developing end user application using Android SDK, Android java packages, Setting up the development environment, Installing android development tools (ADT), Fundamental components, Android virtual devices, Running on real device, Structure of android application, Application life cycle.

Unit II [12T+3L]

Understanding android resources - String resources, Layout resources, Resource reference syntax, Defining own resource IDs - Enumerating key android resources, string arrays, plurals, Colour resources, dimension resources, image resources, Understanding content providers - Android built in providers, exploring databaseson emulator, architecture of content providers, structure of android content URIs,reading data using URIs, using android cursor, working with where clause,inserting updates and deletes, implementing content, Understanding intents basicsof intents, available intents, exploring intent composition, Rules for ResolvingIntents to Their Components, ACTION PICK, GET CONTENT, pending intents

Unit III [12T+3L]

User interfaces development in android - building UI completely in code, UI using XML, UI in XML with code, Android's common controls - Text controls, button controls, checkbox control, radio button controls, image view, date and time controls, map view control, understanding adapters, adapter views, list view, grid view, spinner control, gallery control, styles and themes, Understanding layout managers - linear layout manager, table layout manager, relative layout manager, frame layout manager, grid layout manager.

Unit IV [12T+3L]

Android menus - creating menus, working with menu groups, responding to menu items, icon menu, sub menu, context menu, dynamic menus, loading menu through XML, popup menus, Fragments in Android structure of fragment, fragment life cycle, fragment transaction and back stack, fragment manager, saving fragment state, persistence of fragments, communications with fragments,startActivity() and setTargetFragment(), using dialogs in android, dialog fragments, working with toast, Implementing action bar - tabbed navigation action bar activity, implementing base activity classes, tabbed action bar and tabbed listener, debug text view layout, action bar and menu interaction, list navigation action bar activity, spinner adapter, list listener,



list action bar, standard navigation action bar activity, action bar and search view, action bar and fragments.

Unit V [12T+3L]

Persisting data - Files, saving state and preferences - saving application data, creating, saving and retrieving shared preferences, preference framework and preference activity, preference layout in XML, native preference controls, preference fragments, preference activity, persisting the application state, including static files as resources, Working with file system, SQLLite - SQLLite types, database manipulation using SQLLite, SQL and database centric data model for Android, Android database classes.

References:

1. Pro Android 4, SatyaKomatineni& Dave MacLean, Apress.

2. Professional Android 4 Application Development, Retomeier, Wrox.

3. Programming Android, ZigurdMednieks, Laird Dornin, G. BlakeMeike, and Masumi

Nakamura, O'Reilly.

BCA6B12| Operating Systems


Objectives To learn objectives & functions of Operating Systems. To understand processes and its life cycle. To learn and understand various Memory and Scheduling Algorithms. To have an overall idea about the latest developments in Operating Systems

Prerequisites

Knowledge in Data structures.

Course Outline

Unit I [12T + 3P]



Operating System - Objectives and functions - The Evolution of Operating Systems: Serial Processing, Simple batch Systems, Multi Programmed batch Systems, Time Sharing Systems, Parallel Systems, Distributed Systems, Real time systems. Definition of Process, Process States, Process Control Block, Operations on Process, Process Communication, Communication in Client server System, Basic concepts of threads, Concurrency, Principles of Concurrency, Mutual exclusion, Semaphores, Messages, Dead lock: Prevention, Detection, Avoidance.

Unit II [12T + 3P]

Linux Shell Programming: Introduction – Shells available in Unix: Bourne shell (sh), C shell (csh), TC shell (tcsh), Korn shell (ksh), Bourne Again SHell (bash). Bash: special characters – getting help – man pages – Linux Directory Layout – Command for Navigating the Linux Filesystems: pwd, cd, ls, file, cat, cp, mv, mkdir, rmdir, whereis – Piping and Redirection - Informational Commands: ps, w, id, free – clear, echo, more. File permissions – Setting Permissions – Making a file executable. Creating shell programs: comments, variables, operators (arithmetic, relational, logical) – single and double quotes - read – echo – test - conditional commands, iterative commands – break – continue - evaluating expressions using expr, bc – strings – grep – arrays.

Unit III [12T + 3P]

CPU Scheduling: Scheduling Criteria, Scheduling algorithms: FCFS, SJF, Priority, RR, Multilevel, Feedback Queue - Process synchronization, The Critical Section Problem, Synchronization Hardware, Classical Problems of Synchronization: Reader Writer, Dining Philosopher. File and Database System, File System, Functions of organization, Allocation and Free Space Management.

Unit IV [12T + 3P]

Memory Management, Address Binding, Logical Vs Physical Address Space, Dynamic Loading, Dynamic Linking and Shared Libraries, Overlays, Swapping, Contiguous Memory allocation, Paging, Segmentation, Virtual memory, Demand Paging, Page Replacement, Thrashing.

Unit V [12T + 3P]

Protection and security: policy and mechanism, authentication, authorization. Mobile OS: Concepts, history, features, architecture, future scope. Case studies: Android, UNIX kernel and Microsoft Windows NT (concepts only).

Text Books

1. Silberschatz, Galvin and Gagne, Operating System Concepts, John Willey & Sons2. William Stallings, Operating Systems, Internals and Design Principles, PHI3. Mendel Cooper, Advanced Bash-Scripting Guide, Available at



http://www.tldp.org/LDP/abs/abs-guide.pdf

References:

4. Nutt G.J, Operating Systems: A Modern Perspective, Addison Wesley

BCA6B14| Computer Networks

Course Number: 32Contact Hours per Week: 5 (5T + 0P)Number of Credits: 4Number of Contact Hours: 75 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 MarksObjectives

To learn about transmissions in Computer Networks. To learn various Protocols used in Communication. To have a general idea on Network Administration.

Prerequisites Knowledge in data structure. Knowledge in Operating System.

Course Outline:

Unit I [15 T]

Introduction to Computer networks, Topology, categories of networks, Internetwork, Internet, Network Models, Layered model, OSI and TCP/IP models, Physical layer, Switching - Circuit switching, Packet Switching and Message Switching, DTE - DCE Interface, EIA - 232 interface, X.21 modems.

Unit II [15 T]

Data link layer, Error detection and correction, Types of errors, Single CSC error and Burst error, Vertical redundancy check (VRC), longitudinal redundancy Check (LRC), Cyclic Redundancy Check(CRC), Error correction - Single CSC error correction, Hamming code Data compression - Huffman code, data link control, Line discipline, Flow control, Error control, Multiple Access, Random Access, ALOHA, pure ALOHA and slotted ALOHA, CSMA/CD and SCMA/CA, Polling, Wired LANs, Ethernet - IEEE standards, Wireless LANs - IEEE - 802.11,basics of Bluetooth,wifi,wimax and mobile networks (2G,3G,4G)



Unit III [15 T]

Network layer, Networking and Internetworking devices - Repeaters, Bridges, Routers, Gateways, Logical addressing - IPv4 & IPv6 addresses, Network Address Translation(NAT), Internet protocols, internetworking, Datagram, Transition from IPv4 to IPv6, Address Mapping-Error reporting and multicasting - Delivery, Forwarding and Routing algorithms, Distance Vector Routing, Link State Routing,

Unit IV [15 T]

Transport layer, Process-to-process Delivery: UDP, TCP and SCTP, Congestion control and Quality of Service, Application Layer, Domain Name Systems-Remote Login-Email FTP, WWW, HTTP, Introductory concepts on Network management: SNMP.

Unit V [15 T]

Cryptography and Network Security: Introduction – Goals of Security – Attacks - Services and Techniques. Basics of Cryptography: Plain Text - Cipher Text – Encryption – Decryption. Confidentiality: Basics of Symmetric Key Ciphers - Traditional Symmetric Key Ciphers: Substitution, Transposition, Stream & Lock, Modern – Components of Modern Block Cipher – DES - Modern Stream Cipher. Basics of Asymmetric Key Ciphers – RSA Cryptosystem. Integrity: Message – Message Digest – Hash Function. Authentication: MAC. Digital Signature : Analogy with Manual Signature – Process – Signing the Digest – Services – RSA Digital Signature Scheme.

Textbook:

1. Behurouz A Forozan, Introduction to Data Communications & Networking, TMH

References:

1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, PHI2. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communications, VIIth Edition, Pearson

Education3. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security, Principles and Practices,

Prentice Hall of India.4. Steven Graham and Steve Shah, Linux Administration: A Beginners Guide, Third

Edition, Dreamtech,2003.



BCA6B14| Programming Laboratory III: Lab Exam of Java & PHP Programming

Course Number: 33Contact Hours per Week: 0Number of Credits: 2Number of Contact Hours: 0 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 Marks

Objective To practice Java programming. To practice client side and server side scripting. To practice PHP Programming. To practice developing dynamic websites. To practice how to interact with databases through PHP.

Prerequisites Theoretical knowledge in Java programming. Theoretical knowledge of PHP Programming.

Course OutlinePart A: Java Programming

1. Write a program to find the distance between two points.2. Write a program to find the sum, difference, product, quotient and remainder of two

numbers passed as command line argument.3. Write java program to display Fibonacci series up to a limit.4. Write java program to display armstrong numbers within a range.5. Given the sides of a triangle, write a program to check whether the triangle is

equilateral, isosceles or scalene and find its area.6. Read an array of 10 or more numbers and write a program to find the

a) Smallest element in the arrayb) Largest element in the arrayc) Second largest element in the array

7. Write a program to perform base conversiona) Integer to binaryb) Integer to Octalc) Integer to Hexadecimal

8. Write a program to verify De Morgan’s Law9. Write a program to merge two arrays.



10. Write a program to find the trace and transpose of a matrix.11. Write java program to find the sum of the digits and reverse of a given number using

class and objects.12. Write a program to sort a set of n numbers using a class.13. Create a class ‘Account’ to represent a bank account. Write a program to deposit and

withdraw amounts from the account.14. Using class and objects, Write a java program to find the sum of two complex numbers

(Hint: Use object as parameter to function).15. Create a class Time with hh, mm, ss as data members. Write a java program to find the

sum of two time intervals (Hint: Use object as parameter to function).16. Write a program to count and display total number of objects created to a class (Hint:

static members). 17. Write a java program to find the volume of cube, rectangular box, cylinder using

function overloading. 18. Create a class student with methods to read and display the student details. Create a

derived class result with methods to read marks of 5 subjects. Write a java program to display the total and grade of students, creating objects of class result.

19. Create a class Employee with ID, Name Designation and Dept. Create a child class salary with Basic, HRA, DA and Allowance. Write a program to compute the net salary assuming that HRA is 1250, DA, Allowance are 110% and 35% of the Basic salary.

20. Write a program to demonstrate inheritance hierarchy by using class a base class shape and 'TwoDim' and 'ThreeDim' as sub classes. Create classes ‘square’ and 'triangle' derived from TwoDim and 'sphere and 'cube' derived from ThreeDim. A reference variable of shape is used to determine area of various shapes.

21. Write a program to demonstrate the order in which constructors are invoked in multilevel inheritance.

22. Create an abstract class shape with two data members and an abstract method area. Create two child classes rectangle and triangle. Write a program to display the area of the shapes.

23. Create an interface calculator having methods to perform basic arithmetic operation. Write a program to implement the interface to perform operation on integer and float values.

24. Create a class factorial with a method that accept a number and return its factorial in a package P1. Using the factorial class, write a program to find the factorial of a number.

25. Write a multi thread java program for displaying odd numbers and even numbers up to a limit (Hint : Implement thread using Runnable interface).

26. Write a multi thread java program for displaying numbers ascending and descending order (Hint: create thread by inheriting Thread class).

27. Write a program to handle arithmetic exception.28. Create a user defined exception ‘MinBalExp’ to be invoked when the read number is

less than a pre-set value.



29. Create a user defined exception ‘OddValExp’ to be invoked when the read number is an odd number.

30. Write a program to copy a file to another. Pass the file names as command line arguments.

31. Write a program to track keyboard events on an applet.32. Write an applet to display a rectangle with specified coordinate and colour passed as

parameter from the HTML file.33. Create an AWT application to add, remove items in a list box. 34. Create an AWT application to select gender using radio buttons.35. Design a window to accept the qualifications of a user using checkboxes. 36. Create an applet for a displaying smiling face.37. Write a program to display ip address of the system.38. Write a program to implement echo server (A server that echo the messages the client

sends).39. Create a database table employee (id, name, design, dept). Write a program to list the

employees using JDBC.40. Write a program to insert a new employee record to the above table.

Part B: PHP Programming

HTML & CSS

1. Design a website of an educational institution using framesets and links. A sample design is as shown below.

Top Frame

Menu frame Details frame

2. Design a webpage that illustrates the use of the following form controls: (i) input controls: single-line text, password, multi-line text. (ii) buttons: submit and reset.

3. Design a webpage that illustrates the use of the following form controls: (i) input controls: check box, radio button, select box (ii) buttons: submit and reset.

4. Design a webpage that illustrates the use of the following form controls: (i) input controls: datalist, multi-select box, grouped select box (ii) buttons: submit and reset.

5. Design a webpage that illustrates the use of field sets and legends.6. Design a web page to demonstrate Border colors using internal CSS.7. Design a web page to demonstrate Text alignment using CSS.8. Design a web page to demonstrate inline CSS.9. Design a webpage to invert the behavior of the <h1> to <h6> tags using external CSS.10. Design a webpage for a simple image gallery.



JavaScript

11. Write a javascript program to perform find the area and circumference of a circle.12. Write a javascript program to check whether a given number is perfect, abundant or

deficient. Use alert box to display the output.13. Write a javascript program to check whether the given sides can form a triangle. If yes,

find the type (isosceles, equilateral and scalene) and area of the triangle. Use prompt dialogue box to accept the sides.

14. Write a javascript program to display the nth prime number. Value of n should be accepted from the user. Validate the value entered by the user: Only positive numbers except 0 are to be accepted.

15. Write a JavaScript program to find all years in which 1st January is a Sunday between a given range (eg:- between 2010 and 2017). Use

16. Design a webpage to illustrate image rollover.17. Design a JavaScript program to illustrate the following events: onLoad, onClick,

onBlur,onSubmit, onChange.18. Design a JavaScript program to display the multiplication table of a no accepted from the

user.19. Design a form that accepts two integers. Provide 4 buttons for Add, Subtract, Multiply,

Divide. Add JavaScript program to add, subtract, multiply and divide the given numbers when these buttons are clicked. Use output element to display the results.

20. Write a JavaScript program to create a table after accepting row and column numbers from the user. Contents of each cell should be corresponding row-column number (e.g. Row-0 Column-0).

21. Write a JavaScript program to store different colors in an array and change the background color of the page using this array elements

22. Write a JavaScript program to create clock with a timing event.23. Write a JavaScript program for form validation for question numbers 2, 3 and 4.24. Design a webpage to demonstrate the use of progress HTML element.

PHP

25. Write a PHP program to check whether the given number is Armstrong or not.26. Write a PHP program to check whether a given number is perfect, abundant or deficient.27. Display the Fibonacci series up to a given number.28. Create a php program to display the bio data of a person by reading the personal details

using an HTML page.29. Create a login page using database.30. Create a mysql table student with fields roll no, name, mark, grade. Insert records in the

table. Write a PHP program to display the mark list of a student by accepting the register no of the student.



31. Write a php application to generate the pay slip of an employee by accepting name, basic salary and designation. The net salary will be calculated based on the following conditions.

Designation conveyance allowance extra allowance

Manager 1000 500

Supervisor 750 200

Clerk 500 100

Peon 250

HRA –

25 %

Income

tax

Gross

<=200

0

2500 < gross <=4000 3%

4000< gross <=5000 5%

Gross >5000 8%

Gross= basic + HRA + conveyance + extra

Net = gross – income tax

32. Create a table “product” with fieldsitemcode, itemname, unitprice. Write php program to insert 5 records into the table and display it in a table format.

33. Write a php program for delete and update operation on account table. The account table contain fields such as accountno, name and amount.

34. Write an HTML page to display a list of fruits in a list box. Write php program to display the names of the fruits which are selected by the user.

35. Write php program to store current date/time in a cookie and display the ‘last visited on‘ date time on the web page upon reopening of the same page.

36. Design a PHP page to implement a login screen using sessions. Login details are to be verified from the server side with values stored in a database.

37. Write a php program to create an array and store 10 names in the array. Do the following operations.

a. Display the contents using for each statement. b. Display the array in a sorted order. c. Display the array without the duplicate elementsd. Remove the last element and displaye. Display the array in reverse orderf. Search an element in the given array.

38. Design a PHP page to illustrate the use of keygen HTML element.



39. Design a PHP page to illustrate the use of meter HTML element – accept five cities and the temperature of those cities and display the result graphically.

40.Design a PHP page to illustrate the use of file upload – uploading files of a type with a specified size to the webserver.

Include any 20 Java Programming Lab questions and 20 PHP Programming Lab questions in the record book.




BCA6B15| Programming Laboratory IV: Android & Linux shell

Programming

Course Number: 34Contact Hours per Week: 4 (0T + 4P)Number of Credits: 2Number of Contact Hours: 64 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 20 Marks + External – 80 MarksObjective

To practice Android programming. To practice user interface applications. To develop mobile application. To practice shell programming

Prerequisites:

Theoretical knowledge in Android programming. Theoretical knowledge of Shell Programming.

Course Outline:Part A: Android Programming

1. Programs to understand basic arithmetic operations2. Programs to understand basic logic operations3. Programs to understand loops and control statements4. Programs to understand GUI in android5. Android application for adding two numbers6. Develop simple user interface to display message7. Create two menu items-opening a file-saving a file8. Inserting values into Spinner control using Text view and Button.9. Implementation of background image10. Starting another activity from your own activity using intent11. Create a new activity that services ACTION-PICK for contact data which display each of

the contact in the contact database and lets the user to select one before closing and returning the selected contacts URL to the calling activities

12. Create Android application to linkify a text view to display web and E-mail address as hyperlinks. When clicked they will open the browser and E-mail address respectively

13. Implementation of array adapter



14. Create an alert dialogs used to display a message and offer two button options to continue. Clicking either button will close the dialog after executing the attached click listener

15. Get data from Text view control and insert into database using SQLite. Another activity shows inserted data in a List View control

16. Load menu item by parsing XML data.17. Program to implement simple calculator18. Program to Get IP Address19. Program to Home and Lock Screen Widget (Temperature Widget)20. Create a new contact using intent 21. A Button control shows Date picker and Text view control displays selected date.22. Insert data into Spinner and delete selected item using SQLite.23. Program to create simple login screen.24. Create an Android application to display the map of your locality. Use ACTION_VIEW

intent by passing latitude and longitude as parameters.25. Create an Android application to convert a voice into text (using Google Speech to Text

service)26. Create an Android application to populate a list view by getting names & numbers from a

SQLite database table.27. Display the saved contacts available in the android phone in a listview using content

providers28. Create an image grid. Images should be placed under the resources section. 29. Create an android app with three tabs. First tab should contain two Edit text and that

should accept age and name. In the second tab you need another 3 edit texts that accept education address and phone number. After these information is proved, when the third tab is open it should display all the provided information neatly.

30. Create a custom toast with an Image and a TextView.31. Apply a Custom List style to a ListView. ListView should have at least 10 Items.32. Determine the acceleration of your android device along all three axes using

accelerometer? (i.e. x,y,z).33. Capture an Image from the primary camera of an android device and save that picture

into the internal storage.34. Create an app to list files under a given folder name in an EditText35. Fetch data from an arbitrary URL given in an EditText and display it in a TextView36. Create an SQLite database named student. Accept student details from the MainActivity

and save it in the table called student. Display the calculated result in the second activity when a button on the MainActivity is clicked.

37. Create an android app to switch the wifi on and off also illustrate the use of permission in android?

38. Create a spinner that takes data from the String.xml file.39. Create a simple android application that opens the default messaging application



available in the android device?40. Create an app to display message in the notification bar?

Part B: Shell Programming

1. Write a script to find area of a circle 2. Write a shell script to find given number is even or odd3. Write a shell script to make a menu driven calculator using case4. Write a shell script to find the greatest of three numbers5. Write a shell script to compute mean and standard deviation of three numbers6. Write a shell script to find sum of all digits from a given number7. Write a shell script to find reverse of a number8. Write a shell script to find prime numbers upto a given number9. Write a shell script to find n fibonacci numbers10. Write a shell script to check whether a given number is Amstrong or not11. Write a shell script to reverse a string and check whether a given string is palindrom or

not 12. Write a shell script to count no of line,words and characters of a input file13. Code for Write a shell program to convert all the contents into the uppercase in a

particular file in Unix14. Write a script to find the value of one number raised to the power of another. Two

numbers are entered through the keyboard. 15. Write a shell script find the factorial of a given number16. An employee Basic salary is input through keyboard where da is 40% of basic salary and

hra is 20% of basic salary. Write a program to calculate gross salary17. Write a shell script to find the average of the number entered as command line arguments18. Code for Shell script which whenever gets executed displays the message â€œGood

Morning/Good afternoon /Good Evening â€œdepending on the time it get executed" 19. Write a shell script to Display Banner, calander of given year 20. Code for a program to display current date and time, number of users , terminal name,

login date and time21. Write a shell script which uses all the file test operators22. Write a shell script to copy the contents of file to another. Input file names through

command line. The copy should not be allowed if second file exists.23. Write a shell script to find number of vowels, consonants, numbers in a given string.24. Code for Shell script to perform operations like display, list, make directory and copy,

rename, delete25. Write a shell script to compare two files and remove one of them if they are same



Include any 15 Android Programming Lab questions and 15 Shell Programming Lab questions in the record book.

Android versions eclipse, studio etc. may be used for doing the lab works.




BCA6B16| Project Work

Course Number: 35Contact Hours per Week: 4 (0T + 2P in V Sem + 2 P in VI Sem)Number of Credits: 3Number of Contact Hours: 60 Hrs.Course Evaluation: Internal – 30 Marks + External – 120 Marks

Objective

To provide practical knowledge on software development process

Prerequisites

Basic programming and system development knowledge

Course Outline

The objective of the BCA final project work is to develop a quality software solution by following the software engineering principles and practices. During the development of the project the students should involve in all the stages of the software development life cycle (SDLC). The main objective of this project course is to provide learners a platform to demonstrate their practical and theoretical skills gained during five semesters of study in BCA Programme. During project development students are expected to define a project problem, do requirements analysis, systems design, software development, apply testing strategies and do documentation with an overall emphasis on the development of a robust, efficient and reliable software systems. The project development process has to be consistent and should follow standard. For example database tables designed in the system should match with the E-R Diagram. SRS documents to be created as per IEEE standards.

Students are encouraged to work on a project preferably on a live software project sponsored by industry or any research organization. Topics selected should be complex and large enough to justify as a BCA final semester project. The courses studied by the students during the BCA Programme provide them the comprehensive background knowledge on diverse subject areas in computer science such as computer programming, data structure, DBMS, Computer Organization, Software Engineering, Computer Networks, etc., which will be helping students in doing project work. Students can also undertake group project to learn how to work in groups. However, the maximum number of students in a group must be limited to 4.

For internal evaluation, the progress of the student shall be systematically assessed through two or three stages of evaluation at periodic intervals.



A bonafide project report shall be submitted in hard bound complete in all aspects.

ELECTIVES

BCA6B17a|Microprocessor and Applications


Objectives:

To understand internals of Microprocessor. To learn architecture of 8086 Microprocessor To learn instruction set of 8086 Microprocessor To learn how to program a Microprocessor

Prerequisites:

Basic knowledge of Computer

Course Outline

UNIT I (12T)

16-Bit Microprocessor: 8086 Architecture, Pin Configuration, 8086 Minimum and Maximum mode configurations

UNIT II (12T)

Addressing modes, 8086 Instruction set (Data transfer, Arithmetic, Branch, Processor control & String instruction), 8086 interrupts.

UNIT III (12T)

Assembler Directives: Data Definition And Storage Allocation, Program Organization, Alignment, Program End value, Returning Attribute, Procedure Definition, Macro Definition, Data Control, Branch Displacement, Header File Inclusion-Target Machine Code Generation Control Directives.

UNIT IV (12T)



Peripherals and Interfacing: Interfacing output displays (8212), interfacing input keyboards, key Debounce, Programmable communication interface (8251A), programmable peripheral interface (8255), Programmable DMA Controller (8257), Programmable interrupt controller (8259), Programmable interval timer (8253).

UNIT V (12T)

Advanced Microprocessors: Introduction to 80186, 80286, 80386, 80486 and Pentium processors, General introduction to BIOS and DOS interrupts.

References:

1. The Intel Microprocessor 8086/8088. 80186, 80286, 80386 and 80486 Architecture

Programming and Interfacing, Barry.B.Brey,Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd.

2. Microprocessor X86 programming, K.R. Venugopal, Raj Kumar,BPB publications

3. IBM PC Assembly Language & Programming, Abel P, Parson Education Asia 2001

4. Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcomputers, B Ram, DhanpatRai Publications

Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi

5. Microprocessors and Microcomputer Based System Designing,

6. MohamadRafiquzzaman, Universal Bookstall, New Delhi

7. Microcomputer Systems: The 8086/8088 Family. Architecture, Programming &

Designing, Yu. Cheng Liu, Glenn A Gibson,Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi

8. Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals, Ray A.K., Bhurchandi.K.M, Tata McGraw-

Hill, 2002.

BCA6B17b|Multimedia Systems


Objective:

To get a general introduction and basic skills on Multimedia techniques and tools

Prerequisites:

Basic knowledge of +2 level Mathematics



Course Outline

UNIT I (12T)

Multimedia Definition, Use Of Multimedia, Delivering Multimedia, Text: About Fonts and Faces, Using Text in Multimedia, Computers and Text, Font Editing and Design Tools, Hypermedia and Hypertext.

UNIT II (12T)

Images: Plan Approach, Organize Tools, Configure Computer Workspace, Making Still Images, Colour, Image File Formats. Sound: The Power of Sound, Digital Audio, Midi Audio, Midi vs. Digital Audio, Multimedia System Sounds, Audio File Formats –Vaughan’s Law of Multimedia Minimums, Adding Sound to Multimedia Project.

UNIT III (12T)

Animation: The Power of Motion, Principles of Animation, Animation by Computer, Making Animations that Work. Video: Using Video, Working with Video and Displays, Digital Video Containers, Obtaining Video Clips, Shooting and Editing Video.

UNIT IV (12T)

Making Multimedia: The Stage of Multimedia Project, The Intangible Needs, The Hardware Needs, The Software Needs, An Authoring Systems’ Needs. Multimedia Production Team

UNIT V (12T)

Planning and Costing: The Process of Making Multimedia, Scheduling, Estimating, RFPs and Bid Proposals. Designing and Producing, Content and Talent: Acquiring Content, Ownership of Content Created for Project, Acquiring Talent

References:

1. Multimedia: Making It Work,Tay Vaughan

2. Multimedia Computing, Communication & Applications, RalfSteinmetz&KlaraNahrstedt,

Pearson Education



BCA6B17c|Software testing & Quality Assurance


Objectives:

To get a general introduction and basic skills on software testingand quality assurance techniques and tools

Prerequisites:

Basic knowledge of Software Engineering

Course Outline

UNIT I (12T)

Phases of Software project - Quality Assurance, Quality control - Testing, Verification and Validation - Process Model to represent Different Phases - Life Cycle models. White-Box Testing: Static Testing - Structural Testing Challenges in White-Box Testing.

UNIT II (12T)

Black-Box Testing: What is Black, Box Testing?, Why Black, Box Testing?, When to do Black, Box Testing?, How to do Black, Box Testing?, Challenges in White Box Testing, Integration Testing: Integration Testing as Type of Testing, Integration Testing as a phase of Testing, Scenario Testing, Defect Bash.

UNIT III (12T)

System and Acceptance Testing: system Testing Overview, Why System testing is done? Functional versus Non, functional Testing, Functional testing, Non, functional Testing, Acceptance Testing, Summary of Testing Phases.

UNIT IV (12T)

Performance Testing: Factors governing Performance Testing, Methodology of Performance Testing, tools for Performance Testing, Process for Performance Testing, Challenges. Regression Testing: What is Regression Testing? Types of Regression Testing, When to do Regression Testing, How to do Regression Testing, Best Practices in Regression Testing.



UNIT V (12T)

Test Planning, Management, Execution and Reporting: Test Planning, Test Management, Test Process, Test Reporting, Best Practices. Test Metrics and Measurements: Project Metrics, Progress Metrics, Productivity Metrics, Release Metrics.

References:

1. Software Testing Principles and Practices, SrinivasanDesikan&Gopalswamy, Ramesh,

Pearson Education.

2. Effective Methods of Software Testing, William E. Perry, Wiley

3. Software Testing, RenuRajani and Pradeep Oak, TMH

4. Software Testing Tools, K. V. K. K. Prasad, Dreamtech Press

5. Introducing Software Testing, LauiseTamres, Pearson Education

BCA6B17d|System Software


Objectives:

To build fundamental knowledge in system software To learn functions of various system software To specifically learn compilation process of a program

Prerequisites:

Basic knowledge in programming

Course Outline

UNIT I (12T)

System software : General Concept, Assemblers, loaders, linkers,macros, compilers, interpreters, operating system, design of assemblers.

UNIT II (12T)



Macros and macro processors, Macro definitions and instructions, Macro calls, Features of Macros, Design of Macroprocessors

UNIT III (12T)

Loading, Linking and Relocating Loader Schemes-Binders, Linking loaders, overlays, dynamic binders- Dynamic loading and dynamic linking- Relocatability of programs

UNIT IV (12T)

Compilers-Phases of Compiler-Lexical syntax,intermediate code generation, optimization, code generation, symbol table and error correcting routines- Passes of a compiler.

UNIT V (12T)

Case studies of lexical and syntax analyzers: LEX and YACC.

References:

1. D.M.Dhamdhere, Systems Programming and Operating Systems.

2. John J Donovan, Systems Programming

BCA6B17e| Technical Writing


Objectives

Acquire the skills and knowledge for professional technical communication, web content writing, soft skill development and search engine optimization.

Prerequisites

Basic communication skills in English.

Course Outline

Unit I [12 T]

Basics of Technical Communication: Technical Communication - features; Distinction between General and Technical communication; Language as a tool of communication; Levels of communication: Interpersonal, Organizational, Mass communication; the flow of



Communication: Downward, Upward, Lateral or Horizontal (Peer group); Barriers to Communication.

Unit II [12 T]

Constituents of Technical Written Communication: Word formation, Prefix and Suffix; Synonyms and Antonyms; Homophones; One Word Substitution; Technical Terms; Paragraph Development: Techniques and Methods -Inductive, Deductive, Spatial, Linear, Chronological etc; The Art of Condensation- various steps.

Unit III [12 T]

Forms of Technical Communication - Business Letters: Sales and Credit letters; Letter of Enquiry; Letter of Quotation, Order, Claim and Adjustment Letters; Memos, Notices, Circulars; Job application and Resumes.

Unit IV [12 T]

Reports: Types; Significance; Structure, Style & Writing of Reports. Technical Proposal; Parts; Types; Writing of Proposal; Significance, Technical Paper, Project, Dissertation and Thesis Writing. E-Media: E-mail – E-Newsletter – Blogging – E-Magazines – Social Networks.

Unit V [12 T]

Soft Skills: Presentation Strategies - Preparing a Presentation – Body Language – Voice Dynamics – Handling Questions.

Text Books

1. Professional Communication: For GautamBuddh Technical University &Mahamaya Technical University, Pearson Education India.

2. Phillip A. Laplante, Technical Writing: A Practical Guide for Engineers and Scientists (What Every Engineer Should Know), CRC Press.

References

1. Gerald J. Alred ,Charles T. Brusaw, Walter E. Oliu, Handbook of Technical Writing, Tenth Edition.

2. Gary Blake and Robert W. Bly, The Elements of Technical Writing, New York: Macmillan Publishers.

3. Hackos, JoAnn T., Managing Your Documentation Projects. Wiley, 1994.



OPEN COURSES

BCS5D01 | Introduction to Computers & Office Automation


Objectives:

To get a general introduction to office automation packages To get a general introduction to Internet

Prerequisites:

Basic knowledge Computers and Internet

Course Outline

UNIT I (6T)

Introduction to Computers: Types of Computers - DeskTop, Laptop, Notebook and Netbook. Hardware: CPU, Input / Output Devices, Storage Devices – System - Software - Operating Systems, Programming Languages, Application Software - Networks - LAN, WAN - Client - Server.

UNIT II (8T)

Documentation Using a Word Processor (OpenOffice Writer / M.S. Word)- Introduction to Office Automation, Creating & Editing Document, Formatting Document, Auto-text, Autocorrect, Spelling and Grammar Tool, Document Dictionary, Page Formatting, Bookmark, Advance Features - Mail Merge, Macros, Tables, File Management, Printing, Styles, linking and embedding object, Template.

UNIT III (8T)

Electronic Spread Sheet(OpenOfficeCalc/MS-Excel) - Introduction to Spread Sheet, Creating & Editing Worksheet, Formatting and Essential Operations, Formulas and Functions, Charts, Advanced features - Pivot table & Pivot Chart, Linking and Consolidation.

UNIT IV (8T)



Presentation using (OpenOffice Impress/MS-Power Point): Presentations, Creating, Manipulating & Enhancing Slides, Organizational Charts, Charts, Word Art, Layering art Objects, Animations and Sounds, Inserting Animated Pictures or Accessing through Object, Inserting Recorded Sound Effect or In-Built Sound Effect.

References:

1. Absolute Beginner’s Guide to Computer Basics, Michael Miller,Prentice Hall.

2. Learn Microsoft Office, Russell A.Stultz - BPB Publication.

3. Internet & World Wide Web - How to program, H.M.Deitel, P.J.Deitel, et al., Prentice

Hall.

BCS5D02 | Introduction to Web Designing


Objectives:

To get a general introduction to Internet To achieve basic Web designing skills

Prerequisites:

Basic knowledge Computers and Internet

Course Outline

UNIT I (7T)

HTML: Introduction - history of html, sgml - structure of html document, web page layout, html tags and types - font type, paragraph formatting, meta data, blockquote, hyperlinks, linking, comments, white space, horizontal ruler, images, ordered and unordered lists, frames, tables, forms

UNIT II (7T)

DHTML: Introduction, DHTML technologies, elements of DHTML, document object model, events - window events, form events, keyboard events, mouse events, style sheets, properties used in style sheets - background properties, positioning properties.

UNIT III (8T)



Javascript: Introduction and advantages of javascript, java script syntax, writing javascript in html, javascript operators, arrays and expressions, programming constructs - for .. in loop, while loop - dialog boxes and prompts - alert, prompt, confirm methods - functions - built-in functions and user defined functions, scope of variables, handling events, using event handlers and event methods, form object, properties, methods, form element’s properties and methods.

UNIT IV (8T)

HTML Editor: Introduction, advantages, creating, opening, saving a web page, building forms, formatting and aligning text and paragraph, adding lists, styles and themes, linking pages, working with images, frames

References:

1. Internet and World Wide Web, H.M.Dietel, Pearson.

BCS5D03 | Introduction to Problem Solving and C Programming


Objectives:

To introduce fundamental principles of Problem Solving aspects. To learn the concept of programming. To learn C language.

Prerequisites:

None

Course Outline

UNIT I (7T)

Introduction: The problem solving aspect, Top-down design, Implementation of algorithms, Program verification, efficiency of algorithms. Introduction to C Programming, overview and importance of C, C Program Structure and Simple programs, Creation and Compilation of C Programs under Linux and Windows Platforms.

UNIT II (7T)



Elements of C Language and Program constructs. Character Set,C Tokens, Keywords and Identifier, Constants, Variables, Data types, Variable declaration and assignment of values, Symbolic constant definition. C-Operators, Arithmetic operators, relational operators, and logical operators, assignment operators, increment and decrement operators, conditional operators, special operators, arithmetic expressions, evaluation of expressions, precedence of arithmetic operators, Type conversion in expressions, operator precedence and associativity, Mathematical Functions, I/O operations.

UNIT III (8T)

Decision making, Branching and Looping. Decision making with IF statement, Simple IF statement, If.. .else statement, Nesting of If..else and else.. .if Ladder, Switch statement, Conditional operator, Go-to statement. Looping: While loop, Do-While, and For Loops, Nesting of loops, jumps in loop, skipping of loops.

UNIT IV (8T)

Array & Strings - One dimensional array, two dimensional array and multi-dimensional array, strings and string manipulation functions. Structures & Union structure definition, giving values to members, structure initialization, comparison of structure variables, arrays of structures, arrays within structures, structures within arrays, structures and functions, Unions, bit-fields.

References:

1. Programming in ANSI C, E. Balaguruswami.

2. The C Programming Language, Brian W. Kernighan & Dennis M.Ritchie.

3. Let us C, Yashvant P. Kanetkar.

4. Programming with C, ByranGotfried, Schaums Outline series.

BCS5D04| Introduction to Data Analysis using Spread sheet


Objective

To introduce the importance of software tools. To learn the Analysis using Spread sheets.

Prerequisites



Background of the Basic Science and statistics at +2 level

Course Outline

Unit I [8 T]

Introduction to MS Excel and Understanding Basic Working with it: Quick review on MS Excel Options, Ribbon, Sheets , Difference between Excel 2003, 2007, 2010 and 2013- Saving Excel File as PDF, CSV and Older versions - Using Excel Shortcuts - Copy, Cut, Paste, Hide, Unhide, and Link the Data in Rows, Columns and Sheet Using Paste Special Options - Formatting Cells, Rows, Columns and Sheets - Protecting & Unprotecting Cells, Rows, Columns and Sheets with or without Password - Page Layout and Printer Properties - Inserting Pictures and other objects in Worksheets

Unit II [7 T]

Introduction to Pivot table: Use multiple pivot tables and pivot charts to create dashboard, Connect multiple slicers to the pivot tables.

Unit III [8 T]

Pivot table applications in analytics: filter the data shown in the pivot in different ways to achieve subsets of the data, Use calculated fields on top of the pivot table to calculate profitability and find anomalies.

Unit IV [7 T]

Formulae and Function: Use formulas to aggregate the data as an alternative to pivot tables for more flexible reporting layouts. Usage of multiple tables in a single pivot, introduction to data table.

Text Books:

1. Winston, Microsoft Excel 2013: Data Analysis and Business Modeling, Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited (2013), ISBN: 9788120349605

References:

1. John Walkenbach, Microsoft Excel 2013 Bible, Wiley (23 April 2013), ISBN: 9788126541720.

2. Paul McFedries, Excel 2013 Formulas and Function 1st Edition, Pearson India (2014), ISBN: ISBN: 9789332524026.

Department of Economics

M A ECONOMICS (CUCSS)

Semester Name of the Paper Credit

Hours/Week # Total WeightExternal Internal

I

Core Course I- ECO1C01Microeconomics: Theory and Applications I 4 7 36 5Core Course II- ECO1C02Macroeconomics: Theories and Policies I 4 6 36 5Core Course III- ECO1C03Indian Economy: Problems and Policies 4 6 36 5Core Course IV- ECO1C04 Quantitative Methods for EconomicAnalysis-I

4 6 36 5

II

Core Course V- ECO2C05Microeconomics: Theory and Applications II

4 6 36 5

Core Course VI- ECO2C06Macroeconomics: Theories and Policies II 4 6 36 5Core Course VII- ECO2C07Public Finance: Theory and Practice 4 7 36 5Core Course VIII- ECO2C08Quantitative Methods for Economic Analysis-II

4 6 36 5

III

Core Course IX- ECO3C09International Trade 4 6 36 5Core Course X- ECO3C10Growth and Development 4 6 36 5Core Course XI- ECO3C11Banking: Theory and Practice 4 6 36 5Core Course XII- ECO3C12Basic Econometrics 4 7 36 5

IV

Core Course XIII- ECO4C13International Finance 4 6 36 5Core Course XIV- ECO4C14Financial Markets 4 6 36 5

Elective Course III

PAPER-III- BUSINESS ECONOMICS

4 6 36 5

Elective Course X

PAPER-X- LOCAL LEVEL PLANNING

4 6 36 5

Dissertation 4 1Viva Voce (a+b)a. Dissertation Viva

(2 Credits)b.Theory Viva

(2 Credits)

4

Total 72

# 20 hours are allotted for seminars for each paper per semester.* Two elective papers to be selected from the list of 13 elective papers appended.


Vasudevan .K

Assistant Registrar


Section Officer

File Ref.No.20980/GA - IV - B3/2015/Admn


AbstractBA Mass Communication and Journalism - CUCBCSS UG 2014-Restructured Curriculum and Syllabi - Implementedwith effect from 2017 Admissions onwards -Approved-Orders issued.

G & A - IV - B

Read:-1. Minutes of the meeting of the BoS in Journalism held on 17/03/2017 vide item no.1&22. Minutes of the meeting of the Faculty of Journalism held on 06.07.2017 vide itemno.23. Minutes of the meeting of the AC held on 17.07.2017. Vide item no.II C 4. Orders of Vice Chancellor in the file of even No. dated 01.08.2017

ORDER

Vide paper read first above, the meeting of the BoS in Journalism held on 17/03/2017 vide itemno.1&2 approved the resturctured syllabi for BA Mass Communication and Journalism for 2017Admission onwards.Vide paper read second above, the meeting of the Faculty of Journalism held on 06.07.2017 vide itemno.2 resolved to approve the minutes of the meeting of the BoS in Journalism held on 10/2/2017 &17/03/2017.Vide paper read third above, the meeting of the Academic Council held on 17.07.2017 Vide item no.IIC has resolved to approve the minutes of the meeting of the Faculty of Journalism held on06.07.2017 alongwith the minutes of the meeting of the BoS coming under the Faculty of Journalism.Vide paper read fourth above, the Vice Chancellor has accorded sanction to implement therestructured Curriculum and Syllabi of BA Mass Communication and Journalism - CUCBCSS UG2014 with effect from 2017 Admissions onwards.Sanction has therefore been accorded to implement the restructured Curriculum and Syllabi of BAMass Communication and Journalism - CUCBCSS UG 2014 with effect from 2017 Admissionsonwards.Orders are issued accordingly. (Copy of the Restructured Syllabi enclosed)

ToThe Principals of all affiliated Colleges

Copy to:CE/ Ex Section/ EG Section/ DR and AR BA Branch/ EX IV/Director, SDE/SDEExam Wing/ Tabulation Section / System Administrator with a request to upload theSyllabus in the University website/ GA I F Section/ Library/ SF/ FC/DF

1


BOARD OF STUDIES (UG)IN

JOURNALISMRestructured Curriculum

andSyllabi as per

CUCBCSS UG Regulations 2014(2017 Admission Onwards)

PART IB.A.

Mass Communication and Journalism PART II

Complementary Courses in1. Journalism,

2. Electronic Media, and3. Mass Communication (for BA West Asian

Studies)

4. Complementary Courses in Media Practices for B.A LRP Programmes in Visual Communication, Multimedia, and Film and Television

forNon-Journalism UG Programmes

2

GENERAL SCHEME OF THE PROGRAMME

Sl No Course No of Courses Credits Marks

1 Common Courses (English) 6 22 600

2 Common Courses(Additional Language) 4 16 400

3 Core Courses 15 62 1500

4 Project(Linked to Core Courses)

1 2 50

5 Complementary Courses 8 16 400

6 Open Courses 1 2 50

Total 120 3000

3

PART IB.A.

MASS COMMUNICATION AND JOURNALISMDistribution of CoursesA - Common Courses

B - Core CoursesC - Complementary Courses

D - Open Courses

4

A. Common Courses

Sl.No. Code Title Hrs/Week Credit Semester Marks

1 A01 Common English Course I 5 4 I 100

2 A02 Common English Course II 4 3 I 100

3 A03 Common English Course III 5 4 II 100

4 A04 Common English Course IV 4 3 II 100

5 A05 Common English Course V 5 4 III 100

6 A06 Common English Course VI 5 4 IV 100

7 A07 Additional language Course I 4 4 I 100

8 A08 Additional language Course II 4 4 II 100

9 A09 Additional language Course III 5 4 III 100

10 A10 Additional language Course IV 5 4 IV 100

Total 38 1000

5

B. Core CoursesSl.No. Code Title Contact hrs Credit Semester Marks11 JOU1B01 Fundamentals of

Mass Communication 6 5 I 100

12 JOU2B02 History of JournalismAnd Broadcasting 6 5 II 100

13 JOU3B03 Reporting for Newspapers 5 4 III 100

14 JOU3B04 Editing for Newspapers 4 4 III 100

15 JOU4B05 Design and Pagination 4 4 IV 100

16 JOU4B06 Radio Production 5 4 IV 100

17 JOU5B07 Introduction to MassCommunication Theories 6 4 V 100

18 JOU5B08 Introduction to Television Production 5 4 V 100

19 JOU5B09 Corporate Communication 4 4 V 100

20 JOU5B10 Advertising 4 4 V 100

21 JOU5B11 Photo Journalism 4 4 V 100

22 JOU6B12 Media Laws and Ethics 5 4 VI 100

23 JOU6B13 Online Journalism 5 4 VI 100

24 JOU6B14 Introduction to Cinema 5 4 VI 100

25 JOU6B15 Economic and Business Reporting 5 4 VI 10026 JOU6B16ProjectEach student shall submit a short research project relevant to the areas of communication, journalism and mass media carried out under the supervision of a teacher. Evaluation is basedon a dissertation (in approximately 25-40 pages typescript in standarddissertation format). 5 2 VI 50

Total 64 1550

6

C. Complementary CoursesSl.No. Title Contact Credit Semester Marks

1 Complementary I – Course 1 3 2 I 50

2 Complementary II – Course 1 3 2 I 50

3 Complementary I – Course 2 3 2 II 50

4 Complementary II – Course 2 3 2 II 50

5 Complementary I – Course 3 3 2 III 50

6 Complementary II – Course 3 3 2 III 50

7 Complementary I – Course 4 3 2 IV 50

8 Complementary II – Course 4 3 2 IV 50

Total 16 400

There will be Complementary examinations only in the end of second and fourth semester.

The list of Disciplines from which Complementary Courses for B.A. Mass Communication and Journalism may be chosen:1. English2. Political Science3. Economics4. History5. Sociology6. Multimedia Journalism7. Computer Applications8. Communicative / Functional EnglishTitle of the Complementary courses, detailed syllabi and objectives of Complementary (to be taken by B.A. Mass Communication and Journalism students) are to be provided by the concerned Boards.

D. Open CoursesStudents from other disciplines can choose any one of the following courses in the FIFTH semester.Code Title Contact Credit Semester MarksJOU5D01 Newspaper JournalismJOU5D02 Broadcast JournalismJOU5D03 Development Communication 3 2 V 50

7

SCHEME OF EXAMINATION

Core courses consist of fifteen theory papers and a project work.The evaluation scheme for each course including the project work shall contain two parts.i) Internal assessment ii) External evaluation20% weight shall be given to Internal assessment and 80% weight shall be for External evaluation.Each of the fifteen theory papers carries a total of 100 marks (20 for Internal assessment and 80 for External evaluation).The duration of examination for each course is 3 hours.For the project work, out of the total 50 marks, 10 for Internal assessment and 40 for External evaluation.For further details:See University of Calicut Regulations for Choice based credit and SemesterSystem for under Graduate Curriculum – 2014.

8

Semester ICourse Code Title Hrs./ Week Credit Marks

Common Course 1 A01 Common English Course I 5 4 100

Common Course 2 A02 Common English Course II 4 3 100

Common Course 3 A07 Additional Language Course I 4 4 100

Core Course I JOU1 Fundamentals ofB01 Mass Communication. 6 5 100

Complementary Detailed Syllabi and Objectivesare to be provided by the

I Course 1 concerned Boards 3 2 50

ComplementaryII Course 1 " 3 2 50

Total 25 20 500

Semester IICourse Code Title Hrs./ Week Credit Marks

Common Course 4 A03 Common English Course III 5 4 100

Common Course 5 A04 Common English Course IV 4 3 100

Common Course 6 A08 Additional Language Course II 4 4 100

Core Course 2 JOU2 History of JournalismB02 and Broadcasting 6 5 100




Total 25 20 500

The Complementary examinations of First and Second Semester will be conducted at the end of Second Semester.

9

Semester IIICourse Code Title Hrs./ Week Credit Marks

Common Course 7 A05 Common English Course V 5 4 100

Common Course 8 A09 Additional Language Course III 5 4 100

Core Course 3 JOU3 Reporting forB03 Newspapers 5 4 100

Core Course 4 JOU3 EditingB04 for Newspapers 4 4 100




Total 25 20 500

Semester IVCourse Code Title Hrs/ Week Credit Marks Common Course 9 A06 Common English Course VI 5 4 100

Common Course 10 A10 Additional Language Course IV 5 4 100

Core Course 5 JOU4 Design andB05 Pagination 4 4 100

Core Course 6 JOU4 RadioB06 Production 5 4 100




Total 25 20 500

The Complementary examinations of Third and Fourth Semester will be conducted at the end of Fourth Semester.

10

Semester VCourse Code Title Hrs/ Week Credit Marks Core Course 7 JOU5 Introduction to Mass

B07 Communication theories 6 4 100

Core Course 8 JOU5 Introduction toB08 Television Production 5 4 100

Core Course 09 JOU5 CorporateB09 Communication 4 4 100

Core Course 10 JOU5 AdvertisingB10 4 4 100

Core Course 11 JOU5 PhotoB11 Journalism 4 4 100

Open Course I Students can choose courses offered byother departments 2 2 50

Total 25 22 550

Tthe BOS in Journalism offers following courses as open courses. The Students from other disciplines can choose any one of these:JOU5D01 Newspaper JournalismJOU5D02 Broadcast JournalismJOU5D03Development Communication

Semester VICourse Code Title Hrs./ Week Credit Marks

Course 12 JOU6 Media LawB12 Ethics 5 4 100

Core Course 13 JOU6 OnlineB13 Journalism 5 4 100

Core Course 14 JOU6 Introduction toB14 Cinema 5 4 100

Core Course 15 JOU6 Economic andB15 Business Reporting 5 4 100

Core Course16 JOU3B16 Project 5 2 50

Total 25 18 450

11

Total Credits 120 3000PART II

Complementary Courses offered by Journalism for

NON JOURNALISM UG PROGRAMMES

Complementary Courses in1. Journalism,

2. Electronic Media, and3. Mass Communication (for BA West Asian Studies)

4. Complementary Courses in Media Practices (for B.A LRP Programmes in Visual Communication, Multimedia, and Film and Television)

forNon-Journalism UG Programmes

I. Complementary Courses in Journalism1. Introduction to Communication and Journalism.2. News Reporting and Editing.3. History of Mass Media in India4. Corporate Communication and Advertising.

Distribution of CoursesSemester Code Title Hrs/

Week Credit MarksI JOU1C01 Introduction to

Communication andJournalism 3 2 50

II JOU2C01 News Reportingand Editing 3 2 50

III JOU3C01 History of Mass Media 3 2 50 In India

IV JOU4C01 Corporate Communication and Advertising 3 2 50

Total 8 200

12

II. Complementary Courses in Electronic Media1. Introduction to Electronic Media2. Radio and Television3. Fundamentals of Cinema4. Introduction to New Media.

Distribution of Courses

Semester Code Title Hrs./Week Credit Marks

I JOU1C02 Introduction toElectronic Media 3 2 50

II JOU2C02 Radio and Television 3 2 50

III JOU3C02 Fundamentals of Cinema 3 2 50

IV JOU4C02 Introduction to New Media. 3 2 50

Total 8 200

III. Complementary Courses in Mass Communication(for BA West Asian Studies)1. Introduction to Mass Communication2. Print Media Journalism3. Electronic Media4. Mass Media in West Asia

Semester Code Title Hrs/ Week Credit Marks

I JOU1C03 Introduction to MassCommunication 3 2 50

II JOU2C03 Print Media Journalism 3 2 50

III JOU3C03 Electronic Media 3 2 50

IV JOU4C03 Mass Media in West Asia 3 2 50

Total 8 200

Note: The complementary examinations will be conducted only in the end of the Second and Fourth semester with 100 marks for each examination with 200 marks as total for a complementary.

13

IV COMPLEMENTARY FOR LANGUAGE REDUCED PATTERN LRP

Sl No

Course Code


Hours

External Internal Credits

1 JOU1C04 Introduction to Mass Media

3 80 20 3

2 JOU2C04 Newspaper Journalism

3 80 20 3

3 JOU3C04 Television Journalism

4 80 20 3

4 JOU4C04 Digital Journalism

4 80 20 3

Total (4 Courses) 14 320 80 12

Note: In LRP Pattern there will be END SEMESTER examinations at the end of each semester with 100 Marks each.

14

BA MASS COMMUNICATION AND JOURNALISM

Sl.No. Code Title Contact hrs. Credit Semester Marks11 JOU1B01 Fundamentals of

Mass Communication 6 5 I 100

12 JOU2B02 History of JournalismAnd Broadcasting 6 5 II 100

13 JOU3B03 Reporting for Newspapers 5 4 III 100

14 JOU3B04 Editing for Newspapers 4 4 III 100

15 JOU4B05 Design and Pagination 4 4 IV 100

16 JOU4B06 Radio Production 5 4 IV 100

17 JOU5B07 Introduction to MassCommunication Theories 6 4 V 100

18 JOU5B08 Introduction to Television Production 5 4 V 100

19 JOU5B09 Corporate Communication 4 4 V 100

20 JOU5B10 Advertising 4 4 V 100

21 JOU5B11 Photo Journalism 4 4 V 100

22 JOU6B12 Media Laws and Ethics 5 4 VI 100

23 JOU6B13 Online Journalism 5 4 VI 100

24 JOU6B14 Introduction to Cinema 5 4 VI 100

25 JOU6B15 Economic & Business Reporting 5 4 VI 10026 JOU6B16ProjectEach student shall submit a short research project relevant to the areas of communication, journalism and mass media carried out under the supervision of a teacher. Evaluation is based on a dissertation (in approximately 25-40 pages typescript in standarddissertation format). 5 2 VI 50

15

Total 64 1550

BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester I Course 11 Code: JOU1B01

Fundamentals of Mass CommunicationContact Hours: 6 Credits: 5

ObjectivesTo make students acquaint with the basic concepts of communication.

Module IDefinition of communication, evolution of human communication, elements of communication, types of communication: Intra, inter, group, organizational, public and mass. Verbal and non-verbal communication.

Module IIConcept of mass. Evolution of mass communication and mass communication technology. Invention of printing and democratization of knowledge.

Module IIINature, characteristics, functions and dysfunctions of mass media. Types of media, an overview of folk media, print, radio, TV, film and new media.

Module IVDefinition and functions of models. Scope and purpose of communication models. Basic communication models: Aristotle, Lasswell, Shannon & Weaver, circular model, Berlo, Dance, Gerbner’s general model. White’s gatekeeping model.

Module VStatus of mass media in India. Communication and information revolution in India, scope and challenges of digitalization in India, digital divide. Impact of new media on the conventional mass media. Future of print media.

Books for Reference1. International Encyclopedia of Communication: Oxford.2. Turow, Joseph : Media Today: An Introduction to Mass Communication, 4th Edition,Routledge.3. Joseph R. Dominick : The Dynamics of Mass Communication.4. Denis McQuail :McQuail’s Mass Communication Theory.5. Melvin L. Defleur : Fundamentals of Human Communication.6. Denis McQuail and Sven Windahl : Communication Models.7. Agee, Ault &Emery : Main Currents in Mass Communication.Books for Further Reading1. Marshall McLuhan Understanding Media.2. David K BerloThe Process of Communication.

16

3. Kuppuswami Communication and Social Change.4. Keval J Kumar Mass Communication in India.5. D S Mehta Mass Communication and Journalism in India.6. Dr. J V Vilanilam Mass Communication in India.7. Andrew Beck & Peter Bennet Communication Studies.8. Rogers and Singhal India’s Communication Revolution.

I. Continuous Assessment : 20 Marks1. Class Tests: 10 Marks.

There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of final module.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks. Allotment of marks as per University Regulations.3. Media assignments / Seminar Presentation: 5 marks each. Student shall present a seminar on a topic in the syllabus allotted by the faculty and submit

the paper for valuation.

II. Semester end examination: 80 Marks

Model question paperFirst Semester B.A. Degree Examination

JOU1B01 Fundamentals of Mass Communication

Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks: 80PART A

17

Answer any 5 questions not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks.

1 Intrapersonal communication2. Post-truth3. Marshall McLuhan4. Negative feedback5. Digital divide6. Blogs7. Gatekeeping8. Mass-line communication9. Theyyam

(3x5=15)PART B


10. Explain the circular model of communication.11. Explain the dysfunctions of mass media.12. What are the characteristics of new media?13. Differentiate between radio and television.14. Explain the concept ‘mass’ in mass communication.15. What are the functions of mass communication?16. Explain the important functions of communication models.17. Examine the challenges of print media in the digital era.18. Assess the trends in Malayalam films.19. Explain the implications of Dance’s model of communication.20. What are the characteristics and function of non-verbal communication?21. What do you mean by democratization of knowledge?

(5x7=35)

PART CAnswer any 2 questions not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks.22. Trace the evolution of mass communication with special reference to India.23. Explain the characteristics of film as a medium of mass communication.24. Give a critique of mass media in India.25. Describe with appropriate examples the various elements of human communication.

(15x2=30)

18

BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester II Course 12 Code: JOU2B02History of Journalism and BroadcastingContact Hours: 6 Credits: 5

Objective:To help students to understand the foundation on which the Indian Journalism stands.

Module IEvolution of Indian press: James Augustus Hicky - James Silk Buckingham - Serampore missionaries - Raja Ram Mohan Roy - freedom movement and the press - Gandhi as a journalist - press in the post-independence period - Press Council of India.

Module IIHistory of Malayalam press: Rajyasamacharam – Paschimodayam - Gnana Nikshepam –Deepika - Satyanada Kahalam - Malayala Manorama - Kerala Mitram - KeralaPatrika –Mathrubhumi - Kerala Kaumudi - Al-Ameen – Deenabhandu – Prabhatham-Malayalam press during the Freedom Struggle.

Module-IIIProminent personalities of Indian journalism: S.Sadanand, Ram Nath Goenka, Pothen Joseph, cartoonist Sankar, Sivaram, Raghu Ray, Arun Shourie, Prabhu Chawala, Barkha Dutt, Prannoy Roy, Karan Thapar, Rajdeep Sardesai.

Module IVLegends of Malayalam Journalism: Herman Gundert - Kandathil Varughese Mappilai -Swadeshabhimani Ramakrishna Pillai - Kesari Balakrishna Pillai – Chengulathu Kunhirama Menon, Vengayil Kunhiraman Nayanar, K. P. Kesava Menon, C.V. Kunjiraman.

Module VHistory of broadcasting: Radio broadcasting in India - FM radio - growth of television -broadcasting in India – SITE - broadcast code - Prasar Bharati.

Books for Reference1. Parthasarathy, R Journalism in India Sterling.2. Krishna Murthy, Dr N Indian journalism3. Raghavan, G N S The press in India4. Robin Jeffrey, India’s newspaper revolution5. Raghavan, Puthupally Kerala pathrapravarthana charithram6. Thomas, M V Bharathiya Pathracharithram Bhasha Institute

Books for further Reference1. Masani, Mehra Broadcasting and the people National Book Trust2. Aswathy, G C Broadcasting in India Allied3. Kumar, Keval J Mass Communication in India Jaico

19

4. Barns, Margarita The Indian Press George Allen &Unwin5. Bhargava, Motilal The role of the press in the freedom movement Reliance6. Raghavan, G N S Indian Journalism :A new history7. Rao, Chalapathi The press National Book Trust8. Natarajan,J History of Indian journalism9. Chatterjee, P C Broadcasting in India Sage10. Pavarala,Vinod; Malik Kanchan K Other voices the struggle for community radio Sage11. Luthra, H K Indian broadcasting Publications Division12. Baruah, U L This is All India Radio Publications Division

I. Continuous Assessment: 20 Marks1. Class Tests : 10 Marks

There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of final module.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks Allotment of marks as per University regulations3. Media Assignment/ Presentation: 5 Marks each. Student shall present a seminar on a

subject allotted by the faculty and submit the paper for valuation.

II. Semester End Examination: 80 Marks

20

Model question paperSecond Semester B.A. Degree Examination

JOU2B02History of Journalism and Broadcasting

Time: 3 Hours ,Max. Marks: 80

PART AAnswer any 5 questions. Each not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks

1. FM Stations.2. Raghu Ray.3. Pothen Joseph.4. Harijan.5. Terrestrial Broadcasting.6. Sambad Kaumudi.7. Herman Gundert.8. Kerala Mitram.9. Asianet.

(5x3=15 marks)PART B

Answer any 7 questions. Each not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks.

10. What are the objectives of Prasar Bharati?11. Write a note on Serampore Missionaries.12. Trace the history of broadcasting in India.13. Discuss the objectives of the Press Council.14. Comment on Kesari Balakrishna Pillai.15. Briefly describe the history of printing.16. What were the contributions of Raja Ram Mohan Roy to Indian Journalism?17. Comment on the contributions of James Augustus Hicky.18. Trace the journalistic ventures of Swadeshabhimani.19. Briefly elucidate the significance of SITE in the history of broadcasting in India.20. Trace the evolution of ‘Mathrubhumi’ as a nationalist newspaper.21. State the significance of ‘Illikkunnu’ in the history of Malayalam press.

(7x5=35 marks)

PART C

Answer any 2 questions. Each not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks.

22. Explain the contributions of Mahatma Gandhi to journalism?23. Trace the growth of television broadcasting in India.24. Describe the state of press during the Emergency.25. Elucidate the contributions of Christian missionaries to Malayalam Journalism.

(2x15=30 marks)

21

BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester III Course 13 Code: JOU3B03Reporting for NewspapersContact Hours 5 Credits 4

Objective:To make students exposed to the concept of news, types of and news values.

Module I

What is news – Definitions of News – News Values (Determinants): Proximity, prominence, oddity, conflict, controversy, consequence, timeliness and human Interest - News and views

Module II

Qualities and responsibilities of a reporter – Nose for news- resourcefulness - Principles of reporting: Accuracy, objectivity, attribution, fairness and newsworthiness – Keeping deadlines- Source confidentiality.

Module III

Structure of News – Chronological and logical (inverted pyramid) formats in writing – Intro – Importance of Intro – types of Intro – Elements of News – 5 W s and One H ingredients – Hard News – Soft News – human interest stories - Infotainment

Module IV

News sources – Expected and unexpected sources – finding out and making use of sources – tip off – News conferences and Meet- the- presses – Interviews – pre interview home works for special interviews – hand outs and press releases – Other media – Internet – News agencies.

Module V

Types of reporting – Basics of reporting - On (from) the spot reporting – gathering information through various channels – arm chair journalism – Investigative reporting – Beats and assignments – Reporting accidents, tragedies, natural disasters, crime, court, sports, speech, functions, seminars, entertainment, etc. – Specialised reporting.

Books for Reference

1. Melvin Mencher, News Reporting and Writing, New York, Oxford University Press, 2007.

2. Jerry Lanson and Mitchell Stephens, Writing and Reporting the News, New York: Oxford University Press, 2008.

3. Fred Fedler and John Bender, Reporting for the Media, New York: Oxford University Press, 2001.

22

4. Ambrish Saxena, Fundamentals of Reporting and Editing, New Delhi: Kanishka Publishers, 2007.

5. Joan Clayton, Interviewing for Journalists, London: Piatkus Publishers, 1994.

6. Hugo de Burgh, Investigative Journalism: Context and Practice, London: Routledge, 2000.

7. Straubhaar Larose, Media Now, New York: Thomson Wadsworth, 2004.

8. M.V. Kamath, Professional Journalism, New Delhi, Vikas Publishers, 1980.

Books For Further Reading

1. B.G. Verghese (Ed.), Breaking the Big Story; Great Moments in Indian Journalism, New Delhi: Penguin Books, 2003.

2. David Randall, The Great Reporters, London: Pluto Press, 2005.

3. T.J.S. George, Lessons in Journalism: The Story of Pothan Joseph, New Delhi: Viva Books, 2007.

4. Anita Pratap, Island of Blood, New Delhi: Penguin Books, 2002.

5. B. G. Verghese, Warrior of the Fourth Estate: Ramnath Goenka of the Express, New Delhi: Penguin Books, 2005.

6. Kuldip Nayar, Scoop: Inside Stories from the Partition to the Present, New Delhi: Harper Collins Publishers, 2006.

7. P. Sainath, Everybody Loves a Good Drought, New Delhi: Penguin Books, 2004.

I. Continuous Assessment: 20 Marks

1. Class Tests: 10 Marks There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: One, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of final

module.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks. Allotment of marks as per University regulations

3. Media Assignment: 5 Marks Each student shall submit a work book consisting of 5 different news reports.

Semester End Examination: 80 Marks

Model question paperThird Semester B.A. Degree Examination

JOU3B03Reporting for Newspaper

Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 80

23

PART 1

1. Nose for News

2. Beat

3. Meet the Press

4. Deadline

5. Byline

6. Scoop

7. Press release

8. Off the record

9. Curtain raiser story

PART B

Answer any seven questions not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 Marks.

10. What do you mean by ‘inverted pyramid’ in news writing? What are the main merits and

demerits of this pattern of reporting news?

11. What is a follow up story? Suggest some recent news items worth attempting follow up.

12. List five most important qualities of a news reporter and explain.

13. Explain proximity, conflict and consequence as news values. Give suitable examples.

14. How is the language of sports reporting different from that of other hard news? Illustrate.

15. If you are one among the reporters team assigned to cover the State School Youth

festivals, what all will be the preparations you make?

16. How is a feature story different from a hard news story?

24

17. ‘Skepticism’ is a characteristic of news reporter – Do you agree? How and why?

18. ‘Facts are Sacred; Comments are free’ – is a frequently quoted saying in media. What

does it imply?

19. Sources are valued assets of a news reporter. He should handle it with care – Illustrate.

20. Keeping deadlines is of utmost importance in reporters’ life. Why?

21. What do you mean by 5 W’s and 1 H? Do we need to have all these in all the news

equally?

PART C

Answer any two questions. Each not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks

22. Interview is not merely asking some questions. It is an art of opening mind. A reporter

must do ample preparation for it – Describe.

23. Modern news reporter have various sources of information like Facebook, Twitter, Skype,

Whatsapp, Wikipaedia etc. – How do they support a journalist in his job?

24. Which all are the important qualities of news? Explain each with examples.

25. Prepare a detailed news report on a major issue of your village.

25

BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester III Course 14 Code JOU3B04Editing for NewspapersContact Hours: 4 Credits 4

Objective:To make students aware of the importance of error free copy and principles of editing.

Module IWhat is editing – Need and importance – General principles of editing – Structure of a news story – News-person’s language – Copy tasting – Editing for clarity– Editing for accuracy, objectivity, consistency, fairness, taste, balance and legal propriety – News persons language -Euphemism – Policy of the paper – Keep it short and simple ( KISS) – stylebook

Module II

News-room of a paper – Organisational structure of news desk – Editor, managing editor, associate editor, deputy editor, news editor, assistant editor, chief sub editor, senior sub editor, sub editor, proof reader – role and responsibility of news editor – functions and qualities of sub editor

Module III

Copy editing – Handling copies of reporters, correspondents, stringers, agents, citizen journalists and news agencies – Hand outs and press releases – Translating: English to Malayalam and vice versa – Trimming human interest stories – Slashing round ups – Planning follow ups

Module IV

Headlines and captions – Importance – Functions of headlines – Language of headline – Action in headline – Punch and topical – Types of headlines : banner, skyline, kicker, deck, subheads, editorial and feature headlines, Caption and catchwords – Changes and trends in headlining

Photographs and cartoons – Picture editing - Cropping and blowing ups

Module V

Various pages - Features and functions of different pages: Front page – news and make up –editorial page: editorial, articles, middle pieces, columns, letters to editors – Other news pages: Sports, local, national, international, financial and obituary pages – Feature pages and supplements.

26

Books for Reference1. Bruce Westley, News Editing, Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, 1972.2. Harold Evans, Newsman’s English, Handling Newspaper Text, News Headlines, Pictures

on a Page, Newspaper Design (A Five-Volume Manual of English, Typography and Layout) London: National Council for the Training of Journalists, 1984.

3. Floyd Baskette and Jack Sissors, The Art of Editing, New York: Macmillan Publishing Co, 1986.

4. Jerry Lanson and Mitchell Stephens, Writing and Reporting the News, New York: Oxford University Press, 2008.

5. Sunil Saxena, Headline Writing, New Delhi: Sage Publications, 2006.6. Ambrish Saxena, Fundamentals of Reporting and Editing, New Delhi: Kanishka

Publishers, 2007.7. Carl Sessions Stepp, Writing as Craft and Magic, New York: Oxford University Press,

2007.8. Rothsteine, Photojournalism, Amphoto Books, 1974.9. K.M. Sreevastava, News Reporting and Editing, New Delhi; Sterling Publications, 1987

Books for further reading1. T.J.S. George, Editing: A handbook for Journalists, New Delhi: Indian Institute of Mass

Communication, 1989.2. M.L. Stein and Susan Paterno, The News Writer’s Handbook, New Delhi: Surjeet

Publications, 2003.3. George Hough, News Writing, New Delhi: Kanishka Publishers, 2004.4. Jan Hakemulder and Fay Jonge, News Reporting and Editing, New Delhi: Anmol

Publications, 2002.5. Ron Smith and Loraine O’Connell, Editing Today, New Delhi: Surjeet Publications,

2004.6. M.K. Joseph, Outline of Editing, New Delhi: Anmol Publications, 2002.


1. Class Tests: 10 Marks There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: One, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of final

module.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks Allotment of marks as per University regulations

3. Media Assignment: 5 Marks each. Student shall submit a work book consisting of 5 different news reports.


III Suggested Activity: Students shall visit a Newspaper, understand the bureau activities as well as Desk activities and prepare a report.

Model question paperThird Semester B.A. Degree Examination

JOU3B04Editing for News paper

27


PART A

Explain any five of the following each not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries.

1. Copy Desk

2. Catchword

3. Value Addition

4. Libel

5. Dateline

6. Embargo

7. Stylebook

8. Clean copy

9. Intro

PART B

Answer any seven questions each not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 5 Marks

10. Both headline and intro represent the summary of the story. Then how do they differ?

11. What is the difference between running-story and a follow-up story?

12. Explain the term inverted pyramid. Do you consider it a relevant model of news narration of new age? Why?

13. Do all news intros need to contain 5 W’s and 1 H? –Establish.

14. Magazine features are different from newspaper features – How?

15. Prepare a suitable intro for the news of unexpected resignation of KPCC president.

16. Explain the terms ‘direct intro’ and ‘delayed intro’.

17. Differentiate between (a) column writing and (b) articles of a newspaper.

18. What are the characteristics of news-person’s language?

19. Captions are considered to be the heart and soul of news photographs – How?

20. Examine the importance of knowledge of relevant laws while editing news?

28

21. Imagine K J Yesudas declares his retirement from playback singing. What will be your headline for the news story? Explain why did you consider that headline?

PART C

Answer any two questions each not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks

22. Headlines, intros and captions are said to be the touchstones of an editors’ skill - substantiate with examples.

23. What do you mean by a news desk? What are its functions? Explain the roles of a sub-editor and a news-editor in detail.

24. Writing pattern and language differ for different types of newspaper contents –Explain citing examples of hard news, features, analytical news, sports stories and news involving technical matters.

25. Edit the following raw narration into a clean comprehensive news story. Write a suitable intro, arrange the order of details as needed and delete all irrelevant details. Give a suitable heading also.

The tragedy occurred today (Friday, 24th March) evening around 5 o’clock.

Puthiya veettil Raghu (43) , ‘Aradhana’ , Kottiyodi, Near Kuthuparamba, Kannur district, Kerala, his wife Lalitha (39), Their children Anoop (18), Sandeep(16), and Alaka (14) were on a family visit to Raghus’ elder brother Rajendrans’s house at Chettikulam, Elathur, Kozhikkode district. Raghu is a private electrician. Anoop is a student of B .Sc. first year Mathematics at Vimalagiri College, Kuthuparamba. Sandeep is plus one science student at Kottiyodi govt. H S S and Alaka studies in IX standard at Kottiyodi G H S.

Rajendran (46), wife Latha (41), their son Adarsh (20), daughter Maneesha (16) were residing at ‘Anand’ at Chettikulam. Both Lalitha and Latha are housewifes. Rajendran is a small scale building contractor. Adarsh is B A final year student at a private college. Maneesha studies for higher secondary (first year) at GHS, Elathur.

As part of their family re-union members of both families except Raghu and Rajendran were on a pleasure outing to Kappad beach. (Raghu and Rajendran were at a party with friends at a nieghbourhood house).

Reaching Kappad and while playing at beach the children wanted to take selfy in sea-waters. The mothers were chatting at the sand-bed. The children got into the water, arranged themselves in height order. Anoop was in front facing the shore holding mobile camera. They were dipping themselves upto chest in water and on a selfy- spree. Suddenly a huge wave came and immersersed all of them. No one could realize what was happening. Both mothers were seeing what was happening.

People around, hearing hue and cry, jumped into the water for rescue. Some could get hold of Anoop and rescued him. Some others could find Alaka by a nearby rock unconscious a little later. She was rushed to Kozhikkode Medical College Hospital, but could not be saved. Died on

29

the way. The body of snadeep was found deposited at the shore near Koyilandy, 10 kms. away, after 2hrs. Adarsh and Maneesha are still missing. Rescue teams of police, fire force and local people has not abandoned search even late in the night.

The bodies of Sandeep and Alaka are kept at Kozhikkode govt. Medical College mortuary for postmortem whi will be done tomorrow morning.

30

BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester IV Course 15 Code JOU4B05Design and PaginationContact Hours 4 Credits 4

Objective:To help students to understand the pagination techniques that are applied for different pages.

Module I

Pagination – Concept of broad sheets, tabloids and other formats – Functions of newspaper design – Principles of artistic design – White space – Balance, contrast, proportion and unity – Editor as a lay out artist

Module II

Principles of page make up – dummy preparation – positioning – vertical and horizontal make ups – Flexibility – Dos and don’ts of a good lay out – Various types of make ups- Modular make up

Module III

Traditional and contemporary make up concepts – Revolution brought about by computer – Freedom and potentials of D T P and computerized pagination – Design and pagination softwares – Page maker, Quark Xpress, Illustrator, Indesign - Photoshop

Module IV

Designing of different pages: front page, inside news pages, sports page, edit page –Concept of news package - Life style pages – Feature pages – Sunday pages – Supplement pages

Designing magazines – Cover designs

Module V

Innovations and special effects in pages – wrap-arounds and skews – Photo cut outs – Close ups – Vignette – Mortises and insets – Screens and reverses – Display headlines – Info graphics – Colour and tone impacts – Cartoons and caricatures – Centre spreads and Jacket pages.

Books for Reference

1. Tim Harrower, The Newspaper Designer’s Handbook, McGraw Hill.

2. Tim Harrower and Julie Elman. Newspaper Designer’s Handbook 7th Edition.

Books for Further Reading

1. Daryl R Moen. Newspaper Layout and Design.

31

2. The Society for News Design. The Best of Newspaper Design, Rockport Publishers

3. John D. Berry (Ed.).Contemporary Newspaper Design,

4. Steven E. Ames. Elements of Newspaper Design,.

5. Bruce H. Westley, Houghton Mifflin.News Editing,


1. Class Tests : 10 Marks There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester, one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of

final module.

2. Attendance : 5 Marks Allotment of marks as per University regulations.

3. Assignment : 5 Marks There shall be practical test on the design and pagination softwares in the last module, asking each student to design the front page of an A3-size

newspaper.

II.Semester End Examination: 80 Marks

32

Model question paperFourth Semester B.A. Degree Examination

JOU4B05 Design and Pagination


PART A

Answer any five questions each not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks

1. Mast head

2. Page balance

3. Highlights

4. White space

5. Advertorial

6. Modular make up

7. Print-line

8. Dummy

9. Primary optical area

PART B

Answer any seven questions each not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks

10. How does the lay-out of an editorial page differ from that of a front page?

11. What role do advertisements play in the page make ups of newspapers?

12. What is the difference between vertical and horizontal page design? Which one do you prefer? Why?

13. What do you mean by picture editing? What are to be kept in mind while editing pictures?

14. What are the effects in newspaper design, brought about by the influence of TV?

15. Colour and visuals contribute a lot to newspaper design – How?

16. Briefly illustrate the latest trends in newspaper lay out.

17. What are the key factors in news page designing?

33

18. Lay out of feature pages and supplements have more creative element compared to news pages – Do you agree? Why?

19. Gutter and white space contribute much in the aesthetics of newspaper pagination – How?

20. Box news items, reverse headings, screened headings, highlights and layered decks has a role in news page design – How?

21. What are the advantage of modular page design?

PART C

Answer any two questions each not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks

22. What are the major principles in designing a newspaper page? Explain the key factors making it effective.

23. What are the main patterns in newspaper page lay-out? Evaluate the main merits and demerits of each?

24. The emergence of computer has revolutionized the process and effectiveness of newspaper pagination – Establish.

25. You have the list of following news items with you. Prepare a page 1 dummy according to your evaluation and sense. Add photographs and graphics of your choice. The page has two advertisements: (1) 15x3 and (2) 10x2 in size.

Landslide in Wayanad killing four people.Story on the three member family who lost life in the tragedy Demise of a former VC of Calicut University.Moral police attack in Calicut beach, police cane charge, many injured.A party (of your choice) leaves UDF and Joins LDF.BSF Jawan killed in Kashmir

34

BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester IV Course 16 Code JOU4B06Radio ProductionContact Hours: 5 Credit: 4

Objective: The course is intended to explore the art of audio production. The students are made familiar with the aesthetics of sound and its application in various radio programme formats.

Module ICharacteristics of the medium, impact of digital technology on radio broadcasting, fall and rise of radio, broadcasting and narrow casting. Scope and challenges of radio as a mass medium.

Module IIIntroducing radio formats: radio talk – interview - radio drama - chat shows – phone in/phone-out programmes - running commentary - news bulletins – features – and documentaries - special abilities required for each format - writing for radio.

Module IIIRadio news - news-room management - news coverage - news formats - news presentation - structure and content of news bulletins.

Module IVRadio Programme Production - theory of Sound - frequency, spectrum: AM, FM, SW, long wave - sound formats - recording software - sound effects - mixing and dubbing –satellite radio and internet radio.

Module VRole of radio broadcaster –announcer - disc jockey - radio host - ‘on-air’ techniques -performance - art of interviewing – speed – breathing - emphasis and pitch.

Books for Reference1. Sound Engineering Explained, 2nd Edition – Michael Talbot-Smith.2. Radio Production, 3rd Edition – Robert McLeish.3. Other Voices – VinodPavarala and Kanchan K. Malik.Books for Further Reading1. Basic Radio Journalism – Paul Chantler and Peter Stewart (Focal Press).2. This is All India Radio – U. L. Baruah.3. Broadcast Journalism, Techniques of Radio and Television News, 5th Edition –Andrew Boyd.4. Writing and Producing Radio Dramas – Esta De Fossard (Sage Publications).5. Beginning Radio – TV News Writing, 4th Edition – K. Tim Wulfemeyer (SurjeetPublications).6. Radio – TV News Writing, A work book, 2nd Edition – K. Tim Wulfemeyer (SurjeetPublications).

35

7. Modern Radio Production, Programming and Performance – Carl Hausman, PhilipBenoit, Lewis B O Donnell.

1. Continuous Assessment: 20 Marks 1. Class Tests: 10Marks. There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the

semester. One, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of final module.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks Allotment of marks as per University regulations.3. Radio assignment: 5 Marks Students shall produce and submit a radio programme such

as radio documentary, PSA, radio interview and radio magazine programme either individually or group-wise.


Model question paperFourth Semester B.A. Degree Examination

JOU4B06 Radio ProductionTime : 3 Hours Max. Marks : 80

PART AAnswer any 5 questions not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks.

1. AIR2. Phone-in programmes

36

3. Recording softwares4. Narrowcasting5. BBC6. Radio-Jockey7. Radio documentary8. Internet Radio9. Podcast

(3x5=15)PART B


10. Explain the major differences between writing for print media and radio.11. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of AM and FM broadcasting.12. Explain the characteristics of various news bulletins in AIR.13. Elaborate the essential qualities of a good radio announcer.14. What are the do’s and don’ts of radio interviewing?15. Explain the characteristics of scripting for a radio drama.16. Examine the effectiveness of communication through radio during national calamities and disasters.17. What is the importance of sound bites in radio programmes?18. Discuss the trends in radio broadcasting.19. ‘The private FM channels have heralded the second coming of radio.’ Discuss.20. Examine the impact of digital technologies on radio broadcasting.21. With appropriate examples bring out the difference between broadcasting and narrowcasting.

(5x7=35)PART C


22. Explain the characteristics and functions of radio as a medium of mass communication.23. Is radio an effective medium for achieving the developmental goals of the State?24. Discuss the impact of private and Public Service FM radio as entertainment channels of the youth?25. Describe the important principles of writing for radio with examples.

(15x2=30)

37

BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester V Course Code: 17 JOU5B 07Introduction to Mass Communication TheoriesContact Hours: 6 Credit: 4Objective:

This course builds a theoretical framework for students and enables them to understand the different perspectives of media from different contexts. The course is a stepping stone to the academic knowledge in communication studies.

Module 1: Communication studies

Origin of communication studies – communication studies as social science – psychological perspectives of communication, Concept of "Mass" in mass communication. Media audience – the public and the public opinion, public sphere, persuasion and propaganda, attitudinal changes, basics of semiotics

Module 2: Media-audience interaction

Stimulus Response theory, perspectives of individual differences, social categories and social relations; concept of selectivity; One-step, two-step and multi-step flow.

Module 3: Gatekeeping functions

Concept of Gate keeping; Gate keeping models of White, Galtung and Ruge, News flow models of McNelly, Bass and Mowlana.

Module 4: Normative theories

Normative theories of the press/media: Authoritarian theory, Libertarian theory, Soviet media theory, Social responsibility theory, Development communication theory, Democratization theory.

Module 5: Media effects theories

Media dependency theory; Agenda-setting and agenda building; uses and gratifications theories; Media effects – cognitive, affective and behavioural effects. Cultivation theory, cognitive dissonance, spiral of silence.

Books for Reading:

1. Agee, Warren K., Ault, Philip H. and Emery, Edwin: Introduction to Mass Communications.

2. Stephen W Littlejohn & Karen A Foss (Editors): Encyclopedia of Communication Theory, Sage

3. Fiske, John (1996), Introduction to Mass Communication Studies, London, Routledge4. McQuail, Denis: McQuail's mass communication theory.

38

5. McQuail, Denis and Windahl, Sven: Communication models for the study of mass communications.

6. De Fleur, Melvin L. and Ball-Rokeach, Sandra J: Theories of mass communication.7. Kumar, Keval J: Mass communication in India.8. Hasan, Seema (2010), Mass Communication: Principles and Concepts, New Delhi, CBS

Publishers9. Watson, James and Hill, Anne: Dictionary of Media and Communication Studies.

10. Berger, Arthur Asa (2012), Media Analysis Techniques, New Delhi, Sage

1. Continuous Assessment: 20 Marks 1. Class Tests: 10 Marks There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the

semester. One, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of final module.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks Allotment of marks as per University regulations.3. Assignment: Each students should submit an assignment or present a Seminar as per the

suggestion by the faculty.II. Semester End Examination: 80 Marks

[Type text]

Model question paperFifth Semester B.A. Degree Examination

JOU5B07 Introduction to Mass Communication TheoriesTime : 3 Hours Max. Marks : 80

PART AAnswer any 5 questions not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks.

1. Selective perception

2. Social categories

3. Individual difference theory

4. Global village

5. Mean world syndrome

6. Opinion formation

7. Joseph Goebbels

8. Leon Festinger

9. Media studies(3x5=15)

PART BAnswer any 7 questions not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks.

10. Evaluate one step and two step flow of communication.

11. Critically analyse the news flow model of McNelly.

12. What do you mean by media dependence theory?

13. What is the relevance and significance of semiotics in media studies?

14. Examine the impact of propaganda in political communication.

15. Assess the possibilities of attitudinal change through communication.

16. What are the implications of the omnipotence of media?

17. Explain with appropriate examples the Uses and Gratifications theory.

18. Critically evaluate the Libertarian theory of the press.

19. Explain the concepts of opinion leaders and opinion followers.

20. What is the theory of cognitive dissonance?

21. Define public sphere. Can you relate digital media platforms with public sphere?

[Type text]

(5x7=35)

PART C


22. Assess the cultivation analysis theory and its relevance in the present context.

23. What do you mean by normative theories? Discuss specifically the relevance of social responsibility theory of media?

24. Explain in detail the spiral of silence theory. Describe the working of the theory with suitable examples.

25. Explain the scope and challenges of media to set agenda for people.

(15x2=30)

[Type text]BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester V Course 18 Code JOU5B08Introduction to Television ProductionContact Hours 5 Credits 4

Objective:By understanding the fundamentals of TV production, the students should be able to produce a TV programme.

Module 1:

TV characteristics, potentials, limitations

Module 2:

Technical details for a TV production- camera—structure of a TV camera, types of TV cameras, Sound- types of microphones, lip- sync, audio console; Lighting – indoor lighting and outdoor lighting, types- triangle lighting, studio lighting, white/black balancing. Editing- linear and non-linear editing, PCR, studio

Module 3:

Writing for TV- TV Scripting—partial script, full script

Module 4:

Different TV programmes- news, interview, discussion, magazine, OB, TV documentary, Quiz programme, reality show. EFP

Module 5:

Types of TV news- ENG, writing for visuals/ TV news scripting, editing – cutting the footages, Voice over, news bulletin production, Teleprompter, News reading/ news anchoring/ incorporating live discussions and interviews.

Module 6:

TV programme production – pre production, production and post-production, Basics of visual language – types of shots, camera movements, camera angle. Creative editing tool- cut, fade in out, dissolve, cross cut, jump cut, cut away, match cut.

Books for Reference

[Type text]1. Herbert Zettl. Television Production Handbook, 7th Edition.2. Ivan Cury. Directing and Producing for Television, A Format Approach3. Anthony Friedmann. Writing for Visual Media, 2nd Edition

Books for Further Reading1. Gerald Millerson. Video Production Handbook.2. Ralph Donald and Thomas Spann. Fundamentals of Television Production. 3. John Hart. The Art of the Storyboard, 2nd Edition.4. Blain Brown. Cinematography, Theory and Practice.5. Ken Dancyger. The Technique of Film and Video Editing-History, Theory, and Practice, 4thEdition. 6. Steve Wetton. Writing TV Scripts.7. Arthur Asa Berger. Scripts, Writing for Radio and Television. SAGEPublications.


1. Class Tests: 10 Marks

There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester. One, at the completion of module four and the second, at the completion of last module.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks

Allotment of marks as per University regulations.

3. TV production assignment: 5 Marks

Students shall produce and submit a television programme such as extended news report, PSA or TV commercial.

Students can conduct a media visit to any News channel, understand the production and prepare a report.


[Type text]Model question paper

Fifth Semester B.A. Degree Examination

JOU5B08 INTRODUCTION TO TELEVISION PRODUCTION


PART A

Answer any Five questions each not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks.

1. PCR

2. White balancing

3. TV Magazine

4. Teleprompter

5. Split page method

6. Tracking

7. Piece to camera

8. EFP

9. Low angle and high angle shots

(5X3=15)

PART B

Answer any Seven questions each not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks.

10. Explain with the help of a diagram the triangle lighting technique.

11. Explain TV Interview. What are the preparations to be made for a TV interview?

12. Write on the different types of shots.

13. Distinguish between linear and non-linear editing.

14. Write on the major types of TV news.

15. What is OB? Explain the preparations for an OB.

16. Describe the steps in pre-production stage.

17. Explain 5 types of microphones used in TV production.

18. Differentiate between Back light and background light.

[Type text]19. Distinguish between Rough cut and Fine cut.

20. What is jump cutting and cut away? Explain the relationship between these two in TV Production.

21. Explain the change in the style of news reading with the advent of private news channels.

(7X5=35)

PART C

Answer any Two questions each not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks.

22. Explain the potentials and limitations of Television.

23. Critically evaluate the reality shows telecast in Malayalam private channels.

24. Do you think the live discussions during the news bulletin are helpful to the viewers? Critically evaluate the on air discussions in Malayalam Channels.

25. Explain with a diagram how a TV camera works. What are the different types of TV cameras?

(2X15=30)

[Type text]BA Mass Communication and Journalism

Semester V Course Code: 19 JOU 5B 09

Corporate CommunicationContact Hours: 4 Credit 4

Objective:

To furnish the students with fundamentals of PR and Corporate Communication.

Module I

Introduction to Public Relations – definitions, origin and development of public relations, objectives and functions of public relations – qualities of a PRO- key personalities, Ivy Lee, Edward L Burneys, Paul Garret- History of PR in India.

Module II

Propaganda and public relations – publicity and PR – advertising versus public relations – PR campaigns – public opinion in PR- lobbying and pressure groups- PR and social responsibilities

Module III

PR management tools, online deputation management, media relations and crisis management tools – PR activities by Govt. – DAVP, IPRD, PR services and political parties – Code of ethics for PR, IPRA and PRSI

Module IV

Definition of Corporate communication - scope, nature, role and evolution of corporate communication - internal and external audiences, CSR.

Module V

Corporate Identity- Key concepts of corporate identity, corporate identity planning, corporate image, corporate personality, corporate communication tools – house journals.

Module VI

Business communication, writing memos- report writing – writing proposals- preparing press releases, writing for the web, website and social media management.

[Type text]Books for reference

1. Joseph Fernandez, Corporate communications at 21st century primer. New Delhi . Response Books

2. Cornelison, Corporate Communication 3. C.S. Rayadu & K.R. Balan, Principles of Public Relations. Bangalore- Himalaya

Publishing House.4. CEO’s of leading PR Firms. The art of Public Relations. New Delhi, Vision Books.5. Sharon Gerson, Technical Writing: Process and Product, Pearson Education.

Books for further reading

1. Kieth Butterik, Public relations theory and practice. Sage2. B.N. Ahuja & S.S. Chhabra, Advertising & Public Relations. Delhi, Surjeet Publications.3. Alison Theaker. The Public Relations Handbook. New Delhi – Vikas Publishing House

Pvt. Ltd. 4. Scott M. Cutlip, Allen H. Center, Effective Public Relations. New Jersy- Pentice Hall

Books.

I. Continuous Assessment : 20 Marks

1. Class Tests : 10 Marks.

There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of the final module.

2. Attendance : 5 Marks Allotment of marks as per University Regulations.

3. Media assignments / Seminar Presentation : 5 marks Each student shall present a seminar on a topic in the syllabus allotted by the

faculty and submit the paper for valuation.

II. Semester end examination: 80 Marks.III. Suggested activity:

Visiting a PR department and filing a ten page report.

[Type text]

Model question paper

Fifth Semester BA Degree Examination

JOU5B09

Corporate Communication

Time: 3 hrs Max. Marks: 80

PART A

Answer any five questions not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks.

1. Lobbying 2. Ivy Lee3. PRSI4. “Crystallizing Public Opinion”5. Open house6. Kerala Calling7. Spin8. Trial balloon9. Media Kit

(5x3=15)

PART B

[Type text]Answer any seven questions not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks

10. What do you mean by a press release? Explain its importance as a key PR tool.11. Write a short note on house journals and its relevance in PR12. What do you mean by CSR? Explain.13. Write a note on the scope and limitations of business communication.14. Differentiate between publicity and public relations.15. What do you mean by an organized PR campaign? What are its different steps?16. What are the qualities of a good PRO? Explain.17. How advertising is different from PR? Explain.18. Trace a short history of PR in India.19. What are the main objectives of DAVP? Explain.20. Write a short note on the various tools of PR.21. Explain the term ‘enlightened self interest’ and what are the contributions of Paul Garret

to PR?

(7x5=35)

PART C

Answer any questions two not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks

22. “Corporate Communication has its roots in public relations but enjoys wider scope.” Comment.

23. What do you mean by crisis communication? Explain with an example.24. Explain the relevance of corporate communication in 21st century world.25. What do you mean by corporate Communication? Also explain the concepts corporate

identity, corporate image, and corporate personality with examples.

(2x15=30)

[Type text]BA Mass Communication and Journalism

Semester V Course Code: 20 JOU5B10

AdvertisingContact Hours: 4 Credits: 4

Objective:

To enable students to critically analyze advertisements and also to give them an introduction to the world of advertising.

Module I

Definition, features, evolution and functions of advertising – kinds of advertising – product, consumer, co- operative, prestige, corporate, public service, national, regional, global – advertising agencies in India and World – trends in global advertising

Module II

Media planning, market analysis – product research, media reach and frequency, media schedule, segmentation, positioning, niche, media mix – ad campaign and its elements. Ad personalities: David Ogilvy, Alyque Padamsee and Piyush Pandey – top agencies in world, India, and Kerala

Module III

Brand awareness and attitudes- brand identity- brand equity- Brand image- brand loyalty- top national and international brands- Rossiter and Percy model

Module IV

Print ads- principles and components- classified and display ads, television advertising- principles, components and production. Radio ads- principles, components and production. Internet ads- principles and components

Module V

Visualization – copy writing for print, radio, television and online advertisements

Module VI

[Type text]Effects of advertising – advertising and cultural values- cultural jamming –economic, social and ethical issues of advertising- professional organizations and code of ethics – ABC, ASCI, AAAI

Books for reference

1. S.A. Chunnawalla, Advertising: An Introductory Text. Mumbai, Himalaya Publishing House.

2. Subrata Banerjee, Advertising as a Career, New Delhi: National Book Trust.

3. J.V. Vilnilam and A.K. Varghese, Advertising Basics: A Resource Guide for Beginners, NewDelhi: Sage Publications.

4. Frank Jefkins Advertising Prentice Hall

5. Gerald J Tellis Effective advertising: understanding when, how and why advertising wakes 2004. Response Books New Delhi.

6. Lary Percy and Richard Elliot, Strategic Advertising management (2009) Oxford.

Books for further reading

7. George Belch, Advertising and Promotion, Tata McGraw-Hill.

8. S.H.H.Kazmi and Satish Batra, Advertising and Sales Promotion, Excel Books.

9. Wells Burnett Moriarty, Advertising: Principles and Practice, Pearson Education.

10. S.N.Murthy and U Bhojana, Advertising: An IMC Perspective.

I. Continuous Assessment : 20 Marks

1. Class Tests : 10 Marks.

There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of the final module.

2. Attendance : 5 Marks Allotment of marks as per University Regulations.

3. Media assignments / Seminar Presentation : 5 marks Each student shall present a seminar on a topic in the syllabus allotted by the

faculty and submit the paper for valuation.

[Type text]II. Semester end examination: 80 Marks.

III. Suggested activity:

1. Advertising review.

2. Preparation of print ads – classified and display3. Ad agency visit.


Fifth Semester B. A. Degree Examination

JOU5B 10 Advertising

Time: 3 hrs Max. Marks: 80

PART A

Answer any five questions not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks.

1. AIDA2. David Ogilvy3. Amul girl4. Flight5. ASCI6. Classified Ad.7. Alyque Padamsee8. Brand ambassador9. Jingle

[Type text](5x3=15)

PART B

Answer any seven questions not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks

10. Analyze the reach of advertisements of FMCG and FMEG in middle class families in India?

11. “Advertising creates unnecessary needs”. Comment.12. What do you mean by product life cycle?13. “In the case of advertising selling is more important than reality”. Comment.14. What are the key characteristics of print advertisement? Also write important elements of

a print Ad.15. Write a short note on the challenges of TV advertising.16. What do you mean by cultural jamming? Explain.17. Write a short note on the key characteristics of online advertisement.18. Briefly explain Rossiter and Percy model.19. “Public service advertisements have an important role in bringing development in our

society”. Comment.20. Critically evaluate the contributions of Piyush Pandey to Indian Advertising.21. “Advertising promotes consumer culture.” Critically comment on this statement.

(7x5=35)

PART C

Answer any two questions not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks

22. What are the different types of advertising? Explain with examples.23. Write on the positive and negative effects of advertising?24. What do you mean by brand advertising? Explain. Also write on terms like brand

identity, brand image and brand loyalty with examples.25. What do you mean media planning? Explain the concepts: segmentation, niche, targeting

and positioning.

(2x15=30)

[Type text]BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester V Course 21 Code JOU5B11Photo JournalismContact Hours 4 Credits 4

ObjectiveA basic understanding of photography is imparted to the students. The course also aims at imparting the use of photography for journalistic purposes both in print and electronic media.

Module IHistory of photography - role of photography in communication and journalism - knownPhotojournalists like Henri Cartier Bresson, Raghu Rai, Victor George

Module IIDefinition, nature, scope and functions of photo journalism - qualifications and responsibilities of photojournalists – sources - covering issues - writing captions and cut-lines for photo - legal and ethical requirements.

Module IIIUnderstanding the camera - types of camera, DSLR, lens, films and filters.

Module IVTypes of photography - portrait, candid shot, news photo, photo feature, landscape, nature and wildlife, and sports - photo editing.

Module VDigital camera - digital technology - digital effects and techniques.

Books for Reference1. Kobré, Kenneth Photo journalism: The professionals’ approach, 5th Edition2. Sammon, Rick Complete guide to digital photography3. Muse, Ken Basic photo text4. Pasricha, Nirmal A professional’s basic photography5. Wright, Terrence The photography handbook, 2nd Edition6. Lester, Paul Martin Visual communication : Images with messages, 3rd Edition

Books for further reading:1. Grill, Tom; Scanlon, Mark Photographic composition2. Newnes Basic photography3. Cyernshem, G R History of photography4. Rothsteline Photo journalism5. Bergin Photo journalism manual6. Kalish, Stanley E; Edom, Clifton C Picture editing

[Type text]7. Feinberg, Milten Techniques of photo journalism8. Farndon, John Encyclopaedia of photography9. Mallory, Laurance The right way to use a camera10. Editors of Eastman Kodak Company Pocket guide to 35mm photography11. Dilwali, Ashok All About Photography12. London, Barbara; Upton, John; stone, Jim Photography Prentice Hall13. Golden,Reuel Photo journalism Carltna14. Aiyer, Balakrishna Digital photo journalism Authors Press15. Loup, Lanton Photojournalism and today’s news creating visual reality Wiley Blackwell

I. Continuous Assessment: 20 Marks1. Class Tests: 10 Marks. There shall be two internal assessment examinations within

the semester, one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of the final module.

2. . Attendance: 5 Marks Allotment of marks as per University regulations.3. . Photography (SLR) assignment: 5 Marks. Each student shall submit a theme-

based photo essay in digital format consisting of minimum 5 photographs.

II. End Semester examinations 80 Marks.


[Type text]Fifth semester B. A. degree examination

JOU5B11 PHOTO JOURNALISM

Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 80PART A

Answer any 5 questions each not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks.

1. Aperture.2. Precision exposure.3. Henri Cartier Bresson.4. Cropping.5. Depth of Field.6. Telephoto Lenses.7. Macro Photography.8. Shutter speed.9. Papparazi.

(5x3=15 marks)PART B


10. What are the specific roles of long shot, medium shot and close up in assuring visual variety of a newspaper?11. Briefly trace the evolution of photography.12. What are the principles of writing captions and cut lines for news photographs?13. ‘Reporting disaster is an important part of the photojournalist’s job’. Explain.14. What is photo feature? How does features and news differ?15. How does a photojournalist translate political views into pictures? Explain with suitable examples.16. What is wild life photography?17. Delineate psychological portraits and group portraits.18. “Sports photographers are like athletes.” Explain.19. What is a photo essay?20. Write a note on ‘Stand-alone’ photograph21. Explain the contributions of a known photographer of your choice.

(7x5=35 marks)

PART C

[Type text]


22. What are the challenges of a present day photojournalist of a newspaper competing with fast growing TV channels and Internet?23. Describe the role of a picture editor in a newspaper or a magazine.24. Explain the different types of cameras, lens and filters and their specific purposes.25. A terrorist group has agreed to let you photograph their activities. They ask you on a secret mission to plant a bomb. Will you take their pictures or try to stop them from activating the explosions? Discuss the issue of professionalism versus social responsibility of a photojournalist in the above context.

(2x15=30 marks)

[Type text]BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester VI Course 22 Code JOU6B12Media Laws and EthicsContact Hours: 5 Credit : 4Objective:To give the students an exposure to the fundamentals of Media Laws.

Module IBasic Legal concepts - Judicial system in India - Indian Penal Code, role of Macaulay. Fundamental rights - directive principles. Basic legal terms such as writ, FIR, habeas corpus, suo moto, judicial review, PIL, bail, amicus curie etc

Module IIFreedom of the press - evolution of the concept of freedom of the press, Types of censorships. Freedom of speech and expression in Indian Constitution - article 19 (1) (a) and reasonable restrictions. India’s ranking in the press freedom index.

Module IIIDefamation – libel, slander and defenses of media professional - Privacy and Cyber laws - Right to Information Act - Whistle Blower’s Protection Act.

Module IVPress Laws: Official Secrets Act - PRB Act - Copyright Act - Contempt of Court Act - Young Person’s Harmful Publication Act - Indecent Representation of Women’s Act - Drug & Magic Remedies Act - Working Journalists Act - Wage Boards, Film Certification Rules - Intellectual Property Rights- Information Technology Act.

Module VMedia Ethics and Issues - code of ethics for media personnel - Press Council of India- Paid News and Cheque-book Journalism.Impact of Indian emergency (1975-77) on mass media. Internet censorship, data mining by internet service providers, privacy versus public good, privacy in the digital age, embedded journalism, ethics of sting journalism. Corporatisation of media.

Books for Reference1. Naresh Rao &SuparnaNaresh, ‘Media Laws, an appraisal’, Premier PublishingCompany, Bangalore.2. Kundra.S, ‘Media Laws & Indian Constitution’, Anmol Publications Ltd, NewDelhi.3. Vakul Sharma, ‘Handbook of Cyber Laws’, Macmillan, 2002.4. NirmalaLakshman,‘Writing a Nation, an Anthology of Indian Journalism’.5. NaliniRajan, ‘Practising Journalism’, Sage Publications.6. Hamid Moulana, ‘International Information Flow’.7. Karen Sandars, ‘Ethics & Journalism’, Sage Publications.

[Type text]Books for Further Reading1. AravindSinghal& Everett M.Rogers, ‘India’s Communication Revolution’, SagePublications.2. Edward S. Herman & Noam Chomsky, ‘Manufacturing Consent’, VintagePublications.3. Dr. Jan R. Hakemuldar et.al, ‘Principles & Ethics of Journalism’, AnmolPublications.4. Patrick Lee Plaisance, ‘Media Ethics’, Sage Publications.

I. Continuous Assessment: 20 Marks1. Class Tests: 10 Marks. There shall be two internal assessment examinations within

the semester, one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of the final module.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks Allotment of marks as per University regulations.3. Assignment: 5 Marks. Each student shall present a paper on one of the ethical issues

connected with the media, suggested by the faculty and submit it for valuation.II. Semester End Examination: 80 Marks

Model question paperSixth Semester B. A. Degree Examination

JOU6B12 Media Laws and Ethics

Time: Three Hours Max. Marks: 80PART A

Answer any 5 questions not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks.1. IPC

[Type text]2. Objectivity3. Media trial4. Data mining5. Whistle blower6. Embedded journalism7. Invasion of privacy8. Press Freedom Index9. Amicus curie

(3x5=15)PART B

Answer any 7 questions not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks.10. Explain the directive principles enshrined in the Constitution.11. What are the reasonable restrictions of the freedom of speech and expression?12. What are the fundamental rights of an Indian citizen?13. Explain the basic tenets of Copyright Act.14. Comment on the constraints placed on the media with the Official Secrets Act.15. What are the major implications of the defamation law for a journalist?16. Explain the Contempt of Court Act.17. Explain the various types of censorships?18. Differentiate libel and slander with appropriate examples.19. What is the relevance of the Wage Board for the media in India?20. Examine the role of Press Council of India in current media scenario.21. Explain the basic tenets of Intellectual Property Rights.

PART CAnswer any 2 questions not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks.

22. Assess the impact of Indian emergency (1975-77) on the media.23. Discuss the need for a code of ethics for the media personnel.24. Elaborate the provisions of Right to Information Act. Assess its role in empowering citizens.25. Write a critique of sting journalism.

(15x2=30)

[Type text]BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester VI Course 23 Code JOU6B13Online JournalismContact Hours 5 Credits 4Objective:The course intends to introduce the students to internet and online journalism. It, however, does not delve into the technicality of the medium.

Module IInternet as a medium of communication - history and evolution of internet.

Module IIFeatures of online journalism - hypertext, multimedia - online aesthetics – content, design,colours, font, templates, navigation bars, and hyperlinks

Module IIIAnnotative reporting and strengths and limitations - participatory communication, citizen journalism, absence of gatekeeping, timely feedback- portals; blogging – podcasting – vodcasting - microblogging.

Module IVInternet and convergence - culture, subjectivity and net – cyber crime and regulations.

Module VWorld Wide Web - web pages - e-groups - e-governance – online advertisements.

Module VITechnical writing - definition and types - objectives in technical writing - guidelines for effective writing - prewriting, writing and re-writing.

Books for Reference1. Online Journalism: A Basic Text, Tapas Ray, Cambridge University Press.2. The New Media Handbook – Andrew Dewdney and Peter Ride.3. The Cyberspace Handbook – Jason Whittaker.4. Breaking News, Sunil Saxena, Tata McGraw-Hill.Books for Further Reading1. Media and Power – James Curran.2. Media, Technology and Society – Brian Winston.3. Journalism Online – Mike Ward.4. Managing Media Convergence – Kenneth C. Killebrew.

[Type text]I. Continuous Assessment: 20 Marks

1. Class Tests: 10 MarksThere shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester, one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of the final module.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks. Allotment of marks as per University regulations. 3. Assignment: 5 Marks. Each student shall submit a report comparing home pages of two

reputed online newspapers.II. Semester End Examination: 80 Marks

Model question paperSixth Semester B.A. Degree Examination.

[Type text]JOU 6B 13 Online Journalism

Time: 3 HOURS Max. Marks: 80

PART A


1. ARPANET

2. Podcasting

3. WWW

4. e Governance

5. Micro blogging

6. Online Advertisement

7. Portals

8. Virtual reality

9. Net neutrality

(5 x3 = 15 marks)

PART B

Answer any seven questions each not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks.

10. Evaluate the role of Internet as a participatory communication medium.

11. Explain the characteristics of Online journalism.

12. Describe the strengths and limitations of annotative reporting.

13. Discuss the importance of cyber laws and regulations in online journalism.

14. Formation of e community is nothing but evolution of a new civil society – Critically evaluate the statement.

15. Analyze the reasons for the gradual decrease in Blogging.

16. Aesthetics has a key role in online journalism- Elucidate.

17. Interactivity is the fundamental principle of digital media- Comment.

18. Examine the role of Digital Culture in media democracy.

[Type text]19. Virtual Citizenship is what digital community is enjoying- Analyse the merits and de merits of virtual citizenship.

20. Briefly analyse the terms hypertext and hyperlinks.

21. Compare the content and design of any two web portals.

(7 x5 = 35 marks)

PART C

Answer any two questions each not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks.

22. Explain the history and evolution of internet.

23. Describe the process and principles of technical writing.

24. Media Convergence is the most appealing characteristic of Internet –Elucidate.

25. Elaborate the role of internet as a medium of communication.

(2 x15 = 30 marks)

[Type text]

64

BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester VI Course 24 Code JOU6B14Introduction to CinemaContact Hours 5 Credits 4Objective:The course exposes the students to a brief theoretical background in order to facilitate film appreciation. The students are also introduced to the techniques and stages of short filmmaking.

Module1: Cinema – characteristics of the medium, early experiments: Muybridge, WKL Dickson, T. A. Edison. E.S. Potter

Module2: World cinema and evolution of film language: D. W. Griffith, Chaplin, Orson Welles, Hitchcock, and Ingmar Bergman, Akira Kurosawa.

A brief overview of German Expressionism, Soviet Montage, Italian Neo Realism – mise-en-scene, French New Wave.

Contemporary World Cinema- Alexandro Gonzalves Inareto, Jafar Panahi, Kim Ki Duk

Module3 : Indian Cinema- a brief history, major people- H. S. Bhatvadekar, D. G. Phalke, Satyjith Ray, Khatak, , Studio system , FTII and India Cinema, Contemporary Indian Cinema: Bengali films, Tamil, Marathi.

Module 4: Malayalam Cinema- brief history, Studios and Malayalam Cinema, Parallel Cinema, Middle Cinema, Adoor Gopalakrishnan, John Abraham, G. Aravindan, T. V. Chandran, K.G. George, Current trends.

Module 5: New technologies and Film making – Animation films, you tube.

Film festivals- IFFI, IFFK. History and evolution of documentary film making.- Flaherty, Grierson, Leni Reifenstahl and Vertov and Anand Patwardhan

Module 6: Ethics, certification of films and censoring,

Practical - short film making/ Film review

List of Cinema

The list is not mandatory, but a model. The faculty is free to select other films of the directors mentioned.

The Great Train Robbery – E.S. Potter

Birth of a Nation - D. W. Griffith

[Type text]

65

Modern Times/ The Kid – Charlie Chaplin

Citizen Kane - Orson Welles

Birds – Alfred Hitchcock

Wild Strawberries - Ingmar Bergman

Seven Samurai - Akira Kurosawa.

Cabinet of Dr. Caligiri – Robert Weine

Battleship Potemkin – Sergie Eisenstien

Bicycle Thieves – Vittorio Desica

Breathless – Jean Luc Godard

Birdman - Alexandro Gonzalves Inareto,

Offside - Jafar Panahi,

Three Iron - Kim Ki Duk

Raja Harischandra - D. G. Phalke

Charulatha - Satyjith Ray

Mekhe Dhakka Thara – Ritwik Ghatak

Aakrosh – Syam Benegal

Unishe April- Rituparno Ghosh

Pasi – K Balachandar

Fantry – Nagaraj Manjule

Elippathayam - Adoor Gopalakrishnan

Amma Ariyan - John Abraham

Oridath - G. Aravindan

Dany - T. V. Chandran

Irakal - K.G. George

CR No. 89 – sudevan

[Type text]

66

Manhole – Vidhu Vincent

Tangled – Byron Howard, Rich Moore

Zootopia – Byron Howard, Nathan Greno

Nanook of the North- Robert Flaherty

Books for Reference1. Virginia Wright Wexman. A history of Film. 6th edition.2. Jarek KUPSC. The History of Cinema for beginners. 3. David K. Irving and Peter W. Rea. Producing and Directing the Short Film and Video, 3rd Edition, 4 Nathan Abrams, Ian Bell and Jan Udris. Studying Film. 5. Frederick Levy. Short Films 101, How to Make a Short Film and Launch Your Filmmaking Career. Books for Further Reading1. J. Dudley Andrew. Major Film Theories, An Introduction. 2. James Monaco. How to Read a Film, 3rd Edition.3. Amy Villarejo. Film Studies, The Basics. 4. Tom Holden. Film Making.5. Blain Brown. Cinematography, Theory and Practice .6. Michael Rabiger. Directing, Film Techniques and Aesthetics, 4th Edition.7. Stanley J. Baran. Introduction to Mass Communication, 4th Edition.

I. Continuous Assessment: 20 Marks1. Class Tests: 10 Marks

There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester, one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of the final module.

2. Attendance: 5 MarksAllotment of marks as per University regulations3. Seminar/Production Assignment: 5 Marks

Each student shall present a study evaluating a filmOr

Each student shall write a script for a short film of 5 minutes duration on a storythread provided by the faculty.


Model question paperSixth Semester B.A. Degree Examination

JOU6B14 INTRODUCTION TO CINEMA

[Type text]

67

Time: 3 Hours Max Marks:80

PART A


1. W.K.L. Dickson2. H.S. Bhatvadekar3. The Great Train Robbery4. FTII5. The Jazz Singer6. IFFK7. CBFC8. Rome Open City9. Udaya Studio

(5X3=15)PART B

Answer any Seven questions each not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks10. Explain the main characteristics of cinema.11. Explain the contributions of D.W. Griffith to the growth of film language.12. What is Auteur theory? Describe its impact on French New Wave.13. Write a brief note on Jafar Panahi.14. Delineate the early studio system in Indian cinema.15. Write a short essay on Robert Flaherty16. Why Cabinet of Dr. Caligari is known as the best example of German Expressionism?17. Write a review of any one of the film directed by Akira Kurosawa.18. Explain the Animation film.19. Write a short review of a film that inspired you a lot.20. What is middle cinema in Malayalam film industry?21. Briefly explain the contemporary Bengali films.

(7X5=35)

PART CAnswer any two questions each not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks.

22. Write a note on Charles Chaplin and his film life.23. Ethics and censoring of films are often controversial in India. Give your views with some

examples.

[Type text]

68

24. Youtube and facebook have opened a new world of film distribution. Do you agree with that? Substantiate your arguments.

25. Explain the contributions made by Adoor Gopalakrishnan to Indian Cinema.

(2X15=30)

[Type text]

69

BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester VI. Course Code 25

JOU6 B15

Economic and Business Reporting Objective:

The course gives the students an outlook of Business Journalism.

Module I

Major School of modern economic thinking:- Classical, Neo Classical, Marxian, Keynessan and Modernist. Important Institutions economic policies implementation at the national and global levels. Breton Woods Institutions, GATT and WTO, United Nations agencies like Undad and Unido and ILO. Planning Commission of India, NITI Aayog

Module II

Milestones of Indian economy;- Five year plans – general overview of Nehruvian model- Bank nationalization- green revolution- control and permit raj and liberalization of the 1990s - 2008 global financial crisis and Indian economy. Major Industries in India Currency Demonetization of (Nov:8,2016)

Module III

Business reporting & editing – A brief history of business journalism:- Corporate reporting – banking- policy making institutions – market reporting- stock market- currency exchange markets and commodity markets – regulatory bodies – budget – leading business NPS, magazines, news agencies and TV channels in India and abroad

Module IV

Salient features of Kerala economy:- Kerala model of development and the linkages of the states economy with global markets. Cash crops in Kerala – migration to the Gulf and other countries – migrant laborers in Kerala- status of agriculture response to 2008 global recession – role of major dailies like Malayala Manorama, Mathrubhumi and the Hindu in covering business stories linked to Kerala- Specialized business journals like Dhanam and Business Deepika

Books for Reading

1: Paul M Sweezy, The Theory of Capitalist Development

2. Michael Lewis, Liar’s Poker

[Type text]

70

3. : Robert Shiller, Irrational Exuberance (It is another work taking a close look at the functioning of financial markets),

4. Noureil Roubni, a professor at Stern School of Business is widely credited with predicting the 2008 global financial crisis.

5. C.T. Kurien, Global Capitalism and Indian Economy,

6. Jagadish Bhajwati, a professor of Columbia University,

7. Dr. K. K. George, Limits to Kerala Model of Development provides a good introduction to the chronic problem of fiscal deficits in Kerala.


1. Class Tests : 10 Marks There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester, one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of the

final module.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks Allotment of marks as per University regulations.

3. Assignment: 5 Marks Each student shall present a paper on an economic issue proposed by the faculty and submit it for valuation.


[Type text]

71

Model Question PaperSixth Semester BA Degree Examination

CUCBCSS –UG

JOU 6B 15 ECONOMIC AND BUSINESS REPORTING

Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks : 80 marks

PART A

Answer any five questions. Each not exceeding 50 words. Each question carries 3 marks.

1.GATT

2. UNIDO

3. NITI Aayog

4. Stock market

5. Budget

6. WTC and foreign trade

7. GDP

8. Budget

9. Liberalisation Policy (5 x 3 = 15)

PART B

Answer any seven questions. Each not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks.

10. What is the scope of Business Journalism?

11. Nationalisation of the banks in India

12. Discuss in detail the modernist school of thinking.

13. What are the major industries in India?

14. What are the major business journals available? Discuss briefly about their contents.

15. What is green revolution?

[Type text]

72

16. Write about global financial crisis of 1990s

17. Discuss briefly five year plans

18. What is the present status of Indian economy?

19. How to report budgets?

20. What are the business news agencies?

21. Write about Breton Woods institutions. (7 x 5 = 35 marks)

PART C

Answer any two questions. Each not exceeding 400 words. Each question carries 15 marks.

22. Discuss in detail the Kerala Model of development.

23. What is the status of agriculture in Kerala? Discuss the cash crops in the state.

24. Write about the ‘migrant labours’ and the impact of this phenomena in Kerala society.

25. Discuss the ‘Currency Demonitisation’ of November 8, 2016 and its effects in our country.

(2 x15 = 30 marks)

C. Complementary CoursesSl.No. Title Contact Credit Semester Marks

1 Complementary I – Course 1 3 2 I 50

[Type text]

73

2 Complementary II – Course 1 3 2 I 50

3 Complementary I – Course 2 3 2 II 50

4 Complementary II – Course 2 3 2 II 50

5 Complementary I – Course 3 3 2 III 50

6 Complementary II – Course 3 3 2 III 50

7 Complementary I – Course 4 3 2 IV 50

8 Complementary II – Course 4 3 2 IV 50

Total 16 400

There will be Complementary examinations only in the end of second and fourth semester.

A list of disciplines from which Complementary Courses for B.A. Mass Communication and Journalism may be opted is given below:1. English2. Political Science3. Economics4. History5. Sociology6. Multimedia Journalism7. Computer Applications8. Communicative / Functional EnglishTitle of the Complementary courses, detailed syllabi and objectives of Complementary (to be taken by BA Mass Communication and Journalismstudents) are to be provided by the concerned Boards.

[Type text]

74

D. OPEN COURSE

The BOS in Journalism offers following courses as open courses. The Students from other disciplines can opt any one of these:

Code Title Contact Hours Credit MarksJOU5D01 Newspaper JournalismJOU5D02 Broadcast JournalismJOU5D03 Development Communication 2 2 50

[Type text]

75

OPEN COURSES(Students from non – journalism disciplines can opt any one of the following courses)Each course carries 2 credits and 2 hours per week are allotted for the course.

JOU5D01 Newspaper JournalismJOU5D02 Broadcast JournalismJOU5D03 Development Communication

I.BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester V Open course Code JOU5D01Newspaper JournalismContact Hours 2 Credits 2

ObjectiveThe course introduces the students the basic ideas of Newspaper Journalism.

Module IOrganizational structure of a newspaper: business, mechanical and editorial departments -responsibilities and qualities of news editor and sub editor/ bureau chief and reporter/ photographers, organizational structure of editorial desk and bureau.

Module-IIContents of a newspaper: news - definitions of news - types of news - news determinants; features - definition and types of features – articles – editorials –- letters to editor- interviews - reviews; profiles and columns-contests.

Module IIIReporting practices - news story structure – headlines - lead and body - inverted pyramid style - types of reporting: general assignments, beats and specialties - principles of reporting -cultivating news sources.

Module IVProcess of editing: general principles of editing - writing headlines subheads and captions - design and pagination - pagination softwares.

Books for Reference1. Shrivastava, K.M., ‘News reporting and editing’, Sterling publishers Pvt. Ltd, NewDelhi, 2003.2. Kamath M.V., ‘Professional Journalism’, Vikas publishing House, New Delhi.1980.3. Vir Bala Aggarwal, ‘Essentials of Practical Journalism’, concept publishing Company,New Delhi, 2006.4. Bruce D. Itule, and Douglas A. Anderson. ‘News Writing and Reporting for Today’s

[Type text]

76

Media’, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.895. Julian Harris, Kelly Leiter, Stanley, Johnson, ‘The Complete Reporter’, MacmillanPublishing Co, New York.6. Harold Evans, ‘Newsman’s English’ William Hainemann Ltd, 1972.7. Baskette, Sissors and Brooks, S.,’The Art of Editing,’ Macmillan Publishing Co.Inc.,New York, 1982.8. Bruce Westly, News Editing.9. M.L. Stein. and Susan F Paterno,,’The News Writer’s Hand book,’ Surjeet Publications,New Delhi, 2003.10. George A Hough,’ News Writing’, Kanishka Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.11. Joseph M.K., ‘Outline of Reporting’, Anmol Publications, News Delhi, 2002.12. Franklin, et al., ‘Key Concepts in Journalism Studies’, Vistaar Publications, NewDelhi, 2005.13. Jan R. Hakemulder,’News Reporting and Editing’,Anmol Publications,New Delhi,1998.

I: Continuous Assessment: 10 Marks1. Class Tests: 5 Marks

There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: one, at the completion of module two and the second, at the completion of final module.

2. Attendance: 2.5 MarksAllotment of marks as per University regulations

3. Media Practical: 2.5MarksEach student has to do news reporting and editing practical on topics suggested by the

faculty.II: Semester End Examination: 40 Marks

[Type text]

77

Model question paperFifth Semester BA Degree Examination

JOU 5D 01 Newspaper Journalism Time: 2 Hours Max. Marks:40

PART AAnswer any Five questions each not exceeding 25 words. Each question carries 2 marks.

1. Infographics2. Beat3. Letters to the editor4. Lead5. Hard news6. Crime reporting7. Op - Ed8. Investigative reporting9. Oddity

(5 x2 = 10 marks)PART B

Answer any three questions each not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks.

10. Elaborate the concept of Inverted Pyramid.11. Explain different types of editorials.12. What are the fundamental principles of news reporting?13. Cultivating news sources is the primary duty of a reporter- Elucidate.14. Explain the role and functions of news editor.15. Distinguish the characteristics of profile and interview.

(3 x5 = 15 marks)PART C

Answer any one question not exceeding 400 words. The question carries 15 marks.

16. Explain the general principles of news editing.17. Describe the definition of news. Also analyse the role of news determinants in news reporting. (1 x15 = 15 marks)

[Type text]

78

II.BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester V Open course Code JOU5D02Broadcast Journalism Contact Hours 2 Credits 2

ObjectiveThe course introduces the students the basic ideas of Broadcast Journalism.

Module IIntroduction to broadcasting – definition of broadcasting - evolution of broadcasting - broadcasting in India –

Module IIRadio broadcasting - characteristics and role of radio - types of radio stations: AM and FM -organizational structure of a radio station - radio programme formats: talk, news and musicformats.

Module IIIRadio programme production techniques: writing for the ear - radio news writing – script writing for radio drama, radio commercials - radio interviewing techniques - news reading and presentation – radio jockeying.

Module IVTelevision broadcasting - characteristics of television as a medium - organizational structureof a television station - cable TV - DTH - television programme formats.

Module VTelevision programme production techniques: scripting for TV programmes- TV interviewing - structure of TV news – TV newsgathering - TV news writing - news anchoring - video jockeying.

Books for Reference1. Joseph R.Dominick-‘The Dynamics of Mass Communication’.Mc Graw Hill, NewDelhi.2. John Vivian -‘The Media of Mass Communication’ Allyn and Bacon.3. Arul Aram and Nirmaldasan, ‘Understanding News, Media’-Vijay Nicole ImprintsPvt.Ltd.Chennai.4. Robert McLeish-‘Radio Production’. Focal Press London.5. Giraud Chester et.al-‘Television and Radio’-Prentice Hall.6. Herbert Zettl, ‘Television Production Handbook’-Wadsworth, USA.7. Andrew Boyd,’ Broadcast Journalism, Techniques of Radio and Television News’Focal Press London.8. Ted White, ‘Broadcaste News: Writing, Reporting and Producing’, Focal Press

[Type text]

79

London9. P.K Ravindranath , ‘Broadcast Journalism’-Author Press, New Delhi.


There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: one, at thecompletion of module three and the second, at the completion of final module.

2. Attendance : 2.5 MarksAllotment of marks as per University regulations

3. Radio, TV Practicals : 2.5 MarksEach student has to do practicals on topics suggested by the faculty.

II: Semester End Examination: 40 Marks

Model question paperFifth Semester BA Degree Examination

[Type text]

80

JOU 5D 02 Broadcast Journalism

Time:2 Hours Max. Marks: 40

PART A


1. FM

2. Community radio

3. Vividh bharathi

4. Prasar bharathi

5. DTH

6. Breaking news

7. Prannoy Roy

8. ViCTRERS

9. RJ

(5 x2 = 10 marks)

PART B

Answer any three questions each not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks.

10. Explain the characteristics and role of radio.

11. “Writing for the ear” is the concept behind radio production- Elucidate.

12. What are the steps involved in radio interviewing?

13. Explain the organizational structure of television.

14. Briefly analyse the structure of TV news.

15. News reading, presentation and anchoring are the fundamental areas of attention in broadcasting- Explain.

(3 x5 = 15 marks)

PART C


[Type text]

81

16. Explain the definition and evolution of broadcasting.

17. What are the commonalities and differences in TV and Radio broadcasting?

(1 x15 = 15 marks)

III.BA Mass Communication and JournalismSemester V Open course Code JOU5D03Development CommunicationContact Hours 2 Credits 2

ObjectiveThe course introduces the students to the issues of development and the specific role playedby the media in development support communication.

[Type text]

82

Module 1The Concept of development- Different approaches to development (Economic, Sociological& Psychological)- NWICO,NANAP.

Module 2Development communication - theories of development communication – Everett Rogers, Nora C Qubral, Daniel Lerner- development and communication campaigns –KHEDA,SITE- diffusion of innovations research – social marketing of family planning, health and pro-social innovations- Indian context- P. Sainath.

Module 3Communication strategies for empowerment - participatory and sustainable developmentcommunication.

Module 4Development communication in action – international agencies and development aid: FAO,ILO, UNDP, UNESCO, UNFPA, UNICEF, WTO, WSF and WHO.

Books for Reference1. Development Communication – B. N. Ahuja and S. S. Chhabra.2. Communication for Development in the Third World – Srinivas R. Melkoteand H. Leslie Steeves.3. Communication for Development and Social Change – Jan Servaes, Editor.954. International and Development Communication, A 21st-Century Perspective –Bella Mody, Editor.Books for Further Reading1. Participatory Communication, Working for change and development – ShirleyA . White, K Sadanandan Nair and Joeph Ascroft.2. Development Communication and Media Debate – Mridula Meneon.3. India, the Emerging Giant – Arvind Panagariya.4. Participatory Video, Images that Transform and Empower – Shirley A. White(Editor).5. The Art of Facilitating Participation – Shirley A. White (Editor).6. Television and Social Change in Rural India – Kirk Johnson.7. Communication, Modernization and Social Development– K. Mahadevan,Kiran Prasad, Ito Youichi and Vijayan K. Pillai.8. Everybody Loves a Good Drought – P. Sainath.


There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester, one, at thecompletion of module three and the second, at the completion of final module.

[Type text]

83

2. Attendance : 2.5MarksAllotment of marks as per University regulations.

3. Paper Assignment: 2.5 MarksEach student shall study a development problem in the area approved by the faculty,

write a 450-word story and submit it for valuation.

II.Semester End Examination: 40 Marks

MODEL Question PaperFifth Semester BA Degree Examination

JOU 5D 03 Development Communication


PART A

[Type text]

84

Answer any Five questions each not exceeding 25 words. Each question carries 2 marks.1. NWICO2. SITE3. UNESCO4. P. Sainath5. Rogers6. Empowerment7. Garama swaraj8. WTO9. Participatory communication ( 5 x2 = 10 marks)

PART B

Answer any 3 questions each not exceeding 100 words. Each question carries 5 marks.10. Explain the concept of communication campaigns in development.11. Describe the theories of development communication.12. Elaborate the role of sustainable development in Indian context?13. Kheda project was the milestone in development communication movements in India- Elucidate.14. Diffusion of innovations is the fundamental theory behind the development communication strategies in third world- Examine.15. Social learning is also important while executing development communication strategies- Explain.

(3 x5 = 15 marks)PART C


16. Development agencies of United Nations play a vital role in Development Communication- Critically evaluate the statement.17. What are the different approaches to development? (1 x15 = 15 marks)

[Type text]

85

PART IIComplementary Courses offered by JOURNALISM for

NON JOURNALISM UG PROGRAMMES

Complementary courses in

1. Journalism,

2. Electronic Media, and

3. Mass Communication (for BA West Asian Studies).

AND

4. Complementary Courses in Media Practices (for B.A LRP Visual Communication, Multimedia, and Film and Television)

Part II - 1 Complementary Course in Journalism1. Introduction to Communication and Journalism.2. News Reporting and Editing.3. History of Mass Media in India.4. Corporate Communication and Advertising.

Aim: Expose undergraduate students to the discipline of journalism which has come to play a significant role in contemporary society.

[Type text]

86

Objectives• To review the basic concepts in the fields of communication and journalism.• To give a historical overview of mass media in India and abroad.• To introduce the relatively new concept of corporate communication with due emphasis on public relations and advertising.• To introduce newspaper journalism through news reporting and editing.• To motivate students to take up further studies and careers in journalism.

ScopeThe scope of the courses shall be limited to the study of the fundamental areas of journalism with emphasis on understanding the basic concepts, principles and practices.

[Type text]

87

Complementary Course in Journalism

Semester I Course I Code JOU1C01

Introduction to Communication and Journalism

Contact Hours 3 Credits 2

Module I

Fundamentals of communication: definitions of communication – elements of communication – types of communication – functions and dysfunctions of mass communication.

Module II

Print media –advantages and limitations of print media, Media Ethics. Challenges faced by Print Media.

Module III

Electronic media and film: characteristics and functions of radio and television – strengths and limitations of radio and television, 24X7 News Channels in India. –film as a medium, Film censorship and Certification.

Module IV

New media: Definitions- characteristics of new media – evolution of internet – blog – online newspapers – citizen journalism – social media- troll, online media platform.

Modue V

Freedom of the press: freedom of speech and expression in Indian Constitution – Article 19(1) (a) and reasonable restrictions – defamation – Censorship. Right to Information Act

Module VI

Basic communication models and theories – models of Aristotle, Shannon and Weaver, Westley and MacLean, Lasswell, Schramm, and Berlo – magic bullet theory, Individual differences theory, selectivity theories.

Books for Reference

[Type text]

88

1. James Watson and Anne Hill : A Dictionary of Communication and Media Studies, Edward Arnold Group, London.

2. Joseph R. Dominick : The Dynamics of Mass Communication, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

3. Denis McQuail : McQuail’s Mass Communication Theory, Vistaar Publications, New Delhi, 2005.

4. Melvin L. Defleur : Fundamentals of Human Communication.

5. Denis McQuail and Sven Windahl: Communication Models.

6. Joseph A Devito : Communicology: An Introduction to the study of Communication, Harper and Row, New York, 1985.


1. Uma Joshi : Textbook of Mass Communication and Media, Anmol Publications New Delhi, 1999.

2. O.M. Gupta and Ajay S. Jasra : Internet Journalism in India, Kanishka Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.

3. Kuppuswami : Communication and Social Change.

4. Keval J Kumar : Mass Communication in India, Jaico Publishing House, New Delhi, 2005.

5. Dr. J V Vilanilam : Mass Communication in India.

I. Continuous Assessment: 10 Marks1. Class Tests :5 Marks

There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: one, at thecompletion of module two and the second, at the completion of final module.

2. Attendance : 2. 5 MarksAllotment of marks as per University regulations3. Seminar/Production Assignment : 2. 5 Marks

Each student shall present seminar.II End Semester Examination: 40

[Type text]

89


Semester II Course 2 CODE JOU 2 CO1

NEWS REPORTING AND EDITING


Module I

Organisational structure of a newspaper – business, Mechanical and editorial departmental chart- responsibilities and qualities of chief editor – news editor, chief sub editors, sub editors, Bureau: bureau chief- chief reporter – reporters, stringers and freelancers.

Module II

Content of a newspaper- news – definitions – types of news – news determinants(values) – features – types of features – articles – middles –advertorials – editorials – interviews – reviews – profiles – columns – travelogues – cartoons.

Module III

News story structure – lead (intro) and body – inverted pyramid and hour glass, principles of news writing. Impact of New Media in Newspaper reporting.

Module IV

Reporting practices – basics of reporting – on the spot, arm chair reporting – beats, assignments – types of reporting – straight, interpretative, investigative, crime. Principles of reporting – news sources – news agencies – interviews.

Module V

Editing for newspapers – general rules of editing – headlines – writing Headlines – layout, design and pagination soft wares – page maker – in design – quark X press.

Books for Reference

1. Shrivastava, K.M., ‘News reporting and editing’, Sterling publishers Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.

2. Kamath M.V., ‘Professional Journalism’, Vikas publishing House, New Delhi.1980.

3. Bruce Westly, News Editing.

4 M.L. Stein. and Susan F Paterno,,’The News Writer’s Hand book,’ Surjeet Publications, New Delhi, 2003.

[Type text]

90

5. George A Hough,’ News Writing’, Kanishka Publishers, New Delhi, 2006.

6. Joseph M.K., ‘Outline of Reporting’, Anmol Publications, News Delhi, 2002.

7. Franklin, et al., ‘Key Concepts in Journalism Studies’, Vistaar Publications, New Delhi, 2005. 8. Jan R. Hakemulder,’News Reporting and Editing’,Anmol Publications,New Delhi,1998.

I. Continuous Assessment: 10 Marks1.

Class Tests :5 MarksThere shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: one, at the

completion of module two and the second, at the completion of final module.2. Attendance : 2. 5 Marks

Allotment of marks as per University regulations3. Seminar/Production Assignment : 2. 5 Marks


[Type text]

91

Model Question PaperSECOND SEMESTER BA DEGREE EXAMINATION

CUCBCSS –UG


JOU 1 CO1 / JOU 2C01 – INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION AND JOURNALISM AND NEWS REPORTING AND EDITING

Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 80

SECTION A

Answer all the following ( Part I and II must be attended separately)

PART I

1. Information that is sent back to the source is known as------

2. The act of producing a message is known as------

3.------is a social media network

4. Infotainment is ------

5. Stringer in a newspaper is-----

6. Gatekeeper in a newspaper is ------ (6 x ½ = 3 marks)

PART II

7. ‘Leader’ of a newspaper is ------

8. The head of a news bureau is -----

9. Vlog is -----

10. ---------is a pagination software

11. Sting operation is a branch of -----------reporting

12. --------is a combination of advertisement and editorial

6 x ½ = 3 marks)

[Type text]

92

SECTION B

Answer any five of the following from each part

PART I

13. Netizens

14 Arm chair journalism

15. Article 19(1)A

16.Troll

17. Sensational story

18. Ethics (5 x 2 = 10 marks)

PART II

19. Soft news

20. Special correspondent

21. News Editor

22. Layout

23. Proximity

24. Beats (5 x 2 = 10 marks)

SECTION C

Answer any three of the following form each part in not more than 100 words

PART I

25. Describe intrapersonal communication

26. Examine the relevance of Magic bullet theory

27. What is Right to Information Act?

28. Discuss the trends in new media (3 x 5 = 15 marks)

PART II

[Type text]

93

29. What are the duties of a sub editor?

30. What are the principles of news writing?

31. Describe the types of reporting

32. Discuss news determinants. (3 x 5 = 15 marks)

SECTION D

Answer any one of the following from each part

PART I

33. Define mass communication. What are the functions of mass communication?

34. Discuss the freedom of press in the Indian Constitution. Write about the freedom enjoyed by the media in our country. (1 x 12 = 12 marks)

PART II

35. What is layout of a newspaper? Analyse the layout of a newspaper you are familiar with.

36. Describe the various news sources.

(1 x 12 = 12 marks)

[Type text]

94


Semester III Course 3 Code JOU3C01

History of Mass Media in India


Module I

Evolution of Indian press : James Augustus Hicky – James Silk Buckingham – Serampore missionaries – Raja Ram Mohan Roy – freedom movement and the press – Gandhi as a journalist – press in the post-independence period – Emergency, Paid News, Corporatisation of media, Press Council of India.

Module II

Histroy of Malalyalam press : Rajya samacharam – Paschimodayam – Jnana Nikshepam – Deepika– Kerala Mithram – Kerala Patrika – Malayala Manorama – Mathrubhumi – Kerala Kaumudi – Al-Ameen – Deenabhandu –publications of political and religious organization, Malayalam press during the Freedom Struggle.

Module III

Legends of journalism : Hermann Gundert – Kandathil Varughese Mappillai – Swadeshabhimani Ramakrishna Pillai – Kesari Balakrishna Pillai – K.P. Kesava Menon – C.V.Kunhiraman. Other prominent personalities of Indian journalism- S.Sadanand, Ram Nath Goenka, Pothen Joseph, Arun Shourie, Prabhu Chawala, Barkha Dutt, Prannoy Roy, Karan Thapar, Rajdeep Sardesai.

Module IV

An overview of history of broadcasting in India – SITE –– FM radio, Community Radio–Prasar Bharati- types of radio programmes.

Module V

Films – Brief history of Malayalam cinema and great masters of Indian cinema – H.S.Bhatvadekar, Dadasaheb Phalke, Satyajith Ray, Ghatak, Adoor Gopalakrishnan, Mani Kaul, Shyam Benegal, Saeed Mirza, Mira Nair, Deepa Mehtha – Documentaries.

Books for Reference

1. Rangaswami Parthasarathy, ‘Journalism in India’.

2. Dr.Nadig Krishna Murthy, ‘Indian Journalism’.

[Type text]

95

3. GNS Raghavan, ‘The Press in India’.

4. Robin Jeffrey, ‘India’s Newspaper Revolution’.

5. Puthupally Raghavan, ‘Kerala Pathrapravarthana Charithram’.

6. M.V.Thomas, ‘Bharathiya Pathracharithram’, Bhasha Institute.

7. Mehra Masani, ‘Broadcasting and the People’.

8. G.C.Aswathy, ‘Broadcasting in India’.

9. Keval J. Kumar, ‘Mass Communication in India’.

10. Vijayakrishnan, ‘Malayala Cinimayude katha’.

11. Amanas Ramachandran Nair, ‘Chalachithra Padhanagal’.





[Type text]

96


Semester IV Course 4 Code JOU4C01

Corporate Communication and Advertising


Module I

Introduction to PR: definitions, origin and evolution of public relations – role and functions of PR – PR tools: external and internal publics – house journal – qualities of a PRO – PRSI, IPRA, PR campaign, PR activities by Central and State governments.

Module II

Corporate communication – definition, emergence and scope of corporate communication – Difference between PR and Corporate Communication, corporate identity – key concepts of corporate identity – corporate identity planning – corporate image – corporate personality – corporate social responsibility, corporate brand, corporate functions, Crisis communication.

Module III

Advertising – definition – evolution of advertising – functions and effects of advertising – types of ads advertorial- ad agencies and functions of advertising agencies – ASCI and DAVP – Ad.Campaign.

Module IV

Copy writing practices – ad copy – elements of copy: Principles of illustration, slogan, display, text, logo and caption – copywriting for broadcast commercials – jingles and internet ads.

Module V

Ethics of advertising: ethical issues of advertising – professional organizations and code of ethics.

Books for Reference

1. Sandeep Sharma & Deepak Kumar, ‘Advertising, Planning, implementations and control’, Mangal Deep Publications, Jaipur.

2. Sanjay Kaptan & Akhilesh Acharya, ‘Advertisement in Print Media’, Book Enclave, Jaipur.

3. S.A Chunawalla, ‘Advertisement an Introductory Text’, Himalaya Publishing,

4. Chunnawalla etal, ‘Advertising Theory and Practice’, Himalaya Publishing, New Delhi.

[Type text]

97

5. Otto Klepner, ‘Advertising Procedures’, Atlanta Books. 6. Scott M Cutlip and Allan H. Centre, ‘Effective Public Relations’, Pearson Education Ltd.Delhi.

7. Sam Black, ‘Practical Public Relations’, UBS Publishers Distributors Pvt Ltd.

8. D.S. Mehta, ‘Handbook of PR in India’.

9. Joseph Fernandez, Corporate Communications A 21st Century Primer, Response, Books, New Delhi.

Joep Cornelissen. Corporate Communication- a guide to theory and practice.





[Type text]

98

Model Question PaperIV SEMESTER BA DEGREE EXAMINATION

CUCBCSS –UG


JOU 3 C01 / JOU 4 C01 – HISTORY OF MASS MEDIA AND CORPORATE

COMMUNICATION AND ADVERTISING

Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks: 80 marks

SECTION A

Answer all the following (Part I and II must be attended separately

PART I

1. Press council of India was formed in ----- year

2. Young India was published by ...........

3. ..............is a publication by Raja Ram Mohan Roy

4. The editor of Calcutta Chronicle was ...........

5. The first newspaper in India was from ...........State

6. C.V. Kunhiraman was associated with ...........newspaper

(6 x ½ = 3 marks)

PART I

7. ASCI when expanded is ...........

8. Jingle is ...........

9. ...........is an in-house magazine of an organization

10. ...........is the father of PR

11. PR originated from ...........country

12. ...........is a central government advertising agency

[Type text]

99

(6 x ½ = 3 marks)

SECTION B

Answer any five from each part in not more than 30 words)

PART I

13. Indian opinion

14. INS

15. Pothan Joseph

16. Private FM radio channels

17. Al-Ameen

18. Dig Darshan (5 x 2 = 10 marks)

PART II

19. Logo

20.Direct mail

21. Press release

22. DAVP

23. USP

24. Ghost writer (5 x 2 = 10 marks)

SECTION C

Answer any three from each part in not more than 100 words

PART I

25. What are the contributions of Mahatma Gandhi to Indian Journalism?

26. Examine the role of the Press Council of India.

27. Trace the history of AIR from its beginning to the present day.

[Type text]

100

28. Analyse the contribution of Dadasaheb Phalke, the great master of Indian cinema.

(3 x 5 = 15 marks)

PART II

29. What are the essentials of an effective copy?

30. Discuss the various external tools of PR.

31. What are the steps in an advertising campaign?

32. What is corporate identity? (3 x 5 = 15 marks)

SECTION D

Write an essay on any one from each part in not more than 300 words)

PART I

33. Describe the role played by three prominent personalities of Indian Journalism.

34. What are the latest trends in Malayalam Journalism?

(1 x 12 = 12 marks)

PART II

35. Differentiate between Public Relations and Corporate communication. Explain the scope of Corporate Communication in the present context.

36. Discuss different types of advertisements with examples.

(1 x 2 = 12 marks)

[Type text]

101

PART II- 2. Complementary Courses in Electronic Media

1. Introduction to Electronic Media2. Radio and Television3. Fundamentals of Cinema4. Introduction to New Media

Objectives1. To review the basic concepts in the field of radio, television, film, and new media.2. To expose the students to the field of broadcasting by introducing the basic principles and practices of radio and television.3. To familiarize students with various aspects of cinema as a medium of mass communication.4. To introduce concepts of broadcasting with special emphasis on writing and reporting for radio and television.5. To motivate students to take up further studies and careers in electronic media.

ScopeThe scope of the study shall be limited to the study of fundamental areas of radio, television, cinema, and new media with emphasis on understanding the basic concepts, principles, and practices.

[Type text]

102

Complementary Course in Electronic Media

Semester I Course 1 Code JOU1C02

Introduction to Electronic Media


Module ICommunication: definition, elements and types of communication,mass communication - nature, characteristics, functions and dysfunctions of mass communication, mass media - types of media: print, radio, TV, film and new media.

Module IIBasic Communication Models: Aristotle, SMCR and Circular Model of Communication, Basic theories of Communication: Normative theories and Uses and Gratification theories.

Module IIIRadio: characteristics, scope and limitations - brief history of radio, Types of radio stations: AM, FM.

Module IVTelevision: characteristics, scope and limitations - origin and development of television, Cable TV, Satellite TV, DTH

Module VNews: types of news - news determinants – news story structure- print VS broadcast news; AIR, DD, Private FM stations and News Channels with special reference to Malayalam.

Books for Reference1. Joseph A Devito : Communicology: An Introduction to the study ofCommunication, Harper and Row, New York,1985.2. Joseph R. Dominick : The Dynamics of Mass Communication, McGrawHill, New Delhi.3. Agee, Ault & Emery : Introduction to Mass Communications, Harperand Row, New York, 1985.4. Spencer Crump : Fundamentals of Journalism, McGraw Hill BookCompany.5. Oxford : International Encyclopedia of Communications.6. James Watson and Anne Hill : A Dictionary of Communication and MediaStudies, Edward Arnold Group, London.7. John Vivian : The Media of Mass Communication, Allyn andBacon.

[Type text]

103

8. Andrew Boyd : Broadcast Journalism, Techniques of Radio andTelevision News, Focal Press, London.Books for Further Reading1. Uma Joshi : Textbook of Mass Communication and Media,Anmol Publications New Delhi, 1999.2. Keval J Kumar : Mass Communication in India, Jaico PublishingHouse, New Delhi, 2005.5. D S Mehta : Mass Communication and Journalism in India.6. Dr. J V Vilanilam : Mass Communication in India.7. Andrew Beck & Peter Bennet : Communication Studies.8. Rogers and Singhal : India’s Communication Revolution.

1. Continuous Assessment: 10 Marks1. Class Tests : 5 Marks



3. Seminar Presentation : 2.5 MarksEach student shall present a seminar on a subject allotted by the faculty and submit

the paper for valuation.Semester End Examination: 40 Marks

[Type text]

104

Complementary Courses in Electronic MediaSemester II Course 2 Code JOU2C02

Radio and Television


Module IOrganisational set up of AIR, Private FM stations, Community Radio, Online Radio.

Module II.Basic elements of radio programme- sound, music and effects. Writing for the ear - radio news writing, news reading- script writing for different radio programmes – interview, talk, feature, commentary, magazine programmes, radio drama, documentary, Radio Jockeying.

Module IIIOrganizational set up of DoorDarshan, TV on Web, TV on Mobile.

Module IVStructure and types of TV news – TV news gathering - news writing – voice over, news anchoring, teleprompter

Module VScripting for television programmes - TV interviewing, Discussion, TV magazines, Live programmes, special audience programmes

Books for Reference1. Joseph R.Dominick-‘The Dynamics of Mass Communication’.Mc Graw Hill,New Delhi.2. John Vivian -‘The Media of Mass Communication’ Allyn and Bacon.3. Arul Aram and Nirmaldasan, ‘Understanding News, Media’-Vijay NicoleImprints Pvt.Ltd.Chennai.4. Robert McLeish-‘Radio Production’. Focal Press London.5. Giraud Chester et.al-‘Television and Radio’-Prentice Hall.6. Herbert Zettl, ‘Television Production Handbook’-Wadsworth, USA.7. Andrew Boyd,’ Broadcast Journalism, Techniques of Radio and TelevisionNews’ Focal Press London.8. Ted White, ‘Broadcast News: Writing, Reporting and Producing’, Focal

[Type text]

105

Press London9. P.K Ravindranath , ‘Broadcast Journalism’-Author Press, New Delhi.

1. Continuous Assessment: 10 Marks1. Class Tests : 5 Marks



3. 3. Radio, TV Practicals : 2.5 MarksStudents shall produce and submit a radio programme such as radio documentary,

PSA, radio interview and news magazine programme either individually or group-wise.Or

Students shall produce and submit a television programme such as an extended newsreport, PSA and TV commercial either individually or group-wise.

Semester End Examination: 40 Marks

[Type text]

106

Model Question PaperSecond Semester B.A. Degree Examination


JOU1CO2/JOU2C02 Introduction to Electronic Media and Radio and Television


SECTION A

PART 1

Fill in the blanks1. DTH stands for ----2. DD Malayalam channel started on the year --------3. 'Radio Mango' is an example for --------- radio.4. Radio makes pictures in the ----------- of the listener.5. First Private TV channel of south India is -----------6. Interactivity is the main characteristics of ------------- media.

(6X1/2=3)Part II

Fill in the blanks7. ‘Alakal’is the example for ----- Radio8. The person who asks questions in an interview is -----9. The expansion of ENG is --------------10. A Television news story with no visuals is known as ---------------11. ‘Nerkkuner‘ is an example for ------------ programme in TV.12. ----------- helps a news reader to read without errors while live news production.

(6X1/2=3)SECTION B

PART IWrite very short notes on any five of the following

13. Satellite TV14. Limitations of Radio15. AM stations16. Narcotizing dysfunction17. Agenda setting function of mass media18. Source

(5X2=10)

[Type text]

107

PART IIWrite very short notes on any five of the following

19. Station Director of AIR20. TV on Mobile21. TV Discussion22. Radio Talk23. Radio Jockeying24. OB

(5X2=10)

SECTION CPART I

Write short essays on any three of the following25. Explain any FIVE news determinants with examples.26. Write on the features of Interpersonal Communication.27. Describe the main characteristics of TV that differentiate it from Radio.28. Explain the role of the element feedback in a communication.

(3X5=15)

PART IIWrite short essays on any three of the following

29. Explain the basic elements of radio programme production.30. Explain the structure of an interview. How should a producer plan an interview?31. What are the elements that can be used for audience participation in a Radio Magazine?32. Explain the specialties of Radio Drama.

(3X5=15)SECTION D

PART IAnswer any one of the following in about 400 words.

33. Delineate the origin and development of TV in India.34. Explain the characteristics of mass media.

(1X12=12)

Part IIAnswer any one of the following in about 400 words.

35. Explain with the help of a diagram the organisational set up of AIR.36. Elucidate the major points to be noted while writing for Broadcast media.

(1X12=12)

[Type text]

108

Complementary Courses in Electronic MediaSemester III Course 3 Code JOU3C02

Fundamentals of Cinema


Module ICinema ; Characteristics and typesCinema: a brief history. -Lumiere brothers and early experiments, characteristics of cinema.

Module IIMajor film movements – An OverviewGerman expressionism- Cabinet of Dr.Caligary by Robert Wiene.Soviet montage - Battleship Potemkin by Sergie Eisentein.Italian Neo Realism - Bicycle thieves by Vittorio Desseca.A few Great masters: Charlie Chaplin - Alfred Hitchcock - Akira Kurosawa, Kim KiDuk and Mohsen Makmalbaf.

Module III.Indian Cinema: New wave and commercial cinema, FTII – Indian Masters: H.S. Bhatwadekar, DG. Phalke, Satyajith Ray - Ritwik Ghatak, Mrinal Sen, Girish Kasaravalli, K Balachandar

Module IVMalayalam Cinema – an Overview, Masters: - Adoor Gopala Krishnan - G Aravindan - John Abraham, P.N. Menon, K.G. George

Module VFilm Making: Steps in film making: Pre Production, Production and post production.Visual language-Basics of cinematography: types of shots, camera movements,camera angles, camera viewpoints - Lighting- three point lighting techniques.

Additional List of Cinema:

The Circus - Charlie ChaplinPsycho - Alfred HitchcockDreams - Akira KurosawaThree Iron - Kim Ki DukGabba - Mohsen Makmalbaf.Apur Sansar - Satyajith RaySubarnarekha - Ritwik GhatakVidheyan - Adoor Gopala KrishnanVaasthuhaara- G Aravindan

[Type text]

109

Cheriyachante Kroorakrithyangal - John AbrahamOlavum Theeravum – P.N.MenonPanchavadippalam - K.G. George

Book for reference:1 Virginia Wright Wexman. A history of Film. 6th edition.2. Jarek KUPSC. The History of Cinema for beginners. 3.Keval J. Kumar, Mass Communication in India’, Jaico Publishing House, NewDelhi. 4.Jill Nilmes: An Introduction to Film Studies, Routledge, London, 19965. Bruce Mamer: Film Production Technique, Thomson Wadsworth, USA.Web Resources1. www.imdb.com2. www.mrqe.com3. www.wikipedia.org




Each student shall present a study evaluating a filmOr

Each student shall write a script for a short film of 5 minutes duration on a story thread provided by the faculty.

II End Semester Examination: 40

[Type text]

110

Complementary Courses in Electronic MediaSemester IV Course 4 Code JOU4C02

Introduction to New Media


Module IInternet as a medium of communication: history and evolution of internet - characteristicsof new media: immediacy, interactivity, universality, hypertext, multimedia, media convergence

Module IIOnline reporting: language and style of online journalism, tools for newsgathering, news determinants in cyberspace, dos and don’ts of online reporting.

Module IIIOnline News writing: Types of Online news – writing breaking news, writing features, editing – HL writing

Module IVEthics in new media: obscenity and privacy - copyright and libel - cyber laws. Information Technology Act

Module VSocial media: evolution, definition and types, social media as a tool for news gathering, social media activism: Jasmine Revolution, India Against Corruption movement, Social media as a tool for Political Communication, social media as a tool for Public Relations and Propaganda.

Books for Reference1. Tapas Ray, ‘Online Journalism – A Basic Text’, Foundation Delhi, 2006.2. Jason Whittaker, The New Media Handbook –The Cyberspace Handbook .3. Sunil Saxena , ‘Broadcasting News: The craft and technology of onlineJournalism’.4. Jason Whittaker, ‘Web Production for writers and journalists’.5. Anna Evertt, John T. Caldwell, ‘New Media:Theories and practice ofDigitexuality’.6. Stephen Quinn, ‘Digital Sub editing and Design’.7. Nalini Rajan (ed.), ‘21st Century Journalism in India’, Sage, 2007.8. Aravind Singhal & Everett M. Rogers, ‘India’s CommunicationRevolution’.

[Type text]

111





Model Question Paper

[Type text]

112

Fourth Semester B.A. Degree ExaminationComplementary Course

JOU3CO2/JOU4C02 Fundamentals of Cinema and Introduction to New Media

TIME: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 80

SECTION A

PART 1Choose the correct answer from the choices given:

1. Elippathayam is directed by

a. Aravindan b)P.N. Menon c)Adoor Gopalakrishnan d)P. Padmarajan

2. Rashamon is a

a. Japanese film b)Korean film c)Indian Film d)European film

3. The light that illuminates the portions left out by principal light source is

a. Key light b)Background light c)Back light d)Fill light

4. Vittorio Desica is part of

a. German Expressionism b)Italian Neo Realism c)Sur-realism d)Expressionism

5. The helping hand of Thomas Alva Edison was

a. Lumier brothers b)Muybridge c)Melies d)W K L Dickson

6. --- shot shows the eye-lid of the eye tightly

a. a). Extreme Long Shot b)Long Shot c)Close Up d)Extreme close Up.

(6X1/2=3)PART II

Choose the correct answer from the choices given:7. ARPANET is developed by ----------- Army

a. Indian b) British c) German d) U.S.8. WWW was invented by

a. Adam Curry b)Tim Berners Lee c)Ray Tomlinson d)Steve Johns9. UGC in cyberspace means

a. a). University Grants Commission b) User Generated Contentb. c) Unknown Giant Crime d) Unintentional Greed and Corruption

10. Before Broadband there was ----- connection to get connected to internet in Indiaa. a). Dial-up b)STD c)2G d)3G

11. Google Alert is aa. News gathering tool b) Editing tool c) HL writing tool d) Enquiry

tool

[Type text]

113

12. Twitter was introduced ina. a). 2011 b) 2000 c) 2006 d) 2007

(6X1/2=3)SECTION B

PART IWrite very short notes on any five of the following.

13. P.N. Menon14. Psycho15. Low angle shot16. Key light17. Lumiere Brothers18. Ritwik Ghatak

(5X2=10)PART II

Write very short notes on any five of the following.19. Online tools for news gathering20. Online features21. Libel22. ERNET23. Obscenity in cyber space24. VSNL

(5X2=10)SECTION C

PART IWrite short essays on any three of the following.

25. Explain the characteristics of Cinema.26. Briefly write on German Expressionism.27. Critically evaluate any one film by Satyajith Rai.28. Explain the important types of shots.

(3X5=15)Part II

Write short essays on any three of the following29. How does the writing for New Media differ from that of Print Media?30. What are the news determinants in the cyber space?31. Explain the online editing process.32. Write a short note on how social media can be used as tool for Propaganda.

(3X5=15)

[Type text]

114

SECTION DPART I

Answer any one of the following in about 400 words.33. Write a note on the current status of Malayalam Cinema.34. Explain the steps in film making.

(1X12=12)PART II

Answer any one of the following in about 400 words.35. Explain characteristics of New Media.36. Critically evaluate the impact of Social Media on the youth.

(1X12=12)

[Type text]

115

Part II - 3

Complementary Courses in Mass Communication (for BA West Asian Studies)

1. Introduction to Mass Communication

2. Print Media Journalism

3. Electronic Media

4. Mass Media in West Asia

Aim:

To expose undergraduate students to the discipline of Mass Communication which has come to play a significant role in contemporary society.

Objectives

To review the basic concepts in the fields of communication and journalism.

To create awareness about the role and scope of Mass Media in our contemporary society.

To help students acquire skills which would enable them to work in newspapers, radio and television.

To give a brief overview of media scenario in West Asia.

To provide a bird’s eye view of Iranian cinema with due emphasis on the contributions of prominent Iranian film makers.

Scope

[Type text]

116

The scope of the courses shall be limited to the study of the fundamental areas of Mass Communication with emphasis on understanding the basic concepts, principles and practices.



Introduction to Mass Communication


Module I: Fundamentals of Communication

Definitions of communication - elements of communication - types of communication -

Concept of mass and its evolution - nature and characteristics of mass communication - functions and dysfunctions of mass media - types of mass media.

Module II: Print Media

Definitions, characteristics and types of newspapers, magazines and books - online newspapers - magazines and books in the digital age -Scope and limitations of print media.

Module III: Electronic Media

Characteristics of radio, television, film, home video industry, Direct Broadcast Satellites, Direct to Home service, and recording industry.

Module IV: New Media

History and evolution of the internet, -characteristics and emergence of new media - online media: social networks, blogs, vlogs, podcast, news portals - basics of web writing - introduction to technical writing and documentation.

Book for reference:

1. Joseph R. Dominick : 'The Dynamics of Mass Communication'. McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

2. Agee, Ault and Emery : 'Introduction to Mass Communications', Harper and Row, New

[Type text]

117

York, 1985.

3. Joseph A. Devito: 'Communicology: An Introduction to the Study of Communication'. Harper and Row, New York, 1978.

4. Keval J. Kumar : 'Mass Communication in India', Jaico Publishing House, New Delhi, 2005.

5. Uma Joshi: 'Text Book of Mass Communication and Media', Anmol Publications, New Delhi, 1999.

6. James Watson and Anne Hill: 'A Dictionary of Communication and Media Studies', Edward Arnold, London, 1993.

7. Denis McQuail: 'McQuail's Mass Communication Theory', Vistaar Publications, New Delhi, 2005.

8. Denis / DeFleur, 'Understanding Mass Communication', Goyl Saab, New Delhi,1991.

9. O.M Gupta and Ajay S Jasra: 'Internet Journalism in India', Kanishka Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.

10. Gordon H, Mills & John A. Walter: ‘ Technical Writing’.

11. John Pavlik: ‘Journalism and New Media’.

12. Jason Whitaker: ‘ The Internet, The Basics.’

[Type text]

118


Semester II Course 2 Code JOU2C03

Print Media Journalism


Module I: Introduction to Journalism

What is journalism? - Principles and functions of journalism - journalism as a profession - role and responsibilities of a journalist - ethics of journalism.

Module II: Newspaper Organization

Organizational structure of a newspaper: business, mechanical and editorial departments - editorial hierarchy -responsibilities and qualities of chief editor, news editor, chief sub-editor, bureau chief, reporters – freelance journalism.

Module III: Newspaper Content

Contents of a newspaper – definition and types of news - news determinants – features – editorial – interviews – reviews – cartoons – columns - readers’ letters .

Module IV: News Reporting

Reporting practices - news story structure - inverted pyramid style - hour glass style - lead and body – beats - press conferences - meet the press - news releases - news sources - principles of reporting.

Module V: News Editing

Principles of editing – role and responsibilities of a sub-editor - editing process - headlines and headlining - newspaper layout and design - style book - typesetting and printing methods: DTP and offset printing.

Books for reference:

1. K.M Shrivastava: ‘News reporting and editing’, Sterling publishers Pvt. Ltd.

2. M.V Kamath: ‘Professional Journalism’, Vikas publishing House.

[Type text]

119

3. Vir Bala Aggarwal: ‘Essential of Practical Journalism’, concept publishing Company.

4. Bruce Itule, and Douglas Anderson: ‘News Writing and Reporting for Today’s Media’, McGraw Hill.

5. Julian Leiter, ‘The Complete Reporter’, Macmillan.

6. Harold Evans, ‘Newsman’s English’ William Hainemann Ltd.

7. Baskette,Floyd K.,Sissors,Jack Z.,Brooks, S: ‘The Art of Editing’, Macmillan Publishing Co.Inc.

8. Bruce Westly: News Editing.

9. M.L. Stein. and Susan F Paterno: ‘The News Writer’s Hand book’, Surjeet Publications.

10. Franklin: ‘Key Concepts in Journalism Studies’, Vistaar Publications.


1. Class Tests : 10 Marks

There shall be two internal assessment examinations; one at the end of the first semester

and the second semester. (2 x 5 = 10 Marks)

2. Attendance : 5 Marks

A maximum of five marks shall be allotted for the attendance collectively for the two

semesters. Allotment of marks should be as per the University regulations.

3. Media Practical : 5 Marks

In the first semester, each student shall present a seminar on a subject allotted by the

faculty and submit the paper for valuation. (2.5 Marks)

In the second semester, students shall collectively bring out a laboratory newspaper with news

story inputs from each student. (2.5 Marks).

Complementary Courses in Mass Communication


[Type text]

120

JOU1C03 & JOU2C03

INTRODUCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION

&

PRINT MEDIA JOURNALISM

Time: Three Hours Maximum Marks: 80

Section A

Answer all the following.

Part I and Part II must be attended separately.

PART I

1. The term communication stems from the Latin word ---

2. Conversing with the divine may be termed --- communication.

3. --- in communication refers to anything that distorts or interferes with the message.

4. Who is the founder of Facebook?

5. Vlog.

6. ARPANET.

(6 x ½ = 3 marks)

PART II

7. Who is the chief-editor of Malayala Manorama daily?

8. Expand DTP.

9. Lead is also known as ---

10. Banner headline.

11. Op-ed.

12. Cub.

[Type text]

121

(6 x ½ = 3 marks)

Section B

Answer any five of the following from each part.

PART I

13. Fifth estate.

14. You Tube.

15. Radio Mango.

16. Feedback.

17. Citizen journalism.

18. DTH.

(5 x 2 = 10 marks)

PART II

19. Bureau chief.

20. Beat.

21. Kicker. 22. Intro. 23. Middle. 24. Deadline.

(5 x 2 = 10 marks)

Section C

Answer any three of the following from each part.

PART I

25. Differentiate between intrapersonal and interpersonal communication.

[Type text]

122

26. Comment on the broadsheet, tabloid and berliner newspaper formats.

27. Differentiate between radio and television.

28. What is technical writing?

(3 x 5 = 15 marks)

PART II

29. What are the qualities required for a reporter?

30. Differentiate between press conference and meet-the-press.

31. What is the structure of a news story?

32. Delineate the types of news with examples.

(3 x 5 = 15 marks)

Section D

Answer any one of the following from each part.

PART I

33. Define communication. Explain its basic elements.

34. Critically examine the characteristics and roles of TV as a medium of mass

communication.

(1 x 12 = 12 marks)

PART II

35. What makes news? Explain the news values with examples.

36. Explain the structure of the editorial department of a newspaper enumerating

the responsibilities of the key persons.

[Type text]

123

(1 x 12 = 12 marks)



Electronic Media


Module I: Radio Broadcasting

[Type text]

124

Defining broadcasting - kinds of radio stations - organizational structure of a radio station - radio programme formats.

Module II: Radio Practices

Radio news writing - script writing for radio drama, documentary and commercials - radio interviewing techniques - news reading and presentation - radio jockeying.

Module III: Television Broadcasting-

Organizational structure of a television station - types of television programmes.

Module IV: Television Practices

Television news gathering - principles of television news writing - script writing for television - news anchoring and presentation - video Jockeying -the television studio.

Module V: Film characteristics and types:

Types of films: feature films, documentaries, short films, animations and others

Module VI: Basic production techniques of Film

Stage one-Pre-production: idea, treatment, script, storyboard, schedule, budget, crew, location, art direction, casting and rehearsals - Stage two-Production: set procedures, camera techniques, camera movements, camera angles, camera distances, lighting - Stage three-Post-production: visual editing, sound editing, special effects.


1. Arul Aram & Nirmaldasan: 'Understanding News Media', Vijay Nicole Imprints Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2006.

2. Robert McLeish: ‘Radio Production’, Focal Press, London, 1994.

[Type text]

125

3. Chester, Garrison, & Willis: 'Television and Radio', Prentice Hall, 1978.

4. Herbert Zettl: 'Television Production Handbook', Wadsworth, USA, 2000.

5. Andrew Boyd: 'Broadcast Journalism, Techniques of Radio and Television News', Focal Press, London, 2001.

6. Ted White: 'Broadcast News: Writing, Reporting and Producing', Focal Press, London,2005.

7. P.K. Ravindranath: 'Broadcast Journalism', Authors Press, Delhi, 2004.

8. Blain Brown. ‘Cinematography, Theory and Practice’.

9. Keval J. Kumar, ‘Mass Communication in India’, Jaico Publishing House, New Delhi.

10. Bruce Mamer: Film Production Technique, Thomson Wadsworth, USA.

11. Tom Holden:‘Film Making’.

12. Susan Hayward, ‘Key concepts in Cinema studies’, Routledge, New York, 2004.



Mass Media in West Asia


Module I: Media Landscape of West Asia:

An overview of important newspapers, radio and television in West Asia:

Egypt

Al – Ahram, ERTU, Nile Sat and Nile FM.

[Type text]

126

Qatar

Al-Arab, The Gulf Times, QBS, and Al-Jazeera TV

Saudi Arabia

Arab news, Ar-riyadh, The Saudi Press Agency (SPA), Saudi Arabian Broadcasting Service,.

UAE

Al Bayan, Dubai Media City (DMC), Middle East Broadcasting Center (MBC).

Turkey

Turkish Daily News, Milliyet, RTUK, TRT, MED TV.

Iran

Tehran Times, The Islamic Republic News Agency (IRNA), Islamic Republic of Iran Broadcasting (IRIB).

Iraq

Al-Baath, The Iraqi News Agency (INA).

Israel

The Jerusalem Post, Haaretz, The Jewish Telegraphic Agency (JTA), Israel Broadcasting Authority (IBA).

Gaza strip and West bank

Al-Quds ( Jerusalem ), Palestine Broadcasting Corporation (PBC), Sawt Filastin (The Voice of Palestine or VOP).

Module II : The Cinema of Iran

Visual arts in Persia - Early Persian Cinema, -Pre-revolutionary cinema - post-revolutionary cinema - Commercial cinema in Iran - Iranian new wave films - Prominent film makers in Iran: Abbas Kiarostami, Mohsen Makhmalbaf, Majid Majidi, Jafar Panahi, Rakhshan Bani-E'temad, and Samira Makhmalbaf.


1. Katharina Notzold, ‘West Asia: Media Systems’ ,Blackwell Publishers, 2008.

2. Dabashi Hamid, ‘Close-up: Iranian Cinema, Past, Present and Future’, Verso, London, 2001.

3. Dabashi Hamid, ‘Masters and Master pieces of Iranian Cinema’, Mage Publishers,

[Type text]

127

Washington DC, 2007.

4. History of Film, Pearson.

Web Resources

1. www.imdb.com

2. www.mrqe.com

3. www.wikipedia.org


1. Class Tests : 10 Marks

There shall be two internal assessment examinations; one at the end of the third semester

and the fourth semester. (2 x 5 = 10 Marks)

2. Attendance : 5 Marks

A maximum of five marks shall be allotted for the attendance collectively for the two

semesters. Allotment of marks should be as per the University regulations.

3. Media Practical : 5 Marks

In the third semester, students shall produce and submit a radio programme such as radio

documentary, PSA, radio interview and news magazine programme either individually or group-

wise. (2.5 Marks)

Or

Students shall produce and submit a television programme such as an extended news

report, PSA and TV commercial either individually or group-wise. (2.5 Marks)

[Type text]

128

Or

Each student shall write a script for a short film of 5 minutes duration on a story thread

provided by the faculty. (2.5 Marks)

In the fourth semester, each student shall present a seminar on a subject allotted by the

faculty and submit the paper for valuation. (2.5 Marks)

Or

Each student shall present a study evaluating an Iranian film. (2.5 Marks)

Complementary Courses in Mass Communication


JOU3C03 & JOU4C03

ELECTRONIC MEDIA

&

MASS MEDIA IN WEST ASIA

Time: Three Hours Max.Marks: 80

Section A

Answer all the following.

Part I and Part II must be attended separately.

PART I

[Type text]

129

1. Who invented radio?

2. AM stands for ---

3. The FM radio station owned by Mathrubhumi group is ---

4. Who is the presenter of the popular interview show, ‘Nere Chovve’?5. ENG6. Story board

(6 x ½ = 3 marks)

PART II

7. Who is the director of ‘Children of Heaven’?

8. Expand PBC.

9. Uday Hussein.

10. Nile FM.

11. Khatami.

12. DMC.

(6 x ½ = 3 marks)

Section B

Answer any five of the following from each part.

PART I

13. Define broadcasting.

14. Executive producer.

15. Non-linear editing.

16. Radio Jockeying.

17. Shooting script.

18. High Angle

(5 x 2 = 10 marks)

[Type text]

130

PART II

19. Jafar Panahi.

20. Arab News.

21. QBS. 22. Al-Baath. 23. Sawt Filastin. 24. Majid Majidi.

(5 x 2 = 10 marks)

Section C

Answer any three of the following from each part.

PART I

25. Briefly explain the organizational structure of a medium-sized radio station.

26. What are the do’s and don’ts of radio script writing?

27. What are the main categories of equipment used for television

programme production?

28. Explain the types of shots.

(3 x 5 = 15 marks)

PART II

29. Trace the evolution of Al-Ahram.

30. Comment on Iranian new wave cinema.

31. State the contributions of Samira Makhmalbaf.

[Type text]

131

32. Briefly enumerate the important television channels in Turkey.

(3 x 5 = 15 marks)

Section D

Answer any one of the following from each part.

PART I

33. Explain the steps in film making.

34. Describe the different types of television programmes with examples.

(1 x 12 = 12 marks)

PART II

35. Explain the role and importance of of Al-Jaseera in West Asian media landscape.

36. Critically review the films of Abbas Kiarostami.

(1 x 12 = 12 marks)

[Type text]

132

Part II - 4

Complementary Courses in Media Practices for B.A LRP Visual Communication, Multimedia, and Film and Television

Sl No

Course Code


Hours

External Internal Credits

1 JOU1C04 Introduction to Mass Media

3 80 20 3

2 JOU2C04 Newspaper Journalism

3 80 20 3

3 JOU3C04 Television Journalism

4 80 20 3

4 JOU4C04 Digital Journalism

4 80 20 3

Total (4 Courses) 14 320 80 12

[Type text]

133

Aim:

Expose undergraduate students to the discipline of journalism and mass communication with due emphasis on its practical aspects which has academic, industrial, and social relevance.

Objectives

To review the basic concepts in the field of print, radio, television, and digital media. To introduce newspaper journalism through news reporting and editing. To expose the students to the field of television journalism with special emphasis on

writing and reporting practices for television. To familiarize students with various aspects of digital media as a medium of mass

communication.

Scope

The scope of the study shall be limited to the study of fundamental areas of print, radio, television, and digital media with emphasis on understanding the basic concepts, principles, and practices.

[Type text]

134

Complementary Courses in Media Practices for B.A LRP



Introduction to Mass Media

Module I: Fundamentals of Communication

Definitions of communication - elements of communication - types of communication - nature and characteristics of mass communication - functions and dysfunctions of mass media - types of mass media.

Module II: Print Media

Definitions, characteristics and types of newspapers, magazines and books - online newspapers - magazines and books in the digital age -Scope and limitations of print media.

Module III: Electronic Media and Film

Characteristics and functions of radio and television – strengths and limitations of radio and television – organizational structure of radio and television – film as a medium – new trends in electronic media and film.

[Type text]

135

Module IV: New Media

History and evolution of the Internet - characteristics and emergence of new media - online media: social networks, blogs, vlogs, podcast, news portals.

Module V Freedom of the press

Freedom of speech and expression in Indian Constitution – Article 19(1) (a) and reasonable restrictions – defamation – Right to Information Act

Reading List

1. Joseph R. Dominick: 'The Dynamics of Mass Communication'. McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

2. Agee, Ault and Emery: 'Introduction to Mass Communications', Harper and Row, New York, 1985.

3. Joseph A. Devito: 'Communicology: An Introduction to the Study of Communication'. Harper and Row, New York, 1978.

4. Keval J. Kumar: 'Mass Communication in India', Jaico Publishing House, New Delhi, 2005.

5. Uma Joshi: 'Text Book of Mass Communication and Media', Anmol Publications, New Delhi, 1999.

6. James Watson and Anne Hill: 'A Dictionary of Communication and Media Studies', Edward Arnold, London, 1993.

7. Denis McQuail: 'McQuail's Mass Communication Theory', Vistaar Publications, New Delhi, 2005.

8. Denis / DeFleur, 'Understanding Mass Communication', Goyl Saab, New Delhi, 1991.

9. O.M Gupta and Ajay S Jasra: 'Internet Journalism in India', Kanishka Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.

10. John Pavlik: ‘Journalism and New Media’.

11. Jason Whitaker: ‘ The Internet, The Basics.’

1. Continuous Assessment: 20 Marks

[Type text]

136

1. Class Tests: 10 Marks.

There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of module five.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks.

Allotment of marks as per University Regulations.

3. Media assignments / Seminar Presentation: 5 Marks.

Student shall present a seminar on a topic in the syllabus allotted by the faculty and submit the paper for valuation.


[Type text]

137


Semester II Course 2 Code JOU2C04


Newspaper Journalism

Module I: Introduction to Journalism

What is journalism? - Principles and functions of journalism - journalism as a profession - role and responsibilities of a journalist - ethics of journalism.

Module II: Newspaper Organization

Organizational structure of a newspaper: business, mechanical and editorial departments - editorial hierarchy -responsibilities and qualities of chief editor, news editor, chief sub-editor, bureau chief, reporters – freelance journalism.

Module III: Newspaper Content

Contents of a newspaper – definition and types of news - news determinants – features – editorial – interviews – reviews – cartoons – columns - readers’ letters.

Module IV: News Reporting

Reporting practices - news story structure - inverted pyramid style - hour glass style - lead and body – beats - press conferences - meet the press - news releases - news sources - principles of reporting.

Module V: News Editing

Principles of editing – role and responsibilities of a sub-editor - editing process - headlines and headlining - newspaper layout and design - style book - typesetting and printing methods: DTP and offset printing.

Reading list

1. K.M Shrivastava: ‘News reporting and editing’, Sterling publishers Pvt. Ltd.

[Type text]

138

2. M.V Kamath: ‘Professional Journalism’, Vikas publishing House.

3. Vir Bala Aggarwal: ‘Essential of Practical Journalism’, concept publishing Company.

4. Bruce Itule, and Douglas Anderson: ‘News Writing and Reporting for Today’s Media’, McGraw Hill.

5. Julian Leiter, ‘The Complete Reporter’, Macmillan.

6. Harold Evans, ‘Newsman’s English’ William Hainemann Ltd.

7. Baskette,Floyd K.,Sissors,Jack Z.,Brooks, S: ‘The Art of Editing’, Macmillan Publishing Co.Inc.

8. Bruce Westly: News Editing.

9. M.L. Stein. and Susan F Paterno: ‘The News Writer’s Hand book’, Surjeet Publications.

10. Franklin: ‘Key Concepts in Journalism Studies’, Vistaar Publications.



There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester: one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of module five.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks

Allotment of marks as per University Regulations.

3. Media Practicals: 5 Marks

Students shall collectively bring out a laboratory newspaper with news story inputs from each student.


[Type text]

139




Television Journalism

Module I: Television News Channel

Organizational structure of a television news channel; bureau and desk operation; television news terminology

Module II: Television Reporting

Qualities and responsibilities of a television reporter; news formats - O-C, O-C VO, O-C VO SOT, O-C Graphics, O-C SOT, O-C Live, O-C Phono and O-C Package; ENG and DSNG; Piece To Camera (PTC) – stand-up, stand-up close, stand-up open and signature line, Live news

[Type text]

140

reporting – straight-up live, live with interview, live with SOT, live with VO, live with VOSOT and live with package; breaking news; techniques of live telecast

Module III: Television News Structure

Headlines, teaser and teller leads, body and tag; subbing reporters’, news agency and citizen journalists’ copies; writing voice-over; studio package; rundown preparation TV news language, ingredients of TV newscast

Module IV: Production Control Room (PCR) operation

Role and responsibilities of producer, news editor, assignment editor, visual editor and graphics editor

Module V: Television Interviews

Opinion interview, information interview, news interview, filed interview, vox pop and personality interview, interviewing techniques; panel discussion, News based programmes- debates, satirical programmes etc.

Module VI: Television News Anchoring

Qualities of a news anchor; aesthetics of presentation – speed, breath, gesture, posture, facial expressions, pitch, pace, pause and duration

Books for Reference

1. Ivor Yorke, Television News, Focal Press2. Zettl, Television Production Handbook, Wadsworth3. Andrew Boyd, Broadcast Journalism, Techniques of Radio and Television News, Focal

Press4. Ted White, Broadcast News Writing, Reporting and Production 5. Gerald Millerson, Effective TV Production6. Browssard and Holgate, Broadcast News7. Fletcher, Professional Broadcasting


1. Eric K. Gormly, Writing and Producing Television News, Surjeet Publications2. Robert L. Hilliard, Writing for Television, Radio, and New Media, Wadsworth, 2004 3. Rick Thompson, Writing for Broadcast Journalism, Routledge.

[Type text]

141



There shall be two internal examinations within the semester: one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of module six.

2. Attendance: 5Marks

Allotment of marks as per University regulations

3. Interview Assignment: 5 Marks

Students divided into teams of four members each, shall produce a 15-minute personality interview and submit for valuation.

II. End Semester Examination: 80 Marks



[Type text]

142


Digital Journalism

Module I: Digital Media

Evolution of digital media – types of digital media - characteristics of digital media - World Wide Web - Web pages - e-groups - e-governance – online advertisements.

Module II: Digital Journalism

Features of online journalism - hypertext, multimedia, interactivity, instant feedback, and absence of gate keeping. Online aesthetics – content, design, colours, font, templates, navigation bars, and hyperlinks

Module III: Digital Reporting

Online reporting characteristics, tools, skills, strengths and limitations – mobile journalism - citizen journalism- portals; blogging – podcasting – vodcasting - microblogging.

Module IV: Issues in digital Journalism

Media convergence – cyber culture – subjectivity – cyber crime and related regulations – cyber ethics.

Module V: Digital Content Development

Definition and types - objectives in online content development - guidelines for effective writing - prewriting, writing and re-writing – qualities of a successful content developer.

Module VI: Data Journalism

[Type text]

143

Introduction to data – types of data – big data – online data sources – data journalism skills and tools for data journalists – sourcing, filtering, managing and visualising data.

Books for Reference

1. Tapas Ray, Online Journalism: A Basic Text, Cambridge University Press.

2. Andy Bull, Multimedia Journalism A Practical Guide, Routledge – London.

3. Jonathan Gray, Miliana Bounegru, & Lucy Chambers (Eds.), The Data Journalism Handbook, www.datajournalismhandbook.org/1.0/en/

4. Mark Briggs, Journalism 2.0. How to Survive and Thrive, www.scholarcommons.usf.edu

5. Andrew Dewdney and Peter Ride, The New Media Handbook.

6. Jason Whittaker, The Cyberspace Handbook.

7. Sunil Saxena, Breaking News, , Tata McGraw-Hill.

8. Gordon H, Mills & John A. Walter, ‘ Technical Writing’.


1. James Curran, Media and Power.

2. Brian Winston, Media, Technology and Society.

3. Mike Ward, Journalism Online.

4. Kenneth C. Killebrew, Managing Media Convergence.



[Type text]

144

There shall be two internal assessment examinations within the semester, one, at the completion of module three and the second, at the completion of the module six.

2. Attendance: 5 Marks.

Allotment of marks as per University regulations.

3. Digital Media Practicals: 5 Marks.

Each student shall submit a report comparing home pages of two reputed online newspapers.

Or

Each student shall create a blog with the content of his/her choice and submit its link for valuation.



File Ref.No.27503/GA - IV - E3/2013/CU


Abstract

Faculty of Commerce and Management Studies-Regulations, Scheme and Syllabus for MCom

course under Credit Semester System (Regular and SDE)- Approved- Orders issued.

G & A - IV - E

Read:-1) Minutes of the Meeting of the Board of Studies in Commerce(PG) held on 22-04-

2015(item no.1,3 &4)

2) Minutes of the Meeting of the Faculty of Commerce and Mangement Studies held

on 03-06-2015(item no.3)

3) Minutes of the Meeting of the Academic Council held on 11-07-2015.

4) Orders of the Vice Chancellor in File No.19337/GAIV-E/SO/2015/Admn dated 04-

08-2015

ORDER

As per paper read First above, the Board of Studies in Commerce(PG) at its meeting held on 22-04-

2015 has finalised and approved the revised Scheme and Syllabus for MCom course to be

implemented from 2015-16 academic year onwards. The Board also finalised the new MCom

Regulations and Guidelines for the evaluation of MCom Project Work and conduct of Viva Voce.

The Board further decided to implement the same pattern and Syllabus for Regular and SDE

students.

As per paper read Second above, the Faculty of Commerce and Management Studies at its

meeting held on 03-06-2015 has approved the minutes of the meeting of the Board of Studies in

Commerce(PG) and regarding the syllabi and Regulations of MCom Programme, the Faculty

pointed out some mistakes relating to some aspects and requested the Chairman to rectify these

mistakes and submit to the University. Accordingly, the Chair Person has submitted the corrected

copy of the regualtions, Scheme and Syllabus for MCom Programme.

As per paper read Third above, the Academic council at its meeting held on 11-07-2015 vide item

no.II-G has resolved to approve the minutes of the meeting of the Faculty of Commerce and

Management Studies alongwith the minutes of the meetings of the Boards of Studies coming under

the Faculty.

Sanction has therfore been accorded by the Vice Chancellor for implementing the Regulations,

Usha K

Deputy Registrar


Section Officer

Scheme and Syllabi for MCom Programme, common to MCom(Regular) and MCom (SDE) w.e.f.

2015-16 academic year onwards.


Copy of the Regulations and Syllabi- appended.

To

The Principals of all affiliated colleges

Controller of Examinations/Director SDE

Copy to: JCE-1/JCE-5/PA to CE/EX/EG-1/PG Branch/Sf/FC

(System Administrator- with a request to upload the Syllabi in University Website)

1


REGULATIONS GOVERNING MASTER OF COMMERCE

PROGRAMME

UNDER CREDIT AND SEMESTER SYSTEM (CSS) FOR AFFILIATED

COLLEGES AND SCHOOL OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

IMPLEMENTED WITH EFFECT FROM 2015 -16 ACADEMIC YEAR

1.0 Title of the programme

This DEGREE shall be called MASTER OF COMMERCE (M.Com.).

2.0 Eligibility for admission

Any candidate who has passed B.Com or BBA (earlier BBS) degree of

University of Calicut or B.Com, BBA or BBM or BBS degree of any other

University or Institute in any state recognized by UGC or AICTE and approved by

University of Calicut with a minimum of 45% marks or equivalent grade is eligible

for admission. OBC and SC/ST students are eligible for relaxation as per

University rules.

3.0 Duration of the programme

The duration of the M.Com programme of study is two years divided into

four semesters.

4.0 Medium of Instruction

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

5.0 Subjects of study

The subjects of study leading to the award of M.Com shall comprise the

following courses:

5.1 Semester One

MC1C1 Business Environment

MC1C2 Quantitative Techniques for Business Decisions

MC1C3 Accounting for Managerial Decisions

MC1C4 IT Applications in Commerce

MC1C5 Organizational theory and Behavior

5.2 Semester Two

MC2C6 International Business

MC2C7 Advanced corporate Accounting

MC2C8 Business Communications

M.C2C9 Management Science

MC2C10 Strategic Management and Corporate Governance

5.3 Semester Three

2

MC3C11 Financial Markets and Institutions

MC3C12 Income tax law and Practice

MC3C13 Research Methodology

MC3E01 Elective I

MC3E02 Elective II

5.4 Semester Four

MC4C14 Financial Derivatives and Risk Management

MC4C15 Cost Management

MC4E03 Elective III

MC4E04 Elective IV

MC4P01 Project Work and Viva Voce

.

5.5 All the above courses can be handled by Commerce faculty.

5.6 There should be industrial visit/study tour in the third semester for a minimum

period of two days and report shall be submitted to the Head of the department

within two weeks of the visit( Applicable only to regular students of affiliated

colleges)

6.0 Attendance

A candidate shall attend a minimum of 75% of the number of classes

actually held for each of the courses in a semester to be eligible for appearing for

examination in that course. If the candidate has shortage of attendance in any

course in any semester, he or she shall not be allowed to appear for any

examination in that semester. However, the University may condone up to 10% of

shortage if the candidate applies for it as laid down in University procedures and if

the Vice Chancellor is satisfied with the reasons cited by the candidate for his

absence in classes.

7.0 Duration of the semester

Each semester shall consist of 16 weeks of study. This does not include the

time used for conducting University examinations.

8.0 Internal Assessment

All courses except project work shall have internal assessment.

8.1 Internal Assessment Marks

As per common regulations for CSS for PG

8.2 Internal assessment components

As per common regulation for CSS for PG

9.0 External Examination: As per common regulations for CSS for PG

10.0 Project Work

3

10.1. During the third and fourth semesters each student shall do a project work

under the guidance of a faculty member.

10.2 The project should be done individually on a topic based on a business

organisation or a social or economic problem relating to the discipline to be

decided by the student under supervising teacher.

10.3 The candidate shall prepare at least two copies of the report: one copy for

submission to the Department and one copy for the student which he/she has

to bring with him/her at the time of viva voce. More copies may be prepared

if the organization or the guide or both ask for one copy each.

10.4 The report shall be printed (or neatly typed) and bound (preferably spiral

bound) with not less than 50 A4 size, 1.5 spaced, pages, Times New Roman

Font, Font Size 13 pt.

10.5 The project report should be submitted to the Head, Department of

Commerce of the College where he/she is doing M.Com at least 10 days

before the last working day of the fourth semester duly certified by the

guide.

10.6 Structure of the report Title page

Certificate from the organization (if the project work is done in an organisation).

Certificate from the supervising teacher.

Declaration of student.

Acknowledgements

Contents

Chapter I: Introduction (Significance of the study, Research problem, objectives of the study, Research methodology etc.)

Chapter II: Review of literature

Chapter III: Organization Profile/Conceptual Frame work

Chapter IV: Data Analysis and Interpretation

Chapter V: Summary, Findings and Recommendations.

Appendix: Questionnaire, specimen copies of forms, other exhibits etc.

Bibliography: Books, journal articles etc. used for the project work.

10.7 Project work shall have the following stages

Problem identification

4

Project draft proposal presentation and discussion

Finalisation of the proposal

Data collection and analysis of data

Reporting writing

Final Project Report submission.

10.8 Evaluation of project report: As per common regulations for CSS for PG.

11.0. Viva Voce

11.1 At the end of fourth semester, each candidate shall attend a comprehensive

viva voce.

11.2 The viva board shall have two external members and one internal member.

11.3 Guideline for evaluation of Project Evaluation and conduct of Viva-voce

(for the students of affiliated colleges)

(a) The Project work may be started in Third Semester.

(b) The Head of the Department shall arrange the internal evaluation of the Project work and upload the mark to the University website.

(c) The internal marks of 20 shall be distributed based on the following criteria:

1 Report Writing 10 Marks

2 Viva-voce 10 marks

(d) The external marks shall be awarded by conducting Via-voce by the Board

consisting of External and Internal examiners constituted for this purpose.

The external examiners shall be appointed by the University. The internal

examiner shall be the Head, Department of Commerce of the College or a

faculty member nominated by him or her from the Department of Commerce.

5

(e) The External marks of 80 shall be distributed based on the following criteria.

1 Relevance of the topic, statement of the problem,

research methodology

15 Marks

2 Presentation, Quality of analysis, Findings and

Conclusions

25 marks

3 Comprehensive Viva voce 40 marks

Total 80 marks

11.4. Guidelines for evaluation of Project Evaluation and conduct of Viva-

voce (for the students of School of Distance Education)

(a) The student shall arrange a supervising teacher for their Project work

themselves and intimate the same to the SDE Centre Co-ordinator (in the

Proforma provided). All regular/retired Commerce Teachers of Govt./ Aided Colleges are competent to be a supervising teacher.

(b) The Project should be submitted to the Centre Co-ordinator within the time fixed by the Co-ordinator.

(c) Internal marks of 20 for the Project work shall be awarded by the Internal

evaluation of the Project work to be arranged by the SDE Centre Co-

ordinator. For the internal evaluation of the Project the following criteria shall be considered:

1 Problem formulation 5 Marks

2 Methodology adopted 5 marks

3 Report writing 10 marks

(d) The external marks of 80 for the project work and viva-voce shall be

awarded by the board of examiners consisting of at lest two examiners

nominated by the Centre Co-ordinator with the approval of the SDE

Director. All regular/retired teachers of Govt./Aided colleges under the

University are competent to be the external examiners for the evaluation of

the project. The external marks shall be distributed on the basis of the

following criteria:

6

1 Relevance of the topic, Statement of the

problem, Research methodology

15 Marks

2 Presentation, Quality of analysis, Findings

and Conclusions

25 Marks

3 Comprehensive Viva-voce 40 Marks

Total 80 Marks

12.0 Scheme of Instruction and Examination

12.1 Semester I

Course

Code Course Title

Hours

Theory

Hours

Pratice

Total

Hours

External

Marks

Internal

Marks

Total

Marks

Total

Credits

MC1C1 Business

Environment 80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC1C2

Quantitative

Techniques

for Business Decisions

80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC1C3

Accounting

for

Managerial

Decisions

80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC1C4

IT

Applications

in Commerce

80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC1C5

Organisational

theory and Behaviour

80 16 96 80 20 100 4

Total in a

Semester 400 80 480 400 100 500 20

7

12.2. Semester II

Course

Code Course Title

Hours

Theory

Hours

Pratice

Total

Hours

External

Marks

Internal

Marks

Total

Marks

Total

Credits

MC2C6 International

Business 80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC2C7

Advanced

Corporate

Accounting

80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC2C8 Business

Communication 80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC2C9 Management

Science 80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC2C10

Strategic

Management

and Corporate Governance

80 16 96 80 20 100 4

Total in a

Semester 400 80 480 400 100 500 20

12.3. Semester III

Course

Code Course Title

Hours

Theory

Hours

Pratice

Total

Hours

External

Marks

Internal

Marks

Total

Marks

Total

Credits

MC3C11

Financial

Markets &

Institutions

80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC3C12

Income Tax

Law and

Practice

80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC3C13 Research

Methodology 80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC3E01 Elective I 80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC3E02 Elective II 80 16 96 80 20 100 4

Total in a

Semester 400 80 480 400 100 500 20

8

12.4. Semester IV

Course

Code Course

Title

Hours

Theory

Hours

Pratice

Total

Hours

External

Marks

Internal

Marks

Total

Marks

Total

Credits

MC4C14

Financial

Derivatives

and Risk Management

80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC4C15 Cost

Management 80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC4E03 Elective III 80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC4E04 Elective IV 80 16 96 80 20 100 4

MC4P01

Project

Work and Viva-Voce

80 16 96 80 20 100 4

Total in a Semester 400 80 480 400 100 500 20

Grand Total 1600 320 1920 1600 400 2000 80

Note:

1. Practice of 16 hours for each course is for the students to prepare for

seminar, visit firms, do and present assignment etc. (for students of affiliated colleges only).

2. For SDE students, the internal marks of 20 marks for all courses (except the

project work) shall be awarded on the basis of a multiple choice question examination based on the syllabus.

13.0 Functional Electives

13.1. Electives in the following optional areas can be chosen by the students

(a) Finance

(b) Marketing (c) Human Resource Management

13.2. Finance:

Course Code Name

MC3E(F)01 Financial Management

MC3E(F)02 Security Analysis and Portfolio Management

MC4E(F)03 Strategic Financial Management

MC4E(F)04 Tax Planning and Management

9

13.3. Marketing:

MC3E(M)01 Advertising and Sales Management

MC3E(M)02 Consumer Behaviour

MC4E(M)03 Supply Chain and Logistics Management MC4E(M)04 Service Marketing

13.4. Human Resource Management:

MC3E(HR)01 Industrial Relations Management

MC3E(HR)02 Managemnt Training and Development

MC4E(HR)03 Performance Management MC4E(HR)04 Compensation Management

14.0 Choosing Optional for specialization

Each candidate shall choose an area as given in section 13 above and the

choice shall be final. This choice should be clearly mentioned in the application filled up for registration of the first semester examinations.

14.1 Changing option after completing the course

Option change will be allowed after the completion of the M.Com

programme, that is after applying for or appearing for all the four semester examinations, only on cancellation of the previous choice of the optional area.

14.2 In that case, marks of the previous option will not be retained. Original mark

lists of the previous optional papers shall be submitted to the Controller of

Examinations along with the application for registration for examinations under the

new option.

14.3 After applying for or appearing for such examinations under the new option,

new mark lists shall be issued with the marks scored in the examinations in the

courses under the new option or if the student fails to appear for examinations under the new option, his or her absence will be mentioned in the mark list.

14.4 Option change after applying for degree certificate

Option change shall not be allowed once a student applies for provisional or

original degree certificate.

14.5 In case a college wants to change its optional area, it shall complete the

process of approval of option change before admission to M.Com of that academic

year starts. That is, option available in a college shall not be changed after admission to M.Com of the year is completed.

14.6 Notwithstanding anything stated in these regulations, a student is always

free to cancel his or her registration for M.Com with a given option and register for

it with a different option. That is, if a student has already registered for M.Com

with Financial Management, he or she can cancel that registration and register

10

afresh for M.Com with any other option along with M.Com regular candidates of

that year. On cancellation, he or she has to write all the four semester examinations

afresh.

15. Ranks

Ranks shall be awarded in each area of specialization. That is, there shall be

one set of ranks for Finance area, another set for Marketing area and a third set of ranks for HRM area.

16. Applicability of this regulations to SDE students:

This common regulation for M.Com Programme in respect of attendance,

duration of semester, Internal assessment components, Study Tour/Industrial visit

etc. are not applicable to SDE students. Instead the rules and regulations issued by

the university from time to time in this regard or in any other matter will be applicable to them.

17. Application of the common regulation for CSS PG

In all other matters where this regulation is silent the provisions of the

common regulation for PG Program under CSS of the University modified from

time to time will applicable.

Note: This set of regulations supersedes all the earlier M.Com regulations and this

set of scheme, syllabi and regulations shall be in force from the 2015-16

M.Com admissions in colleges. University reserves the right to amend these

schemes, regulations and syllabi from time to time without prior notice to

any.

1


Master of Commerce (CSS)

Semester I

MC1C1: BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To familiarise students with the concepts of macro-economic in which a

Business organization operates.

To give an idea about the policies of the government and assess their impact on business.

Module I: Business Environment: Components and significance – Scope –

political, Economic, Social, Technological, Legal, Cultural and Labour

Environment – Trade Unions – Quality Circles – External Factors Influencing

Business Environment – Dimensions of International Business Environment – Challenges. 15 hours

Module II: Structure of Indian Economy: Economic Systems – Economic

Planning – Planning Commission and NITI Ayog – Public Sector – Changing Role

– Relevance – Public Sector Reforms – Public Private Participation – Privatization

and Disinvestments – Fiscal Policy – Monitory Policy – Structure of Union and State Budgets – Sources of Revenue – Management of Public Debt. 20 hours

Module III: Profile of Indian Economy: New Economic and Industrial Policy –

Economic Reforms – Land Reforms – Liberalization – Problems of Growth –

Unemployment – Poverty – Regional Imbalances – SEZ – Social Injustices –

Inflation – Black Money – Lack of Technical Knowledge and Information – Globalization Various Aspects – Consequences 15 hours

Module IV : Foreign Direct Investment and Institutional Investment : Forms –

Policy - FDI in Retail Trade – Problems and Consequences – FEMA –

Multinational Corporations Role and Recent Trends – Problems and Consequences – Competition Law. 10 hours

Module V: International Agreements – An Overview: WTO – WTO and India –

Trade Related Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) – Trade related Investment

Measures (TRIMS) – General Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS) – BRICS –

GAAT – SAARC – ASEAN – OPEC – Intellectual Property Rights – Barriers to Trade – Recent Foreign trade policy. 20 hours

2

References:

1. M. Adhikari: Economic Environment of Business, Sulthan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.

2. Ian Worthington, Chris Britton: Business Environment.

3. Francis Cherunilam: Business Environment, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.

4. Claire Capon: Understanding the Business Environment.

5. K.V.Sivayya and VBM Das: Indian Industrial Economy, Sulthan Chand

Publications, Delhi.

6. David Baron: Business and Its Environment.

7. Panday G.N: Environmental Management, Vikas Publishing House.

8. Raj Agarwal: Business Environment, Excel Publications, New Delhi.

3



Semester I

MC1C2: QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR BUSINESS DECISIONS

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To acquaint students with important quantitative techniques, which enable

sound business decision making

To make students learn the process of applying appropriate quantitative techniques for validating findings and interpreting results.

Module 1: Quantitative Techniques :Qualitative and quantitative approaches –

role in decision making – Significance of quantitative decisions - Inferential

analysis for management – statistical estimation – point estimation – interval

estimation – Confidential Limits – estimating population mean –estimating population proportion – Sample size and its determination. 15 hours

Module 2: Tests of significance : Basic concepts – parametric tests – sampling

distribution – large and small samples – standard error – hypothesis – level of

significance – degree of freedom – central limit theorem – critical value. Parametric

tests – tests for means, tests for proportions, tests for variance – Z test, t test, F test

– Test for Paired Observations – Analysis of Variance – one way and two way classifications. 20 hours

Module 3 : Non-parametric tests : assumptions – Features – Advantages –

Limitations – Chi Square test – contingency tables – tests for goodness of fit – test

for independency – Sign test, Wilcoxon Signed Rank test – Mann Whitney U test – Kruskell Wallis test – Wald Wolfowitz Runs test – Applications in business.

15 hours

Module 4 : Statistical quality control : variations – Assignable variations and

chance variations – process control – product control – control charts for variables

– control for attributes – X chart –R chart – P chart –np chart –C chart – merits of control charts – Applications in business. 15 hours

Module 5: Correlation : types – Coefficient of Correlation – Rank correlation –

Partial and Multiple correlation – Regression – probable error – Software for

Quantitative methods – SPSS – Data Entry – Analysis tools – Descriptive statistics

– Inferential Analysis. 15 hours

4

References:

1. Levin & Rubin, Quantitative Approaches for Management, Pearson

2. Anderson, Quantitative Methods for Business Decisions, Thomson

3. Barry Render, Quantitative Analysis for Management, Prentice Hall of India

4. Dr.N.D.Vohra, Quantitative Techniques for Management

5. Anand Sharma, Quantitative Techniques for decision making, Himalya

Publishing House

6. Gupta & Khanna, Quantitative Techniques for decision making, Prentice

Hall of India.

7. Gupta SP, Statistical Methods, S. Chand & Sons.

5



Semester I

MC1C3: ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGERIAL DECISIONS

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

Enable the students to know the applications of accounting tools, techniques

and concepts in managerial decision making process.

Module 1: Management Accounting: Nature, Scope and functions – Role of

management Accountant – Cost concepts and classifications – Variable costing and

Absorption costing – emerging costing approaches – Life Cycle Costing – Quality

costing – kaizen costing – throughput costing – Back flush costing. Activity based

costing – Introduction – Concepts – cost drivers and cost pools – Steps to develop ABC system – ABC system – ABC system and corporate strategy. 10 hours

Module 2 : Capital investment Process : Investment appraisal methods – Payback

period – ARR – Time adjusted methods – Discounted payback period – Net Present

value method – IRR – Profitability index – Terminal value method – Capital

Rationing – Risk analysis – Decision tree approach – sensitivity analysis – Other statistical methods. 20 hours

Module 3: CVP Analysis and Decision making : Managerial applications of

CVP analysis – Make or Buy decisions – Alternative methods of Production – Buy

or lease decision – Shut down or continue – Repair or replace – Accepting bulk

orders for Idle capacity utilization – Pricing under different situations – Suitable product mix, and Key Factor. 15 hours

Module 4: Cost of capital: Concept – Relevance – Elements of cost of capital –

Cost of equity – Cost of debt – Cost of retained earnings – calculation of weighted

Average Cost of Capital – Cost control and cost reduction techniques – Value Engineering. 15 hours

Module 5: Performance measurement : Financial and non-financial measurement

of performance – Return on investment – Residual income – Economic value added

(EVA) – Concept – measurement – Balanced score card – Concept – objectives –

Multiple score card measures – New horizons in Managerial control – Transfer

pricing – Responsibility accounting – Performance Budgeting – ZBB – Social cost benefit analysis. 20 hours

(Theory 40% and Problems 60%)

6

References:

1. Cost and Management Accounting- Jain and Narang, Kalyani Publishers

2. Management Accounting and Financial Control-S N Maheswari, Sulthan Chand & Sons

3. Management Accounting N.K Kulshrestha,Taxman Publications

4. Management Accounting – Paresh Shah, Oxford Publishers

5. Advanced Management Accounting – Ravi.M Kishore, Taxman

6. Management and Cost accounting – Colin Drury, Cengage Learning

7. Management Accounting – Dr. S.P Gupta, Sahitya Bhavan Publishers

Journals/News papers

Management Accountant

Chartered Financial Analyst

Chartered accountant

Business line

Economic times.

7



Semester I

MC1C4: IT APPLICATIONS IN COMMERCE

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

1. To get an overall idea about various IT applications used in the business

platform especially MIS.

2. To make a practical approach in spreadsheet modeling and database

management System.

3. To get an idea about the integrated business solution package.

Module I: Concept of MIS : Information- Concept of information – Characteristics

of information – quality of information - information overload – System - System

concepts – Types of systems – characteristics of system – control in systems –

system stress – Characteristics of MIS – MIS architecture – Basic structural

concepts – MIS and other academic disciplines – Need for MIS – Strategic role of

MIS - Limitations of MIS – Approaches for system development : System

development life cycle – prototyping – Rapid Application development – End user

development. 20 hours

Module II: Introduction to different Sub-systems: Transaction Processing

Systems, Office Automation Systems - Decision Support Systems - Executive

Information Systems - Artificial intelligence and Expert systems. Functional

Information Systems in Business - Production Information system – Marketing

Information System – Financial Information System – HR Information System.

12 hours

Module III : Spread sheet based application for business : basic concept of

spreadsheet – popular spreadsheet based programmes – Modeling in spreadsheet –

formulation – Logical functions – Financial functions – Statistical analysis –

spreadsheet security – database function in spreadsheet – linking data between

work sheets – developing models for liquidity and profitability analysis by using accounting ratios – Project appraisal using spread sheet – Inventory management.

20 hours

Module IV : Database management technology : Data base concept – Database

terminology – DBMS – Popular DB softwares – Components of DBMS – Database

structure – RDBMS – DBA – Data mining – Data warehousing – Introduction to

database software – Elements and objects of database software – Table creation –

8

Query creation – Form creation – Report Generation – Business application of Database software 20 hours

Module V : Enterprise Resource Planning : Introduction – Features of ERP –

Database and ERP – ERP & BPR – ERP Modules – ERP implementation methodology – Popular ERP Packages. 8 hours

References:

1. Management Information Systems: LM Prasad & Usha Prasad – Sulthan Chand & Sons.

2. Management Information Systems: AK Gupta – S Chand & Co. Ltd.

3. Management Information Systems: James O Breien, George M Marakas & Ramesh Behl-Mc Grawhill

4. Enterprise Resource Planning: Alexis Leon.

9



Semester I

MC1C5: ORGANISATIONAL THEORY AND BEHAVIOR

80 Hours Marks: 80

Module I: Organizational basis for behavior – Contributing disciplines to the

OB field - Need for the knowledge of OB – Need for a contingency approach to the

study of OB – Emerging challenges and opportunities for OB – the organization as

a system – System – System approach to organizational behavior – Managerial

functions – The organization and people. 10 hours

Module II : Basic psychological process – Perception – Factors influencing

perception - Attribution theory – Specific applications in organizations – Learning -

Theories of learning – Using learning concepts for self management – implications

for performance and satisfaction – Remembering – Basic motivational concepts –

Theories of motivation. 20 hours

Module III: Personality – Determinants of personality – Theories of personality –

Major personality attributes influencing organization behavior - Building and

maintaining the self values, attitudes and job satisfaction – Ethical issues in

organizational behavior – Mental and health problems in organizations – role of

counseling. 20 hours

Module IV: Group dynamic and inter group relationships – Characteristics of

workgroup – Basic forces of group behavior – Dynamics of effective operating

groups – Work group behavior and productivity - Team management – Styles and

skills in leadership and communication – Power and politics in organization –

Managing differences and conflicts – managing change – Organization and society.

20 hours

Module V : Organizational development – Techniques of organizational

development Interventions – Grid management – Transactional analysis –

Sensitivity training – Process consultancy - Case discussions and analysis.

10 hours

10

References:

1. Fred Luthans: Organisational behavior

2. Danial C. Fieldman and Hugh Arnold: Managing individual and group

behavior in organization.

3. Henry Mint berg: The structure of organization

4. Edwin Gerlog: Organization theory and design

11



Semester II

MC2C6: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To acquaint the students with various concepts of foreign trade and international business.

Module I: International Business: Meaning and Scope – Theories of

International trade: classical and modern theories – protectionism vs. free trade –

Trade barriers - Tariff and Non-tariff barriers – Terms of trade – Balance of payment – disequilibrium and corrective measures. 15 hours

Module 2: International Business Analysis: Internal and External environment

analysis – Modes of Entry - exporting – Licensing – franchising – contract

manufacturing – Management contracts, turnkey projects – Foreign Direct

Investments: Greenfield Investments – Mergers & Acquisitions – joint ventures – FDIs in emerging markets: recent trends. 15 hours

Module 3: Stages of Internationalization: International, Multinational, Global

and Transnational corporations – strategic orientations – Growth of MNCs -

contributing factors – merits and demerits of MNC – transfer of technology – regulation of MNCs – MNCs in India. 18 hours

Module 4: International Traded Agreements: Bilateral, Plurilateral and

Multilateral agreements – GATT and WTO – WTO agreements - TRIPs, TRIMs,

GATS and AoA – Trade Facilitation Issues – Environmental issues – India and WTO 17 hours

Module 5: Regional Economic Integrations: Meaning and rationale – Forms of

integrations – EU, NAFTA, ASEAN, SAFTA, APEC and other groupings –

International Financial Institutions - IMF, World Bank and ADB – functions and

role in economic development. 15 hours

12

References:

1. Francis Cherunilam, International Business: Text and Cases, PHI, New Delhi.

2. Shyam Shukla, International Business, Excel Books, New Delhi

3. Rakesh Mohan Joshi, International Business, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.

4. P.Subba Rao, International Business, Himalaya Publishing House,

Mumbai.

5. Manab Adhikary, Global Business Management in an International Economic Environment, Macmillan, New Delhi.

6. Charles W L Hill, International Business, Mc Graw Hill, New York.

7. Michael Czinkota, International Business, Wiley, New York.

8. Justin Paul, International Business, PHI, New Delhi.

9. Anant Kumar Sundaram and J, Stewart Black, The International Business Environment: Text and Cases, PHI, New Delhi.

10. John Daniels, Lee Radebaugh, Daniel Sullivan International Business, Pearson Education, New York.

13



Semester II

MC2C7: ADVANCED CORPORATE ACCOUNTING

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

1. To provide theoretical knowledge of International Financial Reporting Standards.

2. To enable the students to gain ability to solve problems relating to Holding Company, Accounts, Liquidation of Companies and various other Accounts.

Module 1: International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS): Introduction –

Meaning – Scope – An Overview of the International Financial Reporting

Standards – IFRS 1 to 13, Role of IASB – Arguments for Global Convergence –

Required disclosure as per IFRS – Achievements of IASB and Obstacles in

Convergence – Difference between IFRS and Indian Accounting Standards – US

GAAP. 15 hours

Module 2 : Accounting for Group companies: Holding Companies – Definition –

Accounts Consolidation – Preparation of Consolidated Balance Sheet – Minority

Interest – Pre – acquisition or Capital Profits – Cost of Control or Goodwill – Inter-

company Balance – Unrealized inter company profits – Revaluation of assets and

liabilities – Bonus Shares – Treatment of Dividend 20 hours

Module 3: Accounting for corporate restructuring - Internal - External - Merges

and Acquisition - Accounting for Liquidation of Companies: Preparation of

Statement of Affairs – Deficiency/Surplus Account – Liquidator's Final Statement

of Account-Receiver's Statement of Accounts. 25 hours

Module 4: Voyage Accounts: Meaning of important terms – Voyage in progress -

Farm Accounts: Characteristics – Advantages and Disadvantages – Final Accounts of Farms. 10 hours

14

Module 5: Human Resources Accounting: Objectives – Methods of Valuation –

Advantages and Disadvantages

Accounting for Price Level Changes: Methods – CPP, CCA and Hybrid.

10 hours


References:

1. Shukla and Grewal: advanced Accounts. (S.Chand & Co Ltd. New Delhi)

2. Jain and Narang: Advanced Accounts (Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana)

3. Sr. K. Paul: Accountancy, Volume-I and II (New Central Book Agency,

Kolkata)

4. R.K., Lele and Jawaharlal; AccountingTheory (Himalaya Publishers)

5. Dr. L.S. Porwal; Accounting Theory (Tata Mc Graw Hill)

6. Robert Anthony, D.F. Hawkins & K.A.Merchant: Accounting Text & Cases.

(Tata Mc GrawHill).

7. Dr.S.N. Maheshwari: Corporate Accounting (Viakas Publishing House Pvt.

Ltd. New Delhi)

8. Dr.Ashok Sehgal & Dr. Deepak Sehgal; Advanced Accounting (Tazmann,

New Delhi).

9. RL Gupta & Radhaswamy Advanced Accountancy. (Sultan Chand and Co.)

10. Anthony, RN & Reece, JS: Accounting Principles, Richard Irwin, Inc.

11. Barker, P & O'hOgartaigh, C:Group Accounts – Theory and Practice,

Oaktree Press 1st Edn.

12. Narayanswamy, R: Financial Accounting - A Managerial Perspective, PHI,

New Delhi,

13. Hani & Mukherjee: Corporate Accounting, TMG, New Delhi.

14. Xavier, g Francis: Fundamentals of Advanced Accounts, Vol-III, TMG,

New Delhi.

15. Financial Reporting Vol. 1 by The Institute of Chartered Accountants of

India.

16. Advanced Accountancy MC Shukla. T.S.Grewal. & S.C. Gupta.

Journals

Chartered Accountant.

15



Semester II

MC2C8: BUSINESS COMMUNICATION

80 Hours Mark: 80

Objectives:

1. To understand the process of business communication

2. To acquire required skills to manage business communication

3. To give awareness about and to help develop the personality of the students.

Module I: Business Communication : meaning – need – process – methods –

written, verbal, non-verbal, visual, telecommunications; types of business

communications – internal and externals, upward and downward, lateral; barriers to

communication – physical, psychological, linguistic, mechanical. 10 hours

Module II: Communication through letters: business letters - layout of letters-

kinds of business letters - characteristics of a good letter, application for

appointment – resume – references; appointment orders: Business enquiries -

offers and quotations - orders execution of orders – cancellation of orders - Letters

of complaint, letters of agency – status enquiries - circulars and circular letters

notices report by individuals - reports by committees- annual report - writing of reports. 20 hours

Module III: Non-verbal communication: Body language - Kinesics, proxemics,

para language -Effective listening- Principles of effective listening: factors

affecting listening - Interviewing skills - appearing in interviews - conducting interviews.

20 hours

Module IV: Self development and communication: development of positive

personal attitudes SWOT analysis - Personality development- concept of

personality, concept of self- perception, personality Types. 15 hours

Module V: Transactional analysis: Games and exercises: Business games, Group

discussions; Mock interviews; Seminars - effective listening exercises - Public

speaking - preparing and delivering effective public speeches - Physical exercises -

Yoga and meditation for personality development. 15 hours

16

References:

1. O'Hair. Dan. Gustav W. Friedrich and Lynda Dee Dixon, Strategic

Communication in Business and the Professions, Pearson Education, Delhi,

2008.

2. Dalmal Fisher. Communications in Organizations, Jaico Publishing House,

Mumbai – 1999.

3. Bovee. Thill & Schatzman, Business Communication Today. Pearson

Education, Delhi, 2004.

4. Shirley Taylor, Model Business Letters, E-mails & other Business

Documents, Pearson Education, Delhi, 2004.

5. Soundararaj, Francis, Speaking and Writing for Effective Business

Communication, Macmillan India Ltd., Delhi, 2007.

6. Rajendra Pal & Korlahalli, Essentials of Business Communication, Sultan

Chand & Sons, New Delhi 2004.

17



Semester II

MC2C9: MANAGEMENT SCIENCE

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To familiarize students with concepts of management science and tools

supporting decision making

To enable students to apply Management science techniques in appropriate decision situations.

Module 1: Management science: basic concepts – Operations Research and

Management science – Models – modeling – important management science techniques – Merits and demerits. 10 hours

Module 2: Linear Programming : basic concepts – formulation of LPP –

solutions to LPP – Graphic method – simplex method – maximizing and minimizing with inequality of constraints – applications in business 15 hours

Module 3: Transportation and Assignment :Transportation – basic concepts –

NWC method – Least Cost method – Vogel's approximations method – stepping

stone method – Modified Distribution method – Assignment - basic concepts – solution for assignment model – Hungarian assignment method. 20 hours

Module 4: Network Analysis : Basic concepts – network – CPM – Calculation of

project duration – critical activities – PERT – Time estimates in PERT – Probability of project completion – applications in business.

Module 5: Queuing theory: basic concepts – Waiting line models –

characteristics of single facility - single line model - Game theory– Traffic in

Orensity – decision making on queues - Applications – softwares.

15 hours

References:

1. Anderson: Introduction to Management Science – Quantitative Technique for Decision making Thomson.

2. Operations Research – Kautiswarup, P.K. Gupta, Manmohan – Sulthan Chand & Sons.

3. Operations Research SD Sharma, Kedar Notes, Ramnath & G.Meerut.

4. OR Techniques for management – VK Kapoor & Sumant Kapoor – Sulthan Chand & Sons.

18



Semester II

MC2C10: STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND CORPORATE

GOVERNANCE

80 Hours Marks: 80

Module 1: Introduction: Basic concepts of strategy and strategic management –

level of strategy – Strategic Management Process – Models of strategic

management – Approaches to strategic decision making – vision – mission – objectives – goals – strategic implications of social and ethical issues. 12 hours

Module 2: Environmental Analysis – Concept of environment – Micro and macro

environment – Environmental Scanning – SWOT analysis – Strategy and Competitive advantage. 12 hours

Module 3 : Strategic Choice: Generating strategic alternatives – Strategic options

at corporate level – Stability, Growth and Defensive Strategies – Strategic Alliance

– SBUs – Portfolio models – BCG matrix – Michael Porter's competitive strategies

– External growth strategies – Merger, acquisition, joint venture and strategic

alliance (with business cases) 24 hours

Module 4: Strategic implementation: Various approaches to implementation of

strategy – Planning and allocating resources – Strategic Control. 12 hours

Module 5: Corporate Governance and Business ethics – issues and concepts of

corporate governance – Corporate governance practices in India – Board

composition and audit committee – Corporate governance in family business and

state owned business – An overview of business ethics – Concept – nature –

relationship between ethics and corporate excellence – social, environmental and economic responsibilities of business. 20 hours

References:

1. Krishna Kumar: Cases in Strategic Management – Managerial Experiences,

Global Business Press (1996) .

2. RM Srivastava: Corporate Strategic Management, Pragati Prakashan.

3. Azhar Kazmi: Strategic Management and Business Policy, Tata McGrawhill Publishers (2010).

4. Stephen Hains: Strategic Thinking, Jaico Publishing House (2008)

19

5. RM Srivastava and Divya Nigan: Corporate Strategic Management, Pragati Prakashan (2000).

6. Frank T Paine and Carl R Anderson: Strategic Management, The Dryden

Press.

7. Charles W.L.Hill, Garethe R. Jones and A Shilling: Strategic Management,

Cengage Learning (2013).

8. Christine A.Mallin: Corporate Governance, Oxford University Press (2007).

9. A.C. Fernando: Business Ethics and Corporate Governance, Pearson Education (2012).

10. Das: Corporate Governance in India, Prentice Hall of India (2008).

11. A.C. Fernando: Corporate Governance – Principles, policies and practices, Pearson Education (2009).

12. UC Mathur: Corporate Governance and Business Ethics: Text and Cases, Mcmillan India ltd (2005).

20



Semester III

MC3C11: FINANCIAL MARKETS AND INSTITUTIONS

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To provide the students a sound information and knowledge of broad framework of financial markets and institutions.

To impart the students an understanding of the inter-linkages and regulatory framework within which the system operates in India

Module 1: An overview of financial markets: Financial markets – Nature –

Functions – money market – Capital markets – Markets for derivatives – Working

of stock exchange in India – NSE, BSE, OTCEI – Role of SEBI – Major international stock markets. 15 hours

Module 2: Interest rates :Theories of Interest rate - determination - Maturity and

structure of interest rates - Term structure of interest rates - Financial repression

and interest rate - The yield curve - interest rates savings - Interest rate and

investment - issues of relative rates and return. 15 hours

Module 3: Commodity markets : MCX, NCDEX, and NMCE – Functions,

administration, regulations and general mechanism – International commodity

markets – Debt market – Types, functions, instruments – Operational mechanism –

Hindrances for the development of debt market. 15 hours

Module 4: Development financial institutions: IDBI, IFCI, NABARD, SFCs,

UTI, SIDBI – Mutual Fund SEBI guidelines on mutual fund – Provident Fund – Pension Funds – PFRDA – Insurance Companies – IRDA. 15 hours

Module 5: Foreign capital flows : forms of foreign capital – FDI and FPI – FIIs

– International financial instruments – ADR, GDR. IDR and Euro bonds – Role of

foreign capital in Indian financial system – Trends in foreign capital inflows to India – Regulatory framework for foreign capital flows. 20 hours

References:

1. LM Bhole and Jitendra Mahakud: Financial Institutions and markets, Tata Mc Grawhill Publishers, (2009).

2. Shshi K Gupta: Nisha Agarwal and Neeti Gupta, Financial Markets And Institutions, Kalyani Publishers, (2013)

3. S Sachdeva: Indian Financial System, Educational Publishers, (2005).

21

4. MY Khan: Financial Services, Tata McGrawhill publishers (2004)

5. Keith Pilbeam: Finance and Financial Markets, Palgrave Macmillan (2005).

6. Gordon and Nataraj: Financial Markets and Services, Himalaya Publishing House.

7. Bharati V Pathak: The Indian Financial System: Markets, Institutions and Services, Dorling Kindersley India (pvt) ltd (2009).

8. Clifford Gomez: Financial Markets, Institutions and Financial services,

Prentice-Hall of India (2008).

22



Semester III

MC3C12: INCOME TAX LAW AND PRACTICE

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To enable students to understand computation of taxable income of various entities and procedure of assessment.

Module 1: Computation of Taxable Income: An overview of different heads of

income – Clubbing of incomes and aggregation of income – Set off and carry

forward of losses – Incomes exempt from taxes – Deductions in computing total

income – Rebates and reliefs of tax. 20 hours

Module 2: Assessment of various entities:

i. Assessment of agricultural Income – Computation of Agricultural Income – Calculation of tax on integration.

ii. Assessment of individuals – Treatment of income received from various

institutions – Applicability of Alternate Minimum Tax (AMT) – Computation of Taxable Income and Tax Liability.

iii. Assessment of Hindu Undivided Family (HUF) – Computation of Total

Income and Tax Liability of HUF. 20 hours

Module 3: Assessment of firms (Including Limited Liability Partnership – LLP):

i. Computation of book profit – Remuneration to partners – Computation of

Total Income and Tax Liability – Applicability of Alternate Minimum Tax on firms.

ii. Assessment of AOP/BOI – Computation of Total Income and Tax liability of AOP/BOI – Application of Alternate Minimum Tax on AOP/BOI

iii. Assessment of Co-operative societies and trusts – Deductions under 80P –

Other deductions – Computation of trusts – Definition – Creation – Types of trusts – Tax exemptions – Accumulation of income – Assessment of trusts.

20 hours

Module 4: Income Tax Authorities : Powers and functions – Provisions of

advance payment of tax – Tax payment – Deduction and collection of tax at source – Recovery of tax – Computer applications in tax management.

23

10 hours

Module 5 : Procedure for assessment of Income Tax: Filing of return of Income –

Voluntary return of income – Statutory obligations for filing of return – Time and

documents for filing of returns – Return of loss – Belated returns – Revised returns

– Defective returns – PAN – Different types of assessment – Self assessment –

Assessment on the basis of return – Best judgment assessment – Regular assessment – Reassessment – Protective assessment. 10 hours

(40% theory and 60% problems)

References:

1. BB Lal, Income Tax, Pearson (Dorling Kindersley (India) Publication,

Latest Edition,

2. Dr. hc. mehrotra and dr.sp. goyal, income tax law and practice sahitya

bhavan publications – latest

3. Ahuja GK & Gupta Ravi, Systematic Approach to Income Tax, Bharat Law House, Latest Edition.

4. BB Lal, Income Tax, Pearson (Dorling Kindersley (India) Publication, Latest Edition.

5. AC Sampat Ayengar, Law of Income Tax, Bharat Law House, Latest Edition.

6. Singhania VK, Income Taxes: Law and Practice, Taxman, Latest Edition.

24



Semester III

MC3C13: RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To acquaint students with process and methodology of research

To enable students to identify research problems, collect and analyse data and present results.

Module 1: Research: Basic concepts - Meaning – Objectives – Types –

Approaches – Significance of research in social sciences – Process of research –

Formulating problem – Literature Survey – Hypothesis – Research Design – Types

– Exploratory, Descriptive, Diagnostic, Experimental – Sample Design –

Collecting, analyzing, testing, interpreting and presenting result.

15 hours

Module 2 : Population Survey and Sample Study: Population & Sample –

Sampling theories - Techniques of sampling – Random and Non random

techniques – Sample Size – Determination of sample size – Sampling Errors – Non

sampling Errors – Factors influencing sample size – Optimum sample size – Case

Study – Pilot Survey. 20 hours

Module 3 : Data collection : collection of Primary Data – Methods of Data

Collection – Observation – Field Survey – Questionnaire - Interview Schedule –

Preparation of Questionnaire – Process of Interviewing – Collection of secondary data – Sources of secondary data. 10 hours

Module 4 : Measurement and Scaling : Variables – Attributes – Process of

measurement – Attitude Measurement – Scaling - Scaling Techniques – Graphic

Rating – Likert – Thurstone – Semantic Differential – Stapel – Dichotomous –

Scales – Types of Scales – Scale Values – Validity and Reliability of Scales –

Errors in measurement. 20 hours

Module 5: Data Processing and Presentation : Field Work – Editing –

Classification – Coding – Tabulation – Summarization – Analysis of data – One

way ANOVA - Univariate, Bivariate and Multi variable methods - Tools of

Analysis – Descriptive Analysis – Inferential analysis – Interpretation –

Presentation – Report Writing - Types of Reports – Contents of Reports – Format of Reports – Documentation Styles. 15 hours

25

References:

1. Tandon BC, Research Methodology in Social Sciences, Chaithanya

Publishing House

2. Whitney FL, Elements of Research, Prentice Hall o India

3. Ferber R, Research Methods in Economics and Business, Macmillan

4. Deming W Edwards, Sample Design in Business Research, John Wiley

5. Bailey Kenneth D, Method of Social Research, Macmillan

6. Krishna Swamy, Methodology of Research in Social Sciencem Prentice Hall

of India.

7. Achalapathi KC, Readings in Research Methodology in Commerce and

Business Management, Himalaya Publishing House.

26



Semester IV

MC4C14: FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES AND RISK MANAGEMENT

80 Hours Marks: 80

Course Objectives:

1. To make the students efficient in the area of derivatives, by giving them the knowledge of basics in options, futures, swaps etc.

Module 1:Introduction to risk management – Meaning and need – importance –

Types of market risk – Risk management issues in business – Financial derivatives

– Meaning – Need – Growth of financial derivatives markets in India – Derivative

markets – Exchange traded financial derivatives for risk management in India –

Participants – Functions – Types of risk management instruments – Forwards –

Futures – Options – Swaps – The regulatory framework of derivative trading in India. 16 hours

Module 2: Future's growth and development t- Difference between forwards and

futures - financial future - Future trading – currency futures – Interest rate futures

Pricing and valuation – of future contacts – Value at risk-Hedging risk – Hedging

with stock index future – types of members and margin system in India-Future trading in stock exchange for risk management. 20 hours

Module 3: Options – meaning – needs and importance-options and futures-

fundamental option strategies-type of option-put-call-trading strategies of risk

instruments-positions in options-stock indices-options in Indian stock market.

16 hours

Module 4 : Risk pricing of options-intrinsic value and time value-pricing at the

expiry of contact-factors affecting option pricing-put-call-parity pricing-models of pricing-binomial option-pricing models-Black Schole's pricing methods.

16 hours

Module 5: Swaps-meaning and definition-development-structure of swap dealing

for risk management-interest rate swaps-forward swaps and swap option contracts-

cancellable and extendable swaps-no generic swaps transactions. Currency swaps - Valuation and pricing of swaps - risk management function of swap transaction.

12 hours

(Only theory, No problems expected)

27

References:

1. Kevin Dowd-Measuring Market risk, second edition.

2. John C Hull-Options futures and other derivatives, seventh edition.

3. Jayanth Rama Varma, Derivatives and Risk Management, TMH, Latest Edition.

4. Mishra, Financial Derivatives, Excel publishers, Latest Edition.

5. SL. Gupta, Financial Derivatives: Theory, concepts and problems, Prentice Hall of India, Latest Edition.

6. SS Kumar, Financial Derivatives, Prentice Hall of India, Latest Edition.

28



Semester IV

MC4C15: COST MANAGEMENT

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

1. To provide students the adequate knowledge of modern cost management

techniques and to enable them apply these techniques for managing a

profitable and competitive enterprises.

Module 1: Cost Management – Nature – Cost management system – Strategic cost

management (SCM) – Components of SCM – Cost concepts in decision making.

Activity Based Costing (ABC) – Need for emergence of ABC – Concept of ABC –

Kaplam and Cooper's approach to ABC-Cost drivers and cost pools –

Characteristics of ABC-Allocation of overheads under ABC-Steps in ABC system-Implementation of ABC and its benefits. 15 hours

Module 2: Modern cost management concepts–Kaizen costing–concepts–

procedures–evaluation–benefits–target costing– nature– methods–steps-life cycle

costing-phases-features-stages and importance-Product Life Cycle costing and cost control. 15 hours

Module 3: Emerging Costing Approaches: Measuring productivity - Productivity

index - Advantages of Higher productivity - Causes of low productivity - Business

Process Reengineering - Concept-Importance - Issues in BPR-Just In Time (JIT) -

Objectives – Features - Implementation and benefits of JIT - Value Chain Analysis

- Internal linkages - Supplier linkages - role of value chain in decision analysis.

15 hours

Module 4: Costing in service sector and process costing : Classification and

collection of costs in operating costing - Transport costing-Boiler house costing-

Power house costing - Hospital costing – Canteen costing – Cinema theatre costing-

Hotel costing - Process costing - process losses and gains – valuation of work in

progress (equivalent production) – Joint products and by products – Accounting for

joint products and by products – Inter – process profits. 20 hours

Module 5: Standard costing and variance analysis: Types of standard-setting

standards – advantages – variance analysis – importance – material, labour,

overhead, sales and profit variance – interpretation of variance - control and

efficiency ratios – investigation of variances – techniques of interpretation of

variances. 15 hours

(40% theory and 60% problems)

29

References:

1. Catherine Stenzel & Joe Stenzel, Essential of Cost Management, John Wiley and sons, Latest Edition.

2. Roman I wiel & Michael W mahr Hand book of Cost Management, John Wiley and Sons, Latest Edition.

3. Lianabel Oliver, The cost management tool box. AMA Publication, Latest

Edition.

4. John K. Shank & Vijay Givindarajan, Strategic Cost management: The new tool for competitive advantage, The free press, Latest Edition.

5. K.P.Gupta, Cost Management: Measuring, monitoring and motivating performance, Global India Publications, Latest Edition.

30



Elective: Finance

Semester: III

MC3 E (F) 01 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To acquaint the students with the basic analytical techniques and methods of

financial management of business organization.

To provide the students the exposure to certain advanced analytical techniques that are used for taking financial policy decisions.

Module 1: Foundation of Finance: Goals and functions of finance – Legal –

Operating and Tax environment for financial decisions – Sources of short term

finance – Sources of long term finance – Retained earnings – Common stock and

right issues – ADRs and GDRs – Long term debt – Preferred stock – Convertible securities – Warrants and exchangeable – ECBs – FCCBs – Lease finance.

16 hours

Module II: Working Capital Management: Working Capital – meaning – concept

and cycle – Working capital management strategy – Estimation of working capital

– Mathematical and simulation models of working capital decisions – Management

of cash and marketable securities – Cash management techniques – Lock box

system, Concentration baking – Methods of Inventories – Techniques of inventory

management – Management of receivables – Techniques of receivable

management. 24 hours

Module III: Cost of Capital: Concept – significance – Computation of cost of

Debt, Preference capital, Equity capital and Retained Earnings – Opportunity cost of capital – Marginal cost of capital – WACC – Capital Asset Pricing Model.

12 hours

Module IV: Capital Structure: Leverage Analysis – Operating, Financial &

Combined leverage – EBIT – EPS Analysis – Financial Breakeven – Indifference

Point – Capital Structure Theories – Optimum capital Structure – NI approach, NOI

approach, Traditional approach & Modigliani Miller approach – Arbitrage process – Determinants of Capital Structure. 16 hours

31

Module V : Dividend policy : Mechanics and practices of dividend payment –

factors affecting dividend policy – legal framework of payment of dividend –

dividend theories – determinants of dividend policy and some case studies.

12 hours

(Theory 50%, Problems 50%)

References:

1. Soloman, Ezra, Theory of Financial Management, Columbia Press (Latest

Edition)

2. James C Van Horne. Financial Management and Policy Prentice Hall of

India (Latest Edition)

3. Weston, J. Fred and Brigham, Eugne F. Managerial Finance, Dryden Press

(Latest Edition)

4. Prasanna Chandra. Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill (Latest

Edition)

5. Khan, M.Y. and P.K. Jain. Financial Manager, Tata McGraw Hill (Latest

Edition).

6. Pandey, I.M. Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill (Latest Edition)

7. Ravi M. Kishore. Financial Management, Taxmann (Latest Edition)

8. Brigham, Ehrhavdt. Financial Management, Cengage Learning India

Private Ltd. New Delhi – 110082 (Latest Edition)

9. Ross S.A., R.W. Westerfield and J. Jaffe, Corporate Finance, McGraw Hill

(Latest Edition)

10. Anderson, Sweeney and Williams. An Introduction to Management

Science, Cengage Learning India Private Ltd. New Deli – 110092 (Latest

Edition)

11. Brigham and Houston. Fundamentals of Financial Management, Cengage

Learning India Private Ltd., New Delhi – 110091 (Latest Edition)

12. Brealey R.A. and S.C. Myers. Principles of Corporate Finance, McGraw

Hill, (Latest Edition)

13. Sudhirbhat. Financial Management. Excel Book (Latest Edition)

14. Damodaran, A. "Corporate Finance : Theory and Practice". John Wiley &

Sons (Latest Edition)

Journals

Finance India

Applied Finance, ICFA

Journal of Finance

Journal of Financial Economics

Chartered Financial Analyst

Financial Dailies

32



Elective: Finance

Semester: III

MC3 E (F) 2: SECURITY ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

80 Hours Marks:80

Objectives:

1. To establish a conceptual framework for the study of security analysis and

portfolio management. This course will provide the students the ability to understand and utilize the skill of optimizing returns.

Module I: Investments: Meaning and concept – Investment objectives – various

asset classes – factors in investment decisions- Investment process – concept of risk

and return – sources of risk – Measurement of risk and return – Diversification and hedging – ethical investing. 13 hours

Module II: Bond Investment analysis: Types of bonds – International bonds –

Bond yields – Yield to Maturity (YTM) – risk analysis is bonds – Bond value

theorem – Bond immunization strategies. 15 hours

Module III: Equity Analysis: Approaches to equity analysis – Fundamental

analysis – Economy, Industry and Company (EIC) analysis – Equity valuation

models – Dividend Discount Models (DDM) and Price Earnings Ratio (PER)

models – Technical analysis – Dow theory – Chart and Chart Patterns – Market and

Mathematical Indicators – Efficient Market Hypothesis (EMH) and Random Walk

theory – Tests of market efficiency – Critique of Investor rationality – Behavioural Finance. 20 hours

Module IV: Portfolio analysis and selection: Risk return analysis of investment

portfolio – Individual and Interactive risks – measurement of portfolio risks – Risks

tolerance and asset allocation – optimal portfolio – portfolio selection models-

Markowtiz model – Sharpe single index model – Capital Asset Pricing Model

(CAPM) – Capital Market Line (CML) and Security Market Line (SML) – Market

anomalies : calendar effect, size effect and market overreaction – Arbitrage Pricing Theory (APT) – Multifactor asset pricing Models. 20 hours

Module V: Portfolio Management: Active and Passive investment strategies –

Value and growth investing, contrarian strategies – index investing and tracking

efficiency, Portfolio evaluation- Sharpe, Treynor and Jensen measures, Fama's Decomposition Index – Portfolio revision. 12 hours

33

References:

1. Bodie, Zvi, Kane Alex and Alan, J. Marcus, Investments, McGraw Hill.

2. Bhalla, V.K. Investment Management, S. Chand & Company Ltd.

3. Chandra, P. Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, Tata McGraw Hill.

4. Elton, E. and Gurber, M. Modern Portfolio Theory and Investment Analysis, John Wiley and Sons

5. Fischer, Donald E. and Ronald J. Jordan, Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, PHI Learning.

6. Preeti Singh, Investment Management, Himalaya Publishers.

7. Sharpe William, F. and Bailey Jeffery V. Alexander Gordon, J. Investments,

PHI Learning.

8. S.Kevin, Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, PHI Learning

9. Stephen Ross and R. Westerfield, Corporate Finance, McGraw-Hill.

10. Vishwanath, R and Krishna Murthi,C., Investment Management, Springer.

11. V.A. Avadhani, Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, Himalaya

Publishers.

12. Fabozzi, Frank, J. Investment Management, PHI learning.

34



Elective: Finance

Semester: IV

MC4 E (F) 03: STRATEGIC FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

80 Hours Marks: 80

Course Objective

To build an understanding among students about the concepts, vital tools

and techniques used for financial decision making by a business firm.

Module I: Financial goals and strategy : Shareholder value creation (SCV) –

Market Value Added (MVA) – Market – to – Book Value (M.BV) – Economic

Value Added (EVA) – managerial implications of shareholder value creation –

Growth ratios – Internal Growth Rate (IGR) – Sustainable Growth Rate (SGR)

12 hours

Module II: Financial strategy for capital structure: Leverage effect and

shareholders risk – Capital structure planning and policy – Financial options and the value of the firm – Dividend policy and the value of the firm. 20 hours

Module III: Lease Financial strategy: Leasing concept – Types – Cash flow

consequences of lease – Financial evaluation of leasing - Lessee's point of view –

leasing versus buying – NPV method – Equivalent loan method – Evaluation from lesser's point of view – NPV and IRR methods. 16 hours

Module IV: Merger strategy : Theories of Merger – Horizontal, vertical and

conglomerate mergers – Merger procedure – Valuation of firm – Financial impact

of merger – Merger and dilution effect on EPS – Merger and dilution effect on

business control. 16 hours

Module V: Take over strategy : Types of takeovers – Negotiated and hostile bids –

Take over procedures – Takeover defenses – Takeover regulations of SEBI – Distress restructuring strategy – Sell offs – Spin offs – Leveraged buy outs

16 hours

(Theory 50% problem 50%)

35

References:

1. Vanhorne, James C: Financial Management and policy, Pearson, New Delhi, (Latest edition)

2. Brighham and Ehrhardt: Financial Management, Thomson India, (Latest edition)

3. Chandra, Prasana: Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,

(Latest edition)

4. Khan, MY and James PK: Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi, (Latest edition)

5. Pandey IM: Financial Management, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, (Latest edition)

6. Gitman, LJ: Principles of Managerial Finance, Harper and Row (Latest edition)

7. Hampton: Financial decision making, Concepts, problems and cases,

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi (Latest edition)

8. Brealey and Meyers: Principles of Corporate Finance, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi (Latest edition)

36



Elective: Finance

Semester: IV

MC4E (F) 04: TAX PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

80 Hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To acquaint the students with theoretical and practical knowledge of tax

planning and management techniques.

To familiarize the students with major and latest provisions of the India tax

laws and related judicial pronouncements pertaining to various assesses with

a view to derive maximum possible tax benefits admissible under the law.

Module 1: Introduction to tax planning and management: Concept of tax planning

and management – Tax evasions and tax avoidance-Need and significance of tax planning and management-Tax Planning in respect of residential status. 10 hours

Module 2: Assessment of companies: Residential status and incidence of tax-

Special Provisions applicable to assessment of total income of companies-

Deductions available to corporate assesses – Computation of taxable income of

companies and determination of corporate tax liability – Minimum Alternate Tax-

Tax on distributed profit of domestic companies- Tax on income distributed to unit holders-Security Transaction Tax – Tonnage Tax. 25 hours

Module 3: Tax Planning: Individuals – Tax Planning with reference to all five

heads of income for individuals – Salary, House Property, Profit from business and

profession, Capital Gains and Income from other sources – Tax planning with

respect to deductions, exemptions, Rebate, Relief, Concession and incentives

(Problems focused on tax planning). 20 hours

Module 4: Tax planning and managerial decisions: Tax planning in respect of

make or buy, own or lease, repair or replace, export or domestic sales, shut down or

continue, expand or contract, amalgamate or demerger, invest or disinvest-

Financial Management decisions, Capital Structure, dividend policy and bonus

shares. 15 hours

Module 5: Tax planning under various circumstances: Tax planning while setting

up of a business-with reference to location, nature and form of organizations-Tax

planning related to Special Economic Zones (SEZ), Export Processing Zones (EPZ)

37

and Export Oriented Units (EOUs) – Infrastructure sector and background areas –

Tax incentives for exporters. 10 hours

(50% theory and 50% problem)

References:

1. VK Singhania, Direct Tax’s Planning and Management, Taxman, Latest

Edition.

2. VS Sundaram, Commentaries on the Law of Income Tax in India, Pearson Law Publishers, Latest Edition.

3. AC Sampat Ayengar, Law of Income Tax, Bharat Law House, Latest Edition.

4. Bhagmati Prasad, Direct Taxes Laws Practice, Wishwa Prakashan, Latest Edition.

5. Kaushal Kumar Agarwal, Direct Tax Planning and Management, Atlantic

Publishers, Latest Edition.

38



Elective: Human Resource Management

Semester: III

MC3E (HR) 01: INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS MANAGEMENT

80 hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To familiarize the students to the tasks of industrial relations.

To familiarize them with current industrial relations practice.

Module 1: Industrial relations perspectives-Industrial relations and the emerging

socio-economic scenario – Industrial relations and the state-legal framework of

Industrial relations-Industrial conflicts and disputes-salient features of Industrial

Employment (standing orders) Act 1946. 15 hours

Module 2: Industrial relations and trade unions-Role and future of trade unions-

Trade union and the employees-Industrial unrest-Trade union and the management-

Plant level labour relations-works committees-Joint management committees.

20 hours

Module 3: Discipline and grievance Management-Negotiations and collective

settlements-Participative management and co-ownership-Productivity bargaining

and gain sharing. 15 hours

Module 4: Employee empowerment and quality management-Quality Circles-

Employee suggestion schemes-Industrial relations and technology management.

15 hours

Module 5: Role of state in industrial relations- Labour office-Labor courts and

industrial tribunals-Conciliation and mediation. 15 hours

References:

1. Jerome Joseph, Industrial Relations: Towards a theory of negotiated

connectedness, Response Books, Latest Edition.

2. CS Venkataratnam, Globalization and labor management relations, Sage

publications, Latest Edition.

3. PC Tripathi, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, Sultan Chand

& Sons, Latest Edition.

4. Dr.R Venkatapathy and Assissi Menachery, Industrial Relations and labor

legislations, Adithya Publishers, Latest Edition.

5. CB Marmoria, Dynamics of Industrial Relations in India, Vikas Publishing

House, Latest Edition.

39



Elective: Human Resource Management

Semester: III

MC3E (HR) 02: MANAGEMENT TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT

80 hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To expose the students to the concepts and practices of training and

development in the modern organizational settings.

Module 1:Training and development: Strategies for effective training-

Determination of training objectives-Learning and skill acquisition-Organizational

analysis for training-Philosophies of training-Learning and training-Designing a

training programme-Training and education-Theories and principles of training-Factors contributing to effectiveness of training. 20 hours

Module 2: Identification of training needs: Scanning the environment for training

areas-Perspective for training design-Steps in training design-Evaluation of a

training programme-principles of evaluation-Criteria for evaluation-Techniques of evaluation-Return on investment in training. 15 hours

Module 3: Training methods and techniques: Layout for training sessions-Training

aids-Selection of training aids-Training climate-Elements of training climate-

Training for creativity and problem solving-Cost benefit analysis-Training for management change. 15 hours

Module 4: Learning-Dimensions of learning: Basic principles of learning-

Learning process-Types of learning-Learning theories-Organizational analysis for

training-Technology based training -Training for Total Quality Management-

Attitudinal Training methods. 15 hours

Module 5: Training administration-Training Budget-Competency models and

mapping-Implementation of training-Emerging trends in training and development:

New perspectives in training-Cross cultural training, E learning and knowledge Management. 15 hours

References:

1. Agochia & Devendra, Every Trainers handbook, New Delhi, Sage Publications.

40

2. DI Simone RL and Harris DM, Human resource development, Thomson learning.

3. Sahu RK, Training for development, Excel books, New Delhi.

4. Blanchard P Nick and James W Thacker, Effective training: Systems, strategies and practices, Pearson Education, New Delhi.

41



Elective – Human Resource Management

Semester: IV

MC4E (HR) 03: PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT

80 hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To gain an in depth understanding of performance management

To gain practical knowledge in setting up team management, target setting

and achievement.

Module 1: Concepts of organizational performance: Vision and mission,

competencies and behaviors for effective performance-establishing the skill

knowledge and attitude required for the organization's future recruiting and developing against the agreed competencies. 15 hours

Module 2: Performance standards and targets: Clarifying, communicating and

reviewing organizational goals and targets-linking group and individual

responsibilities to organizational performance. 15 hours

Module 3: Performance management: Meaning and importance of managerial

performance, critical success factors analysis for managerial performance-

management styles and performance-performance appraisal-instruments for

performance appraisal-evaluation of managerial performance-setting performance standards-measurement of performance. 20 hours

Module 4: Management style-relationship orientation-task orientation-working in

teams-team development-coaching and training-leadership skills and motivation-

organizational culture and managerial performance-developing appropriate culture

for superior performance. 15 hours

Module 5: Indicators of performance for different levels of Management-tracking

performance-rewards and performance-defining appropriate reward system-ensuring the link between performance and rewards. 15 hours

References:

1. Robert bacal-performance management-Tata McGrawhill.

2. Armstrong M & Baron A, Performance Management and Development, Jaico Publishing House, Latest Edition.

42

3. Armstrong M, Performance management: Key strategies and practical guidelines, Kogan Page, Latest Edition.

4. Bagchi S N, Performance management, Cengage Learning India, Latest

Edition.

5. Bhattachrya D K, Performance Management systems and strategies, Pearson

Education, Latest Edition.

43

(80 Hours)



Elective – Human Resource Management

Semester IV

MC4E (HR) 04: COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT

80 hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To familiarize the students with relevant aspects of compensation.

To familiarize the students to design effective compensation policies.

Module 1: Importance of compensation-difference between wage and

compensation-different wages system-components of compensation-direct-indirect theories of compensation-equality theory-expectancy theory. 15 hours

Module 2: Compensation management-definition-need-objectives-types of base-

pay system-job based-skill/knowledge based-features-evaluation and suitability-

factors determining compensation-internal and external fringe benefits. 20 hours

Module 3: Pricing of jobs-steps-job analysis-quantitative and non quantitative

methods-market pricing-job evaluation-variable pay incentives-individual merit-team incentives-organizational plans-pay for performance. 15 hours

Module 4: Government wage policy in India-payment of wages act 1936-

industrial disputes act 1947-minimum wages act 1948-equal remuneration act-

1976-payment of bonus act 1965-wages board. 15 hours

Module 5: Key issues in compensation management-strategic approaches to make compensation systems more effective in changed global environment. 15 hours

References:

1. Belchor, David W, Compensation Administration, Prentice Hall, Latest

Edition.

2. Henderson R I, Compensation Management in a knowledge based world,

Pearson Education, Latest Edition.

3. Milkovich G: Newmann J and Ratnam C.D.V, Compensation, Tata

McGrawhill, Special Indian Edition.

44

4. Armstrong M & Murlis H, Reward Management: A handbook of salary

administration, London: Kegan Paul, Latest edition.

5. Sharma J P, An easy approach to company and compensation laws, Ane

books Pvt. Ltd; Latest edition.

45



Elective – Marketing

Semester III

MC3E (M) 01: ADVERTISING AND SALES MANAGEMENT

80 hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To enable the students to develop in depth understanding of the modern

concepts and latest techniques of advertising, personal selling and sale force

management.

Module1: Advertising: Nature and importance-Advertising programme-

Classification of advertising-Advertising management process, an overview;

Determining target audience- Advertising objectives and positioning-Advertising

budget decisions-Advertising message decisions-Determining advertising message-

Developing advertising copy-Headline main copy, logo, illustrations, appeal, layout-Cognitive dissonance and advertising-Creativity in advertising.

20 hours

Module 2: Media planning and organization of advertising operations: Types of

media-Merits and limitations of different media-Advertising through internet-

Media selection-Media scheduling-Organization of advertising operations-In house

vs. advertising agency arrangements-Managing advertising agency relations-Social

and regulatory aspects of advertising-Recent developments and issues in advertising-Global advertising. 15 hours

Module 3: Fundamentals of personal selling: Nature and importance of selling-

Types of selling-Personal selling, salesmanship and sales management-Process of

effective selling-Strategic sales management-Ethical and legal aspects of selling.

15 hours

Module 4: Sales planning and sales force Management: Setting personal selling

objectives-Market analysis and sales forecasting-Sales budget, sales territory-Sales

quota-Sales force management-Recruitment and selection-Training and

developments-Motivating, supervising and compensating sales personnel-

Evaluation of sales personnel. 15 hours

Module 5: Advertising research: Advertising research objectives-Deceptive

advertising-Determining deception using advertising research-Product appeal-Copy

46

testing methods and measures-Measuring the effectiveness of the promotional

program, market testing, testing via internet, pre testing, post testing, laboratory

test, field test, PACT (Positioning Advertising Copy Testing). 15 hours

References:

1. Aaker, David A, Rajeev Batra and John G. Mayers, Advertising

Management, Prentice Hall of India, Latest Edition.

2. Belch. George and Michael Belch, Adversising and Promotion: An integrated marketing communications perspective, McGraw Hill, 6th Ed.

3. Madel and Maurice, Advertising, Prentice Hall of India, Latest Edition.

4. Still, Richard, R. Edward W. Cundiff and Norman A.P. Govoni, Sales

Management Decisions, Stratgies and cases, Prentice Hall of India, Latest Edition.

5. Anderson B. Robert, Professional Selling, Prentice-Hall Inc.

6. Spiro, Rosann, William J. Stanton and Greg Richo, Management of a Sales

Force, McGraw Hill/Irwin, Latest edition.

7. Pederson Carlton A, Miburn D. Wright, Barton A, Weitz, Selling Principles and Methods, Richard D. Irwin, Illinois, Latest edition

47



Elective - Marketing

Semester III

MC3E (M) 02: CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR

80 hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To help students develop basic understanding of the concepts and theories of

consumer behaviour and their applications in marketing decision making.

Module 1: Consumer behavior: Importance and nature of consumer behaviour-

types of consumers and their role-application of consumer behaviour principles to

strategic marketing-role of consumer behaviour in marketing - market segmentation and consumer behaviour 10 hours

Module 2: Consumer as an individual: Consumer needs and motivation-

personality and consumer behaviour-psychographics, consumer perception, attitude

formation and change-measurement of consumer attitudes-learning-consumer in a

social and cultural settings-group dynamics and consumer reference graphis-family,

social class and consumer behaviour - The influence of culture on consumer

behaviour-sub cultural and cross cultural consumer analysis-consumer movement -

CRM. 15 hours

Module 3: Consumer decision making - Models of consumers-four views of

consumer decision making-economic, passive, cognitive, emotional-a simple view

of consumer decision making-Howard shet model-Engle, Kollat and Blackwell

model-case studies with reference to India/implications of the models on marketing

decisions. 15 hours

Module 4: Purchase decision process: high and low involvement-pre purchase and

post purchase behaviour-online purchase decision process-diffusion of innovation

across nations/cultures-managing dissonance-cross cultural consumer research-

globalization of consumer markets-emerging issues-case studies 15 hours

Module 5: Consumer research - Nature of consumer research-areas of consumer

research-methods or techniques for studying consumer behaviour- behaviour and

motivational research techniques-measuring customer satisfaction-designing

customer satisfaction surveys and analyzing survey results-measuring service

quality-SERVQUAL and SERVPERF techniques. 25 hours

48

Suggested Readings

1. Schiffman L.G.and Kanuk .L.L, Consumer Behaviour, prentice Hall of

India, 9th Edition.

2. Assel Henry, Consumer Behaviour, Biztantra, Latest Edition.

3. Seth J.N. & Mittal B, Customer Behaviour-A Managerial Perspective,

Thomson South-Western, Latest Edition.

4. Hawkins D.I. & Roger J.B. and Kenneth A.C, Consumer Behavior-Building

Marketing Strategy, Irwin McGraw-Hill, Latest Edition.

5. Engel J.F Roser D Blackwall and Paul W. Miniard, Consumer Behaviour,

Cengage Learning, Latest Edition.

6. Peter J. Paul and Jerry C. Olson, Consumer Behaviour and Marketing

Strategy, McGraw Hill, Latest Edition.

7. Assael H, Consumer Behaviour and Marketing ACtion, Cengage Learning,

Latest Edition.

8. Schroeder, R.G., Operations Management-Contemporary Concepts and

Cases, McGraw-hill, Latest edition.

9. Thompkins and Harmelings, Distribution Management Handbook, McGraw-

Hill, Latest Edition.

10. Stem Al Ansary, Marketing channel, Prentice Hall of India, Latest Edition.

11. K.K.Khanna, Physical Distribution Management, Himalaya Publishing House, Latest Edition.

49




Semester IV

MC4 E (M) 03: SUPPLY CHAIN AND LOGISTICS MANGAEMENT

80 hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

To equip the students with good knowledge on logistics and supply chain management and relate these areas with the organization and business needs.

Module 1: Supply chain management: Introduction and development-nature and

concept importance of supply chain, value chain-components of supply chain-need

for supply chain understanding the supply chain management-participants in supply

chain-importance of supply chain in present market condition. 15 hours

Module 2: Role of manager in supply chain: supply chain performance drivers-key

enablers in supply chain improvement-interrelation between enablers and level of supply chain improvement-systems and values of supply chain. 20 hours

Module 3: Aligning the supply chain with business strategy: SCOR model-

outsourcing and 3 PLs-Fourth party-logistics-Bullwhip effect and supply chain-

supply chain relationship conflict resolution strategies-global logistics-legal aspects of international logistics. 15 hours

Module 4: Logistics Management: Origin and definition-types of logistics-

logistics management-warehouse management-automation and outsourcing-

customer service and logistics management-concepts in logistics, physical

distribution. 10 hours

Module 5: Types of inventory control: Demand forecasting-warehousing and

store management-routing-transportation management-some commercial aspects in

distribution management-distribution channel management-Distribution Resource

Planning (DRP)-recent trends in logistics. 20 hours

50

References:

1. Rushton A Oxley J and Croucher P, Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management, Kogan Page, Latest Edition.

2. Simchi-Levi, David, Kamisnsky, Philip, and Simchi-Levi, Edith, Designing

and Managing the Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies and Case Studies,

Irwin/McGraw Hill, Latest Edition.

3. Christopher Martin, Logistics and Supply Chain Managment Creating Value adding Networks, Pearson Education, Latest Edition.

4. Ballou R.H, Business Logistic Management, Prentice Hall, Latest Edition.

5. Bowersox D.J David J and Cooper, Supply Chain Logistic Management, Prentice Hall, Latest Edition.

51




Semester: 4

MC4 E (M) 04: SERVICE MARKETING

80 hours Marks: 80

Objectives:

1. To develop an understanding of services and service marketing with

emphasis on various aspects of service marketing

Module 1: Introduction: Service-definition-classification of service-service

marketing-definition-objectives-need and importance-emergence and reasons for

growth of service sector in India-environment of service marketing - PESTEL frame work-challenges of service marketing. 15 hours

Module 2: Service marketing mix-role of Service marketing mix-service product-

pricing of services - service promotion and communication mix-service channels

and distributions - internal and external customers-physical evidence and process-service mapping-service blueprinting. 16 hours

Module 3: Service marketing segmentation-approaches-targeting-positioning-

positioning maps-service encounter-service marketing profitability and productivity-relationship marketing in services. 18 hours

Module 4: Application of service marketing-hospitability-travel and tourism-

financial services-banking and insurance-health care-entertainment marketing-

education-public utility service-advertising agency-professional service-

consultancy and advertising agency-web market - green marketing.

16 hours

Module 5: Service models-service triangle management models-the molecular and

servuction model-service triangle marketing model-SERVQUAL model-six market

model-service quality-definition-dimensions of service quality-service quality gap.

15 hours

References:

a. Ziethaml VA and Bitner MJ, Service Marketing, Tata McGraw Hill, Latest

Edition.

b. Hellen W, service Marketing, Macmillan India Ltd, Latest Edition.

c. Lovelock C.H and Wirtz H, Service Marketing: People Technology

Strategy, Pearson Education, Latest Edition.

52

d. Hoffman K.D.J and Bateson E.G. Essentials of Service Marketing: Concepts, Strategies and Cases, Thomson South Western, Latest Edition.

e. Kurtz D.L and Clow K.E, Service Marketing, Biztantra, Latest Edition.

f. Donald Cowell, the Marketing of Services, Heinemann, Latest Edition.

g. Lovelock C.H. and Lauren W, Principles of Service Marketing and Management, Prentice Hall of India, Latest Edition.

U.O.No. ___________ Dated, Calicut University.P.O, 07.08.2017

File Ref.No.4248/GA - IV - J2/2012/CU


Abstract

BSc in Psychology-CUCBCSS UG 2014-Scheme and Syllabus- Approved-Implemented-w.e.f 2017 Admissions-

Orders issued.

G & A - IV - J

Read:-1. U.O. No. 3797/2013/CU, dated 07.09.2013 (CBCSS UG Modified Regulations)

(File.ref.no. 1372/GA IV-J-SO/2013/CU).

2. U.O. No. 5180/2014/Admn, dated 29.05.2014 (CBCSS UG Revised Regulations)

(File.ref.no. 13725/GA-IV-J-SO/2013/CU).

3. Item no. 1 of the minutes of the meeting of the Board of Studies in Psychology UG

held on 13.03.2017

4. Item No. I in the minutes of the meeting of Faculty of Science held on 10.07.2017

5. Item No. II(H) in the minutes of the LXXVI meeting of Academic Council held on

17.07.2017

6. Orders of the Vice Chancellor in the file No. 191466/GA IV/J1/2013/CU dated

27.07.2017

ORDER

The Modified Regulations of Choice Based Credit Semester System for UG Curriculum w.e.f 2014

was implemented under the University of Calicut vide paper read as (1).

The Revised CUCBCSS UG Regulations has been implemented w.e.f 2014 admission, for all

UG programme under CUCBCSS in the University, vide paper read as (2).

The Board of Studies in Psychology UG has approved the Scheme and Syllabus of Core and

___________

___________


Section Officer

The Board of Studies in Psychology UG has approved the Scheme and Syllabus of Core and

Complementary courses of BSc Programme in Psychology-Scheme I and II w.e.f

2017 Admissions vide paper read as (3).

Faculty of Science vide paper read as (4) and Academic Council vide paper read as

(5), has approved the recommendations of the Board. The Hon'ble Vice Chancellor has ordered to implement the resolutions of the Faculty of Sciencevide paper read as (6).

Sanction has, therefore, been accorded for implementing the Scheme and Syllabus of Core and

Complementary courses of BSc Programme in Psychology-Scheme I and II w.e.f 2017 Admissions

under CUCBCSS UG 2014, in the University, w.e.f 2017 Admissions.


(The syllabus is available in the website: universityofcalicut.info)

To

1. All Affiliated Colleges/SDE/Dept.s/Institutions under University of Calicut.

2. The Controller of Examinations, University of Calicut.

3. The Director SDE.

Board of studies in Psychology 1

BSc Psychology Curriculum

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SEMESTER SYSTEM FOR

UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAMME (CUCBCSSUG)


REVISED CURRICULUM FOR BSC PSYCHOLOGY

(2017-18 ADMISSION ONWARDS)

Under Calicut University Regulations for Choice Based Credit Semester System For Under-Graduate Curriculum



BOARD OF STUDIES IN PSYCHOLOGY(UG)

Sl.No

NAME DESIGNATION AND OFFICIAL ADDRESS

1

Smt.Sinto P Anto (Chairman)

Assistant Professor Department of Psychology Vimala college, Thrissur

2

Dr. Nice Mary Assistant Professor Department of Psychology Prajyoti Niketan College,Pudukad

3

Dr. Arun Kumar Assistant Professor Department of Psychology Govt. College for Teacher Education, Calicut

4

Dr. Jaya . A.T. Assistant Professor Department of Psychology Prajyoti Niketan College,Pudukad

5

Rahul. V.R. Assistant Professor Department of Psychology Govt. Training College, Thycaud, Thiruvananthapuram

6

Smt. Sujeesha. T.G. Assistant Professor Department of Psychology Sri C Achutha Menon Government College , Kuttanellur, Thrissur

7 Shiju Joseph Assistant Professor Department of Psychology Govt. Women’s College, Thiruvananthapuram

8 Dr. Vinod Kumar Assistant Professor Dept. of Behavioral Sciences Kannur University

9 Smt. Nisha.K. Assistant Professor Department of Psychology Farook College, Kozhikode

10 Dr. Milu Maria Anto Assistant Professor Department of Psychology Prajyoti Niketan College,Pudukad

11 Dr. Baby Shari.P.A (PG Board Chairman)

Associate Professor Department of Psychology University of Calicut



ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The Board would like to acknowledge the contributions of Dr. Varghese Paul.K., (Associate Professor, Dept. of Psychology, Prajyoti Niketan college, Pudukad), Dr. Monsy Edward, (Associate Professor, Dept. of Psychology, Prajyoti Niketan college, Pudukad), Dr. Sukanya. B. Menon (Assistant Professor, Dept. of Psychology, Prajyoti Niketan College, Pudukad), Dr.Soumya Starlet (Assistant Professor, Dept. of Psychology, Prajyoti Niketan College, Pudukad), Dr. Aneesh. V. Appu (Assistant Professor, Dept. of Psychology, Christ College, Irinjalakuda) and Jobin.A. (Assistant professor on contract, Govt.College,Chittur).



Course Structure of BSc Psychology

SEMESTER I

Sl.no Course code Course title Total hours Hours/week Credits Marks Int Ext Total

1 PSY1A01 Common Course I-English

72 4 4 20 80 100

2 PSY1A02 Common Course II-English

90 5 3 20 80 100

3 PSY1A07 Common Course III-Language other than English

72 4 4 20 80 100

4 PSY1B01 Basic themes in Psychology-I

72 4 3 20 80 100

5 PSY1C01 Human Physiology

72 4 3 20 80 100

6 PSY1C02 Psychological Statistics

72 4 3 20 80 100

Total 25 20 600

SEMESTER II

Sl.no Course code Course title Total hours

Hours/week Credits Marks Int

Ext

Total

7 PSY2A03 Common Course IV-English

72 4 4 20 80 100

8 PSY2A04 Common Course V-English

90 5 3 20 80 100

9 PSY2A08 Common Course VI-Language other than English

72 4 4 20 80 100

10 PSY2B01 Basic themes in Psychology-II

72 4 3 20 80 100


72 4 3 20 80 100


72 4 3 20 80 100

Total 25 20 600



SEMESTER III


Hours/week Credits Marks Int Ext Total

13 PSY3A05 Common Course VI-English

90 5 4 20 80 100

14 PSY3A09 Common Course VIII-Language other than English

90 5 4 20 80 100

15 PSY3B01 Psychological measurement and testing

54 3 3 20 80 100

16 Experimental Psychology Practical –I

36 2 *


90 5 3 20 80 100


90 5 3 20 80 100

Total 25 17 500 *External examination will be conducted at the end of IVth semester

SEMESTER IV



Ext

Total

19 PSY4A06 Common Course IX-English

90 5 4 20 80 100

20 PSY4A10 Common Course X-Language other than English

90 5 4 20 80 100

21 PSY4B01 Individual Differences

54 3 3 20 80 100

22 PSY4B02 Experimental Psychology Practical –I

36 2 4 20 80 100


90 5 3 20 80 100


90 5 3 20 80 100

Total 25 21 600



SEMESTER V

Sl.no Course code Course title Total hours Hours/week Credits Marks Int

Ext

Total

25 PSY5B01 Abnormal Psychology-I

54 3 3 20 80 100

26 PSY5B02 Social Psychology

54 3 3 20 80 100

27 PSY5B03 Developmental Psychology -I

54 3 3 20 80 100

28 PSY5B04 Psychological Counseling

54 3 3 20 80 100

29 PSY5B05 Health Psychology

54 3 3 20 80 100

30 Open Course 36 2 2 10 40 50 31 Experimental

Psychology Practical- II

54 3 *

32 Experimental Psychology Practical –III

54 3 *

33 Project 36 2 550 Total 25 17 *External examination will be conducted at the end of VI th semester

SEMESTER VI



Ext

Total

34 PSY6B01 Abnormal Psychology II

72 4 3 20 80 100

35 PSY6B02 Applied Social psychology

72 4 3 20 80 100

36 PSY6B03 Developmental Psychology II

54 3 3 20 80 100

37 PSY6B04 Life skill Education:Applications and training

54 3 3 20 80 100

38 PSY6B05 Elective 54 3 3 20 80 100 39 PSY6B06 Experimental

Psychology Practical –II

54 3 4 20 80 100

40 PSY6B07 Experimental Psychology Practical- III

54 3 4 20 80 100

41 PSY6B08 Project 36 2 2 10 40 50 Total 25 25 750



Elective Papers

1. PSY6B05-01 Organisational Behaviour

2. PSY6B05-02 Psychology of Criminal Behavior

3. PSY6B05-03 Positive Psychology

4.PSY6B05-04 Educational Psychology

Open Course

Choice I

Code:PSY5D01 Psychology and Personal Growth

Choice II

Code:PSY5D02 Life skill Applications Mark Distribution

Common:English 6x100 600 1000 Additional :Mal/Eng 4x100 400 Core Papers 17x100 1700 1750 Project 50 Open 50 50 Complementary Human

Physiology 4x100

400 800

Psychological Statistics

4x100 400

Total Marks 3600



DETAILS OF COURSES

CORE COURSES

PSY1B01:Basic Themes in Psychology-I

PSY2B01: Basic Themes in Psychology-II

PSY3B01:Psychological Measurement and Testing

PSY4B01: Individual Differences

PSY4B02:Experimental Psychology Practical I

PSY5B01:Abnormal Psychology I

PSY5B02:Social Psychology

PSY5B03:Developmental Psychology I

PSY5B04:Psychological Counselling

PSY5B05:Health Psychology

PSY6B01: Abnormal Psychology II

PSY6B02:Applied Social Psychology

PSY6B03:Developmental Psychology II

PSY6B04: Life Skill Education:Applications and Training

PSY6B06:Experimental Psychology Practical II

PSY6B07: Experimental Psychology Practical III

PSY6B08 :PROJECT

Complementary Courses of Bsc Psychology Programme

Following are the complementary courses of BSc Psychology Programme suggested by the board and the syllabus of these complementary courses are prepared by the respective Board of studies.

Human Physiology

Psychological Statistics



Open Courses During the Vth Semester two Open courses are offered to the students of other departments. Colleges can choose any one course from the two listed below.

PSY5D01:Psychology and Personal Growth

PSY5D02:Life Skill Applications

Elective Courses During VIth Semester four elective courses are offered for Bsc Psychology Programme. Colleges can choose any one course from the four listed below.

PSY6B05-01:Organisational Behavior

PSY6B05-02:Psychology of Criminal Behavior

PSY6B05-03:Positive Psychology

PSY6B05-04:Educational Psychology

Complementary Courses offered by Board of Studies in Psychology to other departments

PSY1C05: Psychological Processes I

PSY2C05:Psychological Processes II

PSY4C05:Psychology of Social Behavior

PSY3C05:Abnormal Psychology

PSY3C06:Life Span Development

PSY4C06: Health Psychology

PSY1C06:Social Behavior I

PSY2C06:Social Behavior II

PSY3 C07:Abnormal Behavior I

PSY4C07:Abnormal Behavior II



EVALUATION SCHEME FOR CORE COURSES

THEORY: EVALUATION SCHEMES

The evaluation scheme for each course contains two parts: viz., internal evaluation and external evaluation.

1. Internal Evaluation

20% of the total marks in each course are for internal evaluation. The colleges shall send only the marks obtained for internal examination to the university.

Table 1: Components for evaluation

Sl.No. Components Marks 1 Attendance 5 2 Test paper I & II 5+5 3 Assignment 2 4 Seminar/Viva 3 Total 20 Table 2: Percentage of Attendance & Eligible marks

% of Attendance Marks Above 90% 5 85-89% 4 80-84% 3 76-79% 2 75% 1

Question Paper pattern for External evaluation of core courses (similar for all six semesters)

Duration Section Pattern Total No. of Questions

Questions to be answered

Marks for each question

Total marks for each section

3 hours

A

Objective Type: Multiple Choice-5 Fill in the Blanks-5

10 10 1 10

B

Short Answer 10 10 2 20

C Paragraph type 8 6 5 30

D Essay 4 2 10 20 GRAND TOTAL 80



Components of internal evaluation for open course

Sl.No. Components Marks 1 Attendance 2.5 2 Test paper I & II 2.5+2.5 3 Assignment/seminar 2.5 Total 10

Question Paper Pattern for External Evaluation(Open Course)

Type of Question Questions to be given


Marks for each question

Total marks

Objective Type 8 8 ½ 4 Very short answers

7 5 2 10

Short Essay 6 4 4 16 Essay 2 1 10 10 Total 23 18 40



MODEL QUESTION PAPER OF CORE COURSE FOR ALL SEMESTERS

FIRST SEMESTER B. Sc DEGREE EXAMINATION, NOVEMBER 2017 PSY1B01 BASIC THEMES IN PSYCHOLOGY I

Name:

Reg No:

Time: 3Hrs Maximum Marks: 80

SECTION -A

Objective Type

Answer ALL Questions .Each carries One mark

Choose the correct Answer from the following options given

1. Who is described as the founder of experimental psychology.

(Freud,William James,Wilhelm Wundt,Rogers)

2. Identify the person who does not belong to Gestalt Psychology.

(Kohler,Koffka,Wertheimer,Kraeplin,)

3. ------------is the school of thought concerned with analyzing sensations and personal experience into basic element.

(Psychoanalytic, Behavioristic,Functionalism, Structuralism)

4.Vivid images during sensory deprivationusually can be best described as-------

(Day dreams,Hallucinations,Hypnagogic,Hypodynamic)

5. ------------is the statistical technique for combining the results of many studies on the same subject.

(Placebo effect,Survey,Correlation,Metanalysis )

Fill in the Blanks

6. ……… is a decrease in perceptual response to a repeated stimulus.

7. Firmly held a belief that has no basis in reality is called……………..

8 Any event that follows a response and decreases its likelihood of occurring again is……….

9. Archetypes is a concept put forward by ………

10. Learning that occurs without obvious reinforcement and that remains unexpressed until reinforcement is provided is called……..



(10x1= 10 Marks)

SECTION - B

(Answer in Two or three sentences)

Answer all questions. Each question carries 2 marks

11. Placebo effect

12. Structuralism

13. Circadian rythm

14. Self-awareness

15. Selective attention

16. Perceptual Organization

17. Meditation

18. Survey method

19. Figure-ground perception

20. Perceptual set

(10x2= 20 Marks)

SECTION -C

(Answer in a paragraph of about half a page to one page)

Answer Any SIX questions. Each question carries 5 marks

21. Steps in scientific investigation

22. Types of variables.

23. Factors affecting attention.

24. Stages of sleep.

25. Discuss the different views on hypnosis

26. Explain cognitive learning

27. Theories of colour vision

28. Scope of psychology

(6 x 5= 30 Marks)



SECTION –D

Essay Type Questions

Answer Any Two of the following .Each Carries 10 Marks.

29. Define psychology.Explain in brief the history of psychology.

30. Explain the nature of consciousness.Give a brief description on altered states of consciousness.

31. Compare and contrast classical and operant conditioning.

32. Elaborate the different research methods in psychology.

(2 x 10= 20)



DETAILED SYLLABI



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER I PSY1B01 Credits : 3

BASIC THEMES IN PSYCHOLOGY- I 72hours OBJECTIVES: 1. To generate interest in Psychology 2. To make familiar the basic concept of the field of Psychology with an emphasis on applications of Psychology in everyday life. 3. To understand the basics of various theories in Psychology 4. To provide basic knowledge about systems and processes like attention, learning and Consciousness. Module 1 Introduction 20 hours Psychology: A working definition. Origin of Psychology: Philosophical origins; Early Indian and Greek thoughts, major ideas of Descartes, Locke. Biological origins;Darwin, Genetics. Brief history of modern scientific psychology:structuralism, functionalism, behavioral, psychoanalytic, humanistic, cognitive perspectives, Gestalt psychology.Branches of Psychology, Scope of Psychology. Methods of psychology: Observation-participant and non-participant observation, naturalistic observation; Interview methods-structured, semi structured and unstructured interviews;Surveys; case study; Questionnaires; Correlational studies; experimental method. Module 2 Attention and Perception 20 hours Attention: selective and sustained attention; Factors affecting attention; Phenomena associated with attention-span of attention, division of attention, distraction of attention. Sensation and perception: Difference between sensation and perception: sensory threshold; absolute threshold; difference threshold; just noticeable differences; subliminal perception. Perceiving forms, patterns and objects: perceptual set, feature analysis, bottom-up processing, top-down processing. Perceptual organization; Gestalt principles, figure and ground segregation, phi-phenomenon. Perceptual constancies: size, shape, brightness constancies. Visual illusions;Theories of colour vision; Theories of auditory perception. Module 3 States of Consciousness 14 hours Nature of consciousness; Biological rhythms: circadian rhythms; Sleep and waking cycle: stages of sleep; functions of sleep; functions of REM sleep; sleep disorders Dreams: psychodynamic, physiological and cognitive views. Altered states of consciousness: Hypnosis; Meditation. Altering consciousness with drugs- Brief outline on psychoactive drugs.



Module 4 Learning 18 hours Concept of learning, Nature of learning, learning curve. Types of Learning; Associative learning (Classical and operant conditioning) and Cognitive learning. Classical conditioning: Basic experiment and basic terms; Principles of Classical conditioning-Acquisition, Higher order conditioning, Extinction, spontaneous recovery, Generalization and Discrimination. Applications of classical conditioning. Operant conditioning; Law of effect; Basic experiment of Skinner; Reinforcement, Punishment, Shaping and Chaining; Schedules of reinforcement. Applications of operant conditioning. Cognitive learning: Cognitive map; latent learning; sign learning. Observational learning/ Modelling REFERENCES Baron, R.A. (2004). Psychology, 5th ed. New Delhi: Pearson education. Bootzin, R., & Bower, G.H. (1991). Psychology today- An Introduction. 7th ed. New York: Mc Graw Hill Inc. Commer, R. & Gould, E. (2011). Psychology around Us. New Delhi: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Coon,D.& Mitterer,J.O.(2013)Introduction to Psychology: Gateways to Mind and Behavior, 13th ed.Wadsworth, Cengage Learning Feldman, R. (2011). Understanding Psychology,10th edition. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill. Morgan, C.T., King, R.A., Weisz, J.R., & Schopler, J. (1993). Introduction to Psychology, 7th ed. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill. Weiten, W. (2002). Psychology: Themes and Variations, 5th ed. New York: Brooks/Cole Publishing co. Additional References: Gerrig, R. J (2013) Psychology and Life (20th Edn) Boston: Pearson Kuppuswamy, B. (1990). Elements of ancient Indian Psychology, 3rd ed. New Delhi: Konark Publishers Pvt. Ltd. Mishra, B.K. (2008). Psychology: The study of Human Behavior. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of Ind



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER II PSY2B01 Credits: 3

BASIC THEMES IN PSYCHOLOGY- II 72hours OBJECTIVES: 1. To generate interest in Psychology 2. To make familiar the basic concept of the field of Psychology with an emphasis on the applications of Psychology in everyday life 3. To understand the basics of various theories in Psychology 4. To provide basic knowledge about systems and processes like cognition, memory,motivation and emotion. Module 1 Cognitive Processes 16 hours Basic units of Thought: Concepts; forming concepts, Types of concepts, prototypes; Images; Language, the structure of Language, Role of language in thinking. Reasoning; Deductive and inductive thinking. Problem solving; Types of problems, steps and barriers to effective problem solving, approaches or strategies of problem solving-trial and error, heuristics, algorithm, forming sub goals, searching for analogies, changing the representation of the problem ;Culture, cognitive style and problem solving. Creative thinking; convergent and divergent thinking; stages of creative thought. Decision making; Heuristics and judgment-availability heuristics, representativeness heuristics, anchoring heuristics. Module 2 Memory 22 hours Key processes in memory: Encoding, Storage and Retrieval. Atkinson-Shiffrin Model; sensory memory, short term memory and long term memory; Levels of processing. STM; Iconic memory; Working memory, Alan Baddeley's components of working memory; Chunking; Rehearsal-maintenance rehearsal, rote rehearsal, elaborative rehearsal. LTM; Types of LTM-procedural memory, declarative memory-semantic memory,episodic memory; Flash-bulb memory, tip of the tongue phenomenon. Implicit and explicit memory-priming. Measuring memory; Recall, Recognition, Relearning. Retrieval cues; Encoding specificity principle; Context dependent memory, State dependent memory; Serial position effect; Reconstructive memory; Source Monitoring; Eyewitness testimony; False memory; Metamemory. Forgetting: Curve of forgetting; Reasons of forgetting-ineffective coding, decay, interference, retrieval failure, motivated forgetting; Repression. Strategies for remembering; Rehearsal, Elaboration, Organisation (Mnemonics).



Module 3 Motivation 20 hours Motivation; A model of Motivation; Sources of Motivation-Drives, Incentives, Instincts. Theories of motivation: Drive theory; Incentive theory; Hierarchy of needs theory; Arousal theory-Yerkes-Dodson's Law; Goal setting theory; Evolutionary theory; Cognitive theories-Balance theory, Cognitive dissonance theory, Expectancy theory, Attribution theory. Types of Motives; Biological motives and learned motives.The motivation of hunger and eating: Biological factors in the regulation of hunger; Environmental factors in the regulation of hunger: Sexual motivation; Hormones and human sexual behaviour; Sexual orientation. Achievement motivation: Individual differences; situational determinants of achievement behaviour; Measuring achievement motivation. Aggressive motive; Power motive; Affiliation motive.Intrinsic and extrinsic motivation. Module 4 Emotion 14 hours Emotion: The elements of emotional experience; The cognitive component, The physiological component; The behavioural component; Primary emotions; Positive emotions. Emotion and the brain; Physiology and emotion; fight or flight, sudden death, lie detectors. Expression of emotions; Facial expressions, non-verbal cues and body language; Assessment of emotions. Theories of emotion: James-Lang theory; Cannon-Bard theory; Opponent process theory; Cognitive appraisal theories of emotion-Schachter's two-factor theory and Lazarus's theory of cognitive appraisal; Facial feedback hypothesis; Evolutionary theories of emotion. REFERENCES Baron, R.A. (2004). Psychology, 5th ed. New Delhi: Pearson education. Bootzin, R., & Bower, G.H. (1991). Psychology today- An Introduction. 7th ed. New York: Mc Graw Hill Inc. Commer, R. & Gould, E. (2011). Psychology around Us. New Delhi: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Coon,D.& Mitterer,J.O.(2013)Introduction to Psychology: Gateways to Mind and Behavior, 13th ed.Wadsworth, Cengage Learning Feldman, R. (2011). Understanding Psychology,10th edition. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill. Morgan, C.T., King, R.A., Weisz, J.R., & Schopler, J. (1993). Introduction to Psychology, 7th ed. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill. Weiten, W. (2002). Psychology: Themes and Variations, 5th ed. New York: Brooks/Cole Publishing co. Additional References: Gerrig, R. J (2013) Psychology and Life (20th Edn) Boston: Pearson Kuppuswamy, B. (1990). Elements of ancient Indian Psychology, 3rd ed. New Delhi: Konark Publishers Pvt. Ltd. Mishra, B.K. (2008). Psychology: The study of Human Behavior. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER III PSY3B01 Credits: 3

PSYCHOLOGICAL MEASUREMENT AND TESTING

54 Hours

Objectives: To offer foundation on psychological measurement and testing

To provide the basis of test construction and to build up skills on developing psychometric test

To familiarize the uses of psychological tests

To make aware of ethical principals in testing

Module 1: Introduction to Measurement and Scaling Techniques (14 Hours)

Definition of measurement, Levels of measurement: Nominal, Ordinal, Interval and Ratio scales,

Properties of scales of measurement: Magnitude, equal interval and absolute zero, Distinction

between psychological measurement and physical measurement, Problems in psychological

measurements.

Concepts of psycho physics: Absolute threshold, Difference threshold, Weber’s law, Fechner’s law,

Psychophysical/ psychological scaling methods- Method of Average Error, Method of Minimal

Changes, Method of Constant Stimuli, Method Of Pair Comparison, Method Of Rank Order.

Module 2: Nature and Use of Psychological Tests (12 Hours)

Definition of psychological test, Historical perspective of psychological testing

Uses of psychological test, Characteristics of a good test: Objectivity, Reliability, Validity, Norms,

and Practicability, ethical issues in psychological testing, Factors influencing Test Administration-

Examiner, Testing Conditions, Test Taker.

Classification of psychological tests: Speed test and power test, Individual and group tests, Verbal,

Non-verbal and performance tests, culture specific and culture free tests, Objective and subjective

tests.



Module 3: Test Construction and Administration (14 Hours) Introduction to steps of test construction- Planning, Writing, meaning and purpose of item analysis,

Administration, Standardisation ,Meaning of Reliability, Types of reliability, Meaning of Validity,

aspects of validity – face validity, content validity; construct validity, criterion-related validity,

Concept of Norms –norm referenced and criterion- referenced norms, types of norms- percentile,

standard score, age equivalent, grade equivalent and T-score.

Module 4: Basics of Psychological research (14 Hours) Meaning and characteristics of scientific research, types of research: historical, basic versus applied

research, experimental versus descriptive/non experimental.

Research Process- identifying the problem-types of problems, hypothesis- types of hypothesis,

variables- dependent, independent, extraneous variables, formulating research design, reviewing the

literature-sources of review, Sampling- fundamentals of sampling,

Data collection techniques-questionnaire and schedule, interview, content analysis, observation,

rating scale, carrying out statistical analysis-difference between descriptive and inferential statistics,

drawing conclusions.

Structure of a research report, APA style of writing research report

References

Singh, A.K.(2008). Tests, Measurements and research Methods in Behavioural Sciences(3rd ed.). Patna: Bharati Bhawan Publishers

Chadha.N.K.,(2009).Applied Psychometry. New Delhi: Sage Publications India Pvt Ltd.

Anastasi, A., & Urbina, S. (2005). Psychological Testing (7th ed.).New Delhi: Prentice –Hall Of

India.

Kaplan R. M.& Saccuzzo D. P,(2007), Psychological Testing –Principles, Applications And Issues. (6th Edition).New Delhi Thomson And Warsworth.

Additional references

Kothari, C. R. (2009). Research Methodology- Methods & Techniques. (2nd ed.). India: Repro India Limited

Goodwin.C J.(2002). Research in Psychology: Methods and design (3rd ed.) New York: john iley 7Sons, Inc

Evans, A. N & Rooney, B. F. (2008).Methods in Psychological Research. USA: Sage Publications

Gregory,R.J .(2000).Psychological Testing:History,Principles,And Applications (3rd ed.) Boston: Allyn & Bacon.



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER III 36hours

EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY PRACTICAL I

Objectives

To nurture the ability in students to understand himself/herself and other persons. To develop the skills of testing and scientific reporting in psychology. To familiarize the students to various psychological tests and assessment tools. To generate an interest in working of the community with a psychological outlook

PART I

Attention

1. Span of attention 2. Set in attention 3. Division of attention 4. Distraction of attention 5. Colour blindness test 6. Depth perception

Each student is required to conduct a minimum of 4 experiments from the above experiments and submit record for evaluation at the end of the fourth semester. The list includes experiments that measure attention and perception. Evaluation will be made at the end of fourth semester.

References

Anastasi, A.,& Urbina, S.(1997). Psychological Testing. USA: Prentice Hall.

Postman.L.F. &Fagan,J.P.(1949).Experimental Psychology.An introduction .New York:Harper and Brother Publishers.

Singh, A.K.(2004).Test measurements and methods in behavioral sciences.New Delhi: Bharati Bhavan Publishers and Distributers.

Woodworth,R.S.,&Schlosberg,H.(1965).Experimental Psychology.New York: Methen and Co.Ltd.



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER IV PSY4B01 Credits: 3

Individual Differences 54hours

OBJECTIVES

To provide theoretical knowledge about systems and processes like intelligence and personality

To understand the history of intelligence and Personality Testing

To familiarize the student with various types of tests in Psychology

Module 1: Intelligence (14 hours)

Definition, nature and meaning of intelligence,. Determinants of intelligence – Role of heredity and

environment. Theories of intelligence- Spearman-Two factor, Cattel- Fluid and crystallized

intelligence, Guilford’s structure of intellect model, Thurstone’s –primary mental abilities,

Sternberg- Triarchic approach, Gardner-Multiple intelligence theory, Goleman’s emotional

intelligence theory.

Module 2: Assessment of intelligence, Aptitude and achievement (12 hours)

Assessment of intellectual abilities-history of assessment- Sir Francis Galton, Alfred Binet, Lewis

Terman – concept of IQ, intelligence tests-Stanford-Binet intelligence scale,Wechsler scale,

Kaufman’s Scale, Raven’s Progressive Matrices, Bhatia’s Test Of Intelligence, Seguin-Form Board

Test, Extremes of intelligence

Define Aptitude and Achievement, Distinction Between Aptitude Test And Achievement Test, Uses

Of Achievement Tests, Types Of Aptitude Test- DAT, GATB, Sensory Tests, Motor Dexterity Test .

Module 3: Personality (14 hours) Concept of Personality, Psychodynamic approaches. Freud’s theory: instinct theory, Levels of

consciousness, structure of personality, defense mechanisms, psychosexual stages of development.

Jung: Structure of personality, Basic concepts in Individual Psychology. Horney: Basic anxiety,

styles, feminist turn in psychoanalysis.

Trait and Type theories: general approach. Allport: traits. Cattell: source and surface traits,.

Eysenck: dimensions of personality. Introduction to Humanistic perspective: Rogers, Maslow.



Module 4 : Assessment of Personality(14 hours) Meaning and purpose of personality assessment. Tools of personality assessment -Self report

inventories, Strength and weakness of self report inventories, 16PF, MMPI ,EPQ: General outline

about these tests. Questionnaires and Inventories, Projective measures of personality – Strengths

and weakness of projective tests, TAT, Other measures: Behavioral Observation and Interviews,

situational tests. Measurement of interest- types of interest tests, Strong Interest Inventory. Strenghts

and Weaknesses of Projective tests.

References

Passer M.W.& Smith.R E.,(2007).psychology-the science of mind and behaviour(3rd ed.). New

Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill

Singh, A.K.(2008). Tests, Measurements and research Methods in Behavioural Sciences(3rd ed.). Patna: Bharati Bhawan Publishers

Gerrig R.J &Zimbardo.P.G. (2005).psychology and Life(17th ed.).New Delhi: Pearson Education.

Anastasi, A., & Urbina, S. (2005). Psychological Testing (7th ed.).New Delhi: Prentice –Hall Of

India.

Coon, D. (1983). Introduction to Psychology: Exploration and Application. New York: West

Publishing Co.

Morgan,C.T., King, R.A., Weisz, J.R.,& Schopler, J. (1993). Introduction to Psycholgy, 7th ed.

New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill

Additional References

Weiten,W.(2002). Psychology: Themes and Variations, 5th ed. New York: Brooks/ Cole

Publishing Co.

Baron, R.A. (2004). Psychology, 5th ed. New Delhi: Pearson education.

Bootzin, R., & Bower, G.H. (1991). Psychology today- An Introduction. 7th ed. New York: Mc Graw Hill Inc. Feldman, R. (2011). Understanding Psychology,10th edition. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER IV PSY4B02 Credits: 4

EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY PRACTICAL I 36hours

Objectives


PART II

Illusion

1. Horizontal-Vertical illusion 2. Muller-Lyer Illusion

Memory

3.Immediate memory span

4.Working memory scale

5.Children’s memory scale

6.PGI Memory Scale

7. Weschler Memory Scale

Each student is required to conduct any of the above 4 experiments and submit record for evaluation at the end of the fourth semester. The list includes experiments that measure illusion and memory. Evaluation for Part I (III Sem ) & Part II (IV Sem) will be made at the end of the fourth semester.

References







Name:...........................................

Reg No: ........................................

MODEL QUESTION PAPER FOR ALL PRACTICAL EXAMINATION S

Experimental Psychology-I PSY4B 02

Maximum Marks: 80 Time: 3Hrs

Conduct any one experiment from the following. Write the introduction, plan, procedure, result and discussion.

1. Find out the immediate memory span of the subject OR

2. Find out the division of attention of the subject.



Pattern of evaluation of Experimental Psychology Practical I External Evaluation 80 marks

Internal Evaluation 20 marks

Introduction

15 marks

Practical Knowledge of the subject

5marks

Punctuality

5 marks

Attendance 5 marks Administration

25 marks

Result and Discussion

20 marks Record

5 marks Record

10

Viva Voce

10 marks



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER V PSY5B01 Credits : 3

ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY-I 54 hours

Objectives

To enable students to understand the concepts of abnormal behavior To develop awareness about different types of anxiety and stress disorders To encourage the students to know different therapeutic techniques in management of

anxiety and stress disorders.

Module 1: Basic concepts 8 hours

Mental disorder, classification, Historical views of abnormal behaviour, causal factors- Biological-psychosocial and socio cultural

Module2: Stress disorders and anxiety disorders 10 hours

Stress and stressors- Coping strategies, stress disorders: Adjustment disorder-post traumatic stress disorder; Anxiety disorder: specific phobia, social phobias, generalized anxiety disorders, obsessive-compulsive disorder. Causal factors

Module 3: Somatoform and dissociative disorder 18 hours

Somatic Symptom Disorders, Hypochondriasis, Somatization Disorder, Pain Disorder, Conversion Disorder; Dissociative Disorders - Depersonalization/ Derealization Disorder, Dissociative Amnesia and Dissociative Fugue, Dissociative Identity Disorder (DID). causal factors

Module 4: Personality disorders 18 hours

Cluster A Personality Disorders-Paranoid Personality Disorder, Schizoid Personality Disorder, Schizotypal Personality Disorder. Cluster B Personality Disorders- Histrionic Personality Disorder, Narcissistic Personality Disorder, Antisocial Personality Disorder, Borderline Personality Disorder. Cluster C Personality Disorders - Avoidant Personality Disorder, Dependent Personality Disorder, Obsessive-Compulsive Personality Disorder. Causal Factors.

Reference

Butcher, J. N.,Hooley, J. M.,&Mineka, S. (2014). Abnormal Psychology (16th ed.).U.S.A :Pearson Education, Inc.

Carson, R. C., Butcher, J. N., &Mineka, S. (1996). Abnormal Psychology and Modern life (10thed.). Newyork :Harper Collins College Publishers.



Seligman, M. E. P., Walker, E. P.,&Rosenhan , D. L. (2001). Abnormal Psychology (4thed.). Newyork :W. W. Norton & Company, Inc.

Sadock, B. J.,Sadock, V.A., & Ruiz, P. (2015). Kaplan &Sadock’s Synopsis of Psychiatry Behavioral Sciences/ Clinical Psychiatry ( 11th ed.). U.S.A:Wolters Kluwer.



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY


SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 54hours OBJECTIVES: To enable the student to

Understand and explain behavior in social settings Explain the psychological aspects of various social phenomena To create awareness about the management of human behaviour in group settings

Module 1: Introduction to Social Psychology 12hours Origin and Development of Social Psychology, Definition, Nature, Goal and Scope of Social Psychology, Methods of social psychology, Social Psychology and Related Disciplines

Module 2: Social perception and Attitudes 15hours Social Perception-Definition, Non-Verbal Communication- facial expression, gazes, stares, body language, touching, deception and micro expressions. Attribution - Definition, Theories - Correspondence inference, Kelly’s theory, Applications of attribution theory, Attribution Errors. Attitude and behavior - Definition, nature, components, functions and formation of attitudes. Persuasion, cognitive approach to persuasion, resistance to persuasion. Cognitive dissonance and attitude change. Module 3: Group, Leadership and Social Influence 15hours Groups: nature and functions. Types and theories of leadership. Social facilitation, social loafing. Social influence: Conformity, Factors affecting conformity. Compliance: Underlying Principles and tactics. Obedience and destructive obedience . Module 4: Interpersonal attraction and prosocial behavior 12hours Interpersonal attraction: beginning of attraction, proximity, emotions, affiliation need. Becoming acquainted- situational determinants-Love- Triangular Model of love.



Prosocial behavior -Responding to emergency, Steps. Altruistic personality. Volunteering. Explaining prosocial behavior: Empathy altruism model, negative state relief model, empathic joy hypothesis, genetic determinism . REFERENCES Baron, R.A., Branscombe, N.R., Byrne, D., & Bhardwaj, G. (2009). Social Psychology, 12 th ed. New Delhi: Pearson Education. Baron, R.A., & Byrne, D. (2002). Social Psychology, 10th ed. New Delhi: Pearson Education. Chaube, S.P., & Chaube, A. (2006). Groundwork for Social Psychology (Vol.1).Hyderbad: Neelkamal Publications Pvt.Ltd. Feldman, R.S. (2001). Social Psychology, 3rd ed. N J. Pearson Education. Michener, H. A., Delamater, J.D., & Myers, D.J. (2004). Social Psychology. Australia: Thomson Wadsworth Publication. Myers, D.G. (1999). Social Psychology, 7 thed. New Delhi : Pearson Education . Schneider, F.W., Gruman, J.A., & Coutts, L.M. (2005). Applied Social Psychology: Understanding and addressing social and practical problems. New Delhi: Sage



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER V PSY5B03 Credits: 3

DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY –I 54hours

OBJECTIVES

1) To study human development in Psychological Perspectives

2) To create awareness about major Psychological changes along with physical and cognitive development

Module 1: Introduction and theories to Life Span Development 13 hours

Historical foundation of developmental psychology. Growth and development- Different

Theories of development (Brief): Freud, Behaviorist, social, learning, Vygotsky, Periods of

Development, and Erikson’s Theory. Developmental tasks of each stages of development.

Module 2: Prenatal Development 14 hours

Fertilization- Germinal Period, Embryonic Period, Fetal Period- Effect of long term & short term use

of Teratogens- Birth Process: Types, methods- prenatal and perinatal diagnostic tests. Birth

Complication and their effects. Post partum period- physical, emotional adjustment.

Module 3: Physical Development 13 hours

Newborn reflexes, Gross and fine motor skills. Perceptual development in infancy. Physical

development from childhood to adolescence. Physical condition and health issues in early & middle

adulthood.

Module 4: Cognitive Development 14hours

Piaget’s theory of Cognitive Development: Process of development, 4 stages- Sensory Motor,

Preoperational, Concrete operational and Formal Operational stage. Language development: Pre-

linguistic, Phonological, Semantic, Grammatical and Pragmatic Development .Cognitive changes in



early adulthood- Post formal thought, Schaie's Model of Cognitive Development, Sternberg -

Cognitive Development of middle adulthood

REFERENCE

Berk, L.E (2003) Child Development (3rd de). New Delhi: Pearson Education Pvt Ltd

Hurlock, E.B (1996) Developmental Psychology-A Life span Approach. New Delhi: Tata

McGraw Hill Publishing Company

Papalia, D.E et.al (2004) Human Development (9th Ed). New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Santrock, J.E (2007) Child Development (2nd end) New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company



B.SC Psychology


PSYCHOLOGICAL COUNSELLING 54hours

Objectives:

To acquire theoretical knowledge in the areas of psychological counseling

To understand the applications of counseling in various settings

To practice counseling techniques through role plays

Module 1: 18 hours

Couselling and Helping. Definition and scope of Counselling. Goals of counseling. Conditions

facilitating effective counselling. Counsellor and counsellee characteristics. Characteristics of an

effective counsellor.

An overview of Egan’s Model – Problem-management and Opportunity-development approach to

Helping – Outline of the three stages. Stage 1 – The Current Picture: Help clients clarify the key

issues, Stage 2- The preferred picture: Help clients identify and set goals. Stage 3- The Way

Forward: Help clients develop strategies and plans for goal implementation

Module 2: 6 hours

Approaches to counselling: Person-centered counselling, Psychoanalytic counseling counselling, Cognitive counselling, Behavioral counselling, Eclectic approach

Module 3: 20 hours

Counselling Skills and Techniques

Opening Techniques – Greeting, topics, physical arrangements, attitudes, Non verbal skills

(SOLER), Rapport building. Listening techniques - Active listening, forms of poor listening



Open-ended questions, Silence, Focusing, Empathic responding, Paraphrasing and reflecting, Probing and Summarising, Structuring

Acceptance techniques, Structuring techniques, Leading techniques, Reassurance and suggestion methods, Challenging, Interpretation & confrontation, Timing & Pacing, Advanced empathy

Divergent thinking, Goal setting, Decision making, Problem solving, Role playing, Advice and information giving strategies, Terminating skills

Module 4: 10 Hours

Applications of Counselling in various settings (briefly): School counselling, Career Counseling and

Guidance, College counselling, Premarital counselling, HIV/AIDS counselling, counselling for

terminally ill. Group counseling

Values in counselling. Ethics in counselling. Legal aspects in counselling. Professional codes.

Note: A few major skills like active listening, paraphrasing and reflecting are to be practiced through role plays in the class.

Reference:

Capuzzi, D. (2007). Counselling and psychotherapy: Theories and intervention. New Delhi: Dorling Kindsley.

Egan, G. (1990). The skilled helper: A systematic approach to effective helping. Thomson Brooks/Cole Publishing Co.

Jones, R.N. (2008). Basic Counselling Skills- A helper’s manual. New Delhi: Sage Publishers.



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER V PSY5B05 Credits: 3

HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY 54hours

Objectives

To understand the psychological,behavioral and cultural factors contributing to physical and mental health health

To study the management of different illnesses

MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY 12 hours

Definition of Health Psychology, Mind Body Relationship, Need And Significance of Health Psychology, Biopsychosocial Model V/S Biomedical Model

MODULE 2: HEALTH BEHAVIOUR AND PRIMARY PREVENTION 12 hours

Health Behaviours, Changing Health Habits-Attitude Change, Cognitive Behavioural Approach-Health Belief Model, Theory Of Planned Behaviour, Trans Theoretical Model, Protection Motivation Theory, Social Cognitive Theory And Attribution Theory, Models Of Prevention

MODULE 3: STRESS AND COPING 16 hours

Stress, Theoretical Contributions To Stress-Fight-Flight, Selye’s General Adaptation Syndrome, Tend –Befriend, Psychological Appraisal & Stress, Coping: Moderators Of Coping-Personality, Social Support, Other Life Stressors, Stress Management Programmes

MODULE 4: PSYCHOSOCIAL ISSUES AND MANAGEMENT OF ADVANCING AND TERMINAL ILLNESS 14 hours

Emotional Responses To Chronic Illness, Psychosocial Issues —Continued Treatment, Issue Of Non Traditional Treatment, Stages To Adjustment To Dying, Psychological Management Of Terminal Illness, Medical Staff And Terminal Ill Patient,Individual Counselling, Family Therapy, Management Of Terminal Illness In Children

REFERENCE

Taylor E. S. (2006). Health Psychology (6TH EDITION), MC Graw Hill Companies,California

ADDITIONAL REFERENCE

Naima Khatoon (2012). Health Psychology, Dorling kindersley (INDIA) Pvt. Ltd.



Marks, F.D., Murray M., Evans B., and Estacio V. M. (2011) Health Psychology: Theory, Research and Practice (3rd edition).Sage Publications india pvt. Ltd.



OPEN COURSE One among the following courses may be offered by Departments of Psychology for other students CHOICE I CODE: PSY5D01 PSYCHOLOGY AND PERSONAL GROWTH Credit : 2 CHOICE II CODE: PSY5D02 LIFE SKILL APPLICATIONS Credit : 2



OPEN COURSE To be offered by Department of Psychology for other students OPEN COURSE CHOICE I SEMESTER V PSY5D01 Credits : 2

PSYCHOLOGY AND PERSONAL GROWTH 36hours Objectives To understand the basic concepts in Psychology To aquaint the students with the aspects of personal growth The contents and teaching of this part is general and designed to suit as a general or Peripheral paper for non-Psychology main students. The class room interaction should focus on experiential component of learning apart from the usual lectures Module 1. 8 hours Psychology: - Definition and history of psychology.The subject matter and scope-Branches of Psychology and its application in personal and social life Module 2. 12hours Positive Psychology:-History and concept of positive psychology. Concept of Happiness: - Basic nature of emotional development. Positive and negative emotional state. Control of emotional states. Happiness – causes and effect of happiness application in day to day life. Hope and Optimistic Behavior-General concepts. Module 3. 16hours Positive Self , social relations and methods for personal growth :- Self esteem-determinants-self efficacy-Development of social and personal self-Barriers in self development. --Family and relationships-role of emotional intelligence in activating social life. Social well-being and personal growth. Brief out line of transactional analysis Conflicts and frustration management- Stress management techniquess. Meditation as a tool for personal growth-Yoga techniques for enhancing personal effectiveness and positive emotional and social life. Reference Baron, R.A. (2004). Psychology, 5th ed. New Delhi: Pearson education Carr, Alan (2011). Positive Psychology (2nd Edn), New York: Routledge Taylor and Francis Group.



Mishra, B.K. (2008). Psychology: The study of Human Behavior. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India Additional Reference: Fadiman, James and Frager, Robert (2002) Personality and Personal Growth (5th Edn) Prentice Hall



OPEN COURSE To be offered by Department of Psychology for other students

OPEN COURSE CHOICE II

SEMESTER V PSY5D02 Credits : 2

LIFE SKILL APPLICATIONS 36hours Objectives

To promote life skill education To develop abilities for adaptive and positive behavior To enhance self-confidence and self-esteem Module 1 8 hours Life Skill: Concept, meaning, definition, need, Importance, ten core life skills. Module 2 14hours Self awareness: concept, importance of self awareness, skills to become self aware and benefits of self awareness in real life. Empathy: Need for empathy, importance of empathy in building relationships, benefits of empathy in real life. Problem solving: Steps of problem solving, using problem solving skill in solving real life problems Module 3 14hours Survival Skills: Interpersonal relations-building of interpersonal relations, skill to improve interpersonal relations Effective communication: listening skills, verbal and non verbal communications. Negotiating skills: decision making-importance of effective decision making in real life, career decision making . References Hurlock,B.E. (2007). Developmental Psychology. New Delhi:Tata MC Grew Hill Publishing Co.Ltd Nelson – Jones, R. (2007). Life Counseling Skills.New Delhi :Sage Publishers Rajasenan ,U. (2010). Life skills,Personality and Leadership.Chennai,RGNIYD UNESCO and Indian Natotional Commission for Cooperation .(2001). Life skills in Non formal Education;A Review. Paris. UNESCO-http://www.unesco.org



Wadker,A.(2016).Lifeskills for success. Delhi:Sage Publications WHO (1999) Partners In Life Skill Education: Conclusions from a Uninvited Nations Inter -Agency Meeting, Geneva WHO-http://www.who.int/en/



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER V

EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY PRACTICAL II 54hours

Objectives


PART I

Learning

1. Massed v/s spaced learning 2. Rote V/s Meaningful learning 3. Trial and error learning

Transfer of training

4.Bilateral transfer

5.Habit interference

Motivation

6.Level of aspiration

7.Knowledge of result

Each student is required to conduct any 6 experiments and submit record for evaluation at the end of the semester. The list includes experiments that measure learning and motivation. Evaluation will be made at the end of sixth semester(PSY6B06) .

References





B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER V

EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY PRACTICAL III 54hours

Objectives


PART I

1. Standard Progressive Matrices 2. Eysenck Personality questionnaire 3. Bhatias Battery of Performance intelligence Tests 4. Tests of creativity 5. Bells adjustment inventory 6. Locus of control 7. Multiphasic interest inventory 8. Achievement value and anxiety inventory 9. Career decision making scale

Each student is required to conduct a minimum of 6 tests and submit record for evaluation at the end of the semester. The list includes psychological assessments that measure intelligence and personality. Evaluation will be made at the end of sixth semester(PSY6B07).

References







B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER V

PROJECT 36hours

Pursuing a research project enables students to pursue an original study about a topic of interest. Students are expected to conduct a small project on socially relevant topics. Project work should be carried out with the supervision of faculty members in the department. The project work must be started from the fifth semester onwards and students should submit their report at the end of sixth semester.

Guide lines for the Project work

The project work shall be a quantitative, qualitative or exploratory study and the use of simple statistical techniques may be encouraged.

Students must do the project work individually and submit the report in manuscript format ( handwritten form).

Preferably tool can be prepared by the students themselves such as interview schedule, observation schedule, questionnaires, categories of content analysis etc

Authenticity of the project work should be verified. The report should not exceed 30 pages The report must have five chapters such as Introduction, review, method, result and

discussion, summary and conclusion and reference (APA format). An abstract of the study should be submitted along with the research report. The project will be valued both internally and externally



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER VI PSY6B01 Credits : 3

ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY-II 72hours

Objectives

To develop awareness about major psychological disorders

To acquaint the students with causes of major psychological disorders

Module 1: Substance abuse disorder 20hours

Alcohol Related Disorders - Clinical Picture of Alcohol Related Disorders,Biological Causal Factors in the Abuse of and Dependence on Alcohol,Psychosocial Causal Factors in Alcohol Abuse and Dependence,Sociocultural Causal Factors. Drug Abuse and Dependence - Opium and Its Derivatives (Narcotics), Cocaine and Amphetamines (Stimulants), Methamphetamine, Barbiturates (Sedatives) , Hallucinogens, Ecstasy, Marijuana ,Stimulants

Module 2: Schizhophrenia and other psychotic disorder 20hours

Schizophrenia - Origins of the Schizophrenia Construct, Epidemiology, Clinical Picture-Delusions, Hallucinations, Disorganized Speech and Behavior, Positive and Negative Symptoms. Subtypes of Schizophrenia, Other Psychotic Disorders -Schizoaffective Disorder, Schizophreniform Disorder, Delusional Disorder , Brief Psychotic Disorder . Causal factors

Module 3: Mood Disorder 20hours

Mood Disorders: Types of Mood Disorders. Unipolar Depressive Disorders -Major Depressive Disorder, Other Forms of Depression, Premenstrual Dysphoric Disorder , Dysthymic Disorder (Persistent Depressive Disorder). Bipolar and Related Disorders-Cyclothymic Disorder, Bipolar Disorders (I and II) .Causal Factors.

Module 4: Developmental disorders 12hours

Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder, Conduct Disorder, Autism Spectrum Disorder, Specific learning Disorders, Intellectual Disability. Causal factors

Reference

Butcher, J. N., Hooley, J. M., &Mineka, S. (2014). Abnormal Psychology (16th ed.). U.S.A : Pearson Education, Inc.



Carson, R. C., Butcher, J. N., &Mineka, S. (1996). Abnormal Psychology and Modern life (10th ed.). Newyork : Harper Collins College Publishers.

Seligman, M. E. P., Walker, E. P. , &Rosenhan , D. L. (2001). Abnormal Psychology (4th ed.). Newyork : W. W. Norton & Company, Inc.

Sadock, B. J., Sadock, V. A., & Ruiz, P. (2015). Kaplan &Sadock’s Synopsis of Psychiatry Behavioral Sciences/ Clinical Psychiatry ( 11th ed.). U.S.A :Wolters Kluwer.



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER VI PSY6B02 Credits : 3

APPLIED SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 72hours Objectives: 1. To familiarize the theoretical concept and research methods in applied psychology. 2. To give knowledge about application of social psychology in different areas like clinical, Educational, health and media. 3. To understand the major social issues in India. Module 1: Foundations of applied social psychology 18hours Social psychology and related disciplines. Applied social psychology: historical context. Social Psychological theories- cognitive dissonance theory, group think theory. Module 2: Applying social psychology to clinical and counseling psychology 18hours Social psychological roots of social anxiety. Social psychological model of depression. Treatment and prevention- self presentation theory, hopelessness theory and biases in clinical decision making. Psychiatric social work- need and role of a case worker, after-care work, data collection, help to the family and helping the patient. Module 3: Applying social psychology to the media and aggression 18hours Consequence of viewing media violence- fear, aggressive thoughts. Effects of exposure to violent pornography. Reducing the harmful effects of exposure to violent sexual material. Effects of media influence on our thought. Aggression. Theoretical perspectives on aggression: role of biological factors, drive theories, modern theories of aggression. Determinants of aggression: social, personal, situational. Media violence, child abuse, domestic violence. Prevention and control of aggression. .Module 4: Social problems in India and applying social psychology 18hours The concept of social problems, characteristics, causes, types, stages in the development of social problems, and solving social problems. Brief description about the concept of poverty, unemployment, population explosion, child abuse and child labor REFERENCES Chaube, S.P., & Chaube, A. (2006). Groundwork for Social Psychology (Vol.1).Hyderbad: Neelkamal Publications Pvt. Ltd.



Myers, D.G. (1999). Social Psychology, 7 thed. New Delhi: Pearson Education. Ram Ahuja (1999).Social Problems in India. Jaipur and New Delhi: Rawat Publications. Schneider, F.W., Gruman, J.A., & Coutts, L.M. (2005). Applied Social Psychology: Understanding and addressing social and practical problems. New Delhi: Sage Publication.



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER VI PSY6B03 Credits: 3

DEVELOPMENTAL PYCHOLOGY –II 54hours

Objectives:

1) To study emotional and social development of life span periods.

2) To study the vocational development and adjustments in adulthood.

3) To understand the period of late adulthood.

Module 1: Emotional Development 13hours

Emotion- types of emotions. Emotional behavior in infancy to middle adulthood.

Temperament: definition, different classifications. Self development-role of family,

parenting and peer relations in emotional development. Close relationships in adulthood.

Adult life changes, marriage and family in adulthood.

Module 2: Social Development 15hours

Process of socialization from infancy to middle adulthood. Vygotsky’s theory of social

development - ZPD. Development of attachment: types, Bowlby’s Ethological theory of

attachment, Factors affecting attachment. Marital Life Style & Parenthood in Young

Adulthood. Empty nest syndrome. Attraction, love and close relationships- adult marriage

life. Moral development- theories: Piaget, Kohlberg.

Module 3: Vocational Development 12hours

Vocational development and adjustment in early adulthood. Career, work and leisure in middle

adulthood. Selecting a job, appraisal of vocational adjustment. Work life balancing. Vocational



adjustment in Middle Adulthood-Changed working conditions that affect middle aged workers,

conditions influencing vocational adjustment and satisfaction in middle age.

Module 4: Late adulthood 14hours

Characteristic of late adulthood. Gerontology. Physical –cognitive – language- and socio-

emotional development in late adulthood. Development of personality and self. Family and

relationships. Biological theories of ageing. Vocational adjustment and adjustment to retirement

in late adulthood. Facing death and loss: Psychological issues, Pattern of grieving, special losses.

REFERENCES

Hurlock, Elizabeth.B(1996).Developmental Psycholgy: A Life-Span Approach. New Delhi:

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company.

Papalia, Diane. E et.al(2004).Human Development,9th ed. New Delhi. Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company Limited.

Santrock, J. E (2007) Child Development (2nd end) New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY


LIFE SKILL EDUCATION: APPLICATIONS AND TRAINING. 54hours

Objectives

To promote life skill education To develop abilities for adaptive and positive behavior To enhance self-confidence and self-esteem Module 1 12hours Introduction to life skills. Life skill; Need and importance-definition and interpretation by WHO-Origin and development of concept of life skill. Module 2 14hours Mother skills: self awareness – development of self theories-assessment ; empathy. Survival Skill: inter personal and intrapersonal orientations, interpersonal attraction & theories-skill to develop relations and resolve conflicts. Effective communication: components of communication. Listening-verbal and non verbal skills. Module 3 14hours Thinking skills: Critical thinking & creative thinking and media thought. Negotiating skills: Decision making-problem solving. Coping skills: Life skills for stress & time management; symptoms of anxiety-overcoming anxiety-goal setting and planning. Module 4 14hours Life skill in different area: Life skill for preventing addiction-life skill for career planning and development-life skill for women empowerment-life skill training for various groups (Adolescents, youth). References Hurlock,B.E. (2007). Developmental Psychology. New Delhi:Tata MC Grew Hill Publishing Co.Ltd Nelson – Jones, R. (2007). Life Counseling Skills.New Delhi :Sage Publishers Rajasenan ,U. (2010). Life skills,Personality and Leadership.Chennai,RGNIYD UNESCO and Indian Natotional Commission for Cooperation. (2001). Life skills in Non formal Education;A Review. Paris.



UNESCO-http://www.unesco.org Wadker,A.(2016).Life skills for success. Delhi:Sage Publications WHO (1999) Partners In Life Skill Education: Conclusions from a Uninvited Nations Inter -Agency Meeting, Geneva WHO-http://www.who.int/en/



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER VI PSY6B05 Credit : 3

Electives

Each student has to opt one elective among the following four papers

1. PSY6B05-01 Organisational Behaviour

2. PSY6B05-02 Psychology of Criminal Behavior

3. PSY6B05-03 Positive Psychology

4. PSY6B05-04 Educational Psychology



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

SEMESTER VI PSY6B05-01 Credits : 3

ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 54hours

Objectives:

1). To familiarize the concept of human Behaviour in Organizations

2). To give knowledge about work-motivation, group, leadership and organizational culture

MODULE1: INTRODUCTION TO ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 11hours

The Concept of Organization – Need and Importance of Organizational Behaviour – Goals-

Scope and Challenges of Organization - Organization Structure-Types –Organizational

behaviour Models.

MODULE 2: INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOUR 13hours

Attitude – Characteristics – Components – Formation of attitude. Perception–Importance –

Factors influencing perception – Interpersonal perception- Impression Management. Motivation -

Meaning and types of Motivation, content theories and process theories.

MODULE 3: GROUP BEHAVIOUR AND LEADERSHIP 15hours

Concept of groups - Basic groups- Theories of group formation. Communication - Processes of

communication in organization-Functions of communication. Transactional Analysis.

Leadership- Functions of a leader- Approaches to the study of leadership phenomenon.

MODULE 4: DYNAMICS OF ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 15hours

Meaning of conflict - The processes of conflict, Types and sources of conflict, Resolution of

conflict. Meaning of stress- Work stressors - Consequences and management of stress-

Balancing work and life. Organizational development – Characteristics –Objectives –

Organizational effectiveness.



REFERENCES

Robbins, S.P.(2005) Essentials of Organizational Behaviour, 8th ed. New Delhi: Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd. Sharma, R.A.(2000) Organizational Theory and Behaviour,2nd ed. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited.



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY


PSYCHOLOGY OF CRIMINAL BEHAVIOR 54hours

Objectives:

� Mold youngsters with conceptual knowledge in Criminology. � To enable the students to build up on their analytical skills in Criminology.

MODULE 1: THEORY AND METHOD 12 hours

Crime, Criminal law and Criminals-Theories of Crime-Foundations of Modern Criminology-Theories of

Crime-Radical, Situational, and Rationality perspectives-Getting a Line on Crime: The production and Use of Data.

MODULE 2: CRIMES AND CRIMINAL OFFENDERS 14hours

Murder and Assault-Robbery: Theft by violence and varieties of non-violent- Occupational and Organized Crime- Public Order Crime.

MODULE 3: CORRECTIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 14hours

Correction Psychology in Adult Setting- Psychological Assessment in Corrections- Treatment and Rehabilitation in Correctional Facilities- Juvenile Corrections.

MODULE 4: FORENSIC PSYCHOLOGY 14hours

Definition- General Concepts- Special areas: Investigative Psychology-Police Psychology-Child Forensic Psychology-Forensic Psychology

REFERENCES:

Bartol, C.R & Bartol, A.M. (2004) Forensic Psychology. U.K: Sage Publications. Barlow, H.D (1987). Introduction to Criminology, Boston: Little Brown & Co. Howtt (2002) Forensic and Criminal Psychology. London: Prentice Hall. Dutta, R.K. (2003) Crime against Women. New Delhi: Reference Press Pognebin, M.R (2003) Qualitative Approaches to Criminal Justice perspective from the field. London: Sage Publications.



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

54hours


POSITIVE PSYCHOLOGY

Objectives

To familiarize the important concepts in positive psychology

To understand the importance of well being which allows people to understand what makes

life worth living

To give knowledge about the importance of factors contributing happiness

MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO POSITIVE PSYCHOLOGY 12 hours

What is positive psychology? Positive Psychology: assumptions, goals and definitions

Eastern and western perspectives in positive psychology

MODULE 2 : WELL-BEING 14 hours

Well-Being: Definition, subjective and psychological well-being, perspectives on well-being:

hedonic and eudaimonic, other theories of well-being.

MODULE 3 : HOPE,OPTIMISM AND FLOW 14 hours

Optimism, hope, mindfulness, expectationism, risk homeostasis theory, and time perspective,

neurobiology of optimism. Flow: self determination theory & intrinsic motivation, meta-

motivational state and reversal theory. Resilience: sources of resilience, mindfulness meditation



MODULE 4 : HAPPINESS 14 hours

Positive emotions, positive & negative affectivity. Happiness : Measuring happiness, effect of

happiness, causes of happiness, circumstances & happiness, happiness enhancement. Happiness

across life span, gender & happiness, marriage & happiness, gender difference in the benefits of

marriage, money, happiness and culture, close relationships and happiness

REFERENCES

Alan Carr (2011). Positive Psychology: The Science of Happiness & Human strengths (II

edition). Routledge, London & New York.

Snyder R.C., Lopez J. S., Pedrotti T. J. (2011). Positive psychology: the scientific and

practical explorations of human strengths (2nd edition). Sage publications India Pvt. Ltd, New

Delhi.

Baumgardner S. & Crothers M. (2015). Positive Psychology. Dorling Kindersley ( India ) Pvt.

Ltd. New Delhi



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY


EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 54hours

Objectives:

1). To promote an understanding of the application of psychological principles in the process of

education.

2). To familiarise the students with the characteristics of normal and exceptional children.

3). To provide the ways and methods of teaching and classroom management.

Module 1: Educational Psychology 13hours

Nature and Scope of Educational Psychology – Contribution of Piaget, Vygotsky, Skinner,

Rogers and Maslow, Dewey, and Gardener on Education. .

Module 2: Child Development and Learning 13hours

Age-level characteristics and education – Physical, social, emotional and cognitive

characteristics of Pre-school to Higher secondary students. Role of teacher in each stages of

education.

Learning: Behavioural approach – Objectives of instruction – Mastery Learning – Behaviour

modification techniques.

Module 3: Motivation 14hours

Behavioural, Cognitive and humanistic approaches of motivation – Implication of achievement

motivation and attribution theories –Techniques for enhancing student motivation. Class room

communication- verbal, non- verbal and unintended communication.



Module 4: Educating Exceptional Children 14hours

Education of Gifted Children, Juvenile delinquent, Learning Disabled , Mentally Retarded ,

Physically Disabled , Emotional and Behavioural Disordered. Role of special educator in dealing

with exceptional children.

REFERENCES

Bichler, R. F & Snowman, J (1990) Psychology Applied to Teaching (6th Edn) Boston: Houghton

Mifflin Company.

Santrock, J.W. (2011). Educational Psychology (4th ed.). New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.

Woolfolk, A (2004) Educational Psychology (9th Edn) Delhi: Pearson Education.

Seifert, K.Sutton,R. (2009) Educational Psychology (2nd Edn).Zurich:Global Text.



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY


EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY PRACTICAL II 54hours

PART II

1.Simple reaction time

2.Choice reaction time

3.Tracing test

4.Steadiness tests

5.Finger dexterity

6.Tweezer dexterity

7. Conformity Behaviour

8. Social Maturity Scale

9. Self-expression Inventory

10. Parental Encouragement Scale

Each student is required to conduct any 6 experiments from the above experiments and submit record for evaluation at the end of the semester. Evaluation for Part I (V Sem ) & Part II (VI Sem) will be made at the end of the sixth semester(PSY6B06).

References







Pattern of evaluation of Experimental Psychology Practical II External Evaluation 80 marks


Introduction

15 marks


5marks

Punctuality

5 marks


25 marks


20 marks Record

5 marks Record

10

Viva Voce

10 marks



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY


EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY PRACTICAL III 54hours

PART II

1. 16 PF 2. Weschler adult performance intelligence scale 3. Emotional Intelligence inventory 4. Aptitude Tests 5. IAS rating scale 6. Occupational stress inventory 7. Materialism spiritualism scale 8. Family relationship inventory 9. Risk taking scale 10. Study habit scale

Each student is required to conduct a minimum of 6 tests from the above tests and submit record for evaluation at the end of the semester. Evaluation for Part I (V Sem ) & Part II (VI Sem) will be made at the end of the sixth semester(PSY6B07).

References







Pattern of evaluation of Experimental Psychology Practical III External Evaluation 80 marks


Introduction

15 marks


5marks

Punctuality

5 marks


25 marks


20 marks Record

5 marks Record

10

Viva Voce

10 marks



B.SC PSYCHOLOGY

36 hours SEMESTER VI PSY6B08 Credits: 2

PROJECT

Pattern of evaluation of Project

External Evaluation

40 marks

Internal Evaluation

10 marks

Significance of the study, Objectives,

Method, Analysis of results and finding

25 marks

Novelty of the subject

2 marks

Punctuality

2 marks

Organisation of the report

3 marks Presentation skill

5 marks

Viva Voce

3 marks

Viva Voce

10 marks



COMPLEMENTARY COURSES IN PSYCHOLOGY OFFERED TO OTHER DEPARTMENTS



SYLLABUS OF PSYCHOLOGY AS COMPLEMENTARY COURSES OF

BA SOCIOLOGY

Name of Course Code Credit Hrs/week Semester Psychological Processes -I

PSY1C05 2 3 I

Psychological Processes -II

PSY2C05 2 3 II

Abnormal Psychology

PSY3C05 2 3 III

Psychology of Social Behavior

PSY4C05 2 3 IV



SYLLABUS OF PSYCHOLOGY AS COMPLEMENTARY COURSE OF

BA SOCIOLOGY

Semester I PSY1C05 Credit: 2

PSYCHOLOGICAL PROCESSES –I 54 hours

Objectives: To generate interest in psychology

To familiarize the students with the concepts of basic psychological processes

To understand the basics of various theories in psychology

To provide basic knowledge about systems and processes like attention, learning

and memory

Module 1 Introduction 10 hours Psychology: A working definition.

Origin of Psychology: Philosophical origins; Early Indian and Greek thoughts major ideas of

Descartes, Locke. Biological origins; Darwin, Genetics.

Brief history of modern scientific psychology: structuralism, functionalism, behavioral,

psychoanalytic, humanistic , cognitive perspectives, Gestalt psychology.

Branches of Psychology, Scope of Psychology.

Methods of psychology: Observation-participant and non-participant observation, naturalistic

observation; Interview methods-structured, semistructured and unstructured interviews;

Surveys;case study; Questionnaires; correlational studies; experimental method.

Module 2 Attention and Perception 14hours Attention:selective and sustained attention;Factors affecting attention;Phenomena associated

with attention-span of attention,division of attention,distraction of attention.

Sensation and perception:Difference between sensation and perception

Perceptual organisation;Gestalt principles,figure and ground seggregation,phi-phenomenon.

Perceptual constancies:size,shape,brightness constancies.



Visual illusions;Theories of colour vision;Theories of auditory perception.

Module 3 Learning 16hours Concept of learning, Nature of learning, learning curve.

Types of Learning; Associative learning(Classical and operant conditioning) and Cognitive

learning.

Classical conditioning: Basic experiment and basic terms; Principles of Classical conditioning-

Acquisition, Higher order conditioning, Extinction, spontaneous recovery, Generalization and

Discrimination.

Operant conditioning; Law of effect; Basic experiment of Skinner; Reinforcement, Punishment,

Shaping and Chaining; Schedules of reinforcement..

Cognitive learning: Cognitive map; latent learning; sign learning.

Observational learning/Modelling

Module 4 Memory 14hours Key processes in memory: Encoding, Storage and Retrieval.

Atkinson-Shiffrin Model; sensory memory, short term memory and long term memory; Levels of

processing.

STM; Iconic memory; Working memory, Alan Baddeley's components of working memory;

Chunking; Rehearsal-maintanence rehearsal, rote rehearsal, elaborative rehearsal.

LTM;Types of LTM-procedural memory,declarative memory-semantic memory ,episodic

memory;

Flash-bulb memory,tip of the tongue phenomenon.

Measuring memory;Recall,Recognition,Relearning.

Forgetting:Curve of forgetting;Reasons of forgetting-ineffective coding, decay,Interference,

retrieval failure, motivated forgetting; Repression.

Strategies for remembering; Rehearsal, Elaboration, Organisation(Mnemonics).

REFERENCES Baron, R.A. (2004). Psychology, 5th ed. New Delhi: Pearson education.



Bootzin, R., & Bower, G.H. (1991). Psychology today- An Introduction. 7th ed. New York: Mc

Graw Hill Inc.

Commer, R. & Gould, E. (2011). Psychology around Us. New Delhi: John Wiley & Sons Inc.

Coon, D.& Mitterer ,J.O.(2013)Introduction to Psychology: Gateways to Mind and Behavior,

13th ed. Wadsworth, Cengage Learning

Feldman, R. (2011). Understanding Psychology,10th edition. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.

Morgan, C.T., King, R.A., Weisz, J.R., & Schopler, J. (1993). Introduction to Psychology,

7th ed. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.

Weiten, W. (2002). Psychology: Themes and Variations, 5th ed. New York: Brooks/Cole

Publishing co.

Additional References: Gerrig, R. J (2013) Psychology and Life (20th Edn) Boston: Pearson

Kuppuswamy, B. (1990). Elements of ancient Indian Psychology, 3rd ed. New Delhi: Konark

Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

Mishra, B.K. (2008). Psychology: The study of Human Behavior. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of

Ind




BA SOCIOLOGY

Semester II PSY2C05 Credit: 2

PSYCHOLOGICAL PROCESSES –II 54 hours




To provide basic knowledge about systems and processes like cognition,

intelligence and personality

Module 1 Cognitive Processes 14 hours Basic units of Thought: Concepts; forming concepts, Types of concepts, prototypes; Images;

Language, the structure of Language,

Reasoning; Deductive and inductive thinking.

Problem solving; Types of problems, steps and barriers to effective problem solving,approaches

or strategies of problem solving-trial and error heuristics, algorithm, forming subgoals, searching

for analogies, changing the representation of the problem .

Creative thinking; convergent and divergent thinking; stages of creative thought.

Decision making ;Heuristics and judgement-availability heuristics, representativeness heuristics,

anchoring heuristics.

Module 2: Motivation and Emotion 10 hours Introduction: Instinct, drive. Primary and secondary motives. Hunger and eating.

Learned motives: affiliation, achievement and power motive, Hierarchy of motives.

Intrinsic and extrinsic motivation.



Concept of Emotion. Physiological correlates of emotion. Theories of emotion: James-Lange

theory,Cannon-Bard theory, Schachter-Singer theory, Appraisal theory,Evolutionary theory,

Opponent process theory. Assessment of emotion

Module 3: Intelligence 14 hours Definition, nature and meaning of intelligence,.Determinants of intelligence – Role of heredity

and environment. Theories of intelligence- Spearman-Two factor, Cattel- Fluid and crystallized



intelligence theory.Evolution of intelligence testing: Stanford-Binet, Wechsler scales.Mental

retardation and giftedness.

.Module 4: Personality 16 hours Concept of Personality Psychodynamic approaches. Freud’s theory: instinct theory,Levels of

consciousness, structure of personality, defense mechanisms, psychosexual stages of

development,. Jung: Structure of personality, Adler: striving for superiority, power motivation.

Horney: Basic anxiety, styles, feminist turn in psychoanalysis.


Eysenck: dimensions of personality. Humanistic perspective: Rogers, Maslow, Albert

Bandura’s social learning theory.

Assessment of Personality, Uses of Personality tests. References: Baron, R.A. (2004). Psychology, 5th ed. New Delhi: Pearson education.


Graw Hill Inc.


Coon,D.& Mitterer,J.O.(2013)Introduction to Psychology: Gateways to Mind and Behavior, 13th

ed.Wadsworth, Cengage Learning




Morgan, C.T., King, R.A., Weisz, J.R., & Schopler, J. (1993). Introduction to Psychology, 7th

ed. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.




Publishing co.





India




BA SOCIOLOGY

Semester III PSY3C05 Credit: 2

ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 54 hours

Objectives

To acquaint the students with the history and meaning of abnormal behavior To develop in them awareness about different types of abnormal behaviors

Module 1: Abnormality 14hours

Meaning of Abnormality, DSM V and Definition of mental disorder

Historical Views of Abnormal Behaviour- Demonology, Gods and Magic, Hippocrates Medical Concepts, Early Philosophical Conceptions, Abnormality during middle ages, Humanitarian Approaches and Contemporary views of Abnormality.

Causal Factors for Abnormal Behaviour- Biological, Psychological and Sociocultural factors.

Module 2: Stress Disorders 12 hours

Definition, Factors predisposing a person to stress, Characteristics of stressors.

Sress and Mental Health- Adjustment disorder, Adjustment disorder caused by unemployment, Post Traumatic Disorder and Acute Stress Disorder.

Stress and Physical Health- Hypertension, Coronary Heart Disease.

Module 3: Panic, Anxiety, Obsessions and their disorders 16 hours

Clinical Picture of Specific Phobias, Social Phobias, Panic Disorder, Agoraphobia, Obsessive Compulsive disorder , Body Dysmorphic disorder, Hoarding disorder and Trichotillomania.

Module 4: Somatic Symptoms and Dissociative disorders 12hours

Hypochondriasis, Somatization Disorder, Pain Disorder, Conversion Disorder; Dissociative Disorders - Depersonalization/ Derealization Disorder, Dissociative Amnesia and Dissociative Fugue, Dissociative Identity Disorder (DID).

Reference

Barlow, D.H. & Durand, V.M. (2015). (2015). Abnormal Psychology: An Integrative Approach (7th ed.). Cengage Learning , Canada.




BA SOCIOLOGY

Semester IV PSY4C05 Credit: 2

PSYCHOLOGY OF SOCIAL BEHAVIOR 54 hours

Objectives

To enable the student to understand and explain behavior in the social setting To explain the psychological aspects of various social phenomena

MODULE 1: Introduction to Social Psychology 12 hours

Origin and Development of Social Psychology.Definition, Nature and Scope of Social Psychology. Research Methods in Social Psychology.

MODULE 2: Social Cognition 14 hours

Schemas: Mental frame works for organizing social information. Impact of schemas on social cognition: Attention, Encoding and Retrieval. Priming: Which Schemas guide our thought?

Heuristics- Reducing effort in social cognition.

Automatic and Controlled Processing: Two Basic modes of social thought. Potential Sources of error in social cognition- Optimistic Bias, Planning Fallacy, Situation specific Sources of error in social cognition- Counterfactual thinking and magical thinking.

MODULE 3: Social Perception and Social Influence 14 hours

Social Perception: Nonverbal communication: Basic channels, Facial feedback hypothesis. Attribution: Theories of attribution- Jones and Davis theory and Kelly’s Theory of causal attribution. Impression formation and impression Management.

Social Influence: Conformity- Factors affecting conformity, Desire to be liked-Normative social influence and Desire to be right-Informational social influence. Compliance: Principles and Techniques,Obedience to authority.



MODULE 4 Prosocial Behavior and Aggression 14 hours

Prosocial Behavior: Motives for Prosocial Behavior, Responding to an Emergency, External and Internal Influences on Helping Behavior. Theoretical Perspectives of Prosocial Behavior.

Aggression: Perspectives on Aggression. Causes of Human Aggression : Social, Cultural, Personal And Situational. Prevention and Control of Aggression.

References

Baron, R.A.,& Branscombe, N.R.(2012). Social Psychology(13 th ed). New Delhi: Pearson Education.

Baron, R.A., Branscombe, N.R., Byrne, D., & Bhardwaj, G. (2009). Social Psychology, 12 th ed. New Delhi: Pearson Education.

Baron, R.A., & Byrne, D. (2002). Social Psychology, 10th ed. New Delhi: Pearson Education

Myers,D.G.(2006).Social Psychology. New Delhi: Tata MCGraw Hill Inc.

Taylor,S.E.,Peplau,L.A., & Sears, D.O.(2006). New Delhi: Pearson Education.



SYLLABUS OF PSYCHOLOGY AS COMPLEMENTARY COURSES OF

BA PHILOSOPHY

Name of course Code Credit Hrs/week Semester Psychological Processes -I PSY1C05 2 3 I Social Behavior-I PSY1C06 2 3


PSY2C05

2

3

II

Social Behavior-II PSY2C06 2 3 Life Span Development

PSY3C06

2

3

III

Abnormal Behavior-I PSY3C07 2 3 Health Psychology

PSY4C06

2

3

IV Abnormal Behavior -II PSY4C07 2 3




BA PHILOSOPHY


PSYCHOLOGICAL PROCESSES –I 54 hours

Objectives:

To generate interest in psychology




and memory




















learning.



Discrimination.







processing.




memory;










Graw Hill Inc.








Publishing co.





Ind




BA PHILOSOPHY


SOCIAL BEHAVIOR –I

Objectives














Prosocial Behavior: Motives for Prosocial Behavior, Responding to an Emergency, External and Internal Influences on Helping Behavior. Theoretical Perspectives of Prosocial Behavior.

Aggression: Perspectives on Aggression. Causes of Human Aggression : Social, Cultural, Personal And Situational. Prevention and Control of Aggression.

References









BA PHILOSOPHY



Objectives:

To generate interest in psychology





































Graw Hill Inc.












Publishing co.





India




BA PHILOSOPHY


SOCIAL BEHAVIOR –II 54 hours

Objectives

To familiarize the major concepts of social behavior To understand the major social issues in society

MODULE 1 Attitudes 12 hours

Definition, Characteristics and Components of attitude. Attitude Formation: How Attitudes Develop- Classical Conditioning, Instrumental Conditioning and Observational Learning.The Fine Art of Persuasion: How Attitudes are changed. Resisting Persuasion Attempts-Reactance, Forewarning, Selective Avoidance. Cognitive Dissonance and Attitude Change.

MODULE 2 Group Influence and Leadership 14 hours

What is a group? Nature and Functions.Social Facilitation. Social Loafing. Deidividuation, Group Polarisation and Group Think. Decision Making by Groups- How it occurs and the Pitfall it faces.Group Interaction: Competition versus Cooperation.

Leadership : Theories of Leadership and Types. Role of leadership in group settings.

MODULE 3 Interpersonal Attraction and Close Relationships 14 hours

Internal Determinants of Attraction : The Need to Affililiate and The Basic Role of Affect.External Determinants of Attraction : Proximity and other observable Characeristics.

Close Relationships: Family, Friends, Lovers and Spouses. Interdependent Relationships: Family and Friends.

MODULE 4 Stereotype, Prejudice and Discrimination 14 hours

Nature and Origins of Sereotyping.Prejudice and Discrimination: Feelings and Actions towards social groups. Techniques for countering the effects of Prejudice.



References









BA PHILOSOPHY

SEMESTER III PSY3C06 Credits: 2

LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT 54 hours

OBJECTIVES

To study human development in Psychological Perspectives

To create awareness about major Psychological changes along with physical and cognitive development

To study emotional , social development and adjustments of life span periods.






Fertilization- Germinal Period, Embryonic Period, Fetal Period. Effect of long term and short

term use of teratogens. Birth Process: Types, methods- prenatal and perinatal diagnostic tests.

Birth Complication and their effects..

Module 3: Physical and Cognitive Development 16 hours


development from childhood to adolescence. Physical condition and health issues in early,

middle adulthood and late adulthood. Biological theories of ageing.

Language development: Pre-linguistic, Phonological, Semantic, Grammatical and Pragmatic

Development . Piaget’s theory of Cognitive Development: Process of development, 4 stages-

Sensory Motor, Preoperational, Concrete operational and Formal Operational stage..Cognitive

changes in early adulthood- Post formal thought, Schaie's Model of Cognitive Development



Module 4 : Emotional and Social Development 17 hours

Emotional behavior in infancy to middle adulthood. Temperament: definition, different

classifications. Process of socialization from infancy to middle adulthood .Close

relationships in adulthood. Adult life changes, marriage and family in adulthood. Facing

death and loss: Psychological issues, Pattern of grieving,special losses.

REFERENCE

1. Berk, L.E (2003) Child Development (3rd de). New Delhi: Pearson Education Pvt Ltd

2. Hurlock, E.B (1996) Developmental Psychology-A Life span Approach. New Delhi: Tata


3. Papalia, D.E et.al (2004) Human Development (9th Ed). New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company 4. Santrock, J.E (2007) Child Development (2nd end) New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company




BA PHILOSOPHY

Semester III PSY3C07 Credit: 2

ABNORMAL BEHAVIOR I 54 hours

Objectives

To acquaint the students with the history and meaning of abnormal behavior To develop in them awareness about different types of abnormal behaviors

Module 1 : Abnormality 14 hours

Meaning of Abnormality, DSM V and Definition of mental disorder

Historical Views of Abnormal Behaviour- Demonology, Gods and Magic, Hippocrates Medical Concepts, Early Philosophical Conceptions, Abnormality during middle ages, Humanitarian Approaches and Cotemporary views of Abnormality.

Causal Factors for Abnormal Behaviour- Biological, Psychological and Sociocultural factors.

Module 2: Stress Disorders 12 hours

Definition, Factors predisposing a person to stress, Characteristics of stressors.

Sress and Mental Health- Adjustment disorder, Adjustment disorder caused by unemployment, Post Traumatic Disorder and Acute Stress Disorder.

Stress and Physical Health- Hypertension, Coronary Heart Disease.

Module 3: Panic, Anxiety, Obsessions and their disorders 16 hours

Clinical Picture of Specific Phobias, Social Phobias, Panic Disorder, Agoraphobia, Obsessive Compulsive disorder , Body Dysmorphic disorder, Hoarding disorder and Trichotillomania.

Module 4: Somatic Symptoms and Dissociative disorders 12 hours

Hypochondriasis, Somatization Disorder, Pain Disorder, Conversion Disorder; Dissociative Disorders - Depersonalization/ Derealization Disorder, Dissociative Amnesia and Dissociative Fugue, Dissociative Identity Disorder (DID).



Reference








BA PHILOSOPHY


HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY 54 hours

Objectives

To understand the psychological,behavioral and cultural factors contributing to physical and mental health health

To study the management of different illnesses

MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY 12 hours

Definition of health psychology, mind body relationship,need and signiificance of health psychology, biopsychosocial model v/s biomedical model

MODULE 2 : HEALTH BEHAVIOUR AND PRIMARY PREVENTION 14 hours

Health behaviours, changing health habits-attitude change,cognitive behavioural approach-health belief model,theory of planned behaviour,trans theoretical model,protection motivatio theory,social cognitive theory and attribution theory.

MODULE 3 : STRESS AND COPING 14 hours

Stress, theoretical contributions to stress-fight-flight, selye’s general adaptation syndrome, tend –befriend, psychological appraisal & stress, coping, stress management programmes

MODULE 4: PSYCHOSOCIAL ISSUES AND MANAGEMENT OF ADVANCING AND TERMINAL ILLNESS 14 hours

Emotional responses to chronic illness, psychosocial issues —continued treatment, issue of non traditional treatment, stages to adjustment to dying.

REFERENCE

Taylor E. S. (2006). Health psychology (6TH EDITION), Mc Graw Hill Companies,California

Additional Reference

Naima khatoon (2012). Health psychology, Dorling Kindersley (INDIA) PVT. LTD.

Marks, F.D., Murray M., Evans, B., & Estacio V. M. (2011) Health Psychology: Theory, Research and Practice (3rd edition).Sage publications INDIA PVT. LTD.




BA PHILOSOPHY


ABNORMAL BEHAVIOR II 54 hours

Objectives

To develop in them awareness about different types of personality disorders and substance abuse.

To acquaint the students with the symptoms of major psychological disorders

Module 1: Personality disorders 14 hours

Clinical Picture of Personality disorders, Cluster A Personality Disorders-Paranoid Personality Disorder, Schizoid Personality Disorder, Schizotypal Personality Disorder. Cluster B Personality Disorders- Histrionic Personality Disorder, Narcissistic Personality Disorder, Antisocial Personality Disorder, Borderline Personality Disorder. Cluster C Personality Disorders - Avoidant Personality Disorder, Dependent Personality Disorder, Obsessive-Compulsive Personality Disorder.

Module 2: Schizhophrenia and other psychotic disorders 14 hours

Clinical Picture of Schizophrenia -Delusions, Hallucinations, Disorganized Speech and Behavior, Positive and Negative Symptoms. Subtypes of Schizophrenia.

Clinical Picture of Delusional Disorders and Brief Psychotic disorder.

Module 3: Mood disorders 14 hours

Clinical Picture of mood disorders, Types of Mood disorders, Unipolar Depressive Disorders -Major Depressive Disorder, Other Forms of Depression, Premenstrual Dysphoric Disorder , Dysthymic Disorder (Persistent Depressive Disorder). Bipolar and Related Disorders-Cyclothymic Disorder, Bipolar Disorders (I and II) .

Module 4: Common Disorders of Childhood 12 hours

Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder, Disruptive, Impulse Control and Conduct Disorders,Seperation Anxiety Disorder and Childhood Depression

Reference




Butcher, J. N., Hooley, J. M., &Mineka, S. (2014). Abnormal Psychology (16th ed.). U.S.A : Pearson Education, Inc.

Carson, R. C., Butcher, J. N., &Mineka, S. (1996). Abnormal Psychology and Modern life (10th ed.). Newyork : Harper Collins College Publishers.

Seligman, M. E. P., Walker, E. P. , &Rosenhan , D. L. (2001). Abnormal Psychology (4th ed.). Newyork : W. W. Norton & Company, Inc.




BA ECONOMICS

Name of course Code Credit Hrs/week Semester Psychological Processes -I

PSY1C05 2 3 I


PSY2C05 2 3 II

LifeSpan Development

PSY3C06 2 3 III

Psychology of Social Behavior

PSY4C05 2 3 IV




BA ECONOMICS


PSYCHOLOGICAL PROCESSES –I 54hours





and memory




















learning.



Discrimination.







processing.




memory;










Graw Hill Inc.








Publishing co.





Ind




BA ECONOMICS








































Graw Hill Inc.












Publishing co.





India



SYLLABUS OF PSYCHOLOGY AS COMPLEMENTARY PAPER OF

BA ECONOMICS

SEMESTER III PSY3C06 Credits: 2

LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT

OBJECTIVES

To study human development in Psychological Perspectives

To create awareness about major Psychological changes along with physical and cognitive development

To study emotional , social development and adjustments of life span periods.






Fertilization- Germinal Period, Embryonic Period, Fetal Period. Effect of long term and short

term use of teratogens. Birth Process: Types, methods- prenatal and perinatal diagnostic tests.

Birth Complication and their effects..

Module 3: Physical and Cognitive Development 16 hours


development from childhood to adolescence. Physical condition and health issues in early,

middle adulthood and late adulthood. Biological theories of ageing.

Language development: Pre-linguistic, Phonological, Semantic, Grammatical and Pragmatic

Development . Piaget’s theory of Cognitive Development: Process of development, 4 stages-

Sensory Motor, Preoperational, Concrete operational and Formal Operational stage..Cognitive

changes in early adulthood- Post formal thought, Schaie's Model of Cognitive Development



Module 4 : Emotional and Social Development 17 hours

Emotional behavior in infancy to middle adulthood. Temperament: definition, different

classifications. Process of socialization from infancy to middle adulthood .Close

relationships in adulthood. Adult life changes, marriage and family in adulthood. Facing

death and loss: Psychological issues, Pattern of grieving,special losses.

REFERENCE

Berk, L.E (2003) Child Development (3rd de). New Delhi: Pearson Education Pvt Ltd

Hurlock, E.B (1996) Developmental Psychology-A Life span Approach. New Delhi: Tata


Papalia, D.E et.al (2004) Human Development (9th Ed). New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Santrock, J.E (2007) Child Development (2nd end) New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company




BA ECONOMICS


PSYCHOLOGY OF SOCIAL BEHAVIOR 54 hours

Objectives












Prosocial Behavior: Motives for Prosocial Behavior, Responding to an Emergency, External and Internal Influences on Helping Behavior. Theoretical Perspectives of Prosocial Behavior. Aggression: Perspectives on Aggression. Causes of Human Aggression : Social, Cultural, Personal And Situational. Prevention and Control of Aggression.



References








Evaluation Pattern of Complementary papers offered by Psychology

External examinations for complementary courses for BA Programmes will be conducted at the end of 2nd and 4th semester.. Internal evaluation may be completed by the end of respective semesters (10 marks each for odd and even semester).External evaluation for 80 marks will be equally split into two parts (Part A and Part B) with 40 marks each for odd semester and even semester. Part A and Part B of the questions will cover syllabus of odd and even semesters. Components of internal evaluation

Sl.No. Components Marks 1 Attendance 2.5 2 Test paper I & II 2.5+2.5 3 Assignment/seminar 2.5 Total 10

` Pattern of question papers for complementary course offered for BA programmes is as follows(Part A from odd semester and Part B from even semester)

Section Sl.no Nature of Questions

No. of questions


Marks Total Marks

Part A Part B Part A Part B

Part A

Part B

Part A

Part B

A 01-06 07-12 Objective type

6 6 6 6 1/2 3 3

B 13-18 19-24 Very short answer

6 6 5 5 2 10 10

C 25-28 29-32 Short essay

4 4 3 3 5 15 15

D 33- 34 35- 36 Essay 2 2 1 1 12 12 12 Total

18 18 15 15 40 40



Model Question Paper for Complementary paper in Psychology for BA Programmes

First/Second Semester BA Sociology, 2017

PSY1C05/Psy2C05

Psychological Processes I/Psychological Processes II

Time : 3 hours Maximum marks:80

Section A

Part A

Objective Questions

Answer all questions. Each question carries ½ mark.

1.The first psychological laboratory was established by :

(a)John Locke (b)Wilhem Wundt (c)Thomas Hardy (d) Sigmund Freud

2.Which school of thought define Psychology as the scientific study of the behavior of an organism?

(a)Functionalists (b) Behaviorists (c) Gestalt (d)Psychoanalysts

3.----- is the meaningful interpretation of sensation

(a)Attention (b)Perception (c)Concentration (d)Meditation

Fill in the Blanks

4. Wrong perception of stimulus is known as –

5. ---- is known as the father of Psychology

6.---- is the founder of scientific psychology (6x ½=3 marks)

Part B

Answer all questions. Each question carries ½ mark.

Objective Questions

7. Identify the odd one

(a) Self-esteem (b)self-actualisation (c) safety (d) Achievement



8. Who put forward hierarchy of motives?

(a) Stern(b) Maslow (c) Binet (d) Terman

9.Write the odd one

(a) Functional fixedness (b) Mental set (c) Creativity (d) Emotion

Fill in the blanks

10. The mental shortcut method of effective problem solving is -------

11. Tendency to achieve certain standards of excellence is -----

12. ------ part of nervous system is responsible for emotions.

(6x ½=3 marks)

Section B

Part A

Answer any five questions. Each question carries two marks. Write short notes on the following.

13.Reinforcement

14.Punishment

15. Determinants of attention

16.Trial and Error learning

17.Naturalistic observation method

18.Determinants of learning

(5 x 2 =10 marks)

Part B

Answer any five questions. Each question carries two marks. Write short notes on the following

19.Barriers of Problem Solving

20.Culture Free test

21.Psycholinguistics

22.Giftedness



23.Lie Detector

24.Images

(5 x 2 =10 marks)

Section C

Part A

Answer any three questions. Each question carries five marks. Write short essay on the following

25.Theories of colour perception

26.Memory processes

27.Schools of Psychology

28.Schedules of reinforcement

(3 x 5 =15 Marks) Part B

Answer any three questions. Each question carries five marks.

29.Hierarchy of motives

30.Stages of Creativity

31.Reasoning

32.Strategies of Problem solving

(3 x 5 =15 Marks)

Section D

Part A

Answer any one question which carries twelve marks. Write an essay on the following

33.Briefly outline the personality assessment techniques.

34.Discuss the theories of Intelligence.

(1 x 12=12marks)



Part B

Answer any one question which carries twelve marks. Write an essay on the following.

35.Explain the causes and theories of forgetting.

36.Define space perception. Explain the use of cues in space perception.

(1 x 12= 12 Marks)